Professional Documents
Culture Documents
iRA 8105 PRO 8095 PRO 8085 PRO SM EN R8 PDF
iRA 8105 PRO 8095 PRO 8085 PRO SM EN R8 PDF
Appendix
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this
Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols
Explanation
Check.
Symbols
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
Explanation
operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
Blank Page
Contents
0 Safety Precautions
CDRH Act------------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-2
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-3
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-3
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2
Main Body---------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickup/Delivery System Option------------------------------------------------Scanning System Options-------------------------------------------------------Function Expansion System Options------------------------------------------
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-5
Features--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7
Specifications----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-25
Cross-Section View---------------------------------------------------------------1-26
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-27
Power Switch-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-27
Control Panel-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-27
2 Technology
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Main Controller-----------------------------------------------------------------2-6
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-32
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-37
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88
Fixing-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-105
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-105
Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-109
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-120
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-126
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit---------------------------------------------------- 2-134
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit----------------------------------------------- 2-143
Registration Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-145
Transfer----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-147
Delivery/Reverse Unit----------------------------------------------------------- 2-148
Duplex Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-150
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-160
Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-161
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-169
MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-172
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-172
Checking the Operating Environment-------------------------------------- 2-175
Setting Up the Network--------------------------------------------------------- 2-178
Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-179
Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-183
Checking MEAP Application Management Page------------------------ 2-186
Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application-------------------------------- 2-187
Checking the Platform Information------------------------------------------ 2-188
MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-188
MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-190
Installing an Application-------------------------------------------------------- 2-192
Adding a License File----------------------------------------------------------- 2-194
Disabling a License File-------------------------------------------------------- 2-196
Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File------------------ 2-197
Reusable license----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-199
License for forwarding---------------------------------------------------------- 2-199
Uninstalling an Application----------------------------------------------------- 2-202
Login Service--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-203
Changing Login Services------------------------------------------------------ 2-208
Initializing the Password------------------------------------------------------- 2-209
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the
Backup Data Using SST------------------------------------------------------- 2-209
Formatting and Replacing the HDD----------------------------------------- 2-214
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)---------------------------------------------------- 2-216
Collection of MEAP Console Logs------------------------------------------- 2-218
Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)----------------------- 2-223
Using USB Devices------------------------------------------------------------- 2-226
Reference material-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-231
Option for exclusive individual measure----------------------------------- 2-233
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-256
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-256
Installing Firmware-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-256
Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-257
System Configuration----------------------------------------------------------- 2-258
List of Functions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-259
Distribution Flow----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-259
Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-260
Overview of Preparation------------------------------------------------------- 2-262
Setting Sales Companys HQ------------------------------------------------- 2-262
Network Settings----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-263
Enabling UGW Link------------------------------------------------------------- 2-266
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode---------------------- 2-267
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode----------- 2-267
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)------- 2-268
3 Periodic Service
Periodical Service Operation Item-----------------------------------------3-2
Fixing-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-176
5 Adjustment
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
When replacing parts---------------------------------------------------------5-2
6 Troubleshooting
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-2
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-78
Image Faults--------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
Paper wrinkle-----------------------------------------------------------------------6-30
Other---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-31
Introduction--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-35
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-35
Basic Flowchart--------------------------------------------------------------------6-37
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-38
Controller System Error Diagnosis--------------------------------------------6-40
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-44
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-47
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-63
Debug log---------------------------------------------------------------------6-111
Scope of Application-------------------------------------------------------------6-111
Overview----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-111
Storing System Information----------------------------------------------------6-111
Collecting System Information------------------------------------------------ 6-112
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)----------------------------- 6-112
DEBUG-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-113
Uploading Data by SST-------------------------------------------------------- 6-114
7 Error Code
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------7-115
8 Service Mode
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Entering Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations-----------------------------------------------I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description-----------------------------COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------Back-up of service mode----------------------------------------------------------
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-7
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-8
I/O (I/O display mode)------------------------------------------------------------8-44
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-124
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-144
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-215
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-218
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-260
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-260
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-261
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-262
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-264
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-265
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-265
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-273
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-276
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-282
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-282
9 Installation
Checking before Installation-------------------------------------------------9-2
Checking Power Supply----------------------------------------------------------Checking the Installation Environment---------------------------------------Checking Installation Space-----------------------------------------------------Points to Note at Installation Work---------------------------------------------
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-73
Setting After Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-79
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-185
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-185
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export-------------------------- 9-186
Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)-------------------------- 9-187
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-191
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-191
Installing the Encryption Board----------------------------------------------- 9-192
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-200
Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-200
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-200
Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-201
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-201
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-201
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-252
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-252
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-256
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-261
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-261
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-275
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-275
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-276
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work
(Only When HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed)--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-276
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-276
Appendix
Service Tools------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-2
Special Tools------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2
Solvents and Oils------------------------------------------------------------------10-5
Safety Precautions
Act
CDRH
Safety
Laser
of Laser System
Handling
power switch ON
Turn
of Toner
Safety
When Handling a
Notes
Lithium Battery
Before it Works
Notes
Serving
to Note at Cleaning
Points
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
8105 PRO/8095 PRO/8085
PRO Series
0-2
CDRH Act
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here
the work.
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States.
F-0-1
Laser Safety
Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on the
machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser beam
F-0-2
from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as users
operate the machine normally.
This product is certificated as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007.
0-2
0-3
Safety of Toner
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power
switch.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power
mode, sleep mode).
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
0-3
0-4
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
0-4
Product Overview
Product Overview
Lineup
Product
Features
Specifications
View/Internal View
External
Operation
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model
Product Lineup
1-2
Main Body
There are two main groups of pickup and delivery options, depending on the communication
I/F used.
*The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).
Combinations
A. imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105PRO/8095PRO/8085PRO ARCNET Communication
Option
Document Insertion Unit-K1
Paper Folding Unit-H1
Booklet Trimmer-D1
Staple Finisher-F1*2
/ Booklet Finisher-F1*3
Professional Puncher-C1*1
+ Professional Puncher Integration Unit-B1*1
F-1-2
F-1-1
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 8105
Print speed
Positioning
Control Panel
HDD
Communication method
with pickup/delivery option
Pickup/delivery option
Pickup and delivery options
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 8095
105 ppm
95 ppm
Target machine: iR7105
Upright Control Panel
Standard: 80 GB,
Maximum: 250 GB
ARCNET (*) / IPC (**)
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 8085
85 ppm
* ARCNET: Communication system used in the iR7105 series. Features are as follows.
Enables real time communication among multiple connected devices.
Devices can be easily added (high extensibility)
F-1-3
** IPC: Communication system used in current low and mid speed models, for communication
with paper deck and finisher.
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model
1-2
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions
Product name
(Japan)
Required Options/Conditions
Pickup System Options
Product name
1-3
Booklet Finisher-F1
PRO
Staple Finisher-F1
PRO
Staple Finisher-D1
Booklet Finisher-D1
Puncher Unit-BE1
Puncher Unit-BF1
T-1-2
Puncher Unit-BG1
Insertion Unit-K1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions
Puncher Unit-BH1
Punch Unit-BB1/BC1/
BD1
Staple-N1
Staple-P1
Staple-G1
Booklet Trimmer-D1
1-3
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions
Product name
Reader Heater
Unit-G1
1-4
T-1-4
Printer Cover-B1
F-1-4
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions
1-4
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions
Hardware Products
Product name (Japan)
Multimedia Reader/
Writer-A1
Mobile Connection Kit-A1
Voice
Guidance
PCB
Expansion Bus-F1/F2
Licence option
Additional Memory
Type B (512MB)
IIPSec Board-B2
F-1-5
Utility Tray-A1/A2
Card Reader-C1/F1
Utility Tray-A1/A2
Card Reader-C1/F1
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Voice
Guidance
Unit
1-5
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions
1-5
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions
License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate
included. Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so
that the applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physical installation work at the time of installation.
1-6
Product name (Japan)
PS Expansion Kit-AH1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions
1-6
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability
1-7
Features
Service Features
Improved Service Operability
Product Features
High productivity
High image quality
Energy saving
8-beam laser
High productivity
Silent machine
Whole circumference
IH fixing
<Preparation>
1) Open the Inner Cover.
2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly.
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the 2 screws.
2) Remove the Drum Fixation Cylinder by removing the screw for installing the Drum Fixation
High productivity
High image quality
Next generation
Controller
x3
High productivity
- Pickup supporting
1319.2
- 220gsm paper
F-1-6
F-1-7
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability
1-7
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability
1-8
New Service Mode
becomes easy.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Reader Communication Cable.
2) Remove the 4 screws, and open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow.
Controller Box
F-1-8
Performing the rear side work while checking the Control Panel is
possible.
By removing the Rotation Control Screw, the Upright Control Panel can be turned to face the
rear side.
F-1-10
As a result, service modes can be executed even when working at rear side of the host
Features
machine.
<Procedure>
Items in the following are newly classified: COPIER > OPTION > BODY
2) Remove the screw on the arm, and turn the Upright Control Panel.
Upright Control
Panel
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability
1-8
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-9
Service Advantage
When a paper jam/error is reported from the user:
Jam Code
Jam Code and Location Code are displayed on the screen (*) when a paper jam occurs.
The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service
technician is sent to the user site.
The cause of trouble and the remedy can be assumed before the service technician is sent
to the user site.
Depending on the cause of the paper jam (e.g.: paper jam caused by wrong operation by
the user), support can be completed by the phone or e-mail. (Visiting to the user site is not
necessary.)
aabbbb
aa : location
bbbb : jam code
F-1-11
Error Code
In addition to Error Code, Location Code is displayed on the screen when an error occurs.
Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa
xxxxxx : error code
yyyy : sub-code
aa : location
F-1-12
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-9
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors
1-10
F-1-13
Purpose
To prevent the communication error caused by the following:
Loose/removed connector due to vibration during transportation
Half-inserted connector at the time of servicing
Features
Easy to hold because the overall height of the housing is high
Connector can be inserted with less force.
Lever lock mechanism is available. Proper insertion can be determined by the sound (snap)
or clicky feeling
Points to Caution when Inserting/Removing the Connector:
Be sure to keep the following in mind during work:
While releasing the lever lock of the housing, hold the housing to remove. Do not
hold and pull the harness.
Be sure to insert the connector while the housing is positioned straight to the socket.
Do not tilt the housing to insert the connector.
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors
1-10
Specifications
Paper size
Product Specifications
Installation type of main body
Photoreceptor
Exposure method
Charging method
Developing method
Transfer method
Separation method
Transfer Belt
Right/Left Deck
Upper/Lower
Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray
Cleaning method Drum
ETB
Fixing method
Delivery method
Type of toner
Toner supplying method
Toner level detection function
Leading edge image margin
Left image margin
Warm-up time
At power-on
At recovery from
sleep mode
First copy time
Image gradations
Print resolution
Maximum image guaranteed area
Maximum printable area
Paper Type
Deck
Console type
84mm diameter amorphous silicon drum
Laser exposure method
Corona + Grid charging method
Dry, 1-component toner projection
Transfer Roller method
Transfer Belt
Separation retard method
Separation retard method
Simple retard method
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Blade + Brush Roller
Heat Roller method
Face-up/face-down
Magnetic negative toner
Set-on
Yes
2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm
2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm
60 sec. or less
60 sec. or less
1-11
Deck
Cassette
1-11
1-12
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
8105 / 8095 / 8085
POD Deck Lite-A1
Power
North
Japan
Europe
Asia
Australia
supply
America
source
V
V
V
V
V
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
(number of
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
cables)
Power
outlet (1)
Power
outlet (1)
Paper Deck Unit-C1
Main body
Insertion Unit-K1
Power
outlet (1)
Paper Folding Unit-H1
Finisher
Professional Puncher-C1
Integration
Unit-B1
Professional Puncher
Power
Integration Unit-B1
outlet (1)
Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO
Power
outlet (1)
Staple Finisher-F1 PRO
Power
outlet (1)
Staple Finisher-D1
Power
outlet (1)
Booklet Finisher-D1
Power
outlet (1)
Booklet Trimmer-D1
Finisher
Punch Unit-BB1/BC1/BD1
Booklet
Finisher-F1
PRO
Puncher Unit-BE1
Finisher
Inner Trimmer-A1
Finisher
Duplex Color Image Reader Main body
Unit-C1
100
20
100
10
100
10
100 2.8
-240
100 2.8
-240
-
10
1.2
1.0
5.5
8
8
Product name
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105 /
8095 / 8085
POD Deck Lite-A1
Paper Deck Unit-C1
Insertion Unit-K1
Paper Folding Unit-H1
Professional Puncher Integration
Unit-B1
Professional Puncher Unit-C1
Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO
Staple Finisher-F1 PRO
Staple Finisher-D1
Booklet Finisher-D1
Booklet Trimmer-D1
Punch Unit-BB1/BC1/BD1
Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1
Inner Trimmer-A1
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1
Width (mm)
Weight (kg)
645
770
1220
242
601
323
746
336
250
621
583
793
793
792
570
570
1407
1190
1040
50
37
61
71
40
305
800
800
654
767
1575
78
95
251
635
792
792
792
765
765
770
655
715
625
605
1040
1180
1180
1040
1040
1040
131
392
403
262
80
180
130
61
108
152
3
3.7
32
39.4
T-1-9
2.8
2.8
-
T-1-8
1-12
1-13
Paper type
Plain paper
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Thin paper
(52 to 63 g/m2)
Heavy 1
(91 to 180 g/m2)
Heavy 2
(181 to 220 g/m2)
Heavy 3
(221 to 256 g/m2)
Bond
Tab
Transparency
Size
A5R
STMTR
B5
A4
LTR
B5R
LTRR
A4R
LGLR
B4R
A3R
LDRR
SRA3
12 X 18
13 X 19
LTR
LTRR
A4
LTR
A4
LTR
Feeding
Width
direction direction
(mm)
(mm)
210.0
215.9
182.0
210.0
215.9
257.0
279.4
297.0
355.6
364.0
420.0
431.8
450.0
457.2
482.6
215.9
279.4
222.7
228.6
210.0
215.9
148.5
139.7
257.0
297.0
279.4
182.0
215.9
210.0
215.9
257.0
297.0
279.4
320.0
304.8
330.2
279.4
215.9
297.0
279.4
297.0
279.4
52.5
52.5
52.5
52.5
52.5
44.1
40.6
38.2
30.5
29.5
27.0
26.5
25.2
24.8
23.5
17.5
12.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
67.2
61.8
58.2
48.6
47.5
41.1
40.0
38.4
37.8
35.8
35.0
24.0
-
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
33.6
30.9
29.1
24.3
23.7
20.6
20.0
19.2
18.9
17.9
17.5
12.0
-
47.5
47.5
47.5
47.5
47.5
39.9
36.7
34.5
30.0
29.5
25.0
24.5
22.8
22.4
21.3
35.0
24.0
-
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
67.2
61.8
58.2
48.6
47.5
41.1
40.0
38.4
37.8
35.8
35.0
24.0
80.0
80.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
33.6
30.9
29.1
24.3
23.7
20.6
20.0
19.2
18.9
17.9
17.5
12.0
-
42.5
42.5
42.5
42.5
42.5
36.5
33.5
31.5
28.5
28.0
22.0
21.5
20.4
20.1
19.0
17.5
12.0
-
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
67.2
61.8
58.2
48.6
47.5
41.1
40.0
38.4
37.8
35.8
35.0
24.0
80.0
80.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
33.6
30.9
29.1
24.3
23.7
20.6
20.0
19.2
18.9
17.9
17.5
12.0
T-1-10
1-13
1-14
Paper Type
Following shows the types of usable papers.
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Type
148.0 to 487.7
148.0 to 181.9
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 487.7
432.1 to 487.7
487.8 to 630.0
100 to 139.6
139.7 to 330.2
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 297.0
297.1 to 330.2
100 to 330.2
T-1-11
1-14
Type
Thin paper
(52 to 63 g/m2)
Size
1-15
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3,
1-4
Custom paper size 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-15
Type
Plain paper 1
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Recycled paper 1
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Color paper
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Size
1-16
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3,
1-4
Custom paper size 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-16
Type
Heavy paper 1
(91 to 180 g/m2)
Letterhead
Size
1-17
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3,
1-4
Custom paper size 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-17
Type
Heavy paper 2
(181 to 220 g/m2)
Size
1-18
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3,
1-4
Custom paper size 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-18
Type
Heavy paper 3
(221 to 256 g/m2)
Size
1-19
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2, 1-1,
1-2, 1-3, 1-4
Custom paper size 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-19
Type
Transparency
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2, 1-1,
1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4,
3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3,
4-4, 5 (long length)
Free size
Free size (long length)
1-20
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
1-20
Type
Labels
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2, 1-1,
1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4,
3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3,
4-4, 5 (long length)
Free size
Free size (long length)
1-21
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1-21
Type
Tracing
Size
1-22
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
A3
420
297
B4
364
257
A4R
297
210
A4
210
297
B5R
257
182
B5
182
257
A5R
210
148
11x17
431.8
279.4
LGL
355.6
215.9
LTR
215.9
279.4
LTRR
279.4
215.9
STMTR
215.9
139.7
SRA3
450
320
12x18
457.2
304.8
EXEC
184.1
266.7
OFFICIO
317.5
215.9
E-OFFICIO
320
220
B-OFFICIO
355
216
M-OFFICIO
341
216
A-OFFICIO
340
220
A-LTR
220
280
A-LTRR
280
220
GLTR-R
266.7
203.2
GLTR
203.2
266.7
GLGL
330.2
203.2
AFLS
337
206
FLS
330.2
215.9
13x19
482.6
330.2
K8
390
270
K16
195
270
K16R
270
195
F4A
342.9
215.9
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3,
1-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-2,
3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4
Custom paper size 5 (long length)
Free size
182.0 to 487.7 100 to 330.2
Free size (long length)
487.8 to 630.0 100 to 330.2
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-22
Type
Cotton (Bond)
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2, 1-1,
1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4,
3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3,
4-4, 5 (long length)
Free size
Free size (long length)
1-23
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1-23
Type
Tab paper
Pre-Punched paper
Postcard
Size
A4
LTR
A4
LTR
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4 on 1 Postcard
1-24
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
210
215.9
210
215.9
148
200
200
297
279.4
297
279.4
100
148
296
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Right Deck
Tray
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Left Deck
Cassette3
Cassette4
Paper Deck
POD Deck
Lite
Insertion Unit
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-1-12
1-24
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover
1-25
[17]
[33]
[32]
[31]
[2]
[30]
[1]
[18]
[29]
[16]
[28]
[19]
[4]
[27]
[3]
[15]
[26]
[5]
[20]
[25]
[24]
[6]
[14]
[21]
[23]
[22]
[8]
[13]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[10]
[11]
F-1-14
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover
F-1-15
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[15]
[17]
[19]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[29]
[31]
[33]
Upper Cover
Upper Middle Cover
Toner Exchange Cover
Deck Left Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Left Front Cover
Left Handle Cover
Finisher Connector Cover
Upper Rear Cover
Rear Upper Cover
Filter Cover
Right Lower Cover
Vertical Path Cover
Right Handle Cover
Right Cover
MP Pickup Tray
Right Rear Cover 1
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[18]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[28]
[30]
[32]
1-25
1-26
Cross-Section View
Pre-exposure
LED
Primary
Charging Assembly
Laser Scanner
Unit
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Fixing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
Transfer Cleaning
Unit
Environment
Heater Switch
Left Deck
Pickup Paper
Path Unit
Right Deck
Cassette
Heater Switch
Cassette 3
Leakage Breaker
Cassette 4
F-1-17
F-1-16
Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the Leakage Breaker.
1) Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off.
2) Using a pen point, press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine.
3) Check that the breaker switch is OFF (O side).
4) Return the breaker switch to ON (I side).
5) Turn ON the main power switch.
1-26
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel
1-27
Operation
Power Switch
Control Panel
Control Panel
Processing/Date
Error
This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Control Panel Power Switch and the
Settings/Registration
Main Menu
11
Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the
Energy Saver
Quick Menu
12
The Environment Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette
10
15
Clear
16
Reset
Do not turn OFF the Main Power Switch while the progress bar (to be displayed when the
17
Status Monitor/Cancel
Start
the shutdown sequence which has been performed with the conventional machines).
14
After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel
13
18
Be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch to cut the power (there is no need to perform
9
Stop
5
F-1-18
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Numeric Key
Settings/registration Key
Check Counter Key
Stop Key
Operation Pen
ID Key
Clear Key
Reset Key
Start Key
1-27
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu
1-28
Main Menu
Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9
F-1-19
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Save
Access Stored Files
Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Secured Print
Remote Scanner
Shortcut to Settings/Registration
Introduction to Useful Features
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu
1-28
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
Settings/Registration Menu
1-29
Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
iR 7105/7095/7085 Series
Settings/Registration
Select an item to set
TOP
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
1/1
Common Settings
Timer Setting
Adjustment/Cleaning
System Settings
Output Report
Copy Settings
Send/Receive Settings
Mail Box Settings
Printer Settings
Address Book Settings
----T-1-14
OK
Log in
F-1-20
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Management Settings
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
1-29
Technology
Technology
Configuration
Basic
Controller
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
Fixing
/ Feed System
Pickup
Auxiliary System
External
MEAP
RDS
Embedded
Updater
Management Operations
System
2-2
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Laser
scanner
unit
(Bk)
Main
controller
1/2
Option
board
Exposure lamp
Controller system
HDD
CCD
DC
controller
Drum unit
(Bk)
ETB
Image
formation
system
Fixing system
Delivery
Transfer
Fixing
Duplexing feed
Pickup
Pickup/
feed
system
Left deck
Right deck
Cassette3
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Cassette4
Laser beam
F-2-1
2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Basic Sequence
Basic sequence at power ON
Main power ON
Print Unit
INITIAL
INITIAL ROTATION
STBY
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
Duplex Feed Right Motor(M18)
ETB Engagement
Detachment
CCW
CW
Delivery Motor(M13)
Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33)
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL6)
Registration Motor(M34)
Reverse Motor(M14)
Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26)
* CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation
F-2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
2-4
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
ETB Engagement
CCW
CCW
Detachment
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
2-4
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
2-5
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
CCW
ETB Engagement CW
CW CW
CW CW
Detachment
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
CW
CW
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
2-5
2-6
Main Controller
Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser (connector for interface).
Removability/installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this
configuration (Slot-in/out)
Overview
Features
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high
functionality.
Main Controller PCB 1
F-2-6
F-2-5
Main Controller PCB 1 controls the entire system while Main Controller PCB 2 mainly controls
image processing.
2-6
2-7
Specifications/configuration
Memory
Main controller PCB 1
PCBs
J2032
J2031
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB+512MB
HDD(Option)
HDD(Standard)
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-2-7
Parts name
F-2-8
Parts name
T-2-1
2-7
2-8
I/F, connector
BAT1
UI
J1003
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Standard
Mini-USB
J1007
J11
J13
FAN
J1015
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Option
LAN
J1017
USB(D)
J1018
Riser
J1019
USB(H)
J1021
Flash
J1020
F-2-9
Parts name
TPM
J1022
CC-VI
J1026
PCI
J1025
Coin
J1027
F-2-10
No.
Function, specifications
No.
Function, specifications
2-8
2
No.
Function, specifications
No.
2-9
Function, specifications
Jack
No.
Function, specifications
J6
Reader I/F
J12
J14
HDD I/F
Memory PCB I/F
J19
T-2-4
J20
Reader
J6
Jack
No.
Function, specifications
T-2-5
FAX-L1 Control
J2083
Memory PCB
J14
Riser
J2
DC Controller Image
J21
Power Supply
J4
HDD Mirroring
Status
J2027
USB-FAX
J19
HDD
J12
DC Controller Control
J22
F-2-11
Jack
No.
Function, specifications
Jack
No.
J2
Riser I/F
To connect Main Controller PCB 1
J21
J4
J5
J22
J23
Function, specifications
DC Controller image data I/F
To connect from the back of Main
Controller PCB 2
DC Controller Control data I/F
Power Supply FAN I/F
2-9
2-10
DDR2-SDRAM Board
Expansion Bus
PCB
IPSec PCB
F-2-13
IPSec PCB
Name
Image analysis PCB
Name
Voice guidance PCB Product name: Voice Guidance Kit-F1/F2 (only for
non-Japanese models)
Expansion Bus PCB Product name: Expansion Bus -F1/F2
Required when PCI option (Wireless LAN Board-B1, IPSec Board-B2) is
installed
Wireless LAN PCB Product name: Wireless LAN Board-B1/B2
Expansion Bus -F1 is required. Only for non-Japanese models.
IPSec PCB
Encryption/composition processing of packet data
Product name: IPSec Board -B2
Expansion Bus -F1/F2 is required.
T-2-6
2-10
2-11
Boot/Shutdown sequence
HDD
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
Boot sequence
User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9.6GB.
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
MEAP application
Universal data
- Starting application
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-14
NOTE:
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not
synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
2-11
2-12
Error description
HDD error
HDD failed to be recognizedStartup partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup
No system software for the main CPU
No system software for the sub CPU
Startup failure of OS
OS startup file is not found
Insufficient memory
T-2-8
NOTE:
When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started
normally.
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
E6020001
0002
0006
4000
4001
Shutdown sequence
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
processing (to preventdamage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts/executes automatically.
NOTE:
On the assumption that the shutdown sequence was not completed normally, the host
machine is shut down by the Relay PCB in approx. 120 seconds.
2-12
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-13
Controls
Network
LAN
Controller
Copy
Printer driver
language
interpretation
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Reader
Rendering
Riser
Connector
Compression
Decompression
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
Compression
HDD
Decompression
To DC Controller
F-2-17
HDD
To DC Controller
F-2-16
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-13
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-14
SEND
protection)
Reader
Format conversion
Overview
The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named TPM PCB. TPM
stands for Trusted Platform Module, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
LAN
Controller
Compression
Network
Spool
HDD
Removable
F-2-18
FAX
TPM
FAX
F-2-20
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
FAX reception
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
Image processing
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. The
Image data
buffer
(JBIG Conversion)
TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions.
Decompression
When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and
installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM
PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)
When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
Main Controller PCB 2
Spool
HDD
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
F-2-19
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-14
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-15
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because
The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
information flow in each setting.
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute Initialize All
Data / Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.
TPM Key
Backup
Backup of
Common Key
TPM PCB
Public Key
Backup Key
for TPM failure
Password
Password
SRAM
HDD
F-2-22
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is
protected only by the common key.
Backup
Common
Key
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level
equivalent to the conventional machines.
Backup for
Common Key
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Password
Password
SRAM
When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the common key
and multiple passwords stored in SRAM and HDD.
HDD
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common
F-2-21
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
activated only when data in all the layers are linked.
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
deleted from the HDD.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-15
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (TPM setting is OFF by default).
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up.
2-16
Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2)
Setting / Registration
CAUTION:
When the TPM setting is set to ON, advice users on the following:
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
settings, this step can be disregarded.
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only Frequently-used Setting under Scan and
Send can be backed up.
*3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
2) Select Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting
Information.
3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
UI. Then, execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box.
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-16
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
1. Enable Functionality
2-17
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
F-2-25
1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to ON.
Setting / Registration
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.
F-2-23
NOTE:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.
F-2-24
F-2-26
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-17
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
confirmation.
2-18
F-2-28
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-18
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-19
If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
F-2-29
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-19
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-20
Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
F-2-30
Context settings
Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter)
Function Settings
Image-composite form for the common print operation
Printer settings
Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings
Inbox settings
Frequently-used Copy settings
Registered short-cuts in Other Functions
Frequently-used Send settings
Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files
Address Settings
Address Book
Management Settings
Sheet counts in Department ID Management
Settings for device information distribution
Certificate settings
License registration
Remote operation settings
Box backup/ restoration
TPM Settings
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-20
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
HDD
Main
Controller
PCB 2
(SRAM)
TPM Setting = ON
2-21
Initially E746-0031 is
shown on the screen.
When the power is turned
OFF/ON after the TPM
PCB is replaced, E7460032 is shown (only when
the TPM setting is set to
ON).
1.Replace the HDDs.
1. Replace the
Initially E602-xxxx is shown
2.Format the HDD.
HDDs.
(the different extension is
3.Download the system software.
2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
4.See the section of Disabling
3. Download the
After the system software
Functionality to execute Initialize
system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
All Data/ Settings.
4. Restore the
shown.
5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM
password
setting is automatically set to OFF.
information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the
in the HDD.
public key and the common key
are automatically set).
1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common
depends on cases).
in the SRAM.
key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control
in the HDD will
panel is reset to OFF. Manually
be automatically
set the TPM setting to ON (the
restored in the
machine is operated in the TPM
SRAM.
setting ON).
3. Restore the
4. Restore the password information
password
stored in the SRAM (see *1).
information stored
in the SRAM (see
*1).
Error
Code
E746
0031
0032
T-2-9
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-21
2
Error
Code
E746
0033
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
Storage
Data Type
Location
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
2-22
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Certificate/
Secret Key
Certificate/
Secret Key
Others
Function
Name of Data
BOX
BOX Password
Yes
BOX
Yes
SEND
Yes
MEAP
SSL,AMS
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
Backup
Availability
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-22
Storage
Data Type
Location
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Encryption
key
Function
Name of Data
2-23
Backup
Availability
Network
Yes
The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 80GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5
Network
Yes
Yes
Yes
Others
Others
MIB
Password/ MEAP
PIN
inch/250GB HDD-D1 (option) makes 250 GB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in
Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box.
Yes
No
T-2-11
Option HDD
Function
Password/ Advanced
PIN
BOX
Name of Data
User information in Advanced BOX
Backup
Availability
Yes
T-2-12
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-31
2-23
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-24
Mirroring PCB controls reading/writing timing of HDD data.
LED PCB makes the LED show operation status of the HDDs.
80 GB
Standard
Ch B
(HDD2)
LED PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Ch A
(HDD1)
F-2-33
Ch B
80 GB
Option
2.5inch/80GB HDD - C1
Master (HDD1)
250 GB
Option
2.5inch/250 GB HDD - D1
HDD Mirroring Kit - E 1
Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
LED PCB
Ch B
250 GB
Option
2.5inch/250 GB HDD - D1
F-2-32
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-24
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
Rebuild progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel.
Copying hard disk data... xx%
NOTE:
This machine can be used even during rebuild process (operation is performed
with HDD1)
The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during rebuild
process. Rebuild is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This
does not apply in the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during
rebuild process
Slot.1 (HDD1)
2-25
Slot.2 (HDD2)
CH B
CH A
Start Rebuild
Complete Rebuild
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-25
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-26
Description of Modes
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
At writing:
Name of Mode
Mirroring PCB
HDD
1
Mirror Mode
Mirroring PCB
HDD
2
HDD
1
HDD
2
F-2-35
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up/blinking if reading/writing to each HDD
is performed properly.
In the case of failure:
The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is
continued by the other HDD.
Description
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
operation.
List of operation status (LED)
---: Light-out A: lighting-up B: blinking
Status
At normal operation
During access with HDD1
During access with HDD2
HDD1 is faulty
HDD2 is faulty
During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild)
During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild)
HDD 1 (Ch A)
HDD 2 (Ch B)
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
--A
---------/A
---/A
------A
--B
---
----A
-------/A
---/A
--------A
--B
T-2-13
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-26
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-27
Mode Flow during Operation
Mirror Mode
Trouble
Halt Mode
Degrade Mode
Mirror Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Trouble
Both HDDs
In which HDD?
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Rebuild Mode
In which HDD?
Trouble
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Both HDDs
Backup HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
In which HDD?
Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Degrade Mode
Halt Mode
In which HDD?
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Backup HDD
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Master HDD
Trouble
Halt Mode
Unable to detect
Master HDD
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
HDD Status?
Unable to detect
Backup HDD
When successfully
Rebuilt
Degrade Mode
F-2-36
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
F-2-37
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-27
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-28
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
each mode.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
accessed firstly.
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Name of
Mode
Status
HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red
Red
LED LED
--A
-----
A: Lit
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.
---
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
---
---
T-2-15
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
*1: This mode shows the message, Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer), on the control panel. In addition, 310006 is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-28
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
2-29
HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to encrypt
the whole HDD including the system software. Encryption allows leaks of confidential data,
offices or private
even when the HDD is stolen, including image data (temporarily generated at Copy or Print
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
jobs) and user data stored in BOX/ Advanced BOX. In addition, the data written into the two
hard disks are also encrypted when the HDD mirroring functionality is enabled. The following
descriptions focus on the HDD encryption function. See the previous section for the mirroring
functionality.
REMOVABLE HDD
are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared. Under this condition, the data
or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor
and the like. To counter such threats against securities, data written to the disk should be
always encrypted to protect them from illegal restoration of image data or others. This product
employs an unconventional approach to achieve HDD encryption and mirroring functionality
with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two
functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
The encryption board can be configured with a HDD and an encryption/ mirroring board, or
with 2 HDDs and an encryption/ mirroring board.
NOTE:
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
2-29
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
2-30
This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 is triggered if the unformatted disk is
Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other
started).
When you start the HDD formatting, the message is automatically shown to confirm whether
Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the encryption board
Encryption
Correct
encryption
board
Correct
controller
Clear execution.
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
two-way authentication
Correct
controller
The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E602-2000.
Poor board connection also causes this error. Check the board connection to seek error
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
Controller
not authorized
Encryption board
not authorized
recovery. Initialization of the encryption board will disable accesses to HDD data permanently.
Cautions should be taken in initialization.
Encryption
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
F-2-40
User data
Recovery
cleared
Replace HDDs
cleared
Action
1) Format the HDD
2) Install the system software
1) Replace encryption board
2) Initialize Encryption Board (see *1)
3) Format the HDD
4) Install the system
1) Initialize the encryption board (see *1)
2) Format the HDD
3) Install the system
N/A
MN-CON clear does not clear
authentication information; no work is
required specifically for HDD encryption kit
T-2-16
is started in safe mode using the USB flash memory with system data stored.
The message as shown in the figure below is displayed.
Select 0 when you are ready to initialize the encryption board.
Encryption board
error occurred.
Check connection
of the board.
Initialize
the board.
All data is deleted
at initialization.
[0]=Initialization
[other key]=exit
F-2-41
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
2-30
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board.
2-31
E610 and detailed codes
E code
Detailed
Code
E610
0001
Attention!
Once initialization
is started,you
cannot cancel it.
is that OK?
[2]= Yes
[other keys]=No
0002
0101
0102
F-2-42
Description
Authentication Error
0201
Cause
Detection
Timing
Failure in Encryption
Board
Error in recognition of
the encryption board
Device Error
Failure in the
encryption board
Actions
Check connections between
the encryption board and
the HDD and between the
encryption board and the main
controller 2. This error may be
triggered after replacement
of the encryption board or the
main controller 2. At any rate,
this error disables accesses to
HDD data. When no problem
is found in connections, use
SST to execute Key Clear >
Format > Install System.
T-2-17
0202
0301
0302
0303
0401
0402
Actions
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
2-31
Service Operations
HDD
2-32
2. After Replacing
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn
2-32
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
2-33
Main Controller PCB 1
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81.
<Procedure of adjustment>
Service part:
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press OK button.(e.g.: If
No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan
Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis).
Main Controller PCB 1
Cooling Fan
Controller
BOX Frame
F-2-43
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
Flash PCB
F-2-44
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
2-33
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.
2-34
Main Controller PCB 2
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing Main Controller PCB 2," on p. 4-86.
<Procedure of adjustment>
Service part:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame
Main Controller PCB 2
F-2-45
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
2-34
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
1. Before Replacing
Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand.
1) Backup of the set/registered data
Use the Remote UI.
2-35
2. When Replacing
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (1 pc.) (When option DDR2-SDRAM is installed: 2 pc.)
Memory PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
Memory PCB
F-2-46
Prohibited Operation:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might
cause to fail the restoration.
Main Controller PCB 1
Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)
Memory PCB
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
2-35
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB
3. After Replacing
1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch.
2) Restoring the backup data
Use the Remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
3) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before
replacement, reset/register the data.
4) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
request the user to generate them again
2-36
TPM PCB
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81.
<Procedure of adjustment>
When TPM setting is OFF
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
When TPM setting is ON
It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to ON.
1) Removing the network cable
Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB
2-36
2-37
Laser is applied to the Nom-image image on the positively-charged drum with this machine.
Image area
Non-image area
Non-image area
Overview
Overview
This machine uses an 8-beam method that enables exposure of 8 beams per scanning
direction for high productivity.
Laser ON
Laser ON
Enlarged view
F-2-48
Laser Scanner Unit can be removed from the side of the main body.
Video signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
BD signal
Laser signal
DC Controller PCB
Polygon motor
Laser Scanner Unit
BD Mirror
F-2-49
BD PCB
La
se
se r A
rB
La
La
se
rH
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-47
2-37
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-38
Specifications
Parts Configuration
Item
Laser team
670nm
Laser type
Laser output
7mW(Max)
8 beams
Resolution
Scanner
motor
Type
Brushless motor
Number of rotations
Laser ON timing
control
Laser beam intensity
control
Others
Reflection mirror
1200dpi
Controls
Description
Wave length
5
Laser ON/OFF control
Polygon motor
BD Mirror
T-2-19
F-2-50
Name
Laser driver
Polygonal mirror
Reflection mirror
Correction lens
Tilt correction motor
Image Formation Lens (small)
Image Formation Lens (Large)
Role
Laser driver
Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main
scanning direction.
Reflect a laser team to the drum.
Correct a main-scanning tilt of the laser beam
coming from the folding mirror.
Correct a main-scanning tilt by moving the
correction lens.
To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an
image
To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an
image
T-2-20
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-38
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-39
Controls
Overview
This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser
control signals.
Main Controller
PCB 2
Polygon Mirror
Control signal
Video signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
Laser Beam
APC Control
F-2-52
<Timing of Execution>
Mode
F-2-51
Item
Purpose/Description
Forcible OFF
APC
Print mode
Standby mode
Laser status
OFF
ON
OFF/ON
OFF
Remarks
Clear the laser beam intensity setting determined by APC.
Adjust the laser beam intensity.
Irradiate a laser beam according to the video signal.
The main unit is placed in the standby status.
T-2-22
T-2-21
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-39
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-40
NOTE:
EEPROM on the Laser Driver PCB stores the 8-beam phase displacement
coefficient (laser phase coefficient), which is unique to the Laser Scanner Unit,
and corrects 8-beam phase difference based on the stored coefficient. When a
Laser Scanner Unit is replaced, the DC Controller PCB automatically retrieves the
laser phase coefficient of EEPROM.
This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction.
<Timing of Execution>
For every eight lines
<Details of the Control>
1) The synchronization control in horizontal scanning direction is executed with reference to
Standard BD
Laser A.
2) The BD PCB is located on the light path of Laser A laser beam and the laser beam is
Laser H
3) The BD PCB detects laser beam of Laser A and generates BD signal to be sent to the DC
Controller PCB.
4) The DC Controller sends the PBD signal to Main Controller PCB 2 according to BD signal.
Laser G
5) Based on the laser phase coefficient and the BD signal, the DC Controller PCB generates
synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction on an 8 lines basis at the generation
area of synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction.
6) Once the PBD signal is received, Main Controller PCB 2 sends video signal to the DC
Controller PCB.
7) The video signal sent from Main Controller PCB 2 is output to the Laser Driver PCB
Laser F
Laser A
T
F-2-54
PBD
signal
Main
Controller
PCB 2
ASIC
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
generation
assembly
Laser
phase
coefficient
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
BD PCB
EEPROM
Laser H
Laser G
Video
signal
Video
signal
BD signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
Polygon
Laser B
Laser A
DC Controller PCB
F-2-53
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-40
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-41
Laser Beam Intensity Control
<Execution timing>
When printing is started
<Execution timing>
When the laser is scanned (per line)
<Control Description>
1) The DC Controller PCB generates synchronization signal in vertical scanning direction
(PVREQ) and sends to Main Controller PCB 2.
<Control Description>
1) The DC Controller PCB outputs laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Laser
2) The Laser Driver IC is set in APC mode and makes laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) to forcibly
emit in series.
3) The Laser Driver IC monitors laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) with the Photo Diode (PD) and
PVREQ
Main
Controller
PCB 2
Image
ASIC
adjusts output of laser diode until the laser light intensity reaches a specified level.
Laser Driver
PCB
Image signal
DC Controller
PCB
PD
F-2-55
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
Laser Driver IC
Laser Control
Signal
DC Controller PCB
LD5
LD6
LD7
LD8
F-2-56
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-41
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
2-42
<Laser Lighting>
When the paper passes through the fixing area after the image was created on the 1st side of
the 2-sided print, the paper temporarily gets shrunk due to the heat. Then, creating the image
Horizontal scanning
on the 2nd side causes the 2nd side image extended, which makes the 2nd side image larger
than the 1st side image when the paper size returns to the original size after the paper is
Without
Correction
With
Correction
<Control description>
When the 2nd side is printed, the following controls are executed with consideration of
papers shrinkage level.
Main scanning direction:
Vertical
scanning
The image in horizontal scanning direction is reduced by skipping the image data.
Sub scanning direction:
The image is reduced by increasing rotating speed of the Polygon Motor.
Increasing rotating speed of the Polygon Motor causes an increase of magnification ratio in
horizontal scanning direction, and equally effects as skipping of image data.
<Polygon Motor Swing Speed>
<Constant Speed>
<Speed Up>
L > L
>
:Exposure
F-2-57
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
2-42
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Polygon Motor Control
2-43
When magnification is corrected, changing the Polygon Motor speed between sheets might
be slower depending on the speed, so productivity might be reduced.
Communi
-cation
Variable Speed
Time
<Execution timing>
Speed convergence
Time
Paper
<Control description>
1) The DC Controller PCB outputs acceleration signal (ACC) to forcibly rotate the Polygon
Motor.
2) The speed detection signals (FG, BD) are detected to be compared with the reference
F-2-58
Variable speed
Wide
-0.3%
105ppm
PPM
95ppm
85ppm
79%
80%
82%
-0.6%
71%
74%
75%
-1.0%
69%
71%
73%
signal generated in the reference signal generation area, so that the acceleration signal
(ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) are controlled to keep the specified speed.
T-2-23
* In the actual use, it is assumed that changing speed over 0.6% is rarely seen.
Related Settings/Registration mode
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings
>Details/Edit > Adjust Image position > Fine Adjust Zoom
Polygon motor
BD PCB
ACC
DEC
BD
DC Controller PCB
F-2-60
F-2-59
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Polygon Motor Control
2-43
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
2-44
DC5V
PS3
Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor
SW2
Front Door Open Detection Switch
DC Controller PCB
DC12V
DC/DC
Relay PCB
F-2-61
NOTE:
This control is executed by the software only and there is no shutter to prevent
laser exposure.
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
2-44
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-45
Servicing
Periodically Replaced Parts
None
Consumable Parts
None
Qty
Cleaning
interval
Remarks
Dust-proof glass
Parts Name
Laser Scanner Unit
Major Adjustments
None
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-45
2-46
Drum Cleaning Unit
Developing Assembly
Overview
Overview
Toner image is formed by the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method in
image formation system.
To ensure high quality print, this machine introduces the following new technologies:
Photosensitive Drum
Small-diameter toner
High resolution by fine-grained toner
Belt transfer method
Improved transfer/feeding performance by the belt feeding
Twin-developing method
Improving developing efficiency by the 2-time developing. Uneven developing at the first
developing is evened out with the second development.
At the second development, if toner is excessively supplied to the drum at the first
development, the excessive toner is pulled to the cylinder. If the amount of toner on the
Transfer Belt
Paper
F-2-62
drum is not enough, toner shortfall is supplied to the drum from the cylinder.
Image Stabilization Control
Image density/gradation correction by the D-max control and the D-half control
The shutter mechanism is added to the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly.
This prevents discharge products from attaching on the Drum, thus prevents image failure
just after startup.
Improved accessibility to the periodically replaced / durable parts provides increased
serviceability.
2-46
2-47
Specifications
Charging Specifications
T-2-26
Primary
Charging Wire
Developing
Upper Cylinder
AC+DC negative
DC positive
A-Si
84 mm diameter
Cleaning Blade
500 mm/sec
Curvature separation + separation claw
Yes (42 +/- 2 deg C)
Yes
Developing Assembly
Dry, 1-component toner projection method
iR-ADV 8105/8095/8085 series
2 cylinders (twin-developing method)
- Developing upper cylinder: 20 mm diameter
- Developing lower cylinder: 20 mm diameter
Toner
Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection Yes (magnetic sensor)
Primary charging
Charging method
Corona charging (2 charging wires + grind wire)
Cleaning
Cleaning Pad (charging wire)
Shutter
Yes
Pre-transfer charging Charging method
Corona charging (1 charging wire)
Cleaning
Cleaning Pad (charging wire)
Shutter
Yes
Transfer method
Direct transfer (ETB: Electrostatic Transfer Belt)
ETB Unit
Material
CR rubber + urethane resin
Circumferential length 298.5 mm
Cleaning
Brush Roller + Cleaning Blade
Transfer method
Transfer Roller (sponge roller)
Separation method
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Disengagement
Yes
mechanism
Waste Toner Container Capacity
Equivalent to 1 million sheets
Full-level detection
Yes
Presence/absence
No
detection
Toner Container
Method
Set-on (manual)
Patch Sensor
Yes
DC negative
Function/Method
Material
Drum diameter
Cleaning
Process speed
Separation method
Drum Heater
Drum HP detection
Developing method
Developing Cylinder
Pre-transfer
Charging PCB
(PCB26)
AC
Item
Photosensitive Drum
Developing High
Voltage PCB
(PCB12)
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
(PCB11)
AC+DC positive
Basic Specifications
DC positive
Grid Wire
Photosensitive Drum
Separation Claw
Item
Primary charging bias
Grid bias
Developing bias
Dust-collection bias
Pre-transfer charging
bias
Transfer bias
Separation claw bias
Bias value
Remarks
2-47
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-48
Parts Configuration
Process Area
Entire Configuration
Primary Charging
Assembly
Grid Wire
Primary
Potential Sensor
Charging Wire
Developing Blade
Pre-exposure LED
Toner Container
Developing Cylinder
Transfer Assembly
Process
Assembly
Photosensitive Drum
Waste Toner
Feed Assembly
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Auxiliary Roller
Patch Sensor
Magnet Roller
Waste Toner
Container
Toner
Stirrer
Separation Claw
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
Dust Collecting
Roller
F-2-65
F-2-64
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-48
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-49
Transfer Area
Transfer Roller
Drive Roller
Static Eliminator
Cleaning Blade
Separation Guide
Idler Roller
Front View
Toner Container
Hopper
Brush Roller
Transfer Belt
Cleaning Shaft
Engagement Arm
Engagement Cam
Sub Hopper
Toner Stirrer
Buffer
Cleaning Unit
F-2-66
Magnet Roller
Buffer
Magnet Roller
F-2-67
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-49
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-50
Drive Configuration
Process Area
M2
CL1
M6
ETB cleaning Unit
TS1
Waste Toner Feed Assembly
PS61
PS90
Waste Toner
Container
SL10
M1
M7
F-2-69
Code
Waste Toner
M1
F-2-68
M2
M6
M7
SL10
CL1
TS1
PS61
PS90
Name
Function
Drum Motor
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-50
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-51
Transfer Area
PS54
PS55
M10
PS56
M43
M19
F-2-70
Code
Parts name
M19
M43
PS55
PS56
Function
M28
CL5
T-2-29
TS3
TS2
F-2-71
Code
M10
M28
CL5
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
Parts name
Function
2-51
2
Code
TS2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
Parts name
2-52
Function
T-2-30
M43
SW5
F-2-72
Code
M2
M43
SW5
Parts name
Function
Developing Motor
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-52
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process
2-53
Print Process
Block
Static formation
block
Developing
block
Transfer block
Fixing block
ETB cleaning
block
Drum cleaning
block
Step
Overview
1 Exposure
1.Pre-exposure
3.Laser exposure
4.Fixing Block
Delivery
8.Fixing
9.ETB cleaning
Photosensitive
Drum
3.Transfer
Block
4.Development
2.Development
Block
5.Pre-transfer Charging
7.Separation 6.Transfer
Registration
MP Pickup Tray
ETB Unit
Deck/Cassette
Rotation of photosensitive drum and ETB
Flow of paper
F-2-73
T-2-32
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process
2-53
2-54
Controls
Control name
Exposure
-Pre-exposure control
Separation
-Separation control
-Separation claw bias control
Exposure
Pre-exposure control
Primary Charging
-Primary charging bias control
-Primary charging wire cleaning control
-Primary charging shutter control
Drum Cleaning
-Drum cleaning exposure
Transfer
-Pre-transfer charging bias control
-Pre-transfer charging wire
cleaning control
-Pre-transfer charging
shutter control
-Transfer bias control
-Transfer belt cleaning control
-Transfer belt engage/disengage
control
Primary charging
Primary charging wire bias
control
Primary charging wire
cleaning control
Primary charging shutter
control
Developing
Developing bias control
Toner Supply
-Toner level detection
-Toner supply control
-Toner container detection
Development
-Developing bias control
-Dust-collecting bias control
Drum Control
-Drum cleaning exposure
-Separation claw bias control
F-2-74
Description
To apply the light of the Pre-exposure LED on the surface of the
Photosensitive Drum.
To apply the positive potential to the Primary Charging Wire and the
Primary Grid Plate.
To clean the Primary Charging Wire.
To prevent image failure caused by ozone generated from the
Primary Charging Wire.
2-54
Control name
Toner supply
Toner level detection
Toner supply control
Toner container detection
Waste toner feeding
Waste toner full level
detection
Waste toner screw lock
detection
Waste toner container
detection
Image stabilization control
Potential control
Patch Detection
D-max control
D-half control
PASCAL control
2D shading control
2-55
Exposure
Description
Pre-exposure Control
To detect toner level in the Developing Unit and the Buffer Unit.
To supply toner from the Toner Container to the Developing
Assembly.
To detect whether the Toner Container is attached to the host
machine.
To prevent uneven density with the print image, residual potential on the Photosensitive Drum
is removed before the primary charging.
With the command by the DC Controller PCB, the Pre-exposure LED (LED 1) is emitted. By
emitting the LED on the Photosensitive Drum, remove residual potential on the drum.
Other Control
Startup Contrast Potential To adjust the contrast potential (Vcont) at startup in order to
maintain the density consistently.
Laser APC control
To correct the laser output control value to prevent changes in
surface potential by the laser output.
Blank Band Control
To blow off the reversely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve
forcibly to the Drum surface in order to collect the toner into the
Drum Cleaning Unit.
Black Band Control
To supply toner thoroughly to the ends of the Cleaning Blade and
prevent the blade from everting by forming the toner band at the
Drum ends.
Low Duty Discharge
To forcibly eject toner by forming the toner band at the Drum ends
Control
in order to avoid toner deterioration in case low duty images are
continuously output.
Pre-exposure LED(LE1)
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-75
T-2-33
2-55
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging
2-56
Primary Charging
<Execution timing>
To make the surface of the Photosensitive Drum evenly and positively charged.
The primary charging bias (DC positive), which has been generated by the Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (PCB11), is applied to the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Plate.
Primary charging DC bias: the bias to be applied to the Primary Charging Wire
Interruption at every 2000 sheets of continuous print (the value can be changed in service
mode: 100 to 2000 sheets)
After last rotation which is performed on the 1500th sheet and later since the last cleaning
(1-roundtrip)
In the case of executing the wire cleaning in service mode (1-roundtrip or 3-roundtrip)
The grid bias is specified based on the estimated life and the environment.
<Control description>
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) makes the Cleaner Screw rotate
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB(PCB11)
clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the
DC positive
DC positive
Screw
Primary Charging Wire
Grid Wire
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Primary Charging Wire
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-77
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging
2-56
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging
2-57
NOTE:
In the environment which moisture content is lower than the one in power saving
environment (temperature: 22 deg C, humidity: 75%, moisture content: 12.41g),
set the Drum Heater to OFF in the sleep mode after a specified time passes.
Discharge product (nitrogen compound) which is generated at the Charging
Assembly when image is formed is deposited on the Drum when the time passes.
When the Drum Heater is OFF, the discharge product (nitrogen compound) has a
chemical reaction with the moisture in the air and generates nitric acid. This nitric
acid deteriorates the surface of the Drum and causes the image failure.
Elapsing time
Operation
Image formation is
completed.
or
Standby mode starts.
DC Controller starts.
(DCON alarm)
(240 min. to 300 min.)
<Execution timing>
ON
OFF
Charging Shutter is closed.
<Execution timing>
After 4 or 5 hours since the drum was stopped*
*The time is determined by the environment (moisture content) when the drum operation
Recovery starts.
was stopped
Environment
1
2
3
4
Energy save
5
6
7
23 deg C 5%
23 deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
22 deg C 75%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Charging Shutter is
opened.
Drum Heater is ON.
Charging Shutter is closed. Two dimensional
Drum Heater is OFF.
shading is OFF.
Time
300 min.
285 min.
270 min.
255 min.
240 min.
Not close
Not close
Not close
T-2-34
1. Operation of Charging
Shutter opening
2. Fixing warm-up
Charging Shutter is
opened.
Drum Heater is ON.
Two dimensional
shading is ON.
Startup sequence
Drum Heater is ON.
Image formation starts.
F-2-78
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging
2-57
2-58
<Control description>
The shutter is open or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire.
The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) moves the Cleaning Pad to the
rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter closed.
Because the Shutter comes between the Grid Wire and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge
products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum.
The Primary Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS94) detects opening/close of the shutter.
Developing
Developing Bias Control
To form a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum by charging toner on the Developing
Cylinder.
<Control description>
The developing bias (AC, DC positive), which has been generated on the Develop High
Voltage PCB (PCB12), is applied to the Developing Cylinder.
Developing DC bias
Grid Wire
Screw
Developing AC bias
The bias to improve image quality.
The bias value is fixed.
Primary Charging
Shutter Sensor(PS94)
Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Motor(M6)
AC+DC positive
Grid Wire
Charging Shutter
Photosensitive Drum
Charging Shutter
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-79
2-58
2-59
To collect toner which floats over the Photosensitive Drum during developing process.
There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to
prevent toner scattering.
<Control description>
The Developing Shutter and Buffer Shutter is opened/closed in conjunction with push-in and
The dust-collection bias (DC negative), which has been generated on the Develop High
Unit. By pulling the Developing Assembly out from the main body, the Developing Shutter
DC negative
Photosensitive Drum
Push
Toner
Buffer Assembly
Developing Assembly
F-2-82
2-59
2-60
Transfer
Pre-transfer Charging Bias Control
To make the charging amount of toner on the Photosensitive Drum appropriate to improve
transfer performance.
The pre-transfer charging bias (AC + DC negative), which has been generated on the Pretransfer Charging PCB (PCB26), is applied to the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
By pulling the Developing Assembly out, the Shutter Arm is pushed by the protrusion on the
Pre-transfer Charging PCB(PCB26)
Developing Shutter, so the Buffer Shutter is closed followed by the Supply Mouth. The Shutter
Arm lifts up by hitting to the bottom of the Hopper.
AC+DC negative
Buffer Assembly Shutter Open
Buffer Assembly
Buffer Assembly Shutter
Developing Assembly
Photosensitive Drum
Push
Toner
Buffer Assembly
Spring
Projection
Developing Assembly
2-60
2-61
<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the primary charging wire cleaning control at the same time.
<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning control at the same
time.
<Control description>
The drive of the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) makes the Cleaner Screw
rotate clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the
<Control description>
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor ( ) detects position of the Cleaning Pad.
Wire.
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) moves the Cleaning Pad
to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter
closed.
Because the Shutter comes between the Pre-transfer Charging Wire and the Photosensitive
Screw
Drum, discharge products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor(M7)
Photosensitive Drum.
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS95) detects opening/close of the
shutter.
Screw
F-2-85
Shutter Flag
Photosensitive
Drum
To specify cleaning interval of the last rotation charging wire (Default: every 2000 sheets (the
interval can be changed within the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets))
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P
Charging Shutter
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
Charging Shutter
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor(PS95)
F-2-86
2-61
2-62
To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the residual toner on the Transfer
The transfer bias (DC positive), which has been generated on the Transfer High Voltage PCB
Belt is removed.
<Control description>
Paper leading edge weak bias: the bias to be applied to the leading edge of the paper (to
Cleaning Shaft
ETB cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Feed Screw
Transfer Roller
Cleaning Blade
F-2-88
F-2-87
2-62
2-63
Transfer Belt
Disengagement
Engagement
<Execution timing>
To make the belt engaged: during printing
To make the belt disengaged: any timing other than the above
<Control description>
1) Reverse rotation of the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) makes the Disengagement Cam
Engagement Arm
rotate.
2) Rotation of the Disengagement Cam moves the Disengagement Arm up and down to make
the Transfer Belt engaged/disengaged with the Photosensitive Drum.
Flag
M19
Engagement Arm
Engagement Cam
Engagement
Disengagement
Photosensitive
Drum
Transfer Belt
Engagement Cam
Engagement Arm
F-2-89
2-63
2-64
Separation
Separation Control
<Separation from the Drum>
Separation is performed using the curvature separation method.
Photosensitive Drum
Paper
Separation Claw
F-2-90
NOTE:
The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit.
This effectively avoids failure in paper feed (double feed, etc.)
Paper
Separation Claw
F-2-91
2-64
2-65
Separation is performed using the curvature separation method and the Static Eliminator.
By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by
Static Eliminator
Separation Guide
<Execution Timing>
Transfer Belt
Paper
Gear Unit
Separation Guide
Static Eliminator
Transfer Belt
M1
Lack
M1
Drive Lever
Cam
F-2-92
2-65
F-2-93
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning
Drum Cleaning
2-66
Separation Bias Control
To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw, this
control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation
Claw.
<Execution timing>
<Control description>
1) The drive of the Main Motor (M2) makes the Magnet Roller rotate.
2) The Magnet Roller forms a thin toner coating layer on the surface of the Photosensitive
Drum.
3) The Drum Cleaning Blade scrapes residual toner on the surface of the Drum.
4) The Toner Collection Feeding Screw feeds the scraped waste toner to the Waste Toner
Container.
The separation claw bias (AC), which has been generated on the Develop High Voltage PCB
(PCB12), is applied to the Separation Claw so that vibration is given to the Separation Claw
to prevent toner attachment.
The bias value is fixed.
AC
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
Separation Claw
F-2-95
Auxiliary Roller
Waste Toner Feed Screw
Magnet Roller
F-2-94
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning
2-66
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
Drum-related Issues
2-67
Drum Heater Control
To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified
Drum HP Detection
The Drum Heater is the flat heater located inside the Photosensitive Drum to keep moisture
content on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum constant by turning ON the heater.
NOTE:
Temperature of the drum is detected by the Thermistor in the Drum Control PCB, and
is controlled by turning ON/OFF the Drum Heater to make it 42 degC
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
Drum Heater
Flag
Environment
Heater
Switch
Environment Sensor
F-2-97
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
2-67
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
2-68
<Operating condition>
Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine.
A.2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt *1)
<Environment Switch: OFF>
Mode
Main SW
Switch
OFF
Cassette SW
OFF
Drum
Heater
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
WarmUp (Recovery)
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Environment Environment
control *1
control *1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-35
Main SW
Switch
Cassette SW
Drum
Heater
WarmUp (Recovery)
OFF
OFF
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Environment Environment
control *1
control *1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-36
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
2-68
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
2-69
Main SW
Switch
Cassette SW
Heater
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
WarmUp (Recovery)
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON *1
ON *1
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-37
Main SW
Switch
Heater
WarmUp (Recovery)
OFF
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
ON *1
ON *1
ON *1
ON *1
ON *1
ON *1
OFF
OFF
ON *1
ON *1
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-38
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
2-69
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2-70
<Environment Control>
Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main
power continues.
Environment control 2: Whether to turn ON or OFF the heater is determined by the
environment (moisture content) right before moving to sleep state, and the condition
continues while the power is OFF or the machine is at sleep state.
Environment
Moisture content
Temperature/Humidity
Drum Heater
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
15
18
12.41
23 deg C 5%
23deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
ON
Hopper Unit
Magnet Roller
T-2-39
Environment control 3: Basically the heater is ON. ON or OFF of the heater can be
switched depending on the moisture contents when the duration time of standby mode/
energy saving mode is long (4 hours at minimum).
Sub Hopper
Toner Stirrer
Buffer Unit
Toner Feed Motor
M28
CL5
1: Drum Heater ON mode *(The Drum Heater must be turned ON when moving to sleep 1
while the 2-dimensional shading-related control is OFF.)
2: Energy saving mode (The Drum Heater is OFF when moving to sleep 1.)
* The mode differs from 2-dimensional shading ON (image priority mode). This mode is for
users who just want to turn ON the Drum Heater when startup time is delayed because of
the increase of controls due to 2-dimensional shading ON.
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE: Image priority mode (2-dimensional
shading).
Developing Assembly
F-2-98
Title
Description
Supply timing
Supply to the
Hopper
ON/OFF
0: 2-dimensional shading OFF (Default)
1: 2-dimensional shading ON (The Drum Heater is turned ON at first time for the day, sleep,
standby/energy saving, potential control, and 2-dimensional shading.)
Toner in the Toner When the Buffer Toner Sensor To drive the Toner Supply
Container is supplied
(TS3) detects absence of
Motor (M10).
to the Buffer Unit.
toner
To be executed until TS3
detects presence of toner.
Supply to the Developer in the Buffer
When the Developing
To drive the Toner Feed
Developing
Unit is supplied to the Toner Sensor (TS1) detects
Motor (M28).
Assembly
Developing Assembly.
absence of toner
To be executed until TS1
detects presence of toner.
T-2-40
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2-70
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
NOTE:
The Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS2) detects amount of toner around the Buffer
Inlet. If toner is supplied excessively from the Sub Hopper to the Buffer Unit (if
there are toner clusters), toner in the Buffer may overflow.
If TS2 detects presence of toner, regardless of presence/absence detection of
toner by TS3, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is stopped so that toner supply to the
Buffer is stopped to prevent toner leak
2-71
Toner Level Detection:
Toner Container
Sub Hopper
TS2
Buffer
TS3
TS1
Developing Assembly
F-2-99
Toner level
Status
Message
100 to 25%
No
(toner presence)
TS2
TS3
25 to 10%
No
TS1
10 to 5%
TS2
TS1
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
TS3
Operation
When TS3 detects absence of toner, the
Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven.
Once TS3 detects presence of toner, M10
is stopped (to prevent toner leak).
When TS3 detects absence of toner, the
Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven.
Once TS3 detects presence of toner, M10
is stopped (to prevent toner leak).
2-71
2
Toner level
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area
Status
Message
5% or less
TS2
TS1
TS3
Operation
2-72
Waste Toner Feeding Area
Waste Toner Full Level Detection
The waste toner of the Drum Cleaning Unit and the ETB Unit is fed to the Waste Toner
Container. There is no sensor to detect toner level in the Waste Toner Container and the toner
level is detected by the video count (1-count per 1 sheet with 6% image).
M2
*) The number 900 sheets is a logical value derived from calculation; thus, it varies approx.
30%. In addition, with Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-RUN-LV, approx.
140 sheets can be printed (with 30% of variation).
ETB cleaning
Unit
Waste Toner
Container
Waste Toner
F-2-100
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area
2-72
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area
2-73
Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection
2. Low duty discharge control in order to maintain the density stability in the case of
The drive by the Developing Motor (M2) is transmitted to the Screw Gear, which makes
the Waste Toner Screw rotate. When this Screw Gear becomes unable to rotate, it slides
sideways by the transmitted drive force.
The Screw Gear fails to rotate once the Waste Toner Screw is locked; therefore, the
transmitted drive force makes the Screw Gear slide sideways. The Waste Toner Lock
Temperature/
Humidity
Moisture
content
0 to less
than 1.0
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
250,000
pages
23 deg C / 5%
23 deg C / 10%
23 deg C / 30%
23 deg C / 50%
27 deg C / 70%
15
28 deg C / 75%
18
30 deg C / 80%
21.6
100,000
pages
1.0 to
less
than 2.0
1,000,000 pages
250,000
pages
120,000
pages
600,000
pages
Detection Switch (SW5) is placed by the side of the Screw Gear and SW5 is pressed when
the Screw Gear is moved. With this mechanism, it is detected that the Waste Toner Screw is
locked.
<Related error code>
E013-0001 Error in Waste Toner Lock Detection Connector disconnection
E013-0002 Error in Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock detection
600,000 pages
150,000
pages
100,000 pages
300,000
pages
150,000
pages
500,000
pages
200,000
pages
500,000
pages
T-2-42
Status
Operation
Warning for full level of waste toner Approx. 83% of the full criterion Printing can be continued
Host machine is
Full level of waste toner
Full criterion
stopped(error display)
T-2-43
The Drive Gear escapes when a certain load is applied to the Waste Toner Feeding Screw
and an error is displayed after the Host Machine has been stopped.
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area
2-73
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-74
Primary
Charging
Wire
Laser Power(Lp)
Laser
Potential Sensor
Developing Cylinder
Patch Sensor
Developing
bias
(Vdc)
Patch
Density
Potential
control
Drum
surface
potential
D-max
Laser APC
control
DC Controller PCB
Reader
D-half
PASCAL
PASCAL
LUT
D-half Patch
Generate gradation table
Main Controller PCB2
F-2-101
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-74
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-75
Execution Timing
Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence.
*70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,**60 sec.70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,***Fixing temperature remaining high at power OFF/ON
Control
Full Potential
Control
Standard
Warm-up rotation
duration
power
(second)
At
Normal
Door
Approx. startup* startup** OFF/
open
ON***
Initial
rotation
Timing
Paper
interval
Jam
recovery
Interruption
Last
rotation
Arbitrary
Forcible
PASCAL PASCAL
interruption Low duty
Normal
(Full
(Quick
at 2,000 ejection
correction) correction)
sheets
()*2
()*3
()*1
0.2
*5
APC Control
at Warm-up
Rotation
()*6
APC Correction
at Last Rotation
()*7
Drum Idle
Rotation at First
in the Day
60.0
APC Correction
at Paper Interval
Charging Wire
Cleaning
30
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
()*8
()*8
Remarks
*1 Operation Criteria
Last rotation after the first job right after startup first
time for the day takes 10 minutes or longer
Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more
following the last potential control execution
Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or
more elapsed from the last potential control execution
*2 Operation Criteria
Every initial rotation for the job that start within 10
minutes after density judgment at normal startup
mode (60 seconds startup)
Initial rotation for the first job that starts after more
than 10 minutes have passed from density judgment
at normal startup mode (60 seconds startup)
*3 Operation Criteria
Forcible interruption when the accumulated value of
the paper interval VL correction value exceeds 10V
within 10 minutes after density judgment at normal
startup mode (60 seconds startup)
*5 At every 20-sheet interval
*6 Operation Criteria
Initial rotation after the first job following 60 minutes or
more elapsed from the last job completion
*7 Operation Criteria
Last rotation after the first job following 30 minutes or
more elapsed from the last job completion
*8 Operation Criteria
Last rotation after 1,500 sheets or more processed
following the last Charging Wire cleaning execution
Forcibly interruption at 2,000 sheets or more
processed following the last Charging Wire cleaning
execution
2-75
Control
D-max Control*
(including the
belt background
correction)
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
Standard
Warm-up rotation
duration
power
(second)
At
Normal
Door
Approx. startup* startup** OFF/
open
ON***
20
()*9
()*9
Initial
rotation
Timing
Paper
interval
Jam
recovery
2-76
Interruption
Last
rotation
Arbitrary
Forcible
PASCAL PASCAL
interruption Low duty
Normal
(Full
(Quick
at 2,000 ejection
correction) correction)
sheets
()*9
D-half Control*
(including the
belt background
correction)
18
()*10
()*10
()*10
LED Intensity
Correction / Belt
Background
Correction
3.5
Idle Rotation at
First in the Day
15 to 30
*11
Low Duty
Ejection
Blank Band
Control
Idle Rotation
at First in
the Day (H/H
environment)
Contrast
Potential
Correction at
Startup
Disengagement
of Transfer Unit
Weak Bias
Control at
Leading Edge
15(30)
()*12
Remarks
T-2-44
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-76
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
Potential Control
Perform the following controls according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum
and the environmental change.
1. VD control
The primary current value (Ip) is determined to become the target dark area potential (VD).
2. VL control
The laser power (LP) is determined to become the target bright area potential (VL).
3. Vdc control
Developing bias is determined by adding the "fogging removal potential (Vback)" (based on
the environment) to the bright area potential (VL).
Execution timing
Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or
longer
Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more following the last potential control
execution
Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or more elapsed from the last potential
2-77
<Control description>
1. VD control
1) The primary current (Ip_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last potential
control*1, is applied and the Potential Sensor measures drum surface potential (VD_Pre).
*1: At the time of installation, the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied.
2) The drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the target potential (VD_Target) are compared to
apply the primary current ( x Ip_Target_Pre), which makes the target potential (VD_Target)
to be in range between the drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the drum surface potential
(VD_Pre), and then the drum surface potential (VD_Pre) at that moment is read.
3) The 2 points of measured dark area potentials are connected with a straight line to
calculate dark area potential characteristics.
4) Based on the obtained dark area potential characteristics, the primary current (Ip_Target) is
calculated, which can obtain the target potential (VD_Target).
5) The calculated primary current is applied and this operation is repeated until the drum
surface potential (VDm) is within the range of the target potential +/- 5V. Potential
measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times.
Voltage(V)
Voltage(V)
control execution
Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or
longer
Every initial rotation for the job that start within 10 minutes after density judgment at normal
VD _Pre
VD_Target
4)
VD_Target5V VDm
5)
3)
VD_Pre
1)
2)
Current(A)
Ip_Target_Pre
Ip_Target_Pre
Ip_Target
Current(A)
Ip_Target
F-2-102
NOTE:
At normal startup mode (60 sec. startup), simple potential control is executed to shorten
the startup time (see Auxiliary Control > Simple Potential Control)
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
[When the drum surface potential (VDm) is not as follows: -5V <= target potential <= +5V ]
Potential control error (VD) "E061-0101" occurs.
2-77
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2. VL control
2-78
[When the drum surface potential is not as follows: -10V <= target potential <= +10V ]
1) The laser power (LP_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last bright area
When the drum surface potential is as follows: -10V > target potential > -30V or +10V
potential control*1, is applied and the Potential Sensor measures the drum surface potential
(VL_Pre).
The laser power (LP) when the previous potential control was succeeded (within +/-
*1: At the time of installation, the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied.
10V target potential) is applied. Refer to the alarm code "32-0002" for the processing
2) The drum surface potential (VL_Pre) and the target potential (VL_Target) are compared to
apply the primary current ( x EPC_LP_Target_Pre), which makes the target potential (VL_
Target) to be in range between the drum surface potential (VL_Pre) and the drum surface
+30V
potential (VL_Pre), and then the drum surface potential (VL_Pre) at that moment is read.
3) The 2 points of measured bright area potentials are connected with a straight line to
calculate the bright area potential characteristics.
4) Based on the obtained bright area potential characteristics, the laser power (EPC_LP_
Target) is calculated, which can obtain the target potential (VL_Target).
5) The Drum is exposed with the calculated laser power and this operation is repeated until
NOTE:
With this machine, laser APC control is executed to correct the bright area potential
between sheets and jobs (see Auxiliary Control > Laser APC Control)
the drum surface potential (VLm) is within the range of the target potential +/- 10V. Potential
measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times.
Lp is actually calculated by the laser power (LP) and the bright area potential characteristics
that were obtained in the last VL control because executing VL control each time takes time.
VI(V)
VL_Pre
VL_Target
VL_Pre
When the bright area potential measured value fails to be within the range of the target
3)
potential +/- 10V, follow the workflow as described below to obtain bright area potential
5)
4)
VL_Target10V VLm
2)
1)
EPC_LP_Target
EPC_LP_Target_Pre
EPC_LP_Target
LP_Target_Pre
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-78
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-79
3. Determination of developing bias (Vdc)
Start of VI potential
control
Developing bias is determined by adding the Vback value (based on the environment table)
to VL (bright area potential) determined in the foregoing control.
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
Y
Potential changes depending
on laser emission
N
Converging potential control
with previous function (gradient)
Vd
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
Vcont
Vdc
Vback
Y
Potential control
(linear interpolation)
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
VL
F-2-105
NOTE:
This machine executes D-max control; therefore, density correction value (offset)
calculated in the D-max control is also reflected when the developing bias (Vdc) is
calculated.
N
Converging potential
control (up to 20 times)
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
N
Abend of potential control
F061 Error
Normal end of
potential control
F-2-104
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-79
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
Patch Detection
2-80
<Patch image at D-max control>
Toner density is detected by detection of the patch created on the Drum with the Patch
Sensor.
Parts configuration
The Patch Sensor consists of the light-emitting part (LED) and the light-receiving part.
Light-emitting part (LED): to emit light to the patch image (PATCH_VOP_ANALOG signal)
Approx
20.30 mm
Halftone patch
(for correction of halftone)
Shadow patch
(for correction of
solid density)
Approx 32.17 mm
Approx 32.17 mm
Reflected light detection part: to receive light reflected from patch image (PATCH_LED_
ASW_IN signal)
F-2-107
Patch
image
Patch Sensor
PATCH_LED_ASW_IN
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-108
PATCH_LED_ON
F-2-106
Operation description
1) LED light intensity correction
Reflected light is detected by the Patch Sensor by changing LED light intensity (input
voltage) (6 points) while rotating the Drum to calculate LED light intensity characteristics.
LED light intensity (input voltage) is calculated by the LED light intensity characteristics,
which become the target reflected light intensity.
2) Drum base correction
LED is emitted with the light intensity (input voltage) determined by the LED light intensity
correction to measure reflected light intensity for a rotation of the Drum. Using the Drum HP
Sensor as a reference, the reflected light intensity and the position on the Drum are saved
in the memory on the DC Controller PCB. The patch density is calculated with this drum
base correction value.
3) A patch pattern is created on the DC Controller PCB to form the patch pattern on the Drum.
The patch pattern differs according to the control to be executed (D-max control/D-half
control).
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-80
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
D-max Control
2-81
3) Determination of contrast potential (Vcont)
This control determines developing contrast to keep a constant solid image density.
Execution timing
Last rotation after 6,000 sheets (or more) have been passed through since execution of the
last D-max control.
Patch image density is read by the Patch Sensor to determine the contrast potential (Vcont)
(that becomes the target density) using the obtained density characteristics.
Drum Surface
Potential (V)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Vd potential
500V
Vcont
(contrast potential)
Last rotation after 2000 sheets (or more) have been passed through since first time for the
day after density judgment at normal startup mode (60 seconds startup)
First power-on when Service Mode > COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>DMAX-SW is 2
Vdc
SW is 3
Control description
Laser power
D-max control is always executed together with potential control. Following shows a series of
workflow.
F-2-110
1) Determination of the primary current (See Full Potential Control > VD control.)
Vdc and VL are determined from the Vcont value and the Vback value (to be determined by
Vd potential
500V
Vcont
(contrast potential)
Drum Surface
Potential (V)
500V
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Vd potential
Vback
(fixed value)
Vdc
Vl
Lp
Laser pawer
F-2-111
5) Determination of laser power (Lp) (See Full Potential Control > VL control.)
VL control is executed to calculate Lp that can obtain VL
Related error codes
Related service modes
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DMAX-SW: ON/OFF setting of the D-max control and the
last rotation D-half control
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DMAX-N: forced execution of the D-max control
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-81
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-82
D-half Control
PASCAL Control
This control determines gradation correction value based on the image density detected by
This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation >
Full Adjust
Execution timing
Patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create a gradation table
Last rotation after 6,000 sheets (or more) have been passed through since execution of the
(PASCALLUT).
Then, a D-half patch gradation table is created to be used as the target in D-half control.
The foregoing table corrects image gradation characteristics caused by change of
environment and deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum.
Execution timing
During execution of Full Adjust: User mode > Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance
SW is 3
> Adjust Image Quality > Image Stabilization Control > Full Adjust
Control description
1) Based on the gradation data sent from the Main Controller, patch images (up to 9 patterns)
are formed on the Drum.
2) Patch density is detected to feed the value back to the Main Controller.
Potential control
DC Controller PCB
*1: Gradation data (LUT table) is generated when executing Full Adjust: Auto Adjust
Gradation > Full Adjust
D-max control
DC Controller PCB
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DH-SW : To set ON/OFF of D-half control for plain paper
group.
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
Read patch
Patch Sensor
Reader
DC Controller PCB
3-sheet output
for test print?
YES
End
F-2-112
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-82
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
NOTE:
Since Inbox images are binary, gradation adjustment cannot be performed after being
stored in Inbox. Gradation adjustment is performed on the rasterized data before they
are stored in Inbox.
When the stored image is output after a long time, gradation adjustment is not
performed on the basis of the environment at the time of output, so appropriate printing
results may not be able to be obtained.
If the environment changes with time, it is advisable to store the data into Inbox just
before output.
2-83
Auxiliary Control
Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Correction
Contrast potential (Vcont) is corrected to keep a constant density and prevent light image
caused by reduced toner charging amount in an energy-saving environment.
NOTE:
Temperature in the Developing Assembly is reduced because the Drum Heater is turned
OFF at sleep state in an energy-saving environment. This operation increases moisture
content in the Developing Assembly and reduces toner charging amount.
Execution timing
At the time of the normal startup mode (in the case that the two dimension shading control is
OFF)
NOTE:
This control is not executed when the two dimension shading control is ON because the
Drum Heater is turned ON.
Control description
1) At the time of normal image formation, contrast potential (Vcont) based on the
environment table is added to the developing bias (Vdc (full potential control value))
determined by the full potential control to correct developing bias.
Vdc=Vdc (potential control value) Vcont
2) The corrected contrast potential (Vcont) is reset (making Vcont 0) when the next full
potential correction is executed.
Potential changes depending
on laser emission
Vd
Vdc
(Full Potential
Control)
Vcont
Vdc
Vback
VL
F-2-113
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-83
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-84
This control corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser
output.
VL (V)
Correction type
A. Between-sheet APC control: to keep constant bright area potential (VL) without reducing
productivity during continuous jobs.
B. Initial rotation APC to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature
VL0re
Procedure 3)
VL
characteristics.
Procedure 1), 2)
C. Last rotation APC control: to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature
characteristics.
Lp_before
Execution timing
A. Between-sheet APC control: at every paper interval of a job.
B. Initial rotation APC control: to be executed during initial rotation of the first job after the
machine has been left unattached for 60 minutes or more since execution of the last job.
C. Last rotation APC control: to be executed during last rotation of the first job after the
machine has been left unattached for 30 minutes or more since execution of the last job.
Control description
A. Between-sheet APC control
Lp_after
F-2-114
1) Bright area potential is measured at every sheet interval by the Potential Sensor.
2) Average sheet interval VL_ave of the measured paper interval VL potential (for 20 sheet
intervals) is calculated.
3) Laser power correction value is determined by the difference between the measured
potential VL (measured at the time of potential control) and the average paper interval VL_
ave in addition to the last bright area potential characteristics (gradient ()).
Correction formula
LP_after=LP_before- (VL-Vl_ave)
LP_after: laser power after correction
LP_before: laser power before correction
VL: measured VL determined at the time of potential control
VL_ave: average paper interval VL_ave
: gradient (control coefficient): gradient reciprocal of LP_VI straight line in the range including
VL target
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-84
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-85
DC Controller PCB
CPU
Execution timing
At the time of laser exposure (only when the two dimension shading control is ON. Default:
Calculation
OFF)
Control description
EEPROM
Drum potential
uneven data
1) Potential data on the Drum surface is saved in EEPROM on the DC Controller PCB
Backup
RAM
Image
ASIC
in the format supporting two-dimension coordinate (measured when the Drum was
manufactured).
Adjusted
value
2) When the power is turned ON, EEPROM data is compared to RAM data. If there is any
difference in the data, the EEPROM data is stored in the backup RAM.
NOTE:
Whether the control is enabled can be checked with COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>2DSTS.
If 0 is displayed, check DRM-LOT number. When 0 is displayed, it means that the drum
has not been registered; thus, execute FUNCTION/2D-SHADE/2D-READ to register
the drum.
3) Potential data on the Drum surface is sent to the image ASIC and the image data is
synchronized with the Drum home position, and then the uneven potential data is converted
into light intensity to be sent to the Laser Driver PCB.
4) The Laser Driver PCB is exposed to remove uneven potential on the Drum.
NOTE:
For Drum provided as a service part, EEPROM which stores potential unevenness data
is included. Therefore, the EEPROM needs to be replaced when the Drum is replaced.
As the life of the Drum advances, uneven density can occur when the halftone image
is output despite correction of the drum uneven potential. In such a case, uneven
density can be corrected by specifying a particular position in service mode. See
Troubleshooting for procedure.
FCOT (First Copy Time) is reduced to detect home position of the Drum by turning ON
the two dimension shading.
Drum
F-2-115
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-85
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-86
Oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and
This control maintains the cleaning performance by providing sufficient amount of toner to the
NOTE:
Large-grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small-grained toner and
can be positively charged (opposite charging) in rare cases. Such oppositely-charged
toner fails to be developed but remains on the Developing Sleeve, which causes image
failure.
NOTE:
Friction coefficient between the Blade and the Drum is increased unless sufficient
amount of toner is applied on the Drum Cleaning Blade, which causes ride-up of the
Blade. Although toner is properly applied to the center of the Blade by normal cleaning
operation, toner is supplied insufficiently to the edge of the Blade.
Execution timing
Execution timing
Last rotation after the specified number of sheets*1 has been fed since execution of the last
Control description
Interval (sheets)
2,000
T-2-45
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-86
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-87
Low Duty Discharge Control
Control description
1) Black band described below is created on the Drum.
2) Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the
Cleaning Blade at that moment.
3) This control turns off the transfer high voltage and makes the Transfer Belt disengaged so
that image is not applied on the Transfer Belt.
In the case of continuous output of low duty image, this control consumes toner at non-image
area to maintain the density stability.
Execution timing
While the video count for every page is accumulated, in the case that the average image duty
is less than the threshold*1, the ongoing job is interrupted at the time of last rotation of a job or
the ongoing job is interrupting in the middle of the job to discharge the toner according to the
72 mm
152 mm
Center
service mode
Drum
Black Band
Moisture content
0.86
152 mm
2098mm
72 mm
F-2-116
Temperature/Humidity
23deg C/5%
Threshold
1%
1.73
23deg C/10%
1%
5.8
23deg C/30%
1%
8.9
23deg C/50%
1%
15
23deg C/70%
2%
18
28deg C/80%
3.5%
21.6
30deg C/80%
5%
T-2-46
Control description
2) The obtained video count is converted into A4 size and the value is accumulated.
3) Once the accumulated value reaches the threshold, the following patch is created on the
Drum to discharge deteriorated toner.
Related service modes
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-DEV>LWDTY-SW ON/OFF of low duty ejection Default ON
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-DEV>LWDTYADJ Set low duty ejection threshold value
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-87
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
Servicing
Parts/Area Name
Expected
life*
COUNTER
(PRDC-1)
FB4-3687
50**
PRM-WIRE
FL2-0462
50**
PRM-CLN
FL2-2720
50**
PRM-CLN
FY1-0883
AR
50
PRM-GRID
FB4-3687
50**
PO-WIRE
FL2-0462
50**
PO-CLN
FL2-2720
50**
PO-CLN
Remarks
With spring
FL3-4558
With spring
FL3-4559
T-2-47
Primary Charging
Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly
Pre-exposure Scraper
Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Front Side Seal/
Drum Rear Side Seal
Expected
life*
COUNTER
(DRBL-1)
FM3-7288
150
PRM-UNIT
FM4-3149
150
PO-UNIT
FC9-9153
50
EXP-SCRP
FC8-7085
FC8-7086
1
1each
100
CLN-BLD
50
BS-SL-F
BS-SL-R
FB4-8018
50
SP-CLAW
Developing Assembly
ETB
Transfer Roller
Brush Roller
ETB Cleaning Blade
FM4-0959
FC8-7160
FC8-7159
FC9-9022
FC6-1647
1
1
1
1
1
150**
50
50
50
50
DVG-CYL
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
T-CN-BRU
T-CLN-BD
Remarks
Use by reversing at
every 500000 sheets
In a high temperature/
humidity environment
(30 deg C/80%), it is
250000 sheets
Remarks
50
Pre-transfer Charging
AssemblyDust Collection Roller
50
50
Pre-transfer Charging
AssemblyToner collection area
50
50
Expected
life*
Consumable Parts
Parts Name
2-88
Drum Surface
30
Drum Edge
25
50
Patch Sensor
50
50
Developing Roller
50
50
50
50
T-2-49
T-2-48
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-88
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-89
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.
When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density
becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following.
When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and
up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the
density of output image becomes light.
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-89
2
3)
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the
2-90
When the rear side test print image is dark
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output
NOTE:
When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density
becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following.
When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and
up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the
density of output image becomes light.
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.
[C]
[A]
F-2-117
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-90
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-91
4) Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print
and check the image.
CAUTION:
Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment
screws with the same amount.
[2]
[D]
[B]
F-2-118
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-91
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-92
Drum
<Procedure of adjustment>
<Procedure of adjustment>
1 Screw
1 Connector
F-2-119
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-92
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
3) Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum.
2-93
Drum Side Seals(Front and Rear)
<Procedure of parts replacement>
CAUTION:
If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in
the ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Applying Tospearl
Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.
uniformly with lint-free paper. In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the
Photosensitive Drum
Tospearl
F-2-120
Sheet
lint-free paper
F-2-121
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-93
2-94
Troubleshooting
ETB
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the ETB Unit," on p. 4-135.
see "Removing the ETB," on p. 4-137.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Clear the ETB control counter. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>TR-BLT)
Parts counter (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>TR-BLT) is also cleared coincidentally.
Patch Sensor
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the Patch Sensor," on p. 4-151.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Adjust the intensity of the Patch Sensor. (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-LED)
Major Adjustments
None
2-94
2-95
Uneven density correction by 2D shading
[Image Sample]
To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum.
Feed direction
55mm
NOTE:
This machine performs two dimensional shading which replaces uneven potential of
the Photosensitive Drum to the exposure amount to correct. (Default: two dimensional
shading is disabled.) As the data of Drums uneven potential, the data measured at the
shipment of the Drum is used.
CAUTION:
This adjustment is executed when the preferred image is not output even if the Primary
Charging Wire height adjustment and secure watermark adjustment * are performed.
* Secure watermark adjustment: Function Settings>Common>Print Settings>Secure
Watermark Settings>Adjust Background/Character Contrast
63mm
F-2-122
2-95
3) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs.
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6
Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3
(LDR) or larger.
When uneven density is seen: Go to step 4.
2-96
CAUTION:
It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes
uneven density of the output image, so output 3 sheets of the test print and adjust the
area where all 3 sheets have the same symptom.
(If the same symptom is seen on the same spot of all 3 sheets, it is possibly caused
from the Drum.)
<Test pattern>
F-2-123
13X19
F-2-125
F-2-124
2-96
NOTE:
For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1 to
output. The following shows the use case of each test print.
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P1
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with light density
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P2
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark density
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P3
: In case of the secure watermark image with uneven density
5) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of
uneven density.
5-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to
return to the initial values.
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2)
2-97
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen is switched,
the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not reflected on the
screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the horizontal scanning direction (H line) is adjusted, the adjustment value of
the vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) is also changed.
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the
density becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern
and make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed
dramatically, the image error (while line) may occur.
Be sure to make adjustment in order of horizontal and vertical scanning directions. If
the adjustment is executed in the inverse order, it may not be executed correctly.
Entering 96 or larger value can generate an error in potential control (E061).
In the case of an error, adjust the setting value between 0 and 95
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE2 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE3 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE4 (Level 2)
5-2) Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction (A to O) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "M-LINE1/M-LINE2", select the target horizontal scanning window (A to
O), and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning direction A
to H
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning direction I
to O
2-97
2-98
5-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image.
5-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27),
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density
becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern and
Not Use
make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed dramatically,
the image error (while line) may occur.
F-2-126
2-98
2-99
Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw
5-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the
procedure.
[Location]
Drum Separation Claw
CAUTION:
If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure, reenter
the values written in step 5-1.
[Cause]
When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure, the Separation Claw may be
deformed. When the Separation Claw is deformed, the paper is easily caught by the leading
edge of the Separation Claw when the paper (especially curled paper) is fed, and a jam (Jam
Code: 0205) is likely to occur.
F-2-128
[Condition]
Job after a jam which occurs when the paper enters to the drum
When using curled paper (when using backside of printed paper, etc.)
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Separation Claw.
Not Use
NOTE:
Replace the Separation Claw when a separation failure jam occurs even once..
F-2-127
2-99
2-100
Uneven density
[Cause]
OR
Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change
Feed Direction
F-2-130
[Field Remedy]
In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal
direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result. When
making adjustment, execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart.
YES
OR
NO
Adjust developing bias
COPIER > ADJUST > VCONT > DE-OFST
Feed Direction
Adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire
(Set the dark area apart)
F-2-131
If it is not a straight uneven density, change the value of the following service mode in
decrement of -10 and check the output result.
COPIER > ADJUST > VCONT > DE-OFST
Is it fixed?
YES
NO
CAUTION :
Enable 2D shading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE; ON
Is it fixed?
Executing the above setting can generate smeared image or foggy image.
After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON
YES
NO
Output the test pattern for 2D shading and adjust the uneven density area individually.
(For detailed procedure, see Troubleshooting > Uneven density correction by 2D shading >
F-2-129
2-100
2-101
[Field Remedy]
1) Remove the Developing Assembly.
NOTE:
Be sure to place paper on a clean place and take out the foot of the Developing
Assembly before placing the Developing Assembly.
Feed Direction
F-2-132
[Location]
F-2-133
Developing Assembly
[Cause]
A line appears in toner coating when imperceptible foreign matter is caught between the 2
sleeves of the Developing Assembly. This can cause image failure of a white line in vertical
scanning direction.
2-101
2-102
3) Clean excess toner on the upper and lower sleeves.
Insert a corner of the paper between the sleeves and scrape out and remove foreign matter
Toner can be excessively attached because the toner is pushed to the sleeve when
scraping out the foreign matter. Perform cleaning in the following steps because excess
toner can cause uneven density.
3-1) While rotating the sleeve, blow the toner with the blower and then check for excess
toner.
F-2-134
NOTE:
The location of foreign matter can be easily identified by using a blower to blow excess
toner between the sleeves.
Be sure to use plain paper with around 75 g/m2. (Too thick paper may not be fit into the
gap. Too thin paper can be folded or ripped.)
If it is difficult to insert paper, turn the gear clockwise and counterclockwise for 2
teeth so that it gets easier to insert paper between the sleeves. Do not turn the gear
counterclockwise for half round or more (otherwise, it can cause image failure due to
collected toner between the sleeve and the blade or between the sleeves)
F-2-135
3-2) Pile up 3 sheets of lint-free paper and clean excess toner with the lint-free paper.
NOTE:
Do not apply force and lightly wipe out the excess toner. Rubbing the toner part can
cause the rubbed part to be dark image.
2-102
3-3) Check if the toner blown by the blower is attached to the Developing Roller; if the
toner is attached, wipe it with lint-free paper.
(Otherwise, the toner is fused to the Roller that causes banding)
2-103
Smeared image
[Cause]
Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which
can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared
image:
When the paper type is changed
Toner deterioration
Rapid change in environment (High temperature <- -> Low temperature)
[Field Remedy]
Start the field remedy
Is it fixed?
YES
NO
Reduce the density
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > DMAX-N-T; reduce the value of DMAX-N-T
Select the following to execute DMAX-N:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DMAX-N
YES
NO
Execute skipping processing (within the acceptable range for density/line width)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; set 1
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; set 1 to 3
Check the image
Complete
F-2-137
2-103
2-104
[Image]
Feed Direction
< Smeared Image >
Side Line
F-2-138
Select the following to execute Full Adjust: Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance
> Adjust Image > Auto Adjust Gradation < Full Adjust; and check the output result.
1) COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > DMAX-N-T; reduce the value of DMAX-N-T from 895 (default)
by -30.
2) Select the following to execute DMAX-N: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DMAX-N; and
then check the output result.
If the symptom is not improved, further reduce the value in step 1) by -30 and then execute
step 2).
CAUTION :
Changing the above setting can cause reduced density or thinner line
If the smeared image is not improved within the acceptable range for density and line width,
execute skipping process in the following procedure:
1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; change the value to 1
2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; change to 1 and check the output result.
3) If the symptom is not improved, change the value in step 2) to 2, 3and check the output
result.
CAUTION :
Changing the above setting can cause minor skipping in the text part.
2-104
2-105
Fixing
Flux
High-frequency
current
Overview
Magnetic material
(Ferrite Core)
Characteristics
Coil
Metal
This machine uses the IH heating method to heat the whole circumference of the Fixing
Roller. This method enables to shorten the warm-up time and high-speed printing.
Exothermic
heat
Eddy current
Fixing Roller
Exciting Coil
F-2-140
Core
2) Using magnetic shunt alloy to prevent temperature rise at the edge of the Fixing Roller
This machine uses degaussing alloy as a material of the Fixing Roller to prevent
temperature rise at the edge of the Fixing Roller (There is no control to cool the edge).
Magnetic shunt alloy becomes less likely to generate electric current by electromagnetic
induction because of its characteristic of losing magnetic property once it reaches a certain
temperature (Curie temperature). This principle restricts excessive temperature rise of the
Paper
Fixing Roller.
Pressure roller
F-2-139
Fixing Roller
Temperature (deg C)
Reference value
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
60
120
180
240
300
360
Time (sec)
F-2-141
2-105
2-106
Specifications
Item
Function/method
Fixing method
Fixing Heater
Fixing Roller
Pressure Roller
Control temperature
Fixing drive control
Thermistor Fixing inlet
side
2-106
2-107
Parts configuration
Cross-section view
Fixing Cleaning
Web takeup roller
Fixing Roller
Thermal Switch2
(TP2)
Fixing Cleaning
Web feed roller
Fixing Roller
Static eliminator
Heater Unit
Fixing Cleaning
Web roller
Upper
separation claw
coil, core
Thermal Switch1
(TP1)
Fixing Roller
F-2-143
Code
Pressure roller
Static eliminator
Pressure roller
F-2-142
Parts name
Fixing Roller
Function/method
Heating toner and paper
To prevent abnormal temperature rise at the edge by using the
degaussing alloy material
Pressing and feeding paper
Whole Circumference IH Heater
To heat the whole circumference of the Fixing Roller
To remove residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller
Pressure Roller
Heater Unit
Coil Core
Fixing Cleaning Web
Fixing Cleaning Web Roller
Fixing Cleaning Web Take-up
Roller
Fixing Cleaning Web Feed Roller
Upper Separation Claw
To separate paper from the Fixing Roller (to prevent paperwrapping)
Reciprocating width: 3mm
Fixing Inlet Guide
Paper Feed Guide to the Fixing Assembly
Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
To prevent leak, static offset and noise
Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
Parts name
THM1
THM2
THM4
TP1
Thermal Switch1
TP2
Thermal Switch2
Function/method
Contact type
temperature control, failure detection
Contact type
To detect failure with the coil at the fixing inlet side
Contact type
To detect failure with the coil at the fixing outlet side
Non-Contact type (200 -/+ 5 deg C)
To prevent abnormal temperature rise(the fixing inlet side)
Non-Contact type (200 -/+ 5 deg C)
To prevent abnormal temperature rise(the fixing outlet side)
T-2-52
T-2-51
2-107
2-108
Drive configuration
Fixing Cleaning Web
Level Sensor(PS45)
SL9
Fixing Cleaning
Web Drive Solenoid
(SL9)
M3
Fixing Motor
(M3)
Fixing Toenail
Fixing Outlet
Jam Sensor(PS4) Sensor(PS52)
Fixing Inlet
Sensor(PS51)
F-2-144
Fixing Outlet
Fixing Inlet
Sensor(PS51)
Fixing Motor
(M3)
Code
Parts name
Function/method
M3
Fixing Motor
SL9
PS4
PS45
PS51
PS52
2-108
2-109
Controls
Overview
To prevent fixing failure, temperature control of the Fixing Roller is executed with the following
Cleaning Web
length detection
Cleaning Web
drive control
timing.
NO
Temperature control
Thermistor
reciprocating control
Fixing temperature
control
3
4
Overview
To control temperature to reach the standby temperature.
To be switched from the following 4 modes according to the
environment temperature/ humidity and the temperature of
the Fixing Roller:
Normal startup mode
Low temperature environment startup mode
High humidity environment startup mode
Recovery mode
To control temperature so that printing can be performed
immediately after receiving the print request signal
To control temperature by the temperature table according
to the paper type and the paper basis weight.
Following shows other temperature adjustments
To control temperature for reducing power consumption.
T-2-55
Control to prevent
paper-wrapping
Down sequence
control
Protective function
F-2-146
NO
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Control/Function
Overview
2-109
2-110
completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state.
Conditions
80
70
Environment humidity(%)
Environment
temperature
Less than 20
deg C
60
Environment humidity
-
Fixing Roller
temperature
Target
temperature
Target
temperature
reaching time
90 sec
(reference value)
T-2-57
50
40
After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until
completion of developing idle rotation as well as completion of the potential control, and
30
20
Conditions
10
Environment
temperature
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Environment humidity
Fixing Roller
temperature
Target
temperature
F-2-147
Target
temperature
reaching time
90 sec
(reference value)
T-2-58
<Recovery mode>
The machine enters ready state once it reaches the target temperature.
In the case of reaching the target temperature within 60 seconds due to quick temperature
rise of the Fixing Roller, the target temperature is maintained to be shifted to the ready
Conditions
Environment humidity
Fixing Roller
temperature
Target
temperature
Low humidity
70 deg C or less 190 deg C
environment(within 13g of
absolute moisture content)
Target
temperature
reaching time
60 sec
Environment
temperature
-
Environment humidity
-
Fixing Roller
temperature
70 deg C or
more
Target
temperature
195 deg C
Target
temperature
reaching time
60 sec or less
T-2-59
T-2-56
NOTE:
In the case of selecting the fixing improvement mode in the following service mode, the
machine does not enter the startup state for 60 seconds and waits until the specified
time.
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FSPD-S1 :Selection of fixing improvement mode
2-110
2-111
The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country. The details on the
control temperature are shown below.
To provide measures against temperature rise of the coil/Main Body and save energy
consumption, the target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it
reaches a certain temperature.
Fixing Roller
temperature(deg C)
All
Time (minute)
1 to 5
5 to 10
0 to 1
195
195
190
10 and longer
190
T-2-60
190
All
185
Time (minute)
5 to 10
10 to 20
0 to 5
195
195
195
20 and longer
185
T-2-61
180
NOTE:
When restoring from the recovery mode, temperature control is conducted from the
2nd line of temperature control table.
10
Time(min)
F-2-148
2-111
2-112
The target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a
Destination
certain temperature.
This control reduces energy consumption to prevent temperature rise of the Fixing Roller.
Fixing Roller
temperature(deg C)
195
190
Paper Type
0 to 1
195
195
215
175
195
195
200
175
1 to 5
195
195
215
175
195
195
200
175
5 to 10
195
195
215
175
195
195
200
175
10 and
longer
190
195
215
175
190
195
200
175
T-2-63
185
10
Time(min)
F-2-149
Paper Type
0 to 5
200
200
215
185
200
200
200
185
5 to 10
200
200
215
185
200
200
200
185
10 to 20
198
200
215
185
198
200
200
185
20 and
longer
198
200
215
185
198
200
200
185
T-2-64
Detail
C
D
T-2-62
2-112
2-113
By pressing the energy saver key on the Control Panel, energy consumption is reduced by
reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the
NOTE:
To be recovered to the normal mode according to the recovery mode.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The energy saving rate can be changed from "Settings/Registration > Preferences >
Timer/Energy Settings > Change Energy Saver Mode".
(Default: -10%)
When any of the above Error Codes, E000 to E0004, is displayed, the error code
display will not be cleared even though the Main Power Switch is turned OFF. In
such a case, cancel the error by the following service mode and turn OFF and then
ON the power.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR:Clear of error code
NOTE:
The time to change to the low power mode can be changed from "Settings/Registration
> Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Sleep Time".
(Default: 1 min.)
2-113
2-114
Control description
This control has the 3 types of down sequences according to the execution timing.
Overview
In the case of great difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature
at the start of printing or during printing, productivity is dropped to prevent fixing failure or
image failure.
Execution timing
During printing
At the start of printing and when the paper type is switched
In case of plain paper, the fixing temperature of 100% productivity maintains, so the down
sequence does not start.
NOTE:
In case of the default print temperature, 100% productivity is maintained.
When the print temperature is reduced by the service mode, the down sequence may
be started according to the use environment.
<Heavy paper>
Right after the startup (including restoration from the sleep mode), a whole Fixing Assembly
is not warm enough, so the down sequence may be started. However, as printing continues
sequentially, the temperature of the Fixing Assembly is increased and reaches to the
temperature of the 100% productivity
Productivity(%)
Reference value
100%
Heavy paper
85%
Plain paper
70%
Stop
50
150
Sheets
F-2-150
2-114
2-115
downtime
(reference
value)
5 sec
10 sec
-
60 sec
-
60 sec
80 sec
30 sec
10 sec
Remarks
T-2-65
2-115
2-116
Control description
In the case of delay jam at the fixing outlet, the DC Controller determines paper wrapping if
Overview
With this control, failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing
Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented.
the paper remains in the Fixing Assembly and executes the following.
The brake is applied to the Fixing Motor to immediately stop operation of the Fixing Motor (to
minimize the paper wrapping level)
Power distribution to the coil is stopped (to ensure safety).
Paper
Fixing Roller
F-2-151
2-116
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Upper separation claw reciprocating control
2-117
Upper separation claw reciprocating control
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01), the Fixing Main
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, the Upper Separation
Thermistor is moved back and forth by 12mm in the shaft direction of the Fixing Roller.
Claw is moved back and forth by 3mm in the direction of the Fixing Roller.
The drive of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL09) is transmitted to the
Reciprocating Cam.
3m
M3
Fixing Motor
mm
12
Fixing Roller
F-2-152
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Upper separation claw reciprocating control
2-117
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control
2-118
To prevent fixing offset, the residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller is removed with
the Cleaning Web.
Cleaning Web
Fixing Cleaning
Web roller
Fixing Cleaning
Web feed roller
SL9
Fixing Cleaning
Web Drive Solenoid
Fixing Cleaning
Web takeup roller
F-2-154
The take-up length of the Cleaning Web is determined by the paper size and the number of
sheets (in 1 job).
Paper size
1st sheet
Small
1-time
The size with less than 220mm length in
feeding direction (LTR or less)
Middle
1-time
The size between 237mm and 364mm in
feeding direction (B5R to LGL/B4)
Large
2-time
The size with 220mm or more length in
feeding direction (B5R or more)
2nd sheet
3rd sheet
1-time
0-time
1-time
1-time
1-time
1-time
4th sheet or
later
Repeat
wrapping
amount of the
1st to the 3rd
sheet
T-2-66
When the paper is stationed in the Fixing Unit due to a jam or an error, the Fixing Web Drive
Solenoid is turned ON for 5 times at the time of recovery.
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control
2-118
2-119
Protective function
When the length of the Cleaning Web is reduced, the Web Level Detection Arm is moved in
the direction of the arrow to block the light path of the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Detection
Sensor (PS45). When the Fixing Web Drive Solenoid has been turned ON for 4 times after
the detection by this sensor, a fixing web length warning message is displayed on the Control
Panel.
In response to a deviation in temperature (200 +/-5 deg C), bimetal contact of the thermal
switch (TP1; non-contact type/TP2; non-contact type) will open to cut the power supply line
(12 V) used to drive the AC relay on the fixing heater power supply PCB, thereby stopping the
AC power to the fixing heater.
Once the contact point of the Thermal Switch is open, it will not be recovered even
though the high temperature becomes to be normal temperature. Be sure to eliminate
the cause of the error, and then replace the Thermal Switch.
F-2-155
After the display of the fixing web length warning message, the number of turning ON the
Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid is to be counted.
The Error Code E005-0000 is displayed once the counter value reaches 2000 (3000 sheets
of copy/print in A4 size)
In the case of replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to clear the Fixing Web
Counter by the following Service Mode
Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter after the level warning
COPIER >COUNTER >MISC >FIX-WEB
Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter
COPIER >COUNTER >DRBL-1>FX-WEB
2-119
2-120
Servicing
Parts name
Parts Number
FK2-7692-000
Sub Thermistor
FK2-7693-000
Remarks
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
T-2-67
Consumable Parts
No
Parts name
Parts Number
FC5-2286-000
Fixing Roller
FL3-3602-000
4
5
6
500,000
sheets
600,000
sheets
600,000
sheets
600,000
sheets
600,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
Remarks
Parts/Area Name
Piece
1
1
4
4
1
6
Operation
Interval
500,000
sheets
Remarks
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Dry wipe
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Dry wipe
1
4
Be sure to replace it
together with the Fixing
Roller.
500,000
sheets
T-2-68
2-120
2-121
When applying grease, pay attention not to get it accumulated in the cut [a].
Fixing Roller
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-185.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Grease Application
F-2-158
When installing the Insulating Bushing [2] to the Fixing Roller [1], wipe off excess grease
adhered to the end face of the Fixing Roller (including the groove on the edge) [b].
Otherwise, grease may adhere to the Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer or be scattered from the
Fixing Roller.
Grease Application
F-2-156
As a rough standard, see the following for the amount of grease to be applied (approx. 230
mg).
F-2-159
2-121
2-122
Main Thermistor
Clear the counter
COPIER >COUNTER > PRDC-1 >FIX-TH1
Sub Thermistor1,2
Clear the counter
COPIER >COUNTER > PRDC-1 >FIX-TH2
2-122
Troubleshooting
Paper wrinkle
<Location>
Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller
<Cause>
Right after the startup, temperature is different between the center and the edge of the
Fixing Roller (temperature: center > edge).
Because a slippery solid black image does not match to the nip shape when it is fed, the
center of paper is pulled toward the feeding direction, causing paper wrinkle.
<Condition>
Timing: Approx. 20 sheets immediately after the startup first time for the day
Paper size: Paper size larger than B4
2-123
<Field Remedy>
Normally, when printing to paper larger than A3 or LDR size paper at the start of printing in
a high humidity environment, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation.
Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time becomes
longer. In other cases, idle rotation is not performed.
If paper wrinkle occurs on paper larger than B4, increase the setting value from 2 in
increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
If paper wrinkle occurs on B4 size paper, increase the setting value from 4 in increments of
1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-WNKL
[Setting values]
0: OFF
1: When paper is larger than A3/LDR size paper in a high humidity environment,
idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds. (Default)
2: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds, whereas it
is performed for up to 20 seconds when paper size is 304.8457.2 mm
(12"18")/330.2482.6 mm (13"19").
3: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds, whereas it
is performed for up to 40 seconds when paper size is 304.8457.2 mm
(12"18")/330.2482.6 mm (13"19").
4: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 20 seconds.
5: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 40 seconds.
6: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 60 seconds.
2-123
2-124
Center
Edge
c
Paper feed direction
F-2-160
2-124
2-125
Image failure due to the temperature rising at the edge of the Fixing
Roller (crepe mark)
<Location of Trouble>
Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller
<Cause>
This is the symptom which image error like crepe mark occurs when temperature at the
edge of the Fixing Roller rises.
When the temperature rising at the edge occurs, the edge of the Pressure Roller made with
rubber expands, giving the following influences on papers.
Feed speed at the edge is increased, compared with the speed at the center.
Tension is applied in the direction of both edges.
As it get close to the trailing edge, fixing is performed while a paper is distorted, causing an
image error.
<Conditions>
Although all images have a possibility to have the error because the cause is temperature
rising at the edge, the symptom is mainly significant with halftone images. The following
shows estimated error occurrence with halftone image.
When printing 200 sheets or more of small size paper continuously (approx. 1000
sheets in A4 size)
When printing a large size sheet right after printing 100 sheets or more of small size
paper continuously
<Field Remedy>
1) Go through the following: Settings/Registration > XXX > XXX; and turn ON the item.
By doing so, image error (crepe mark) will not occur.
With this setting, temperature difference between the center and the edge of the Fixing
Roller is detected, and start idle rotation when temperature rising at the edge tends to
occur.
During idle rotation, paper feed is stopped to keep constant temperature on the Fixing
Roller, so the productivity is reduced.
2) Switching the image priority mode level.
When the image priority mode is specified, productivity may be extremely reduced
depending on use conditions (paper size, paper type, and print image).
In such a case, change the level of production reduction by the following service mode.
F-2-161
2-125
2-126
:Scanner Sensor
PS67
Overview
:Forced Paper
Feed Control
:One Unit
PS65
PS28
PS24
PS19
PS29 PS64
:Paper path
Overview
Improved productivity (75ppm -> 105ppm)
PS67
PS66
PS21
This feature is enabled by making the Fixing/Feed Assembly and the Duplex Assembly as
one unit as well as making the Delivery Unit and the Door of the Fixing Assembly as one
unit.
This feature is enabled by using forcible paper feed control that feeds paper to the position
PS22
where the jammed paper is easily removed in the case of paper jam.
Increased pickup capacity of the Multi-purpose Tray (50 sheets -> 100 sheets)
Simple retard method is used for pickup.
Stacking capacity has increased from 50 sheets to 100 sheets thanks to the pickup tray
that moves up and down.
F-2-162
Reduced noise
This feature is enabled by using a belt-type motor.
2-126
2-127
Specifications
Item
Function/Method
Paper Storage
Method
Pickup Method
Paper Feed
Standard
Center
Paper Loading
Capacity
Left/Right Deck
Cassette 3/4
Multi-purpose
Tray
Left/Right Deck
A4,B5,LTR
Cassette 3/4
A3 B4,A4,A4R,B5,B5R,A5R,8K(270.0 x
390.0mm),16K(270.0 x 195.0mm),LDR(279.4 x
431.8mm),LGL(215.9 x 355.6mm),LTR(279.4 x
215.9mm),LTRR(215.9 x 279.4mm),STMTR(139.7 x
215.9mm),EXE(267.0 x 184.0mm),12 x 18(304.8 x
457.2mm),12 x 18(304.8 x 457.2mm),SRA3(320 x
450mm),13 x 19(330.2 x 482.6mm)
Multi-purpose
Tray
Left/Right Deck
52g/m2-220g/m2
Cassette 3/4
52g/m2-220g/m2
Multi-purpose
Tray
Left/Right Deck
Service Switching
Cassette 3/4
Multi-purpose
Tray
Depends on user
Paper Size
Paper Grammage
Paper Size
Switching
Paper Size
Switching
Through path
Transparency
detection
Available
T-2-70
2-127
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-128
Parts configuration
PS No.
Switch/Sensor 1
PS52
PS51
PS36
PS35
PS28
PS4
PS65
PS23
PS31
PS6
PS24
PS66
PS19
PS12
PS11
PS32
PS49
PS8
PS50
PS48
PS25
PS17
PS21
PS26
PS68
PS18
SW7
PS33
SW9
PS22
PS27
SW8
PS71
SW10
PS69
PS70 PS72
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13/14
PS17/18
PS19*
PS20*
PS21*
PS22*
PS23
PS24*/PS25
PS26/PS27
PS28*
PS29*
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS35
PS36
PS47/48
PS49/50
PS51/PS52
PS64*
PS65*
PS66*
PS67*
PS68
PS69
PS70
PS71
PS72
PS73
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
Sensor No.
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor
Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor
Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Paper Sensor
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Paper Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor / Cassette 4 Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor / Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Vertical Path Sensor3
Vertical Path Sensor4
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor1/Vertical Path Sensor2
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor/Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor
Writing Gudging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Side Registration Sensor
Right Pickup Sensor
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2
Fixing Inlet Sensor/Fixing Outlet Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2
Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch
Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch
Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch
Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch
T-2-71
*Scanner Sensor
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-128
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-129
Roller
Fixing Roller
Registration Roller
F-2-164
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-129
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-130
Drive Configuration
SL5
No.
M3 M19 M43 M32
M34
M13
M14
M33
SL12
M18
M26
SL7
M24
M31
SL11
M11
SL6
M5
M4
SL3
M27
M20
Name
M3
Fixing Motor
M4
M5
M11
M12
M13
Delivery Motor
M14
Reverse Motor
M18
M19
M20
M21
M24
M26
M27
M31
M32
M33
M34
Registration Motor
M43
ETB Motor
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL4
SL7
M21
SL11
SL12
M12
T-2-72
F-2-165
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-130
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
2-131
Paper path
Feeding path
Delivery Flapper
[1]
Multi Tray
[4]
[2]
Reverse
Flapper
[3]
Duplex
Flapper
[3],[4]
Left Deck Pigkup
Option Pickup
Cassette 3 Pickup
Cassette 4 Pickup
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
F-2-166
2-131
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-132
Interval speed
Model
[ppm]
:Pickup Speed
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
8105/8095/8085 [mm/s]
105
95
Pickup speed
500
:Pre-registration speed
750
:Post-registration speed
Pre-registration speed
500
Post-registration speed
750
Process speed
500
Delivery speed
1100
Delivery/Reverse speed
1100
:Process speed
:Delivery speed
:Delivery/reverse speed
85
T-2-73
F-2-167
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-132
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-133
Unit
Secondary Transfer Unit
Contorol
Basic Movement
Registration Unit
Deck/Cassette detection
Paper Size Detection
Deck/cassette pickup unit
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Basic Movement
Paper Detection
Pre-registration Control
Pre-registration/Registration Unit
Basic Movement
Registration Deceleration Control
Registration Acceleration Control
Face-up Delivery
Face-down Delivery
Duplex Unit
Delivery unit/Duplex unit
Basic Movement
Side Registration Control
Circulation quantity and limit
Deck/Cassette
Pickup Unit
Jam detection
F-2-168
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-133
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-134
Cassette
Basic Movement
Cassette Pickup
Roller
When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface
attaches to Pickup Roller (This is the height of Pickup Roller when Pickup Solenoid is OFF).
M12
Cassette Feed
Roller
PS21
/PS22
If the Pickup Motor (M11/M12/M24) is turned ON, the Pickup Roller will rotate and the paper
will be fed.
When the Pickup Sensor (PS19/PS20/PS21/PS22) detects paper, the Pickup Solenoid (SL3/
SL4/SL6/SL7) will turn ON, and Pickup Roller will draw away from paper surface. Only 1
sheet of paper is sent to feed path by the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller, and fed to
Vertical Path Roller.
M11
/M24
Cassette Separation
Roller
F-2-170
NOTE:
The same single motor is used as a pickup motor for both Cassette 3 and Cassette 4.
The drive is transmitted to Cassette 3 when the motor is in normal rotation and the drive
is transmitted to Cassette 4 when the motor is in reverse rotation. The drive is switched
by the One-way Clutch.
SL6
/SL7
Deck Lifter
Cassette Liter
SL3
/SL4
Deck
M4
/M5
M20
/M21
Deck Separation
Roller
Deck Pickup Roller
NOTE:Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
DK1-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Right Deck)
DK2-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Left Deck)
DK3-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette3)
DK4-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette4)
Setting Value 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON
F-2-169
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-134
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
Deck/Cassette detection
2-135
Cassette
Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size
Deck
Deck is detected by Paper Level Sensor. When light from 2 Paper Level Sensors is not
blocked, it is detected as no deck installed
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47)
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49)
Paper Level
detection lever 1
Deck
detection lever
Projection
Paper Size Detection
Circular Plate
Trailing Edge Slide Guide
F-2-172
Deck
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS48)
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS45)
F-2-171
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
2-135
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-136
Cassette
Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches.
Deck
Set in Service Mode.
There is no mechanism to detect paper size.
NOTE:Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 (Right Deck Paper
setting)
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 (Left Deck Paper setting)
Setting Value
0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR
ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate/
Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge/Side Slide Guide. Paper size is detected by two 4-actuator ON/OFF
combinations. And, if all 4-actuator are OFF is detected, it means no-cassette.
Cassette 3 Size Detection
Switch 1 (SW7)
Cassette 4 Size Detection
Switch 1 (SW8)
F-2-173
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-136
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-137
Width
(mm)
Length
(mm)
B5
EXEC
16K
A5-R
A4
STMT-R
LTR
B5-R
257.0
267.0
270.0
148.5
297.0
139.7
279.4
182.0
182.0
184.0
195.0
210.0
210.0
215.9
215.9
257.0
16K-R
195.0
270.0
LTR-R
215.9
279.4
A4-R
LGL
B4
8K
A3
LDR
SRA3
12 x 18
13 x 19
K_LGL
K_LGL-R
G_LTR
G_LTR-R
G_LGL
OFI
E_OFI
M_OFI
B_OFI
A_OFI
FOLIO
FLSP
A_FLSP
A_LTR
A_LTR-R
A_LGL
FA4
FB4
210.0
215.9
257.0
270.0
297.0
279.4
320.0
304.8
330.2
268.0
190.0
267.0
203.0
203.2
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
206.0
280.0
220.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
297.0
355.6
364.0
390.0
420.0
431.8
450.0
457.2
483.0
190.0
268.0
203.0
267.0
330.2
317.0
320.0
341.0
355.0
340.0
330.0
330.0
337.0
220.0
280.0
340.0
343.0
330.0
Width SW7/SW8
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
Length SW9/SW10
2-A
2-B
2-C
2-D
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
SW7/SW8
1-D
1-C
1-B
1-A
SW9/SW10
2-A
2-B
2-D
2-C
F-2-174
NOTE:
Settings/registration
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Original
Selection
Setting value Cassette3: A5R, STMTR
Cassette4: A5R, STMTR
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Original Selection
Setting value Cassette3: B5, EXEC
Cassette4: B5, EXEC
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Custom Size
Setting value X: 148.0 to 487.7 mm, Y: 100.0 to 330.2 mm (Maximum 5 pieces)
Related Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST
CST3-P1 (Cassette3 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
CST4-P1 (Cassette4 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
Setting value
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
T-2-75
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-137
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
Deck
Right Deck Paper
Level Sensor 1 (PS47)
Left Deck Paper Level
Sensor 1 (PS49)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Full
(100%~50%)
Half
(50%~25%)
Few
(25% or less)
Control
Panel
Screen
Display
2-138
Full
(100%~50%)
ON
OFF
Paper Level
Detection Lever 2
Deck Lifter
T-2-76
F-2-175
Paper
Half (50%~25%)
ON
OFF
Paper
F-2-176
ON
Paper
F-2-177
F-2-178
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
2-138
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
Cassette
2-139
Full (100%~50%)
Paper Level
Detection Lever
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 2 (PS70)
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 2 (PS73)
Cassette Lifter
Holding Plate
F-2-180
Half (50%~25%)
F-2-179
Full
(100%~50%)
Half
(50%~25%)
Few
(25% or less)
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 1
(PS69)
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 1
(PS72)
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 2
(PS70)
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 2
(PS73)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Paper
OFF
ON
Control Panel
Screen Display
F-2-181
ON
ON
T-2-77
F-2-182
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
2-139
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
Paper Detection
2-140
Cassette
If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper
Cassette Lifter
Deck
Right Deck Paper Sensor (PS7)
Left Deck Paper Sensor (PS11)
Paper Detection Lever
Deck Lifter
Holding Plate
F-2-184
F-2-183
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-140
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
2-141
Lifter Control
Cassette
In the machine configuration with the Deck / Cassette set, the Pickup Motor is driven to raise
the Lifter to fit the paper level to the height of the pickup position. The Lifter is also raised
when the Paper Level Sensor went OFF during the pickup operation.
Deck
Right Deck Pickup Motor(M11)
Left Deck Pickup Motor(M24)
Lifter Wire
Middle Plate
Deck Lifter
F-2-186
Lifter Wire
F-2-185
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
2-141
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-142
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-142
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull
Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate,
Basic Movement
1) If the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2) is turned ON, the semi-toothed gear will rotate.
2) The holding plate Fixing Members will be released and the holding plate will ascend.
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
2-143
M33
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
Multi-purpose Tray
holding plate
Semi-toothed
gear
Multi-purpose
Tray pull-out
roller
SL2
Multi-purpose Tray
pull-out roller
Spring
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-188
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-187
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-143
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-144
Paper Detection
The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting
When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose
Paper width is detected by the outputted value from the Variable Resistor Assembly (Multipurpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB (UN13)) which is linked to movement of the Side
Guide Plate.
Setting of the Side Guide Plate on the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray is executed by users after
paper is set.
Paper
Side Guide
Multi-purpose Tray
Detection Lever
Paper Sensor (PS23)
F-2-190
Side Guide
F-2-189
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-144
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control
Registration Unit
Pre-registration Control
Pickup processing time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well
variation.
After the paper is picked up from the pickup cassette, the following reference sensor is used
as a reference to feed the paper for a specified distance, and then the paper is stopped at the
pre-registration position.
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Pickup
Assembly
Paper size
Reference sensor
Stop position
Vertical Path Roller 1
Downstream 10mm
Cassette4
as the environment. Therefore, the machine executes pre-registration control to ease such
Pre-registration Pre-registration
stop position8 stop position6
2-145
Vertical Path
Sensor2(PS25)
Vertical Path
Sensor3(PS26)
Vertical Path
Sensor4(PS27)
All Size
Duplex Merging
Roller
Downstream 10mm
Duplex Outlet
Sensor(PS64)
Duplex Outlet
Sensor(PS64)
Downstream 10mm
Duplex Left
Sensor(PS66)
Duplex Merging
Roller
Upstream 20mm
Pre-registration
stop position7
Pre-registration
stop position 5
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Vertical Path
Sensor 1
Right Deck Pull
Out Sensor
Pre-registration
stop position 2
Vertical Path
Sensor 2
Pre-registration
stop position 3
T-2-78
Vertical Path
Sensor 3
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Vertical Path
Sensor 4
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control
2-145
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control
Registration Control
2-146
Registration Deceleration Control
The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be
This control reduces speed of Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) (Registration
aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly. The rotating
feed speed) by using Registration Sensor (PS29) as a reference and pushes the paper
speed of the Registration Motor (M34) is increased to be higher than the process speed and
Registration Roller
Registration Sensor
M33
M33
F-2-193
M34
F-2-192
Pre-registration speed
Registration arch volume
5mm
Stop point
3mm
Registration Roller
F-2-194
Model
PPM
95
750[mm/s]
500[mm/s]
85
4.5[mm]
23[mm] (20mm (distance between the Registration Sensor and the
Registration Roller) +3mm (registration arch volume))
T-2-79
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control
2-146
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control
2-147
Transfer
Post-registration speed
Process speed
Speed of Registration Roller
Post-transfer Guide
Start point of
deceleration
Registration Roller point
Paper
10mm
Transfer point
F-2-195
Model
PPM
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
8105/8095/8085
105
95
Post-registration speed
750[mm/s]
Process speed
500[mm/s]
45.5[mm]
85
T-2-80
Duct
Paper
Post-transfer Guide
Duct
F-2-196
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control
2-147
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation
2-148
Delivery/Reverse Unit
Basic Operation
Delivery
speed
Process speed
Face-up Delivery
Delivery Motor(M13)
Process
speed
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned ON to switch the feeding path to the
Delivery Assembly side.
2) Rotating speed of the Delivery Motor (M13) is increased once the papers trailing edge
Model
PPM
95
Process speed
500
1100
Delivery speed
1100
85
T-2-81
M13
Inner Delivery Roller
SL5
F-2-197
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation
2-148
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation
2-149
Face-down Delivery
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the
Delivery Assembly side.
2) Rotating speed of the Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (reverse feed speed) once the
trailing edge of the preceding paper passes through the Fixing Roller to make the paper
Delivery
speed
Delivery Motor
(M13)
Reverse feed
speed
Reverse Motor
(M14)
Process
speed
SL5
Process
speed
Stop
50ms
Reverse
Detachment
Solenoid
(SL12)
60 mm before Fixing Roller
(Based on Registration Sensor )
Model
PPM
M13
Reverse delivery
speed
Reverse Upper
Flapper Solenoid
(SL5)
NOTE:
Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size. Delivery speed remains
the same if no delivery option is connected.
Reverse delivery
speed
95
Process speed
500
1100
1100
Delivery speed
1100
85
T-2-82
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
SL12
M14
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation
2-149
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation
2-150
Duplex Unit
Basic Operation
Process speed
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the
Reverse Assembly side.
Stop
Reverse Motor
(M14)
Stop
50ms
2) When the papers trailing edge passes through the Fixing Roller, rotating speed of the
Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (duplex pull-in speed) to make the paper stopped at the
duplex reverse position.
3) The Reverse Motor is driven by the duplex pull-in speed to feed the paper to the Duplex
Assembly (the flapper feeds the paper to the Duplex Assembly). Then, the Duplex Left
Sensor (P66) detects the paper's leading edge, and the paper is fed for a specified distance
to stop at the position of Duplex Left Roller.
Reverse Upper Flapper
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
Duplex Left Sensor
(PS66)
Reverse Upper
Flapper Solenoid
(SL5)
60 mm before Fixing Roller
(Based on Registration Sensor )
20 mm before Reverse
Vertical Path Sensor
Model
PPM
SL5
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
Reverse Upper
Roller
M14
Duplex Flapper
105
95
Process speed
500
1100
750
750
85
T-2-83
M19
Duplex reverse
point
Reverse Lower
Roller
Duplex reverse
standby point
F-2-201
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation
2-150
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control
2-151
In the case of printing the 2nd side of the 2-sided print, side registration displacement level is
measured to adjust the write start timing and correct side registration.
<Execution timing>
Side Registration
Sensor(PS31)
Paper
Front
Standby point
Detecting point
About 10 mm
4. The displacement level measured for side registration correction is converted into pixels to
adjust the laser write start timing according to the displaced direction.
The write start timing is pushed forward when the paper is displaced to the front.
The write start timing is pushed back when the paper is displaced to the rear.
Paper
F-2-203
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control
2-151
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-152
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Duplex reverse
stop position
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position7
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
F-2-204
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-152
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
Pre-registration
stop position7
2-153
Duplex reverse
stop position
F-2-205
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-153
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-154
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position7
Pre-registration
stop position 4
F-2-206
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-154
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-155
F-2-207
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-155
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-156
Jam Detection
Jam Code List
SW2
PS52
PS20 PS67
PS29 PS64
PS28
PS3
PS36
PS35
PS4
PS65
PS24
PS66
PS19
PS32
PS2
PS25
PS21
PS26
PS33
PS22
PS27
F-2-208
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-156
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-157
Other Jams
Sensor
No.
Sensor name
PS19 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1
PS32 Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Sensor name
Jam type
Jam type
0B01
0B02
PS3
0B03
PS2
Yes
0CA1
0CA2
0CA3
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx03
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx04
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx05
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx06
Yes
xx07
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx08
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx09
Yes
Yes
Yes
0CA5
0C10
PS4
xx0A
Yes
xx0B
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx0C
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx0D
Yes
xx0E
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx11
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx12
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx13
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx14
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx15
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx17
PS1
Yes
xx18
PS6
Yes
Yes
Yes
0305
0CA4
T-2-85
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-157
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-158
F-2-209
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-158
2-159
Servicing
Parts/Area Name
None
Consumable Parts
Parts
Number
Piece
FC5-2524
50
C1-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C2-PU-RL
FC5-2528
50
C1-FD-RL
FC5-2524
50
C2-FD-RL
FC5-2526
50
C1-SP-RL
FC5-2528
50
C2-SP-RL
FC5-2524
50
C3-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C3-FD-RL
FC5-2528
50
C3-SP-RL
Parts Name
Expected
life*
COUNTER
Remarks
(DRBL-1)
FC5-2524
50
C4-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C4-FD-RL
FC5-2528
50
C4-SP-RL
FB1-8581
12
M-FD-RL
FC6-6661
12
M-SP-RL
Remarks
Feed Guide
50
Pre-registration Guide
50
Rollers/wheels
50
50
50
50
Scanner Sensor(Pickup
Assembly)
100*
Scanner Sensor(Feeding
Assembly)
100
Expected
life*
Major Adjustments
None
Troubleshooting
None
2-159
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration
2-160
3.3V
Leakage
Breaker
12V
Multi Door
Switch
12V
3.3V
Noise
Filter
All-night Power
Supply PCB
Fixing Power
Supply PCB
AC Driver PCB
12V
24V
3.3V
DC Power Supply
PCB(12V)
12V
DC Power Supply
PCB(24V)
24V
DC Power Supply
PCB B(24V)
24V
Reader
12V
24V
DC Controller PCB
12V
Control Panel
Relay PCB
12V
IH Coil
24V
Reader Heater
Drum Heater
Driver PCB
Drum
Heater
24V
Cassette Heater
24V
Deck Heater
24V
12V
12V
Environment
Heater
Switch
Developing Motor
Drum Motor
High Voltage PCB
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
3.3V
Cassette
Heater
Switch
Main
Driver
PCB
24V
24V
12V
24V
24V
Duplex Driver
PCB
Fixing Motor
24V
Transfer
High
Voltage
PCB
F-2-210
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration
2-160
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-161
Controls
Reader
Controller
PCB
Motor
Fan
Sensor
By equating the electric power in the machine, the maximum power consumption is reduced
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
Reader
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
DADF
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
5V
Fixing
Equation
Fixing
F-2-212
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-161
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-162
<Control description>
This machine executes electric power management to prevent temporary power shortage.
The electric power management detects current value of the entire product with the Current
Deep Sleep
Sensor. In the case that the current value is likely to exceed the electric power reference
value, the DC Controller temporarily reduces electric power supply to the fixing area to
compensate for power shortage.
Shifting time
(specified in User
Mode) has passed
AC
Signal:
Current Sensor
Detection of
Total current value
Power-saving
others
Power
SLEEP-STNDBY
STANDBY
Electric Power
AC Driver PCB
Fixing Assembly
Sleep standby
DC Controller PCB
The mode that can start operation immediately. All power is supplied in this mode, but
ASIC
Determination of fixing
electric power value
Temperature
The mode to reduce energy consumption by reducing the control temperature when the
IH Coil
Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the energy saving rate (this mode can be
F-2-213
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-162
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-163
Mode
Main SW
Switch
Heater
OFF
WarmUp(Recovery)
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Environment Environment
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-88
Main SW
Cassette SW
Drum
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Cassette
Reader
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Copy/Print
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment
control
control
control
control
control
control
*1
*1
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Standby/Energy Saver
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Environment Environment
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-89
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-163
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-164
Switch
Heater
Main Power
OFF
OFF
WarmUp(Recovery)
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-90
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Main SW
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Drum
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
Cassette
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
T-2-91
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-164
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-165
<Environment Control>
Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main
power continues.
Environment control 2: Whether to turn ON or OFF the heater is determined by the
environment (moisture content) right before moving to sleep state, and the condition
continues while the power is OFF or the machine is at sleep state.
Environment
Moisture content
Temperature/Humidity
Drum Heater
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
15
18
12.41
23 deg C 5%
23deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
ON
T-2-92
Environment control 3: Basically the heater is ON. ON or OFF of the heater can be
switched depending on the moisture contents when the duration time of standby mode/
energy saving mode is long (4 hours at minimum).
<Related service modes>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW: To set ON/OFF of the Drum Heater.
0: Normal mode (ON/OFF of the Drum Heater is determined when moving to sleep 1.)
(Default)
1: Drum Heater ON mode *(The Drum Heater must be turned ON when moving to sleep 1
while the 2-dimensional shading-related control is OFF.)
2: Energy saving mode (The Drum Heater is OFF when moving to sleep 1.)
* The mode differs from 2-dimensional shading ON (image priority mode). This mode is for
users who just want to turn ON the Drum Heater when startup time is delayed because of
the increase of controls due to 2-dimensional shading ON.
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE: Image priority mode (2-dimensional
shading). ON/OFF
0: 2-dimensional shading OFF (Default)
1: 2-dimensional shading ON (The Drum Heater is turned ON at first time for the day, sleep,
standby/energy saving, potential control, and 2-dimensional shading.)
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-165
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control
2-166
Fan Control
Location of Fans
Airflow
FM17
FM7
FM17
FM16
FM33
FM2
FM31
FM30
FM32
FM41
Developing Assembly
FM33
FM31
FM4
FM30
FM7
FM42
FM2
Power Supply
FM32
FM41
FM42
FM8
FM5
FM5
FM40
FM3
FM14
FM15
F-2-216
F-2-215
Circuit
code
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM8
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM30
FM31
FM32
FM33
FM40
FM41
FM42
Name
Primary Charging Air-supply Fan
Making Image Exhaust Fan
Main Controller Cooling Fan
Paper Cooling Fan
Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan
Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
Laser Scanner Cooling Fan
Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
Developer Lower Cooling Fan
Developer Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit Air-supply Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit Exhaust Fan
Feed Driver Cooling Fan
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Function
To intake air around the Primary Charging Assembly
To exhaust air in the image formation area
To cool the Main Controller PCB
To cool the paper passing through the delivery area
To cool the fixing power supply
To cool the Transfer Cleaner / To cool the Duplex Feed Guide
To cool the power supply
To cool the power supply
To cool the Laser Scanner
To exhaust air around the Primary Charging Assembly
To cool the Developing Unit
To cool the Developing Unit
To intake air around the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
To exhaust air around the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
To cool the Feed Driver
To cool the Duplex Driver
To cool the Duplex Motor and the Registration Motor
Error/Alarm code
E824-0000
E806-0000
E880-0001
33-0001
E804-0001
E820-0002
E804-0000
FM16
FM4
Power Supply
E121-0001
33-0027
E820-0000
E820-0001
33-0026
FM40
FM15
33-0013
33-0028
33-0002
T-2-93
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control
FM14
FM3
F-2-217
2-166
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control
2-167
Counter control
Fan Sequence
NO.
NAME
FM2
Primary Charging
Air-supply Fan
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM8
WAIT
UP
INTR
STBY
LSTR
JAM
ERR
Power
saving
DEEP
Sleep
Controller control
Print mode
1-sided print/2nd side of
2-sided print
Delivery position
Count-up timing
Tray B
(Lower Tray)
Tray B
Reference Sensor: Lower
(Lower Tray) delivery sensor (PS6)
:Full speed
:half speed
F-2-218
Reference Sensor:
Small (when the length is
up to LTR) -> Duplex Left
Sensor (PS66)
4 Booklet Trimmer-D1
Total 2
102
Total 1
101
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Copy
(Total 2)
202
Total
(Large)
103
Total A2
*1
*1
*1
127
Copy
(Total 1)
201
0
Copy
(Large)
203
*1
*1
JP
JP
TW
2-167
2
Target
120V UL model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
120V UL model
Type 2
(New method)
230V General
model
240V UK model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
240V UK model
Type 2
(New method)
240V CA model
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control
2-168
*1
*1
Total
(Large)
103
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Copy
(Large)
203
Copy
(Total 2)
202
Total
(Large)
103
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
*1
*1
*1
*1
0
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Scan
(Total 1)
0
Copy
(Large)
203
Print
(Total 1)
501
301
*1
*1
*1
*1
0
*1
*1
*1
*1
Total
(Large)
103
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Scan
(Total 1)
Copy
(Large)
203
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
0
*1
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
501
301
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
*1
Total 1
101
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
GB
501
301
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
ES/SE/
PT/NO/
DK/FI/
PL/HU/
CZ/SI/
GR/EE/
RU/NL/
SK/RO/
HR/BG/
TR
IT
IT
T-2-95
AU
Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
*1
GB
*1
*1
SG/KO/
CN
0
*1
US
*1
US
Target
FR
DE
Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service
mode items.
*1
*1
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control
ES/SE/
PT/NO/
DK/FI/
PL/HU/
CZ/SI/
GR/EE/
RU/NL/
SK/RO/
HR/BG/
TR
COUNTER2 to 8 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
*1: Nothing is displayed as default. However, you can change this setting from the service
mode.
2-168
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-169
Servicing
Parts name
Parts Number
Piece
Expected life
Ozone Filter
FL3-2134-000
6000,000 sheets
Dustproof Filter
FC8-9564-000
2000,000 sheets
Remarks
None
T-2-96
Consumable Parts
Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back
Periodical Servicing
2. After Replacing
1) Restoring the backup data
None
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-169
Troubleshooting
2-170
1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
Ring.
F-2-220
x3
F-2-219
NOTE:
If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm, change the phase difference
between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws according to the
following procedure.
F-2-221
2-170
2-171
3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation
Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the
dents formed by tightening the screws.
F-2-222
4) Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and retighten the 2 screws loosened in
step 3.
2-171
2-172
MEAP
Addition of Functions
3 functions
Changes
For the built-in applications in iR-ADV models, 3 functions (services) were added.
These functions support the platform which was reinforced in terms of management. In detail,
Overview
information which the MEAP applications manage respectively (setting information, user
Functions and specifications which were added in Ver.50.xx or later firmware are introduced
here.
setting information, a bunch of keys, and log) can be managed effectively and collectively.
Management service of customized information for each user which MEAP application
retains
2 MEAP Application Configuration Service (MEAP Spec Ver 57)
Management service of the applications setting information
Note:
Registration method of application data to each service and its usage method are
disclosed in MEAP SDK V.4.3.
However, as for the authentication log only, they are disclosed in MEAP Login SDK V.3.1.
Management service of the application data which was stored in each service is provided.
iW EMC Plug-in(DAM Plug-in) RUI SMS
F-2-223
2-172
2-173
Due to the foregoing additional 3 functions, functions for MEAP application were added to
By using the 3 functions which were newly added, MEAP applications can be managed
collectively as follows. (Only for MEAP applications which support new functions)
App1
Dedicated management tool
App2
Dedicated management tool
App1
MEAP applications setting information management function which the application data can
(App1 format)
Pref data
(App1 format)
App2
Log data
(App1 format)
SMS.
Config data
Device
Config data
(App2 format)
Pref data
(App2 format)
Log data
(App2 format)
F-2-224
F-2-226
App1
Configuration
management service
App2
Preference
management service
Device
Log
management service
Config data
Preference data
Log data
(common format)
(common format)
(common format)
Platform
F-2-225
2-173
Technology > MEAP > Changes > Authentication Information Sharing Function
2-174
Authentication Information Sharing Function
times.
In the MEAP environment, the unified authentication function which authentication information
can be shared even between MEAP applications was added.
Supported MEAP Specifications is Ver.59 and both device and MEAP application need to
support this version in order to use this function.
There are 2 types for authentication information sharing: Volatile Credential which the
registered information is discarded at logout or shutdown of the device, and Persistent
Credential which the registered information is not discarded even at logout.
Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used when sharing the authentication information between applications
which log in (authenticate) to the same security domain.
F-2-227
Credential is registered using a login application, so the application which accesses to the
security domain used for authentication by login application can use the Credential.
Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when logging in
(authenticating) to a different security domain.
Credential is registered using a general MEAP application, so the authentication information
can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.
Comparison of functions
Volatile Credential
Registered information Character strings and arbitrary Java
object
F-2-228
Lifetime Registration
Deletion
Encryption of
Credential data
Store (Save) to
Persistent Credential
Character strings only User ID/
Password/Domain/Arbitrary character
strings
At any timing registered by
application
Can be used until deletion by
application or management tool.
Data retained on the HDD is
encrypted.
HDD in the device
T-2-97
Technology > MEAP > Changes > Authentication Information Sharing Function
2-174
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SMS
Service mode
For the reason of security, if not preferring to use Volatile Credential, it can be disabled using
the service mode. (Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.)
Service switch can be found in the following.
[SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [FNC-SW] > [UA-OFFSW]
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
2-175
CAUTION:
For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet
Explorer 6, Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.5 or later is required.
User registration / edit in SSO-H local device
Use of remote login in SSO-H.
F-2-229
SMS
The following system environments are required in order to enable SMS access.
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows XP Professional
Windows 7
Mac OS X 10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X 10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X 10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X 10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-98
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SMS
2-175
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SSO-H Management
SSO-H Management
When using SSO-H for the login service, required system environments are different in
domain authentication or local device authentication.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
Note:
2-176
System environments for administrator and ordinary user
Operating System
Java Runtime
Environment
Supported browser
Windows 7
Mac OS X v10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X v10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X v10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X v10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-99
System environments for administrator and ordinary user (when using IPv6 communication)
Operating System
Supported browser
required.
The following Windows servers are installed under Active Directory, and DNS server for
Windows 7
In order to use domain authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments are
name resolution.
T-2-100
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SSO-H Management
2-176
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SSO-H Management
2-177
Local Device Authentication Management
Note:
Visit the URL of Sun Microsystems (US) to learn how to obtain Java Runtime
Environment.
Accesses via IPv6 communication from a client computer require Java 2 Runtime
Environment Standard Edition 1.5 and later.
Use User Logon Name (Windows 2000 or older) registered in Active Directory as the
user name for domain authentication.
For domain authentication, set a user name only with 1-byte alphanumeric characters
and symbols of - (hyphen), _ (underbar), and % (percent). iR device will reject login with a
user name including a forbidden character.
For domain authentication, the time setting should be synchronized between Active
Directory server and the device (as well as the PC to be logged in). If the time is different
for 5 minutes or more, a login error is triggered in domain authentication (the setting of
allowable time difference can be changed).
A domain authentication manager should be registered when domain authentication is
used. If not registered, setting or management is disabled for some applications. How to
register the manager depends on system environments.
- When not using imageWARE/iW Accounting Manager, a user belonging to Canon
Peripheral Admins group on Active Directory will be authorized as the domain
authentication manager. Follow Active Directory Operation Manual to create Canon
Peripheral Admins group before registering the manager.
For user registration / edit in Local Authentication, following system requirements must be
satisfied.
System environments for administrator and ordinary user
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows 7
Mac OS X v10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X v10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X v10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X v10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-102
Application
System environments for administrator and ordinary user (when using IPv6 communication)
53
88
389
Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389, may be changed to
any port on LDAP service side)
Operating System
T-2-101
Supported browser
Windows 7
T-2-103
Note:
Visit the URL of Sun Microsystems (US) to learn how to obtain Java Runtime
Environment.
Accesses via IPv6 communication from a client computer require Java 2 Runtime
Environment Standard Edition 1.5 and later.
Technology > MEAP > Checking the Operating Environment > SSO-H Management
2-177
Technology > MEAP > Setting Up the Network > Network configuration process
2-178
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
default, so Network and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Return to the top screen, press Login button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321, and the password is
7654321.
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
F-2-231
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
for this message.
F-2-230
F-2-232
Technology > MEAP > Setting Up the Network > Network configuration process
2-178
2-179
Login to SMS
CAUTION:
The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
Outline
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
devices touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
F-2-233
Login method
Authentication
method
Password
authentication
Password
authentication
RLS login
SSO-H
Users registered as
administrators with SSO-H
T-2-104
Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, RLS
Authentication is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if RLS Authentication is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.
2-179
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by Password Authentication
2-180
Login by Password Authentication
In the SMS login window, enter the password for authentication. Only one password can be
registered with SMS. The login procedures are as follows.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The
URL is as follows.
URL: https://<MEAP Device IP address>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
Note:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.) When
you want to change the display original language, change in the box in the right of the
screen.
This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of the device.
For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration) > [MEAP
Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.
F-2-234
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by Password Authentication
2-180
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by RLS Authentication
2) If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the system
administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.
2-181
Login by RLS Authentication
Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user
name and password) used is the information for domain authentication or local device
authentication. The login procedures are as follows.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-235
F-2-236
Note:
When the device authentication method used is domain authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with Active Directory and then click Log
In.
If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In. - When using
SDL as the login service, enter the user information registered in the device, as per local
device authentication.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
- User Name: Administrator
- Password: password
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by RLS Authentication
2-181
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by RLS Authentication
2-182
Note:
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
F-2-238
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
F-2-237
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Login by RLS Authentication
2-182
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-183
Outline
The SMS login method settings are done by setting the login Start/ Stop via the other login
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting.
In former SMS, the language setting of "initial setting/registration (user mode)" was used.
However, when the language setting is other than English or Japanese, it displays in English.
After changed, it will be as follows.
method. In other words, the password authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by first
logging in with RLS authentication, and the RLS authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by
first logging in with password authentication. The Start/ Stop combinations of the two login
methods are as follows.
Start
Logged in by RLS
authentication.
No
Refer to the setting of the
Accept-Language header,
which a browser sends out.
Yes
Setting unavailable
T-2-105
English or Japanese
Language
priority setting of a
browser
Refer to the setting of a language
Except English or Japanese
displaying in registration/initial
setting [Additional Function].
English or Japanese
Display setting
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Authentication server is down
Network problem, no communication with authentication server
of a device
Display in the
language configured.
F-2-239
2. If only domain authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-183
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by Password Authentication
2-184
3) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
F-2-242
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
F-2-240
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen
F-2-243
F-2-241
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by Password Authentication
2-184
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by RLS Authentication
2-185
3) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password
Authentication.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-246
4) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
password authentication screen.
F-2-244
F-2-247
F-2-245
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Setting for login by RLS Authentication
2-185
Technology > MEAP > Checking MEAP Application Management Page > About MEAP Application Management Page
2-186
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
F-2-248
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the
foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket, file descriptor).
Follow the steps below to check the remaining memory:
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Check [Resource Information] for information of the whole device resources.
Amount Used
Remaining
Percent Used
Technology > MEAP > Checking MEAP Application Management Page > About MEAP Application Management Page
2-186
Technology > MEAP > Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application > Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
2-187
F-2-249
Note:
Older iR models show resource information required in each application in List of
Application page (corresponding to MEAP Application Management page of this model).
When checking the resource information of each application in this model, click on the
application name in MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-251
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [Started] or
[Stopped.]
F-2-250
F-2-252
Technology > MEAP > Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application > Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
2-187
2-188
MEAP Specifications
This screen allows users to check MEAP-Contents versions, MEAP Specifications for the
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
CAUTION:
function.
About Name
MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version
on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button) and MEAP
1) Log in to SMS.
platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
information below:
Device Specification ID
MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
F-2-253
2-188
2-189
Product Name
iR-ADV C2030
iR-ADV C2025
iR-ADV C2020
iR-ADV 6075
iR-ADV 6065
iR-ADV 6055
Remarks
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.50.xx or later
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29,
30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,4
5,46,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.37.xx or later
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
42, 44, 45
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Remarks
Ver.10.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53
T-2-106
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
iR-ADV C9075
iR-ADV C9070
iR-ADV C9065
iR-ADV C9060
iR-ADV C7065
iR-ADV C7055
Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Ver.20.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Ver.20.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40 , 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Description
1
2
5
6
7
9
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
2-189
2
Ver
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS
Description
2-190
F-2-254
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS
2-190
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Content of MEAP system information
2-191
MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may
not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the
F-2-255
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, Installed: the application has
been installed.
Active: the application is being in use. Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor)
declared in a statement within the application program.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Content of MEAP system information
2-191
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically, None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed. Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
2-192
Installing an Application
Resource
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is
Product Name
Storage
Memory
Thread
Socket
File
Description
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
Counter Value
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
iR-ADV C2030/
C2025/ C2020 Series
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
Flash model
220MB
32MB
162
128
128
HDD model
1024MB
128MB
256
256
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount
(maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application program, and is
expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework.
Some services may not have printable data.
256
T-2-108
Note:
As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other
resources other than memory, check them when installing.
Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
Users Guide that comes with the individual applications.
Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)
CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
2-192
Technology > MEAP > Installing an Application > Procedure to install applications
2-193
CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS.
You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
If you are adding a license to an existing application, see Chapter 0, Adding a
License File. in this manual.
If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [OK] button.
F-2-256
F-2-258
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [OK].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
F-2-257
Technology > MEAP > Installing an Application > Procedure to install applications
F-2-259
2-193
Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file
8) Upon installation completed, click [To MEAP Application Management] button shown on
the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
2-194
F-2-260
Note:
To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the
application status is Started.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.
Sample file
License File ID
F-2-262
Application ID
Serial Number
Validated Period
Counter informations
F-2-261
Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file
2-194
Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file
2-195
4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
Management ] button.
F-2-264
F-2-265
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [OK] button
Technology > MEAP > Adding a License File > Procedure adding a license file
2-195
Technology > MEAP > Disabling a License File > Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)
2-196
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-267
F-2-268
F-2-266
Technology > MEAP > Disabling a License File > Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)
2-196
Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
2-197
Outline
You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If reinstallation
is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage. To download or delete
a license file, first disable it.
WARNING:
Once you have removed an invalidated license file, you will no longer be able to
download it form the MEAP device.
F-2-269
5) Click [Yes].
F-2-270
F-2-271
Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
2-197
Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
2-198
F-2-272
F-2-274
F-2-275
WARNING:
F-2-273
6) When you have selected [Download] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
Technology > MEAP > Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File > Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
2-198
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
Reusable license
Outline
2-199
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, Disabling a
When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the
License File . and see Chapter 0, Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File. in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-276
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
F-2-277
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
2-199
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
2-200
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [OK].
F-2-280
6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click
[Download].
F-2-278
F-2-281
F-2-279
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
2-200
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
2-201
11) Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
F-2-282
F-2-283
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [Delete] to display the confirmation
screen and click [Yes] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-2-284
Technology > MEAP > License for forwarding > Procedure to create license for forwarding
2-201
Technology > MEAP > Uninstalling an Application > Procedure to uninstall an application
Uninstalling an Application
2-202
3) Click [Uninstall] button for the application to be uninstalled.
F-2-286
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [Yes] button.
Upon [Yes] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
F-2-285
Dimmed [Uninstall] button shows that the selected application cannot be removed.
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a
message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no
loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated
applications.
1) Log in to SMS to click [MEAP Application Management] on the menu.
2) [MEAP Application Management] page is shown.
Technology > MEAP > Uninstalling an Application > Procedure to uninstall an application
F-2-287
2-202
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
Login Service
About Login Service
The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the 'System
Management' page. The pre-install applications and those provided on the accessory CD
are as follows. Default Authentication is used as the default at the time of shipment from the
factory.
2-203
Default Authentication overview
This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.
This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
Both the domain authentication and local device authentication login services can be used.
There is no need to have a separate SA server.
Login is not via SA, so SSO-H refers directly to DNS for authentication.
Kerberos and NTML protocols are supported.
The following three authentication methods may be selected from.
To use Department ID management in domain authentication, the option imageWARE accounting manager is required.
Domain authentication
When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be
used.
When using SSO-H, the clock settings of the server managing the Active Directory
and the MEAP device (and the PC used to log in), must be matched. If there is a
time difference of greater than five minutes in the clock settings, an error will be
generated when login is attempted.
When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
CAUTION:
The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
is required.
Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However,
application settings information cannot be ported.
To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the
device are used.
This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent. In addition
these are not packaged in Administrators CD.
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-203
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Authentication methods of SSO-H
2-204
Differences from conventional SSO
Domain B
SSO-H can use multiple authentication methods, and the user can toggle between them
from a Web browser. (Refer to the MEAP Authentication System Settings Guide 'User
Domain C
DC
Domain B
DC
DC
DC
CAUTION:
Domain C
DC
DC
Domain authentication
This is a form of user authentication which operates in collaboration with the domain controller
on the Active Directory environment network and, as soon as the iR device is logged into,
carries out authentication of the domain on the network. In addition to users belonging to
the domain that includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable
relationship with the domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of
the login destination can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
The function makes use of options iW EMC Accounting Management Plig-in to enable
analysis and management of the iR device usage status.
The protocol used is as follows.
Kerberos : LLS / RLS / ILS
SA
Device
Domain A
Device
Domain A
SSO
SSO-H
F-2-288
Domain B
Domain Controller
( Active Directory )
Domain Controller
( Active Directory )
Domain A User
iR Device
Domain B User
F-2-289
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Authentication methods of SSO-H
2-204
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Access Mode in Sites
CAUTION:
To run domain authentication and Department ID management at the same time,
the options Net Spot Accountant, iW Accounting Manager or iW EMC Accounting
Management Plug-in are required. If domain authentication is selected as the
authentication method without linkage to these systems, login will be disabled and
Department ID management will not come ON. If Department ID management
cannot be turned ON when using domain authentication and login is disabled, switch
the login service to Default Authentication and turn Department ID management
OFF.
2-205
System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to System
Managers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter SA) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
function.
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
In local device authentication the card reader for the option control card cannot be
used.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Access Active Directory within same site only.
authentication error.
Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
Note:
With SSO, linkage with imageWARE/iW Enterprise Management Console Accounting
Management Plug-in was assumed and department management linkage was enabled
even in domain authentication, but with SSO-H, this is now unsupported.
In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
from DNS)
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Access Mode in Sites
2-205
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Access Mode in Sites
2-206
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:
The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
DNS Server A
records:
AD 192.168.1.2
AD 172.24.12.2
AD 172.24.35.2
AD 211.111.1.30
SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
2.Get Active
Directory list
N
WA3. Access Active
Site:Tokyo::
172.24.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Repllic
ation
Site:Osaka::
192.168.1.0/24
Site:Hakata::
211.111.1.0/24
Directory of same
subnet
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Active Directory will be accessed.
4.Access Active
Directory of same
site
DC-Tokyo/DNS
172.24.12.2
n
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
Domain X
io
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
at
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
lic
pl
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
F-2-290
Re
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
DC-Osaka/DNS
172.168.1.2
Site:Tokyo
172.12.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
DC-Hakata/DNS
211.111.1.30
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
Site:Osaka
192.168.1.0/24
SSO-Tokyo
192.168.1.90
SSO-Tokyo
Site:Hakata
211.111.1.0/24
211.111.1.3
F-2-291
Technology > MEAP > Login Service > Access Mode in Sites
2-206
2-207
Specification of SSO-H
Item
Up to 5000
Supported device
IPv6
3584/33
Availability of Department
Management Linkage
Site access
Supported
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
in the device.
[Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
Specification
T-2-109
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
SSO/SDL handling
Conventional SSO and SDL are not packaged in Administrator's CD of this model. In addition,
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
this model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
an optional operation.
Environment confirmation
Refer to the section of Checking the Operating Environment of this manual for system
requirements needed in each login service.
2-207
Technology > MEAP > Changing Login Services > Steps to Change Login Services
2-208
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
device.
F-2-294
CAUTION:
F-2-292
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
F-2-295
F-2-293
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
Technology > MEAP > Changing Login Services > Steps to Change Login Services
2-208
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Outline
2-209
Outline
When a user forgets the password to log in to SMS, initialize it to the default value of
MeapSmsLogin using the switch license for initializing passwords. Follow the steps below:
Outline
When replacing or formatting the hard disk drive, the data in the MEAP application area
needs to be temporarily saved to your PC.
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data.
2) Click [Login] button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The
Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click [Browse..] button and select the
switch license file prepared in advance.
In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
WARNING:
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has
been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings
and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to
observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
F-2-296
3) When you click [Initialize] button, the confirmation message appears. Click [OK] button.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to log in. The
password is case-sensitive.
Note:
If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Outline
2-209
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Backup Item Automatically Copied
2-210
WARNING:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
F-2-297
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS, password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data. It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST. If [Initialize All Data/Settings] was executed and SMS cannot be
accessed, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure
shown in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Backup Item Automatically Copied
2-210
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-211
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
series other than iR-ADV
C2030/C2020 series
System
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
SST
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
only in Download Mode.
3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
start SST on the PC.
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-211
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-212
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.
Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-300
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-298
F-2-301
F-2-299
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-212
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-213
WARNING:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
F-2-302
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS, password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data. It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST. If [Initialize All Data/Settings] was executed and SMS cannot be
accessed, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure
shown in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
F-2-303
3) Transferring Data
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
F-2-304
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.
5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.
Technology > MEAP > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-213
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Formatting the HDD
2-214
Formatting the HDD
Formatting the HDD
Outline
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
conventional counter.
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Formatting the HDD
2-214
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > HDD replacement procedure
2-215
If the MEAP application area can be backed up
If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD
Outline
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally
or not.
or the Flash PCB, so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
1) Preparation for replacement
Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
3 Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD.
4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3 Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD.
4 Reinstalling the MEAP application
When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > HDD replacement procedure
2-215
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) > Starting in Safe Mode
2-216
3) Press
or
[MEAPSAFE] button.
Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause
the trouble.
F-2-306
4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
button.
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
the login service as necessary.
F-2-307
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-305
F-2-308
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) > Starting in Safe Mode
2-216
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) > How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title
bar of the browser.
2-217
How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
1) Startup level 2 of [ SERVICE MODE ].
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ USER ].
F-2-309
F-2-311
WARNING :
If the device has been started in the MEAP SAFE mode, all MEAP applications stop
and the status becomes "Installed".
3) Press
or
MEAPSAFE ].
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is cancelled and the
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup, and start the MEAP application.
F-2-312
F-2-310
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) > How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
2-217
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, click [ OK ]
button.
2-218
What to Prepare
PC connected with the same network as the device
Commercially available terminal software
F-2-313
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
as the terminal software.
Work Procedure
Device Setting Procedure
1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.
F-2-314
F-2-315
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-218
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-219
PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)
F-2-316
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
F-2-319
Connection
Host
Service
TCP port#
3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal] from the [Setup] menu.
F-2-317
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-320
F-2-318
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-219
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the
"OK" button.
2-220
6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
F-2-321
Terminal ID
New-line Receive
: VT100
: LF
F-2-323
F-2-324
F-2-322
F-2-325
Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-220
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-221
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.
Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.
F-2-329
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
F-2-326
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
F-2-327
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.
F-2-328
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-221
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-222
4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
F-2-333
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.
F-2-330
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.
F-2-335
F-2-331
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port
7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
destination.
number].
F-2-336
F-2-332
Technology > MEAP > Collection of MEAP Console Logs > Work Procedure
2-222
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Outline
2-223
Outline
For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP
server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these ports have already
used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use
the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.
HTTP server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8000]
F-2-337
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu.
Note:
Do not use port number 8080 when PS print server unit is connected. If the port
is used, you can not see the page for RUI of the device with MEAP authentication
application. (port 8080 is reserved for redirecting from PS print server unit to device.)
HTTPS server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443]
F-2-338
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function.
F-2-339
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Outline
2-223
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTP Server
2-224
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-2-342
F-2-340
3) Press
or
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then,
restart the device.
button.
F-2-343
F-2-341
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTP Server
2-224
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTPS Server
2-225
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then,
restart the device.
or
button.
F-2-346
F-2-344
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-2-345
Technology > MEAP > Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) > Port setup procedure of HTTPS Server
2-225
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver
2-226
Operating mode
Conventional USB
settings [Use MEAP
keyboard enabled MEAP
driver as USB input
application
device]
USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as system driver) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
ON
* MEAP driver
(conventional
compatibility mode)
OFF (*default)
* Native driver
Software keyboard
application
(System Driver/
MEAP Driver)
System driver
supported MEAP
application
Note:
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference
registration)
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP
restarted.
The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
restarted.
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver
2-226
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver
2-227
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at USB device report print described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible).
Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
plugged to iR device
USB Setting
Registration
[Use MEAP
Native System driver
status of USB
driver for USB application supported
device A
application
input device]
Not registered
Registered
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
YES
NO
NO
NO
MEAP application
System driver
Application with
not supported/
VID/PID declared
conventional
in Manifest for x
application
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be
remembered.
The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
be entered from the software keyboard.
Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
YES
YES
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
T-2-112
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
Setting to use
MEAP application
Registration
System
System driver
Application
MEAP driver
status of
USB
Native
driver
not supported with VID/PID
(Additional
USB device
device application
supported / conventional
declared in
Functions
B
application
application
Manifest for B
mode)
Registered
Not
registered
Not used
B
(Native driver to C
be used)
To be used
B
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
C
Not used
B
(Native driver to C
be used)
To be used
B
C
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Driver
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
T-2-113
2-227
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
2-228
When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
F-2-350
3) Press
or
F-2-351
F-2-349
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
2-228
2
3) Press
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
or
2-229
button.
********************************
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
USB device information
F-2-352
Vendor ID
VID=04A9
VID=1234
VID=4321
PID=2680
PID=5678
PID=8765
Product ID
F-2-355
F-2-353
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
F-2-354
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
2-229
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
2-230
P : Product
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
here.
Connecting device
HID
Storage
S : String
Report printing
Available
Yes
Available
Yes
Not available
No
IrDA
Not available
Yes
Not available
Yes
IC Card Reader
FAX
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
User installation
Not available
Yes
Not available
No
Hub
Internal Hub*
Not available
No
External Hub
Available
Yes
T-2-115
I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
can be recognized.
Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application.
Content
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the
usbhid
It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
usb-storage
It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are connected.
irda-usb IrDA
AppID : Application ID
hub
VID : Vendor ID
gpusb
It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the
input device connected.
gpusbex
It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and the
USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
PID : Product ID
T-2-114
E:Endpoint
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
Technology > MEAP > Using USB Devices > USB Device report print
2-230
Reference material
Glossary
Terms & Acronyms
Application
Application ID
Code Sign
CPCA
(Common Peripheral
Controlling
Architecture)
CPCA Java CL
(Class Library)
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
device.
Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID
authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management
turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification
ID
Esplet
(Esplet Type
Application)
File Description
HID class
iR Native application
ISV
(Independent
Software Vendor)
2-231
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular
Edition)
phones and PDA.
J2RE
(Java 2 Runtime
Environment)
Java
JavaScript
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native
instruction set.
License Access
Number
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires
entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers
Licensae File
LMS
The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license
System)
access numbers.
Login Service
MEAP (Multifunction
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
Platform)
platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
MEAP.
MEAP Contents
2-231
2-232
Terms & Acronyms
MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
SDK
(Software
Development Kit)
The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
Service
MEAP-enabled iR
device
MFP
(Multi Function
Peripheral)
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
Servlet
(Servlet Type
Application)
OSGi
(Open Service
Gateway Initiative)
Portal Service
The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
Protocol
Proxy Server
SMS
The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management.
Service)
Socket
Thread
URL
(Uniform Resource
Locator)
The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
[http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB
The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
T-2-116
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-232
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
2-233
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is
displayed), and press [OK] button.
Setting Procedure
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.
F-2-358
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-356
3) Press [UI-COPY].
F-2-357
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
2-233
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
2-234
screen (level 2)
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
F-2-360
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
Default value
1: No activation of warning display
Setting range, item
0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] button.
F-2-361
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-359
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
2-234
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
Embedded RDS
2-235
Features and benefits
E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview
Overview
Embedded RDS (hereafter, referred to as E-RDS, which stands for EMBEDDED-RDS)
is a network module embedded with a customer's device and enables e-Maintenance /
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System), which can collect and transmit status
changes, counter values, error logs, and consumable information such as the toner low/ out
of the device to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via
Internet.
Major Functions
Service Call Button
If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image, paper jam, or/and other problems
has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
Service Browser
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service persons in charge, and is
Parts counter
To grasp a device of which service browser has been enabled, E-RDS sends browser
Mode counter
Firmware info
When the service browser is enabled in the condition where it had been disabled (OFF)
Environment log
Alarm log
E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases.
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
communication between a device and a server using HTTPS/SOAP protocol.
When the setting for [COPIER] > [ADJUST] data is changed by the Service mode menu
When a communication test is executed for the first time (when no Service mode data has
been sent)
Internet
Proxy Server
DNS Server
Device
Firewall
UGW
Intranet
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-235
Limitations
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
1) At the time of transmission when an alarm / service call error is detected, even if the alarm
log or service call log detected is the target code for service mode menu transmission,
transmission of service mode menu data is not performed in the following cases.
An alarm log or service call log which has been detected by E-RDS as an unsent log
at the time of power-on
An alarm log or service call log waiting for retry after its transmission failed
When service mode menu transmission (when an alarm log or service call error was
detected) failed
Service mode menu data of which processing for acquisition has been already
performed when an alarm or service call error subject to service mode menu
2-236
Service cautions
1) After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform initalizing E-RDS
settings : [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and
communication test : [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COMTEST].
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
unusual.
System upgrade
HDD format and system installation
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [MN-CON]
: RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
transmission occurred
2) When an alarm / service call error occurred continuously AND when time correction
/ change was performed to the device main unit during the target log transmission
processing, a link number may be applied to the old log although it should be applied to the
new log.
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [ADJUST]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
5) When a communication test is performed for the first time in the condition where the
service mode menu transmission function is set to ON, service mode menu transmission
is included in the communication test, and it therefore takes longer time until results are
displayed than the communication test performed in the condition where the function is set
to OFF because acquisition / transmission of service mode menu data are performed.
2-236
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
E-RDS Setup
Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor a device with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
2-237
(3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make the iR
device network related settings in accordance with the following procedures.
1) Displaying the Settings / Registration screen
1. Touch the [Settings / Registration (User Mode)] button.
F-2-363
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
F-2-364
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-237
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
3. When DNS settings and proxy settings are not made, touch the [Close] button to
reboot the device.
2-238
3. Set the DNS server address based on the result obtained in Information item 2 under
"(2) Advance preparations", and touch the [OK] button.
Select [Primary DNS Server] and make settings.
When the secondary DNS server is installed, select [Secondary DNS Server] and
make settings.
F-2-365
3) DNS Settings
1. Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-367
4. When proxy settings are not made, touch the [Close] button to reboot the device.
F-2-366
2. Touch the [TCP/IP Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings]
F-2-368
buttons.
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-238
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
4) Proxy Settings
2-239
e) Set the following items based on the result obtained in Information item 4 under
1. Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-369
F-2-371
3. Set the proxy server based on the result obtained in Information item 3 under "(2)
Advance preparations".
a)
b)
c)
d)
F-2-372
F-2-370
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-239
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > E-RDS-related setting items
2-240
E-RDS-related setting items
Description
E-RDS
Set use/no use of E-RDS function
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) 0: Function not used / 1: Function used
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send
device information, counter data, error statuses to the
UGW.
Default : 0 (Function not used)
RGW-ADR
URL setting of UGW
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Max 128 characters
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif01
F-2-373
RGW-PORT
Set port number of UGW
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Validation : 1 to 65535
Default : 443
COM-TEST
Execution of a communication test with UGW / Display of
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) the result
Perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK!" or
"NG!" as the result.
COM-LOG
Display of detailed information about a communication
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) error with UGW
Error information of a connection failure with UGW is
displayed.
Error occurrence date and time, error code, and detailed
error information are displayed.
Max 30 latest loggings retained
Max 128 characters for Error information.
ERDS-DAT
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > CLEAR)
CA-KEY
([Lv.2] COPIER > Function > CLEAR)
Initialization of CA certificate
When the power is turned OFF/ON after execution, the CA
certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed.
T-2-117
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > E-RDS-related setting items
2-240
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-241
Steps to E-RDS settings
SCALLCMP
([Lv.1] COPIER > Option > USER)
Description
Description
BRWS-ACT
Execution of activation / inactivation of service browsing
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Browsing info is sent to UGW when OFF (BRWS-ACT=0)
is changed to ACTIVE.
Setting result is displayed as "OK!" or "NG!".
BRWS-STS
([Lv.1] COPIER > Display > USER)
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled, it cannot be disabled again.
To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
F-2-374
NOTE:
button at the center of the lower side of
When [Mode List] is selected, touching the
the screen displays explanation of each item or detailed operation guide.
In case of [Mode List Classic], this button is not appeared.
F-2-375
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-241
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
2-242
(2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.
F-2-377
F-2-376
3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot the device.
F-2-378
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-242
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
2-243
7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
F-2-379
CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
F-2-381
If the communication is successful, OK! is displayed. If NG! (failed) appears, refer to the
Troubleshooting and repeat until OK! is displayed.
F-2-380
F-2-382
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-243
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-244
NOTE:
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the bottom of the
counter check screen (displayed by touching the counter check button).
F-2-385
F-2-383
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].
F-2-384
F-2-386
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-244
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1
2-245
2. Touch the [Select/ Request] button.
or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-389
CAUTION:
F-2-387
NOTE:
In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service person needs to perform
processing for service call completion.
F-2-388
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
UGW.
F-2-390
2-245
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-246
Steps to Service Browser settings
F-2-391
2. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-393
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, OK! is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to Troubleshooting until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-392
F-2-394
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-246
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings
2-247
Initializing E-RDS settings
Initialization procedure
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
For the procedures, see Steps to E-RDS settings - step 1..
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].
F-2-395
5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-397
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
default CA certificate file.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings
2-247
FAQ
2-248
When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postServiceModeMenu (only when settings are
changed), service mode menu data is obtained and transmitted for every retry.
No.1
Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming case.
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.
When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postBrowserInfo (only when the license status
is changed in the Web browser option), browser information is saved in retry information
and the data is transmitted at the time of retry. However, when rebooting a device for which
retry information is being set, browser information is again obtained and transmitted.
In any cases, a retry is performed at interval of 5*n minutes (n: retries, 5, 10, 15 minutes)
up to 30 minutes.
No.5
No.2
Q: Let me know the interval of data transmitting from E-RDS to the UGW, and what data size
is sent to the UGW?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The timing is once per 16 hours by default, and counter data volume could be maximum
250 bytes.
No.3
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt?
A: Although the device's been connected with the PS server unit, the data of the
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system is able to pass through to the PS server unit.
Therefore the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system functions normally even if the PS
server unit is connected.
The screen of IP Address settings is disabled though, the item related to authentication can
be enabled.
A: "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA though, E-RDS must comply
with "Basic". Therefore if you can change to "Basic" authentication on the server, the
authentication with E-RDS can be done.
No.7
Q: Can I turn the device power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system
operation?
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time.
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment such
as HUB is made prolonged OFF.
No.4
Q: Does error-retry carry out at the time of a communication error with the UGW?
A: The retry of SOAP communication is performed as follows.
As for postAlert data, three times of data which failed transmitting to the UGW can be
stored in RAMDISK and will be resent at the predetermined interval. When forth error
occurred continuously, its data is stored in the HDD after eliminating the oldest data.
The retry data will be sent at interval of 5 * n minutes. (n: retries, 5, 10, 15minutesup to
30 min)
As to postJamLog, postServiceCallLog and postAlarmLog, these retries depend on the
No.8
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what?
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of a device immediately after
error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does not
take a time from the controller of the device to NIC though, the data will be saved on the
RAM.
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted.
CPCA data which saved internally. Therefore if the data remains, these retries will be done.
2-248
2-249
No.9
Transmission timing
Q: How does E-RDS operate while the device is placed in the sleep mode?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of data
transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again.
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition to
Transmitting data
COPIER
ADJUST
COPIER
DISPLAY
sleep won't be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.10
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Section counter (Department counter)?
A: No, E-RDS does not support Section counter.
No.11
Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
Error retry
Yes
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
ADJUST
transmission?
T-2-120
Transmitting data
COPIER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
No.12
Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?
A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
Transmission timing
Detailed procedure
When operation is
1) Make service browser
performed to enable service
settings in the service
browsing*
mode menu.
2) Send browser
(Only when the operation to
information to UGW.
enable service browsing is
3) When OK is received
performed in the condition
from UGW, set
where [disabling:OFF] is set)
"enabling: 1: Active".
(To use the setting, it is
necessary to reboot the
device)
Transmission
information
Error occurs
2-249
Transmission timing
When the Web browser
option license is entered /
transferred
Detailed procedure
Transmission
information
2-250
No.1
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
Remedy1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which the main unit is connected ON?
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
T-2-121
Troubleshooting
Error occurs
F-2-398
2-250
2-251
(b) Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-399
F-2-401
(c) Select [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS
server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
and then touch Start.
Is the response from the host displayed?
YES: Proceed to Remedy2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the user's system administrator.
F-2-400
2-251
2-252
3) When each line is selected, the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown
in the figure below. (Example: No.05)
F-2-403
NOTE:
A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
Touch the [OK] button to return to the log screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Causes: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
E-EDS have been changed.
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
Check the communication log from COM-LOG.
F-2-402
Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGWPORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "E-RDS setting
items".
NOTE:
Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication log list screen.
In the log, text strings that start with * are communication test (COM-TEST) error logs.
2-252
2-253
No.3
Symptom: Registration information of an E-RDS is once deleted from the UGW server, and is
re-registered after that. If a communication test is not performed, then device information
on the UGW becomes invalid.
Causes: When registration of the E-RDS is deleted from the UGW, the status will be changed
to that the communication test has not completed because related information has lost from a
database.
The following error information is output in the communication error log details display screen.
(Here, "a server" means UGW.)
For No.1 and No.2, only character strings of errors are displayed as error information.
The error information except above, these are displayed in the following form.
[*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW]
So, device information will also become invalid if that condition will be left for seven days
* : Error strings head "*" is added to the error generated by the communication test.
No. Code
LOG list.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
0xxx
00F2
8xxx
2001
8xxx
200A
8xxx
2002
8xxx
2014
8xxx
201E
8xxx
2015
Proxy address
resolution error
8xxx
2028
Server certificate
error
SUSPEND:
Communication test
is not performed.
Event Registration
is Failed
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test ([SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] >
[INSTALL] > [COM-TEST]), and check that the test with UGW finishes successfully.
Cause
0500
0003
No.4
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COM-
Error strings
Remedy
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
Turn the device OFF/ ON.
If the error persists, replace the
device system software. (Upgrade)
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.
ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
Check the network connection, as
per the initial procedures described
in the troubleshooting.
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.
ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
Check proxy server address and reenter as needed.
2-253
2
No. Code
Error strings
10
8xxx
2029
Server certificate
verify error
11
8xxx
2046
Server certificate
expired
12
13
14
15
16
17
Cause
The server certificate
verification error occurred.
2-254
Remedy
No. Code
18
8xxx
2047
19
8xxx
2048
20
0xxx
0003
21
0xxx
0003
8xxx
2003
23
8xxx
2052
24
8xxx
200B
Server address
resolution error
25
0xxx
0003
8xxx
0221
Communication test
is not performed
Server specified list
is too big
26
Try again after a period of time.
Check detailed error code
(hexadecimal) from UGW displayed
after the message.
Turn the device OFF/ ON.
Or replace the device system
software. (Upgrade)
When the error occurs, report the
details to the support section.
And then, after the UGW side has
responded, try the communication
test again.
Cause
22
Try again after a period of time.
If the error persists, check the UGW
status with the UGW administrator.
Check that the value of port number
of UGW (RGW-PORT) is 443.
Try again after a period of time.
If the error persists, check the UGW
status with the UGW administrator.
Error strings
27
8xxx
0222
28
xxxx
xxxx
8300
0306
29
30
8300
0306
31
8xxx
0304
Server response
time out
Remedy
If this error occurs when the
communication test is being run or
Service Browser is being set, try
again after a period of time.
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.
ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS) to 1, and
then perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
Check the device settings status
with the UGW administrator.
Check the network connection, as
per the initial procedures described
in the troubleshooting.
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
later, after turn on the device.
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.
ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.
ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010.
Perform and complete a
communication test (COM-TEST).
The number of elements of alert
filtering is specified correctly.
2-254
2
No. Code
32
33
34
8xxx
0207 0208
8xxx
0004
8xxx
0709
Error strings
Cause
2-255
Remedy
2-255
2-256
Updater
Overview
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System
Firmware Installation
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
UGW
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS via Internet. Particularly
on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices, firmware can be
updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
CDS
Updater
Firmware Upload
Firmware
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
devices.
Canon Inc.
Installing Firmware
If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
methods.
a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
Distribution Method
a. UGW-linked Download / Update
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download
(Remote Distribution / Update)
c. Manual Download / Update
(On-site Update via Service mode)
Download
Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update
Previous
Current
Newer
Commanded
Timing
Ver
Ver
Ver
by:
UGW
Auto
No
Yes
Yes*1
UGW
Manual
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local UI
Auto
Manual
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
UGW
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
T-2-123
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Service
Technician
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
2-256
2-257
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled
by applying CDS.
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation
CDS
Updater
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
or a system option.
Installing MEAP Application
Service
2) Firmware distribution
Technician
LAN
F-2-406
NOTE:
External network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
User
Download
Distribution Method Commanded
by
Manual download/
update via Local UI
Manual download/
upload via Remote UI
Special download/
upload via Remote UI
Periodical update via
Local UI
Local UI
Remote UI
Update
Timing
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
Remote UI
Local UI
Auto
No
No
No
No
No
Specific version only
(Obtain it separately)
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
NOTE:
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
LAN
Sales
Company
LMS
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
MEAP
Application
3) Create LF
Manual
Upload
Application
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
4) Transmit MEAP
Application/LF
Canon Inc.
Yes *1
T-2-124
2-257
2-258
System Configuration
LAN
Sales
Company
LMS
User
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
Manual
Upload
Updater
Firmware
eRDS
Canon Inc.
4) Transmit LF
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
LMS
Application/License
Application
Manual
Readme
License
Access No.
3) Create LF
Dealer
MEAP application
Manual
Internet
User
Sales
Company
CDS
Application
Firmware
Business
Group
UGW
Service
Technician
QA
Canon Inc.
F-2-409
F-2-408
2-258
Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow
2-259
List of Functions
Distribution Flow
Firmware Installation Flow
Function
Firmware
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
Service
Mode
User
Mode
Remote
UI
UGWlinked
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-125
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)
Automatic download
Automatic update
d
b
Firmware acquisition
periodical download
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Periodical update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
*Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50.00.
F-2-410
Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow
2-259
2-260
Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
: User operation
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
scheduled.
Application
Market Release
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
Change of Setting from Service mode
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
Cautions
Concurrent use of Updater functions
Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with
Remote UI.
License Key
Acquisition
(from LMS)
License File
Acquisition
(from LMS)
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Install distributed
application
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
System Option
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
System Option
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
MEAP Application
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
F-2-411
2-260
2-261
Report Print
SEND
Receiving
Wait for EOJ
(end of job)
Wait for EOJ
Cancel
processing to
trigger update *
-
Printing
Queued print
jobs
Sending
Queued send
jobs
Cancel
Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
T-2-126
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
Caution:
The following firmware versions do not support Wait for EOJ Function.
iR-ADV V5000 series: V40.17 or earlier
iR-ADV V7000/9000 series: V40.18 or earlier
For the versions above, triggering firmware update will cancel all COPY/PDL jobs
submitted and/or queued. Only jobs with power-off safeguard (Fax/ I-Fax/ Auto-Report
Print) are recovered after reboot.
2-261
2-262
Overview of Preparation
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
[Update
[Manual
Periodical
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Update] Button update
Companys Settings UGW Link
Button of User of User Mode validation
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-2-127
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-128
2-262
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
Network Settings
Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
2-263
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-2-412
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
2-263
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
2-264
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the
[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
F-2-413
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-2-414
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
2-264
Communication Test
2-265
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all
means even if You succeed in a communication test of the Embedded RDS.
F-2-416
F-2-418
2-265
2-266
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
NOTE:
F-2-419
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-420
2-266
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
2-267
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):
F-2-421
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
F-2-423
F-2-422
F-2-424
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
2-267
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2-268
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-425
F-2-426
Periodical validation
Service
Technician
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2-268
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server
2-269
Various Setting
Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
F-2-428
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
F-2-429
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server
2-269
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level
2-270
4. Press [Settings] button.
F-2-431
F-2-430
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level
2-270
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs
2-271
Displaying Logs
Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
F-2-432
[Log Level]:
Trace
Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
0
1
2
3
4
Log Output
Important Message Ordinary Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output
Trace
Information
Important Message
Ordinary Error
System Error
Description
Detailed logs for debug
Logs related to operations done on the system
Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Logs for ordinary errors
Logs for internal system errors
F-2-433
T-2-131
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs
2-271
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs
2-272
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-434
F-2-436
System Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
F-2-435
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs
2-272
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs
2-273
5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
F-2-437
F-2-439
F-2-438
F-2-440
NOTE:
See Chapter6 "Debug Logs" for how to obtain System Log.
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs
2-273
Communication Test
2-274
4. Press [Test Communication] button.
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.
You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a
communication test of the RDS.
F-2-442
F-2-443
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
F-2-441
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
2-274
2-275
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-444
2-275
Upgrading Updater
2-276
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See
Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded
version.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
2-276
2-277
The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Overview of Preparation"
No steps follow.
Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM)
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
"Overview of Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
2-277
2-278
No.4
Q: In the course of UGW-linked download, what will happen if the user downloads the
No.1
firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW-linked
download before?
Distribution Method
Downgrade Possibility
The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode-linked download and UGW-
No
Yes
Yes
No
linked download can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
No.2
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in manual download and update
compared to update via SST?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in manual download and
update compared to update via SST (It depend on network environment.).
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, manual download and update
takes less time compared to update via SST because updating the firmware to multiple
devices can be executed simultaneously.
When the network line of the user is slow, update via CDS becomes slow in comparison
with the SST. Because speed is displayed by a communication test, You refer to it.
As for the aim of the downloading time, transmission rate is 6 or 7 minutes in the case of
1000KB/sec. (There is a difference in a device and a version of Firmware, accessories and
the quantity of the language files).
No.5
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
schedule has been set in manual download and update?
A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
valid.
No.6
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.7
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
firmware version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW-linked download
and update done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion.
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.
technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on
Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.
No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
2-278
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-279
No.9
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
No.1
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
No.3
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
F-2-445
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with ,
(comma) or ; (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
on the network environment.
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-279
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
No.1
A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
For updating firmware
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
2-280
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware] Update] Button
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Periodical
update
validation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, Cancel button is displayed.
T-2-133
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-134
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-280
Periodic Service
Periodic Service
Service Operation Item
Periodical
3-2
As needed
6000K
2000K
1500K
1000K
600K
500K
300K
250K
120K
At installation
1
2
Part Name
Part No
Number
No. Category
FM3-7288
FL3-4558
1
2
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
PRM-UNIT
PRM-WIRE
PRDC-1
PRM-CLN
PRDC-1
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
PRM-GRID
PO-UNIT
PO-WIRE
PRDC-1
PO-CLN
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DVG-CYL
CLN-BLD
SP-CLAW
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
BS-SL-F
BS-SL-R
EXP-SCRP
-
Counter
Remark
FL2-0462
FL2-2720
5
6
7
Grid Wire
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging Wire
FY1-0883 AR
FM4-3149 1
FL3-4559 1
8
9
10
11
12
1
1
1
1
3
13
14
15
16
17
18
FC8-7086
FC8-7086
FC9-9153
-
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
3-2
3-3
: Replacement (Periodical replacement) : Replacement (Consumable parts) : Cleaning : Lubrication : Adjustment : Inspection
Interval
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Part No
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FC8-7160
FC8-7159
FC9-9022
FC6-1647
FC5-2286
FL3-3601
FC9-8069
FC6-3501
FK2-7692
FK2-7693
FK2-7693
FM4-3158
FC9-6170
-
As needed
6000K
2000K
1500K
1000K
600K
500K
300K
250K
120K
At installation
28
Part Name
Number
No. Category
Remark
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
4
Counter
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
PRDC-1
PRDC-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
-
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
T-CN-BRU
T-CLN-BD
FX-WEB
FX-UP-RL
FX-IN-BS
FX-RTNR
FIX-TH1
FIX-TH2
FIX-TH2
FX-LW-RL
FX-L-STC
-
Using lint-free paper, clean the drum with the drum cleaning powder
(FY9-6024).
Clean with lint-free paper moistened
Remove toner which was scattered at removal of Developing Assembly.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Remove toner on the tray.
Clean when the message is displayed.
3-3
3-4
: Replacement (Periodical replacement) : Replacement (Consumable parts) : Cleaning : Lubrication : Adjustment : Inspection
Interval
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Filter
Ozone Filter
Dustproof Filter
Part No
FB5-3625
FC5-2524
As needed
6000K
2000K
1500K
1000K
600K
500K
300K
250K
120K
At installation
60
Part Name
Number
No. Category
Counter
Remark
DRBL-1
DLV-UCLW
DRBL-1
FC5-2526
DRBL-1
FC5-2528
DRBL-1
FC5-2524
DRBL-1
FC5-2526
DRBL-1
FC5-2528
DRBL-1
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
-
1
1
1
2
1
4
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
-
3: C3-PU-RL
4: C4-PU-RL
3: C3-FD-RL
4: C4-FD-RL
3: C3-SP-RL
4: C4-SP-RL
Right: C1-PU-RL
Left: C2-PU-RL
Right: C1-FD-RL
Left: C2-FD-RL
Right: C1-SP-RL
Left: C2-SP-RL
M-SP-RL
M-FD-RL
-
FL3-2134
FC8-9564
1
1
PRDC-1
PRDC-1
OZ-FIL1
AR-FIL1
T-3-1
3-4
List
Controller
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
Fixing
System
Pickup/Feed
Auxiliary System
External
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
List of Parts
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[3]
[15]
4-2
Name
Upper Cover
Upper Left Cover
Upper Middle Cover
Upper Right Cover
Toner Exchange Cover
Front Cover
Deck Left Cover
Deck Right Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Left Front Cover
Left Lower Cover
Left Handle Cover
Delivery Cover
Finisher Connector Cover
Left Upper Cover
Reference
FM3-9953
FC9-0376
FM3-9909
FC8-2366
FL3-3812
FC8-9562
FC8-7354
FC8-7353
FC8-2495
FC8-2495
FC9-7044
FC9-0152
FC8-7033
FC9-0156
FC9-9103
FC9-0155
T-4-1
[5]
[6]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[10]
[11]
F-4-1
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
4-2
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
No
[17]
[33]
[32]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[31]
[30]
[18]
[29]
[28]
[19]
[27]
4-3
Name
Reference
FC9-5464
FC9-0080
FC8-7016
FC8-9566
FL3-2142
FC9-0157
FC9-0078
FC9-0081
FC8-7347
FC9-0077
FC8-7033
FC8-9353
FC8-7290
FL3-5030
FC8-7274
FC9-0088
FC9-0079
T-4-2
[26]
[20]
[25]
[24]
[21]
[23]
[22]
F-4-2
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
4-3
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-4
Process Unit
Fixing Assembly
Hopper Unit
F-4-3
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-4
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Name
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
FM4-0899
FM3-7531
FM4-0883
NPN
FM3-7291
FM4-0959
4-5
Reference
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-5
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-6
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Registration Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
ETB Unit
Reverse Delivery Unit
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-6
4
No
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
Name
FM3-7379
NPN
FM3-7367
FM4-0964
FM4-0963
FM4-0943
FM4-0963
FM4-0963
FM4-5156
FM4-5316
FM4-0913
FM4-0916
4-7
Reference
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-7
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-8
Controller Box
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-8
4
No
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
Name
FM3-4810
NPN
FM4-0975
FM3-7386
NPN
FM3-7374
NPN
4-9
Reference
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-9
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-10
Developing Assembly
Pre-exposure Scraper
Pre-exposure Scraper
Drum Side Seal (R)
Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Separation Claw
Drum Side Seal (F)
F-4-6
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-10
4
No
Name
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
Main Unit
Developing Assembly
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Process Uni
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Drum Cleaning Unit
Reference
"Removing the Developing Assembly"(page 4-130).
"Removing the Side Seal"(page 4-129).
"Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade"(page 4-119).
"Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw"(page 4-129).
"Removing the Side Seal"(page 4-129).
"Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film"(page 4-122).
4-11
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-11
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-12
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner Holder
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner
Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaner
Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaner Holder
F-4-7
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-12
4
No
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
Name
Main Unit
Reference
Process Unit
FM3-7288
Process Unit
FM4-3149
FB4-3687
FL3-4558
FB4-3687
FL3-4559
FL2-0462
FL2-2720
FY1-0883
FL2-0462
FL2-2720
4-13
Adjustment during
parts replacement
"Primary Charging
Assembly"(page
5-7).
"Pre-transfer
Charging
Assembly"(page
5-9).
"Primary Charging
Wire"(page 5-7).
"Pre-transfer
Charging Wire"(page
5-9).
T-4-7
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-13
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
ETB
4-14
Transfer Roller
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-14
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
Main Unit
ETB
Transfer Roller
ETB Cleaning Blade
Brush Roller
ETB Unit
ETB Unit
ETB Cleaning Unit
ETB Cleaning Unit
Reference
"Removing the ETB Unit"(page 4-135).
"Removing the Transfer Roller"(page 4-139).
"Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade"(page 4-140).
"Removing the ETB Brush Roller"(page 4-140).
4-15
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-15
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-16
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Roller
Insulating Bush
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2
(THM4)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-16
4
No
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
Name
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
FK2-7693
FK2-7692
FL3-3602
Fixing Assembly
FC9-8069
Fixing Assembly
FC6-3501
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
FK2-7693
FC5-2286
FC9-6170
FM4-3158
FB5-3625
Reference
"Removing the Sub Thermistor 1"(page 4-191).
"Removing the Main Thermistor"(page 4-190).
"Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper"(page
4-185).
"Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper"(page
4-185).
"Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper"(page
4-185).
"Removing the Sub Thermistor 2"(page 4-192).
"Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web"(page 4-180).
"Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator"(page 4-189).
"Removing the Pressure Roller"(page 4-188).
"Removing the Upper Separation Claw"(page 4-193).
4-17
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-17
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-18
Dustproof Filter
Cassette 3 Separation Roller
Ozone Filter
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-18
4
No
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
Reference
FB1-8581
FC6-6661
FC5-2524
FC5-2528
FC5-2526
FC5-2528
FC5-2524
FC5-2526
FC5-2528
FC5-2526
FC5-2524
FC5-2528
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
FC5-2526
FC5-2524
FC8-9564
FL3-2134
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Main Unit
4-19
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts
4-19
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-20
Pre-exposure Scraper
Drum Edge
Drum
Pre-exposure Scraper
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-20
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Name
Main Unit
4-21
Reference
"Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-121).
"Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-121).
"Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-121).
"Cleaning the Process Unit"(page 4-117).
"Cleaning the Process Unit"(page 4-117).
"Cleaning the Process Unit"(page 4-117).
"Cleaning Photosensitive Drum"(page 4-127).
"Cleaning the Drum edges"(page 4-128).
"Cleaning the Developing Assembly"(page 4-133).
"Cleaning the Developing Assembly"(page 4-133).
"Cleaning the Developing Assembly"(page 4-133).
T-4-11
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-21
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-22
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-22
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Name
Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Dust Collection Roller
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Roller Electrode Area
Drum Cleaning Unit Toner Collection Area
Patch Sensor
ETB Drive Roller
ETB Idler Roller
Toner Receptacle Tray
Waste Toner Container
Main Unit
Primary Charging Assembly
Primary Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Drum Cleaning Unit
Process Unit
ETB
ETB
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
4-23
Reference
"Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-107).
"Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-107).
"Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-114).
"Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-114).
"Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-114).
"Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-114).
"Cleaning the Process Unit"(page 4-117).
"Cleaning the ETB"(page 4-138).
"Cleaning the ETB"(page 4-138).
"Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray"(page 4-157).
"Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit"(page 4-167).
T-4-12
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-23
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-24
Fixing Assembly
Inner Delivery Roller
Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
Dowel Holder
Dowel
F-4-13
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-24
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Name
Fixing Inlet Guide
Fixing Right Stay
Dowel
Dowel Holder
Fixing Oil Pan
Upper Separation Claw
Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag
Inner Delivery Roller
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
4-25
Reference
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan"(page 4-180).
"Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw"(page 4-194).
"Cleaning the Fixing Roller Static Eliminator"(page 4-182).
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller"(page 4-179).
T-4-13
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-25
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-26
Registration Unit
Feed Guide
Right Door Unit
Feed Guide
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-26
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Name
Main Unit
Registration Unit
Reverse Delivery Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Product Specification
Right Door Unit
Right Lower Door Unit
4-27
Reference
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
T-4-14
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-27
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-28
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-28
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Name
Main Unit
4-29
Reference
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
T-4-15
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-29
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-30
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Pickup Feed Drive Unit
PS29
PS24
PS64
PS19
PS65
PS20
PS28
PS66
PS67
PS21
PS22
Cassette3
Pickup Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
F-4-16
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-30
4
No
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Name
Main Unit
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS64
PS66
PS67
4-31
Reference
"Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller /Cleaning the Right Deck Pickup
Sensor 2 (PS19)"(page 4-200).
"Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller /Cleaning the Left Deck Pickup
Sensor 2 (PS20)"(page 4-199).
"Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller /Cleaning the Cassette 3
Pickup Sensor 2 (PS21)"(page 4-203).
"Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller /Cleaning the Cassette 4
Pickup Sensor 1 (PS22)"(page 4-205).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-209).
T-4-16
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-31
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-32
Dust-Proof Glass
F-4-17
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-32
4
No
Name
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
Main Unit
Product Configuration
4-33
Reference
"Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass"(page 4-96).
T-4-17
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-33
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-34
List of Fan
FM17
FM16
FM33
FM7
FM2
FM31
FM30
FM32
FM41
FM4
Power Supply
FM42
FM5
FM40
FM3
FM14
FM15
F-4-18
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-34
4
No
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM8
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM30
FM31
FM32
FM33
FM40
FM41
FM42
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan
Name
Primary Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
Making Image Exhaust Fan
Main Controller Cooling Fan
Paper Cooling Fan
Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan
Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
Laser Scanner Cooling Fan
Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
Developing Assembly Lower Cooling Fan
Developing Assembly Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
Feed Driver Cooling Fan
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Main Unit
4-35
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Reference
FK2-7678
FL3-3866
FK2-8276
FH6-1548
FK2-7678
FK2-3149
FK2-0360
FK2-2064
FK2-3100
FK2-3100
FK2-3149
FK2-3149
FK2-3149
FK2-7241
FK2-7241
FK2-3100
FK2-7241
T-4-18
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-35
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-36
Process Unit
SL2
SL11
SL10
SL5
SL9
SL12
Fixing Assembly
F-4-19
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-36
4
No
SL2
SL5
SL9
SL10
SL11
SL12
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
Name
Main Unit
4-37
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
T-4-19
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-37
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-38
CL5
CL1
SL6
SL7
SL3
SL4
F-4-20
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-38
4
No
CL1
SL3
SL4
CL5
SL6
SL7
Name
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
Main Unit
Developing Clutch
Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid
Magnet Roller Clutch
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
Developing Assembly
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Hopper Unit
Right Deck Pickup Unit
Left Deck Pickup Unit
FK2-7684
FL3-4906
FL3-4906
FK2-7685
FL3-4906
FL3-4906
4-39
Reference
T-4-20
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-39
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-40
List of Motor
Buffer Assembly
Hopper Unit
Process Unit
ETB Unit
M10
M6
M28
M7
M3
Fixing Assembly
M43
F-4-21
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-40
4
No
M3
M6
M7
M10
M28
M43
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
Name
Main Unit
Fixing Motor
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Toner Supply Motor
Toner Feed Motor
ETB Motor
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
Process Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
ETB Unit
4-41
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
T-4-21
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-41
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-42
M13
M32
M16
M18
M19
M14
F-4-22
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-42
4
No
M13
M14
M16
M18
M19
M32
M44
Name
Delivery Motor
Reverse Motor
Side Registration Motor
Duplex Feed Right Motor
Duplex Feed Left Motor
Duplex Feed Merging Motor
Polygon Motor
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
Main Unit
Outer Delivery Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
4-43
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
T-4-22
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-43
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-44
M1
M34
M2
M33
M26
M31
M11
M24
M4
M27
M20
M5
M12
M21
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-44
4
No
M1
M2
M4
M5
M11
M12
M20
M21
M24
M26
M27
M31
M33
M34
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
Name
Main Unit
Drum Motor
Developing Motor
Right Deck Lifter Motor
Left Deck Lifter Motor
Right Deck Pickup Motor
Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor
Cassette 3 Lifter Motor
Cassette 4 Lifter Motor
Left Deck Pickup Motor
Vertical Path Upper Motor
Vertical Path Lower Motor
Vertical Path Middle Motor
Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor
Registration Motor
4-45
Service Parts No.
FK2-7671
FK2-7667
FM2-4663
FM2-4663
FK2-7674
FK2-7675
FK2-0016
FK2-0016
FK2-7674
FK2-7675
FK2-7675
FK2-7675
FK2-7675
FK2-7674
Reference
T-4-23
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-45
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-46
List of Sensor
Developing Assembly
Process Unit
PS29
TS1
PS90
PS24
PS51
PS4
PS61
PS45
PS52
Fixing Assembly
F-4-24
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-46
4
No
PS4
PS24
PS29
PS45
PS51
PS52
PS61
PS90
PS96
TS1
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
Name
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Vertical Path Unit
Pickup Feed Drive Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Drum Drive Unit
Process Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Developing Assembly
4-47
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
T-4-24
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-47
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-48
Upper High Voltage Unit
Hopper Unit
Buffer Assembly
PS54
TS3
UN13
PS23
TS2
PS56
PS55
PS35
PS66
PS65
PS28
PS64
PS67
PS36
PS25
PS31
PS2
F-4-25
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-48
4
No
PS2
PS23
PS25
PS28
PS31
PS35
PS36
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS64
PS65
PS66
PS67
TS2
TS3
UN13
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
Name
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
Side Registration Sensor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Toner Exchange Cover Open/Close Sensor
Transfer Belt Engage Sensor
Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Buffer Toner Sensor 1
Buffer Toner Sensor 2
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor
Main Unit
4-49
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
FK2-6470
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
FK2-6470
FK2-6470
FK2-6470
FK2-6470
FK2-7713
FK2-7713
FH7-7600
Reference
T-4-25
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-49
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-50
PS8
PS6
PS19
PS32
PS7
Cassette1 Pickup Unit
PS3
PS94
PS95
PS68
PS17
PS21
PS26
PS20
PS47
PS11
PS48
PS13
PS49
PS50
PS70
PS69
PS73
PS72
PS71
PS18
PS22
PS27
PS26
PS14
THU1
Cassette4 Pickup Unit
F-4-26
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-50
4
No
PS3
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS26
PS27
PS32
PS33
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS50
PS68
PS69
PS70
PS71
PS72
PS73
PS94
PS95
THU1
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
Name
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Paper Sensor
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Paper Sensor
Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor
Cassette 4 Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1
Vertical Path Sensor 3
Vertical Path Sensor 4
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2
Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Open/Close Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Open/Close Sensor
Environment Sensor
Main Unit
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Primary Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Main Body
4-51
Service Parts No.
Reference
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
FM3-7307
T-4-26
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-51
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-52
List of Switch
SW1
SW6
Waste Toner Unit
SW5
Power Supply Unit
SW2
SW7
SW9
SW8
SW3
SW10
SW4
F-4-27
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-52
4
No
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch
Name
Power Switch
Front Door Open Detection Switch
Environment Switch
Cassette Heater Switch
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch
Multi Door Switch
Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch
Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch
Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch
Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch
Main Unit
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Waste Toner Unit
Product configuration
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
4-53
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
WC2-5688
WC4-5125
WC1-5179
WC1-5179
FM4-1029
FL3-1271
WC2-5680
WC2-5680
WC2-5680
WC2-5680
T-4-27
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-53
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-54
List of PCB
PCB50
Fixing Feed Unit
PCB51
PCB13
PCB52
Controller Unit
PCB9
PCB4
HDD
PCB34
PCB2
PCB1
PCB55
PCB29
PCB6(100V)
PCB7(200V)
PCB3
PCB8 PCB5
PCB33
PCB17(100V)
PCB18(200V)
PCB30
PCB31
F-4-28
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-54
4
No
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
PCB13
PCB17
PCB18
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
PCB33
PCB33
PCB34
PCB50
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
Name
DC Controller PCB
Main Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Relay PCB
AC Driver PCB(100V)
AC Driver PCB(200V)
DC-DC Converter PCB
DC-DC Converter PCB
Transfer High Voltage PCB
Noise Filter(100V)
Noise Filter(200V)
DC Power Supply(12V)
DC Power Supply(24V)
DC Power Supply(24V)
All-night Power Supply PCB
All-night Power Supply PCB
Transfer High Voltage Registance PCB
Main Controller PCB 1
Main Unit
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
4-55
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
"DC Controller PCB"(page 5-12).
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-55
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-56
PCB12
PCB32
PCB35
PCB26
PCB10
PCB11
PCB15
PCB36
PCB54
PCB24
PCB23
PCB19
PCB20
Process Unit
Process Unit
PCB27(200V)
PCB28(100V)
F-4-29
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-56
4
No
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
Name
Main Unit
PCB10
PCB11
PCB12
PCB15
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
FM4-1099
FM4-1093
FM4-1094
FM4-1096
PCB19
PCB20
PCB23
PCB24
PCB26
PCB27
PCB28
PCB32
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
FM4-5148
FM4-1102
FM4-5148
FM4-1102
FM4-1106
FM4-1107
FM4-1108
FM4-1096
Product configuration
PCB36 BD PCB
Product configuration
Product configuration
4-57
Adjustment during parts replacement
Refernce
T-4-29
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-57
4-58
Heater,others
UN75
VA
LE1
THM2
THM4
EPC1
TP1
VA
VA
THM1
Process Unit
H1
TP2
H3
Fixing Assembly
H2
CB1001
CB1002
CB1004
F-4-30
4-58
4
No
H1
LE1
H2
H3
TP1
TP2
THM1
THM2
THM4
EPC1
CB1001
CB1002
CB1004
Name
Main Unit
Drum Heater
Process Unit
Pre-exposure LED
Multi Cassette Heater
Fixing Heater
Fixing Thermal Switch 1
Fixing Thermal Switch 2
Fixing Main Thermistor
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2
Potential Sensor
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Process Unit
Product configuration
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
Product configuration
Product configuration
Product configuration
4-59
Adjustment during parts replacement
Reference
FK2-7723(JP)
FK2-7724(US)
FK2-7725(EUR)
FM3-7292
FM3-8915
FM4-5160
FK2-7698
FK2-7679
FK2-7692
FK2-7693
FK2-7693
FM4-1096
FK2-7359
FK2-7359
FK2-7357
T-4-30
4-59
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-60
Connector List
4
2
3
16
6
7
17
8
11
10
33
32
13
12
15
21
29
31 30
14
24
19
20
25
26
27
28
34
22
23
18
F-4-31
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-60
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
14
15
15
15
16
17
33
J401
J411
J412
J413
J414
J421
J431
J432
J441
J442
J451
J461
J461
J462
J471
J472
J472
J472
J491
J493
J463
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
4-61
Intermediate Connector
J3017
J3002
J3002
J3123
J3130
J3241
J9040
J9040
J9043
J3018
J3018
J3011
J3011
J2087
J2102
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
J518
J126
J125
J124
J128
J204
J300
J301
J21
J22
J514
J5100
J403
J2159
J5101
J4500
PCB5
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
PCB51
PCB51
PCB5
PCB35
PCB36
M44
PCB35
PCB55
Parts Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Main Controller PCB 2
Main Controller PCB 2
Relay PCB
DECK LATTICE
DECK LATTICE
FINISHER LATTICE
Laser Driver PCB
BD PCB
Polygon Motor
Laser Driver PCB
ARCNET PCB
T-4-31
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-61
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-62
30
40
28
44
36
21
22
20
25
34
24
19
27
41
16
11
35
23
39
29
32
31
45
10
8
6
9
7
3
13
37
24
26
33
46
12
42
14
43
4
5
1
18
17
38
15
F-4-32
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-62
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
J101
J102
J103
J103
J103
J103
J104
J104
J104
J104
J105
J105
J105
J105
J105
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
Parts Name
7
7
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
J107
J107
J107
J107
J107
J108
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J110
J110
J152
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB19
12
J153
PCB20
4-63
Intermediate Connector
J3174
J3251
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3200
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3207
J3208
J3208
J3210
J3211
J3211
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3209
J3209
J3177
J3177
J3177
J3177
J3060
J3060
J3060
J3060
J3255
J3272
J3272
J3167
J3167
J3122
J3101
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J515
J2009
J615
J2136
J2140
J3050
J2161
J3204
J3206
J3271
J1
J2162
J2164
J2165
J2166
J2001
J2002
J2003
J2005
J2053
PCB5
M13
PCB6,7
PS36
PS96
SW5
PS45
THM4
THM2
THM1
M3
SL9
PS51
PS52
PS4
SL2
PS23
UN13
PS24
PS28
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
-
J2137
J2143
J3049
J2141
J151
J522
J2004
J2006
J2007
J2008
J2138
J2139
J3253
-
PS61
PS90
SL10
LED03
PCB19
PCB5
FM33
CL1
FM16
FM17
M1
M2
SW2
SW6
PCB20
Relay PCB
Delivery Motor
AC Driver PCB
Outer Delivery Sensor
Fixed Feed Lever Sensor
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch
Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1
Fixing Main Thermistor
Fixing Motor
Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Outlet Sensor
Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor
Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor1
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Last paper
Sensor
Drum Home Position Sensor
Patch Sensor
Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
LE1
Pre-tranfer Charging Contact A PCB
Relay PCB
Pre-transfer Charging Exhaust Fan
Developing Clutch
Laser Scanner Cooling Fan
Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
Drum Motor
Developing Motor
Front Door Open Detection Switch
Multi Door Switch
Pre-tranfer Charging Contact B PCB
Parts Name
46
J3107
M6
REMARKS
T-4-32
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-63
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-64
13
28
25
29
27
26
38
37
20
22
11
12
35
24
39
36
21
15
23
33
16
30
14
41
18
40
10
6
7
8
9
31
17
34
19
32
F-4-33
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-64
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
J111
J112
J112
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J115
J115
J115
J115
J115
J117
J118
J119
J119
J127
J129
J129
J130
J130
J130
J130
J130
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
Parts Name
11
12
13
J152
J153
J3
PCB23
PCB24
PCB32
Contact A PCB
Contact B PCB
Voltage Control PCB
4-65
Intermediate Connector
J3097
J3098
J3098
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3063
J3016
J3112
J3112
J3176
J3231
J3231
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3169
J3089
J3089
J3089
J3055
J3089
J3089
J3089
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3080
J3200
J3200
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3252
J3047
J2133
J3168
J3106
J3124
J3124
J3124
J3124
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3170
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
J3501
J3511
J3544
J2029
J2132
J3048
J3510
J1
J151
J2034
J2035
J2036
J2038
J2039
J2037
J502
J501
J9130
J614
J3202
J3203
J2114
J2131
J2170
J2171
J2177
PCB11
PCB12
PCB26
PS94
PS3
THU1
PCB54
TS1
PCB32
PCB23
PS54
M28
CL5
TS2
TS3
M10
PCB10
PCB10
FM7
PCB6,7
TP1
TP2
PS95
FM2
FM30
FM31
FM32
40
41
J3108
J3172
PCB24
M7
PCB15
REMARKS
T-4-33
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-65
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-66
32
28
35
27
13
14
21
20
30
34
23
4
12
24
22
25
26
16
33
29
15
17
31
18
11
10
19
F-4-34
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-66
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
J201
J211
J211
J212
J212
J213
J214
J215
J218
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J222
J222
J222
J222
J222
J222
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Intermediate Connector
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3132
J3132
J3634
J3028
J3028
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
4-67
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
J516
J2050
J2071
J2146
J2147
J2076
J2097
J2077
J100
J2042
J2043
J2044
J2045
J2046
J2048
J2049
J2051
J2052
J2148
J2149
J2060
J2061
J2062
J2063
J2064
J2070
PCB5
M24
M11
M33
M26
M31
M12
M27
PCB8
PS20
PS12
PS11
PS10
PS33
PS49
PS50
M5
SL7
PS47
PS48
PS19
PS8
PS7
PS6
PS32
SL6
Parts Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Left Deck Pickup Motor
Right Deck Pickup Motor
Multi-purposeTray Registration Front Motor
Vertical Path Upper Motor
Vertical Path Middle Motor
Cassette3.4 Pickup Motor
Vertical Path Lower Motor
DC-DC Converter PCB
Left Deck Pickup Sensor 1
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Paper Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
Left Deck Lifter Motor
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Right Deck Paper Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
T-4-34
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-67
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-68
6
9
28
26
27 15
30
23
21
31
25
7
14
17
29
20
11
12
18
10
16
13
19
8
2
32
24
22
F-4-35
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-68
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J224
J224
J224
J224
J224
J224
J225
J225
J225
J225
J225
J225
J226
J226
J226
J226
J226
J226
J227
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
4-69
Intermediate Connector
J3128
J3635
J3128
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3031
J3008
J3031
J3273
J3273
J3273
J3033
J3033
J3033
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J2054
J2055
J2066
J2073
J2078
J2079
J2080
J2081
J2056
J2075
J2089
J2090
J2091
J2092
J2069
J2072
J2074
J2085
J2088
J2096
J2082
J2083
J2084
J2093
J2094
J2095
J2168
PS25
PS68
PS2
SL3
PS21
PS13
PS17
PS26
PS71
SL4
PS22
PS14
PS18
PS27
M4
M20
M21
SW9
FM3
SW10
PS69
PS70
SW7
PS72
PS73
SW8
FM40
REMARKS
T-4-35
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-69
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-70
29
13
33
37
32
10
12
20
16
22
15
35
34
31
30
24
27
25
36
21
28
26
18
3
23
17
14
11
19
F-4-36
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-70
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
J310
J311
J311
J330
J331
J331
J332
J332
J333
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J342
J342
J342
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
Parts Name
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
J343
J343
J343
J343
J343
J343
J3063
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB13
4-71
Intermediate Connector
J3233
J3002
J3042
3236
J3243
J3236
J2121
J3242
J3242
J3020
J3021
J3263
J3270
J3270
J3265
J3269
J3270
J3306
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
J517
J100
J3061
J2167
J2108
J2111
J2098
J2109
J2107
J2113
J2115
J2117
J2118
J2120
J2121
J2124
J2125
J2176
J2116
J2144
J2145
PCB5
PCB9
PCB13
M14
M32
M19
M34
M18
M43
PS35
SL5
PS65
FM5
PS66
FM8
M16
PS31
SL12
PS29
FM41
FM42
32
33
34
35
36
37
-
J2100
J2101
J2104
J2105
J2106
J3062
-
PS55
PS56
PS64
PS67
SL11
PCB13
PCB34
Parts Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
DC-DC Converter PCB
Transfer High Voltage PCB
Reverse Motor
Duplex Feed Merging Motor
Duplex Feed Left Motor
Registration Motor
Duplex Feed Right Motor
ETB Motor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Paper Cooling Fan
Duplex Left Sensor
Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan
Side Registration Motor
Side Registration Sensor
Reverse Detachment Solenoid
Registration Sensor
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor
Cooling Fan
ETB Engage Sensor
ETB Disengage Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Left Deck Merging Solenoid
Transfer High Voltage PCB
Transfer High Voltage Resistance
PCB
T-4-36
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-71
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-72
26
28
30
37
29
19
16
17
27
23
24
20
21
25
14
13
15
4
2
9
10
22
18
11
12
F-4-37
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-72
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
14
15
J501
J502
J503
J505
J505
J506
J507
J508
J509
J509
J510
J511
J512
J513
J519
J520
J520
J520
J523
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
4-73
Intermediate Connector
3237
709
3118
3238
J9040
J9024
J9043
3224
J3099
J3218
J3102
J3102
J3200
J3212
J3213
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J5
J23
J611
J4
J2134
J2154
J691
J201
J202
J202
J3545
J2
J2151
J2152
J3637
PCB51
PCB51
PCB6,7
PCB51
FM14
FM15
PCB33
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
PCB26
M3
M1
M2
SW1
Parts Name
REMARKS
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-73
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-74
17
33
32
16
30
14
34
15
13
25
28
31
24
29
26
12
18
21
10
6
3
5
11
7
20
19
27
9
1
23
2
22
F-4-38
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-74
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
12
J601
J602
J603
J604
J604
J605
J606
J606
J607
J607
J608
J608
J608
J609
J610
J613
J510
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB10
12
J510
PCB10
13
J3500
PCB11
13
J3500
PCB11
14
J3502
PCB11
15
J3503
PCB11
16
J3512
PCB12
16
J3512
PCB12
17
J3513
PCB12
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
Fixing Power Supply
PCB
Fixing Power Supply
PCB
Primary Charging High
Voltage PCB
Primary Charging High
Voltage PCB
Primary Charging High
Voltage PCB
Primary Charging High
Voltage PCB
Develop High Voltage
PCB
Develop High Voltage
PCB
Develop High Voltage
PCB
4-75
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
J500
J802
J681
J101
J102
J102
J2001
J2002
J3273
J220
J9071
PCB10
PCB17,18
PCB33
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
SW3
SW4
PCB27,28
PCB27,28
SW1
H2
H3
29
J9072
H4
30
J3510
PCB12
31
J3545
PCB26
32
J3214
33
J3003
J3221
J3222
34
J3217
J3639
9020
9020
J3173
J3173
J3173
J3549
J9019
J3174
J3119
J3115
J3115
J9024
J3116
J3116
J3638
J9043
J3060
J3060
Parts Name
REMARKS
T-4-38
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-75
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-76
17
15
18
37
21
36
40
14
19
16
35
41
23
20
24
26
39
22
38
25
28
11
32
12
33
30
13
6
7
10
31
29
34
27
4
5
1
F-4-39
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-76
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
1
1
1
2
J801
J801
J801
J801
J3547
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB26
J3548
PCB26
J692
PCB33
J693
PCB33
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
J776
J1003
J1003
J1005
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
J4002
J1
J2
J2
J3
J4
J5
J7
J8
J8
J9
J10
J2
J3
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN112
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN120
UN120
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Pre-transfer Charging
PCB
Pre-transfer Charging
PCB
All-night Power Supply
PCB
All-night Power Supply
PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Sub Key PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Inverter PCB
Inverter PCB
4-77
Intermediate Connector
J3004
J3129
3225
J3225
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
25
J9001
CB1001
CB1002
CB1003
CB1004
UN75
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Post Charging Trance
Parts Name
26
J3005
UN75
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
27
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
-
J504
J4001
J6001
J2002
J1
J3002
J3001
J5001
J504
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J2
-
PCB5
UN112
UN114
UN109
UN110
UN110
UN113
PCB5
UN118
UN121
UN116
UN120
UN119
UN115
UN115
-
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Sub Key PCB
Inverter PCB
Transparent touch panel
Hub PCB
LCD
Ten Key PCB
Ten Key PCB
Volume PCB
Relay PCB
Sub Key PCB
TALLY PCB
Transparent touch panel
Ten Key PCB
Transparent touch panel
Inverter PCB
Volume PCB
Hub PCB
Hub PCB
Transparent touch panel
Transparent touch panel
T-4-39
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-77
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
12
14
55
17
18
16
43
41
15
13
42
34
27
19
25
4-78
4
20
10
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
21
46
33
26
23
40
22
44
58
48
54
39
47
35
29
30
51
49
31
32
28
52
45
24
50
57
38
36
37
53
56
59
F-4-40
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-78
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J1000
J1002
J1003
J1004
J1007
J1015
J1017
J1018
J1019
J1020
J1021
J1022
J1025
J1026
J1027
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
Parts Name
16
17
18
19
20
21
J6
J11
J13
J14
J2017
J12
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
22
J2024
23
4-79
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
42
-
J2
-
FM4
PCB51
-
43
44
J1
J1
PCB52
-
PCB51
44
J1
J2027
PCB51
45
J7
24
J6
46
J2
25
26
26
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
J19
J20
J20
J20
J2083
J4
J5
J6
J7
J3
J1
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
-
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
-
J403
J5
J2
J2
J1
J3
J1
J8
J751
J4
-
34
J3
DDR2-SDRAM
Voice Guidance Kit-F1/F2
Control panel
DDR2-SDRAM
USB Device Port-A1
Main Controller Cooling Fan
LAN
USB(D)
Main Controller PCB 2
Flash PCB
USB(H)
TPM PCB
Expansion Bus -F1/F2
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Card reader or Serial interface kit or Coin
manager
Channel Link PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM
Memory PCB
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
HDD Mirroring Kit-E1 or
HDD Data Encryption & MirroringKit-C2
HDD Mirroring Kit-E1 or
HDD Data Encryption & MirroringKit-C2
HDD Mirroring Kit-E1 or
HDD Data Encryption & MirroringKit-C2
LED PCB
57
J1
J3141 J3140
Parts Name
REMARKS
T-4-40
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-79
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
35
J4
36
J2
37
38
39
40
41
J1
J7
J1
J2
J2
PCB52
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
Parts Name
Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AF1
Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax
Board-AF1
Modular PCB (1 line)
Modular PCB (1 line)
Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines)
Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines)
Channel Link PCB
Intermediate Connector
J3012
J3012
4-80
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
58
J4
Parts Name
58
J4
59
59
J803
J803
-
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
-
REMARKS
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
RCON
T-4-41
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-80
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
4-81
<Procedure>
1) Disconnect the Connector (USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable) to remove the Main
Controller PCB 1 Unit in the direction of the arrow.
x2
USB Cable
[A]
2) Remove the Flash PCB, the TPM PCB and the 2 Memory Boards.
2 Screws
F-4-41
1-2)
x2
1 Screw
F-4-44
F-4-42
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-81
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-82
1. Install the following parts removed from the old PCB to the new PCB.
3 Connectors
2 DDR2-SDRAMs
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
x3
NOTE:
It is not necessary to reconfigure/register the data after replacing the Main Controller
PCB 1.
F-4-46
Criterion: If the width of the gap between the connectors of the PCBs is less than 0.5mm
and uniform, the PCBs are connected properly.
x7
F-4-45
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-82
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
3) Place a metallic ruler vertically on the gap between the connectors of the PCBs, and check
that the gap is not large enough for the edge of the metallic ruler to be fitted in.
4-83
4) Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front, and visually check
that the width of the gap is uniform.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the edge of the metallic ruler fits in the gap between the connectors of the PCBs,
adjust the positions of the PCBs.
If the width of the gap is not uniform, adjust the positions of the PCBs.
10
10
20
20
30
30
Metallic ruler
5) If the Main Controller PCB 1 is judged to be connected properly as a result of steps 3 and 4,
install the removed parts in reverse order. If the PCB is not connected properly, perform 2.
Adjusting the positions of the PCBs.
10
20
30
40
50
Gap between
the connectors of
the PCBs
F-4-47
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-83
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-84
4 Screws
x4
F-4-51
F-4-49
3) Loosen the 6 screws securing the Main Controller PCB 2 and the 4 screws securing the
Channel Link PCB.
Loosen
Loosen
Loosen
F-4-52
F-4-50
CAUTION:
If an Image Analysis Board is installed, remove it and loosen the 4 Spacers.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-84
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-85
8) Fully tighten the loosened screws to secure the Main Controller PCB 2, Channel Link PCB,
3 Connectors
and DC Controller PCB in that order. Check that the connectors of the PCBs are properly
connected.
9) Install the covers removed in this procedure in reverse order.
x3
F-4-53
F-4-54
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
4-85
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-86
But you cannot use this function when there is HDD Encryption Board.
When there is HDD Encryption Board:
1) Backup the Settings/Registration data
Use the remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Target Data:
DDR2-SDRAM
Address Book
Forwarding Settings
Settings/Registration
Web Access Favorites
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Print out the Settings/Registration data.
Use service mode.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
Memory PCB
The Settings/Registration data value that cannot be backed up is printed out as a list.
F-4-55
Prohibited Operation:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might
cause to fail the restoration.
Main Controller PCB 1
Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)
Memory PCB
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-86
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-87
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Right). (Refer to "Removing Main Controller PCB 1")
4-1)
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
x2
F-4-58
4-2)
F-4-56
3-2)
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-59
Projection
F-4-57
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-87
4
4-3)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-88
2 Screws
4 Screws
1 Connector
x2
x4
F-4-62
F-4-60
7 Connectors
6 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Plate.
1 Screw
x7
x6
F-4-63
F-4-61
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-88
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-89
3 Connectors
CAUTION:
If the Main Controller PCB 1 cannot be inserted in the slot (or cannot be inserted
properly) or Error occurs after starting the machine, follow the following steps to check
the connection between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2. If
they are not connected properly, perform Adjusting the positions of the PCBs.
x3
Criterion: If the width of the gap between the connectors of the PCBs is less than 0.5mm
and uniform, the PCBs are connected properly.
x7
F-4-64
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-89
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
3) Place a metallic ruler vertically on the gap between the connectors of the PCBs, and check
that the gap is not large enough for the edge of the metallic ruler to be fitted in.
4-90
4) Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front, and visually check
that the width of the gap is uniform.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the edge of the metallic ruler fits in the gap between the connectors of the PCBs,
adjust the positions of the PCBs.
If the width of the gap is not uniform, adjust the positions of the PCBs.
10
10
20
20
30
30
Metallic ruler
5) If the Main Controller PCB 1 is judged to be connected properly as a result of steps 3 and 4,
install the removed parts in reverse order. If the PCB is not connected properly, perform 2.
Adjusting the positions of the PCBs.
10
20
30
40
50
Gap between
the connectors of
the PCBs
F-4-66
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-90
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-91
4 Screws
x4
F-4-70
F-4-68
3) Loosen the 6 screws securing the Main Controller PCB 2 and the 4 screws securing the
Channel Link PCB.
Loosen
Loosen
Loosen
F-4-71
F-4-69
CAUTION:
If an Image Analysis Board is installed, remove it and loosen the 4 Spacers.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-91
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-92
8) Fully tighten the loosened screws to secure the Main Controller PCB 2, Channel Link PCB,
3 Connectors
and DC Controller PCB in that order. Check that the connectors of the PCBs are properly
connected.
9) Install the covers removed in this procedure in reverse order.
x3
F-4-72
3. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2.
1) After the parts are assembled, turn ON the power.
2) Restore the backup data.
1 Screw
F-4-73
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2
4-92
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-93
2-1)
1-1)
2 Screws
1-2)
1-3)
1-4)
x2
2 Screws
1 Boss
3 Protrusions
x2
F-4-75
2-2)
Disconnect the Connector and remove the Grounding Wire and the Reuse Band.
1 Screw
F-4-74
F-4-76
2-3)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-93
4
2-4)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-94
CAUTION:
To prevent falling of Right Cover, hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins.
<Procedure>
1) Lift the Plate to remove.
2 Screws
x2
F-4-77
2-5)
F-4-79
x2
F-4-80
F-4-78
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-94
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
3) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector.
4-95
5) Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body.
F-4-83
F-4-81
CAUTION:
2 Bosses
Do not use the wire when the Right Cover is not removed.
6) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector.
F-4-82
F-4-84
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-95
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass
4-96
<Preparation>
Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, check that the hooking wire of the unit is not
hooked to the frame of the main body.
F-4-85
CAUTION:
When installing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check that the bosses are fitted into
the holes.
F-4-87
F-4-86
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass
4-96
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
4-97
1) While pushing the Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, pull out the Primary Charging
Assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the
Primary Charging Assembly.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover.
1-1)
1-2)
PCB
PCB
F-4-89
F-4-88
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open.
At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine
is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while
the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is
in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
F-4-90
If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly
while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
4-97
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
4-98
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
4-98
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
<Procedure>
4-99
1) Remove the Shield Plate (Right). When removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner
Holder (Left), remove the Shield Plate (Left).
CAUTION:
2 Screws
Do not move the Charging Wire Shutter; otherwise, the shutter can be damaged when
installing the Charging Assembly. When the Charging Wire Shutter is moved by chance,
be sure to move the Shutter until it is invisible.
x2
F-4-92
2) Loosen the screw to move the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaner to the center.
Loosen
F-4-91
F-4-93
CAUTION:
Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at
the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time (otherwise, the Frame of
the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed).
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
4-99
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder
Be sure to push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the
Claw.
4-100
4) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire when removing
the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right).
F-4-94
3) Bring up the Primary Charging Assembly and pinch the Hook to remove the Primary
Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder (Right) in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-96
Charging Wire
Pad
F-4-95
Primary
Charging
Wire Cleaner
F-4-97
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
4-100
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-101
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
3. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
4.Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit (Refer to page 4-145)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
1 Screw
Screw
F-4-100
4) Loosen the screw and turn over the Primary Charging Assembly.
5) Push the front Motor Unit in the direction of the arrow and tighten the 4 screws.
turn over
Screws
Grid Wire
F-4-98
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Right)
Screw
Push
Motor Unit
Screws
Motor Unit
F-4-101
F-4-99
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-101
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
6) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.1mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire
Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
4-102
9) After setting the wire 35 times around, pass through B part. After turning over the Primary
Charging Assembly, pass the wire between the washer and the Motor Unit, wrap around
the screw clockwise to make a full round and secure with the screw.
NOTE:
The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn the Hex Key for 3 to 4 times to
twist the Charging Wire.
Stud A
B part
Screw
turning over
B part
F-4-102
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-102
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
10) Cut the extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.
4-103
13) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the
11) Loosen the 4 screws and tighten the screw until the tension of the Grid Wire is uniformed.
Screws
The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to
remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.
Screw
Motor Unit
F-4-103
14) Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).
15) Tighten the 2 screws.
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Left )
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Right)
F-4-104
Screws
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
F-4-106
4-103
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-104
CAUTION:
Be sure to move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) until they stop
and tighten the screws.
Screws
NOTE:
Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire (Left) and the
Primary Charging Wire (Right).
The following explains the procedure of the Primary Charging Wire (Right).
NOTE:
The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.
CAUTION:
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Left )
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B]
attached to the Charging Wire.
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Right)
F-4-107
Spring [B]
Spring [A]
F-4-108
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
3. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right). (Refer to "Removing the
Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)")
5. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right). (Refer to page 4-98)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-104
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
<Procedure>
4-105
3) Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at
F-4-111
F-4-109
2) Use tweezers to hold the tip of the Spring at the rear side to remove the Spring from the
charging electrode and remove the Charging Wire from the groove of the Positioning Block.
Groove
Charging
Electrode
4) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.06mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire
Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
NOTE:
The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn it for 3 to 4 times to twist the
Charging Wire.
F-4-110
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-105
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-106
9) Hook the Charging Wire to the rear groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block and
6) Hook the ring to the front protrusion of the Positioning Block to hook the Charging Wire to
hold the edge of the Charging Wire Tension Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging
electrode.
the groove.
Groove
Protrusion
Groove
Charging Electrode
Charging
Wire
F-4-114
F-4-112
7) Hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to the Charging Wire to twist with it.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the following in mind after installation.
No bend or twist is found with the Charging Wire.
The Charging Wire is fitted into the groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block.
10) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
11) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right).
12) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right).
13) Install the Shield Plate (Right).
<Processing when replacing the parts>
F-4-113
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-106
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-107
3) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the
left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
CAUTION:
The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to
remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.
3. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to Removing the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left))
4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire. (Refer to page 4-98)
NOTE:
With this machine, discharge products tend to be accumulated inside the Charging
Assembly. To remove the discharge products efficiently, clean with lint-free paper
moistened with water. (If there is toner stain, clean with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the inside of Shield Plate (Right) and Inner Shield Plate (Left) removed from the
Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with water.
2) Clean both sides of the Inner Shield Plate (Middle) of the Primary Charging Assembly with
lint-free paper moistened with water.
F-4-116
4) Remove the Shield Plate (Right) and pinch the Grid Wire to clean it on the right side with
lint-free paper moistened with water.
F-4-115
F-4-117
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-107
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
4-108
1) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly.
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
CAUTION:
<Procedure>
When removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of
the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open.
PCB
PCB
At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine
is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while
the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is
in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly
while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.
F-4-118
F-4-119
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
4-108
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
4-109
Loosen
F-4-120
F-4-121
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
4-109
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
4-110
2) Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front.
F-4-123
F-4-122
F-4-124
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
4-110
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
3) Pinch the Hook and turn it in the direction of the arrow to remove the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cleaner Holder.
4-111
Charging Wire
F-4-125
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner in the direction of the arrow.
Pad
Primary
Charging
Wire Cleaner
F-4-127
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the Pre-transfer Charging Wire when removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner.
F-4-126
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder
4-111
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-112
NOTE:
The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to "Removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder")
5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (Refer to page 4-109)
<Procedure>
F-4-129
2) Use tweezers to remove the front Spring from the Hook and then remove the Charging
Wire from the rear charging electrode.
CAUTION:
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B]
attached to the Charging Wire.
Spring [B]
Spring [A]
F-4-128
F-4-130
3) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.06mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire
Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
4) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-112
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
5) Hook the ring to the rear charging electrode of the Pre-charging Assembly and put the ring
through the rear groove and the sponge groove.
Charging Wire
4-113
8) Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook
the Spring to the Hook.
Groove
Charging
Electrode
Hook
F-4-131
6) On the front side of the Pre-charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to
the Charging Wire to twist with it.
F-4-133
9) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
10) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear).
11) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cleaner Holder.
<Processing when replacing the parts>
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1>PO-WIRE)
2) Clean the Charging Wire. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
F-4-132
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-113
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-114
x2
4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to Removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder)
5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (Refer to page 4-109)
6. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. (Refer to page 4-112)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Shield Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-135
3) While rotating the Dust Collecting Roller, clean it with lint-free paper.
F-4-134
F-4-136
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-114
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit
4-115
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
5) While rotating the Dust Collecting Roller, clean the electrode area with lint-free paper.
2 Screws
1 Screw (for installing the Drum Fixation Cylinder)
NOTE:
When removing the Process Unit, hold both the upper and front Handles to pull out the
Process Unit.
Screw (RS Tightening)
x3
F-4-138
F-4-139
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit
4-115
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit
When installing the Process Unit, fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with
the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw.
Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it
horizontally.
4-116
Groove
Protrusion
Groove
Protrusion
F-4-140
F-4-141
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit
4-116
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit
4-117
2) Clean the Patch Sensor with a wet and tightly-wrung cotton swab.
<Preparation>
CAUTION:
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
Clean the Patch Sensor in the single direction, so that it is cleaned evenly.
F-4-143
3) Clean the rear side of the Process Unit with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-142
F-4-144
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit
4-117
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-118
CAUTION:
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit, clean the area shown with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
If the Drum Cleaning Unit is installed without removing toner, it cannot be installed in
the correct position, causing the cleaning error.
F-4-146
Edge Saddle
1 Connector
4 Screws
x4
F-4-145
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-118
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
<Preparation>
Procedure differs according to the temperature inside the machine. Be sure to perform the
work by following the flow indicated below.
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
1) Turn over the Drum Cleaning Unit to remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.
1 E-ring
10 deg C or higher
4-119
1 Plate
F-4-148
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
4-119
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
4-120
1. Wipe out the toner on both edges of the Drum Cleaning Unit before installation.
2. Be sure to fit in the center position, and then temporarily tighten the screws following
the numeric order (from 1 to 4) and also securely tighten the screws (from 5 to 9).
Loosen
x5
F-4-149
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
F-4-150
4-120
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-121
2) Clean the 2 Pre-exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint-free
paper.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade)
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
1) Clean the Drum Cleaning Unit Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-151
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit
F-4-152
4-121
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film
4-122
3) Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pre-exposure Plastic Film.
2) Fit the Pre-exposure Plastic Film to the edge and lower grooves of the Drum Cleaning Unit.
F-4-153
F-4-154
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film
4-122
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit
4-123
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
x3
F-4-155
2) Push to move the rear side of the Photosensitive Drum with your fingers and pull out the
Drum Unit to the front to remove.
2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is
exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window).
3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.
When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet
after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum
counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise,
the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.
F-4-156
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit
4-123
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
4-124
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. (Refer to page 4-119)
7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.
8. Remove the Drum Unit. (Refer to page 4-123)
<Procedure>
F-4-157
CAUTION:
When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the
following points to note.
1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum.
Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers
around the drum to block light.
x2
2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is
exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window).
3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.
When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet
after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum
counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise,
the Drum Cleaning Blade may be everted.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
F-4-158
4-124
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
4-125
Drum Heater
F-4-160
F-4-159
NOTE:
Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum.
F-4-161
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
4-125
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
CAUTION:
Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing
the Heater Control PCB Unit to the drum.
4-126
NOTE:
If the yellow marker is not aligned with the protrusion, the following control cannot be
executed properly.
1. 2D shading
2. D-MAX control
3. D-half control
F-4-162
When securing the Flange, align the protrusion of the Flange with the yellow marker
to install.
F-4-164
F-4-163
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
4-126
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
4-127
4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.
1) Moisten lint-free paper with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions ; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the
drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024) on the lint-free paper.
2) While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe
the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front.
Drum Cleaning Powder
FY9-6024
Alcohol Solutions
F-4-165
CAUTION:
Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum.
Move the lint-free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area. Forcing
the lint-free paper will not affect the life of the drum.
3) After the alcohol has evaporated, dry wipe the surface with the lint-free paper. If the area is
uneven, go back to the step 1, and increase the back-and-forth movements.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
4-127
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum edges
4) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10 cm), and repeat the step 1 through 3 until the entire
area of the surface has been cleaned.
4-128
F-4-167
F-4-168
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum edges
4-128
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal
4-129
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
Cleaner Separation
Claws
F-4-170
Spring
F-4-169
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal
4-129
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
2) Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
uniformly with lint-free paper.
4-130
NOTE:
In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the Photosensitive Drum
Tospearl
lint-free paper
Sheet
F-4-171
3) Align the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) with the edges of the sheets and affix them.
1 Connector
Seal
Seal
F-4-173
Edge
Edge
F-4-172
F-4-174
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
4-130
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
4-131
When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing
Assembly as shown in the figure.
Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open.
Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is slippery,
so it may cause a fall of the assembly.
If the Developing Assembly is forcibly installed while the Buffer Shutter is open, the
shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, pull out the shutter to the
front and then close it.
F-4-175
F-4-176
Whether the shutter is open or not can be checked with the Shutter Arm.
F-4-177
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
4-131
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right
and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine.
Protrusion
4-132
rail
Protrusion
F-4-179
5) Push the [A] part of the Developing Assembly and extend the legs from the assembly.
rail
[A]
Protrusion
F-4-178
F-4-180
CAUTION:
If the Developing Assembly is placed without extending the legs, it may cause the
developing error due to scratches on the assembly.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
4-132
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-133
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-130)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Developing Sleeve Cover.
4 Screws
x4
F-4-181
NOTE:
When the Developing Assembly is put on the floor or the desk, be sure to place paper
underneath to work on the Developing Assembly.
F-4-182
2) Clean the 4 Developing Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
them.
3) Clean the area outside of the sheet on the 2 Developing Sleeve Holders with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
Sheet
Sheet
F-4-183
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-133
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-134
5) Clean the lower side of Cylinder in the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper moistened
4 Screws
with alcohol.
F-4-185
Developing Sleeve
[A]
Developing Roller
F-4-186
F-4-184
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-134
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit
1-3)
4-135
Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.
1-1)
1-2)
Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
F-4-187
F-4-188
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit
4-135
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit
<Procedure>
4-136
2) Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-189
F-4-190
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit
4-136
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB
4-137
2) Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
2. Remove the ETB Unit. (Refer to page 4-135)
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.
<Procedure>
1) Fold the ETB Drive Roller Unit.
2 Screws
F-4-192
CAUTION:
x2
Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ETB when handling the ETB.
Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise,
it can cause image faults.
F-4-191
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB
4-137
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB
4-138
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to Removing the ETB)
Set the ETB to make the ETB located inside the Guides at both edges.
F-4-193
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB
F-4-194
4-138
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller
4-139
2) Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
2. Remove the ETB Unit. (Refer to page 4-135)
3. Remove the ETB. (Refer to page 4-137)
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it
can cause image faults.
<Procedure>
1) Turn over the Roller Unit to remove the Claw of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support with
needlenose pliers.
F-4-196
NOTE:
When installing the Transfer Roller Shaft Support to the Roller Unit, be sure to check
that the bosses of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support are fitted into the Springs.
x2
F-4-195
F-4-197
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller
4-139
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
4-140
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
4 Screws
1 Screw
x4
F-4-198
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
F-4-199
4-140
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
4-141
2) Remove the Connection Gear and the N-ring from the ETB Brush Roller.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer
Guide.
Do not deform the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide.
F-4-201
x2
F-4-202
F-4-200
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
4-141
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
4-142
Shaft Support
Shaft Support
F-4-203
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
4-142
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container
4-143
1 Screw
F-4-204
F-4-205
NOTE:
In the case of toner spill when removing the Waste Toner Container, be sure to wipe out
the spilled toner.
After the Waste Toner Container is removed, be sure to cover the Waste Toner
Container with the Cap attached in the side.
When the Waste Toner Container is removed outside the machine, be sure to promptly
cover with the Cap to prevent toner scattering.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container
4-143
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater
4-144
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. (Refer to page 4-119)
7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.
8. Remove the Drum Unit. (Refer to page 4-123)
<Procedure>
F-4-206
CAUTION:
When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the
following points to note.
1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum.
Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers
around the drum to block light.
x2
2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is
exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window).
3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.
When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet
after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum
counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise,
the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater
F-4-207
4-144
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-145
<Preparation>
Drum Heater
F-4-208
Loosen
F-4-209
CAUTION:
Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at
the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time. (Otherwise, the frame of
the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed.)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-145
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
2) Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate (Right).
2 Screws
2 Screws
4-146
x2
x2
F-4-210
3) Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.
F-4-212
6) Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.
F-4-211
F-4-213
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-146
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-147
<Installation Method>
2 Screws
CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation
Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the
Cleaner Claw.
CAUTION:
Do not make the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire when removing the Primary
Charging Shutter Unit.
8) Remove the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.
NOTE:
The Shield Plate does not need to be removed when installing the Shutter Unit.
2 Screws
1) Set the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter to the Cleaner Claw.
x2
F-4-214
F-4-215
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-147
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
4-148
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
2.Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
<Procedure>
1) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the arrow.
1 Screw (to loosen)
F-4-218
Loosen
CAUTION:
Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
4) Hold the screw to remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit while the Motor
Unit is installed.
3 Screws
F-4-216
x3
F-4-219
F-4-217
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
4-148
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
5) Remove the Motor Unit from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
4-149
2) Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit.
3 Claws
x3
F-4-222
F-4-220
<Installation Method>
CAUTION:
When installing the Motor Unit, fit the PCB into the slot.
NOTE:
Be sure to put the protrusion of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
between the arms.
1) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
3 Screws
x3
F-4-223
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the rear shaft is secured.
F-4-221
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
4-149
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
4-150
3 Claws
Be sure to check that the rear pin is fit into the frame hole.
5) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.
x3
NOTE:
Move the Shield Plate back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured.
F-4-224
CAUTION:
Be sure to feel tension when installing the spring; otherwise, it can cause image error.
4) Set the spring.
F-4-225
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
4-150
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor
4-151
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
<Procedure>
Slot of Guide
Projection
x2
F-4-228
F-4-226
F-4-227
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor
4-151
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller
4-152
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.
Cover the Photosensitive Drum with paper to avoid direct exposure to light.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to page 4-118)
6. Remove the Drum Unit. (Refer to page 4-123)
F-4-230
3) Remove the Drum Brush Roller by following the procedure as shown in the figure.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the sheet.
CAUTION:
The removed sheet will be used at the time of assembly, so be sure to remove the
sheet neatly and keep it in a safe place.
F-4-231
Sheet
F-4-229
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller
4-152
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit
4-153
<Preparation>
1 Claw
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
2. Remove the ETB Unit. (Refer to page 4-135)
x2
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Lever.
1 Screw
F-4-233
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown
in the figure to tighten screws.
F-4-232
x2
F-4-234
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit
4-153
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit
3 Screws
2 Screws
4-154
1 Connector
Harness
x3
x2
F-4-235
CAUTION:
F-4-237
When installing the Fixing Feed Left Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
figure to tighten screws.
x3
F-4-236
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit
4-154
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit
4-155
<Preparation>
1 Connector
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
2. Remove the ETB Unit. (Refer to page 4-135)
3. Remove the ETB Drive Unit. (Refer to page 4-153)
x3
<Procedure>
1) Disconnect the connectors.
F-4-238
CAUTION:
When installing, turn the gear so that the gear is engaged.
F-4-240
F-4-239
F-4-241
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit
4-155
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator
4-156
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.
F-4-242
F-4-243
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post-transfer Guide.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator
4-156
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray
4-157
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Upper Cover.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle.
x3
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray.
1 Screw
1 Protrusion
F-4-244
F-4-246
F-4-245
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray
4-157
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-158
CAUTION:
1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install.
2. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to
spill toner when removing.
2) Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
1 Screws (to loosen)
3) Remove the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
1 Connector
2 Protrusions
F-4-247
F-4-249
4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.
CLOSE
OPEN
F-4-248
F-4-250
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-158
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-159
CAUTION:
1 Screw
When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.
1 Protrusion
F-4-253
CAUTION:
F-4-251
1. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to
spill toner when removing.
2. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install.
NOTE:
Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.
F-4-252
F-4-254
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-159
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
1 Screw
1 Screw
4-160
1 Protrusion
F-4-255
F-4-257
When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit, be sure to place paper over the ETB Unit for
protection.
4 Screws
1 Connector
Harness
x4
F-4-256
F-4-258
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-160
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-161
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to
tighten screws.
x4
F-4-259
F-4-261
1 Hook
15) Remove the 4 Tapping Screws.
CAUTION:
Put the removed Hopper Unit on paper placed on the work space.
x4
x4
x2
F-4-260
F-4-262
When tightening the Tapping Screws, turn them in the reverse direction to check the
screw thread on the Hopper Unit side before tightening them. Otherwise, the screw
thread on the Hopper Unit side may be broken, which makes it impossible to tighten the
screw.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
4-161
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4-162
<Preparation>
1 Roller
1 Bearing
E-ring
Roller
<Procedure>
Bearing
2 Protrusions
F-4-263
Hooks
F-4-265
Bottle Box
Hook
Hook
F-4-264
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4-162
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.
CLOSE
4-163
OPEN
F-4-266
F-4-268
1 Screw
When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.
1 Protrusion
F-4-269
CAUTION:
1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install.
F-4-267
2. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to
spill toner when removing.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4-163
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4-164
NOTE:
Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.
F-4-272
F-4-270
x2
F-4-273
F-4-271
CAUTION:
When removing the Buffer Unit, be sure not to tilt the unit to prevent toner scattering.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
4-164
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
4-165
<Preparation>
Fit the emboss into the proper position; otherwise, toner can be scattered.
6-2)
6-3)
6-4)
2 Screws
1 Boss
3 Protrusions
F-4-274
x2
F-4-275
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
4-165
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
<Procedure>
3 Screws
1 E-ring
2 Connectors
4-166
Wire Saddle
x3
x2
F-4-276
F-4-278
2 Screws
x2
x2
F-4-277
x4
F-4-279
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
4-166
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-167
<Preparation>
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
1-1)
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-280
F-4-282
1-2)
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-281
Projection
F-4-283
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-167
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-168
2-1)
3-1)
3 Screws
x3
F-4-284
2-2)
F-4-286
4 Screws
x4
F-4-285
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-168
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
<Procedure>
4-169
3) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again
2 Screws
5 Connectors
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
NOTE:
When opening the Motor Driver Support Plate, be sure to free from the protrusion.
Projection
F-4-289
x5
x2
F-4-287
x2
F-4-290
F-4-288
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-169
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-170
2 Screws
2 Connectors
4 Screws
x2
x4
x2
F-4-291
6) Open the Front Cover to move the Fixing Feed Lever down.
F-4-293
(To move the cam at the rear of the Fixing Feed Lever Shaft to the position where it does
not interfere with the Waste Toner Feed Unit.)
F-4-292
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-170
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit
4-171
2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again
tighten the screw.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-97)
3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-108)
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-115)
5. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
6. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Flywheel.
2 Screws
2 Washers
F-4-295
x2
F-4-294
F-4-296
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit
4-171
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit
2 Screws
3 Screws
3 Connectors
1 Connector
4-172
Harness
x2
x3
x3
F-4-297
F-4-299
1 Screw
Harness
5 Connectors
1 Wire Saddle
3 Screws
x3
x5
F-4-298
F-4-300
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit
4-172
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
4-173
2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again
tighten the screw.
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-130)
2. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
3. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Flywheel.
2 Screws
2 Washers
x2
F-4-302
F-4-301
F-4-303
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
4-173
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
2 Screws
3 Screws
3 Connectors
1 Connector
4-174
Harness
x2
x3
x3
F-4-304
F-4-306
1 Screw
Harness
1 Screw
F-4-305
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
F-4-307
4-174
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
4-175
x3
x3
F-4-308
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
4-175
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly
Fixing
4-176
1-3)
Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull
1-2)
Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
F-4-309
F-4-310
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly
4-176
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly
<Procedure>
4-177
CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation
1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
x2
F-4-312
Stepped Screw
F-4-311
When installing the Fixing Assembly, be sure that the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag
passes through the cut-off of the Fixing Outlet Guide.
F-4-313
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly
4-177
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder
4-178
<Preparation>
2 Screws
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, be careful no to turn the 2 Adjustment
Screws.
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
2)Clean the Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
F-4-315
F-4-314
x3
F-4-316
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder
4-178
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller
4) Turn over the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (front
side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the
accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.
4-179
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Inner Delivery Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-317
5) Slide the sensor flag to the rear side, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (rear
side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the
accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.
F-4-319
F-4-318
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller
4-179
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web
4-180
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
3. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
2 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Clean the surface of the Fixing Oil Pan with lint-free paper.
x2
F-4-321
F-4-320
Grip
F-4-322
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web
4-180
4
4-2)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web
4-181
1 Screw
F-4-325
F-4-323
<Procedure>
1) Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover.
2 Screws
NOTE:
Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws.
x2
F-4-324
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web
4-181
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
4-182
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly)
2. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web. (Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Roller Static Eliminator.
1 Screw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Roller Static Eliminator, be careful not to drop it inside of the
Fixing Assembly.
F-4-326
When installing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to wind the web around the Web
Take-up Roller until the green line on the web disappears from view.
F-4-328
F-4-327
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
4-182
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit
2) Dry wipe oil on the Fixing Roller and paper lint adhered on the Fixing Roller Static
Eliminator with lint-free paper, and loosen up the strands of Static Eliminator clotted with oil.
4-183
F-4-329
3 Screws
x3
x3
F-4-330
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit
4-183
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit
4-184
2 Screws
Wire Saddle
6 Connectors
NOTE:
Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Upper Unit to remove the Fixing Pin.
x6
F-4-332
4) Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.
Fixing Upper Unit
F-4-331
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit
4-184
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
4-185
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
4. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit. (Refer to page 4-183)
5. Remove the Heater Unit.
5-1) Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle and remove the 3 screws.
6 Connectors
3 Screws
F-4-335
x3
F-4-334
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
4-185
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
<Procedure>
4-186
3) Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller.
1) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Roller Bearing
Retainer.
Bearing
Insulating Bush
Bushing
Spacer
Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer
Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer
Gear
Insulating Bush
Bearing
Fixing Roller
F-4-337
F-4-336
F-4-338
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
4-186
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
4-187
When applying grease, pay attention not to get it accumulated in the cut [a].
1) Grease Application
Apply approx. 230 mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference
and outer circumference of the Insulating Bushing so that all circumferences are covered
with white film. If grease is not applied, abnormal noise may occur, or the Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer may come off or be damaged.
F-4-341
When installing the Insulating Bushing [2] to the Fixing Roller [1], wipe off excess grease
Grease Application
F-4-339
As a rough standard, see the following for the amount of grease to be applied (approx. 230
adhered to the end face of the Fixing Roller (including the groove on the edge) [b].
Otherwise, grease may adhere to the Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer or be scattered from the
Fixing Roller.
mg).
F-4-340
F-4-342
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
4-187
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller
4-188
2) Remove the Pressure Roller Unit.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
4. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit. (Refer to page 4-183)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide.
2 Screws
Wire Saddle
Edge Saddle
1 Connector
x2
F-4-344
Stepped Screw
Screw(Binding)
F-4-343
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller
4-188
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
4-189
CAUTION:
Do not remove the Static Eliminator with short bristles at the center because it is not a
consumable part.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
4. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit. (Refer to page 4-183)
5. Remove the Pressure Roller Unit. (Refer to page 4-188)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminators (at the front and rear).
2 Screws
F-4-346
F-4-345
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
4-189
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor
4-190
2) Remove the DC Thermoswitch Unit.
1 Screw
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Harness Guide Cover and free the Harness from the Guide.
1 Screw
Edge Saddle
Harness Guide
F-4-348
x2
F-4-347
F-4-349
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor
4-190
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor 1
4) Remove the Copper Plate and the Harness Band to remove the Main Thermistor from the
Main Thermistor Support Member.
4-191
<Preparation>
Harness Guide
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
Main
Thermister
Harness Guide
Leaf Spring
F-4-350
NOTE:
When installing the Main Thermistor Unit, be sure to fit the shaft of Main Thermistor Unit
in the shaft support until clicky sound is heard.
F-4-352
F-4-351
x4
F-4-353
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor 1
4-191
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor 2
4-192
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Removing the Sub Thermistor 1. (Refer to page 4-191)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Holder.
1 Connector
Edge Saddle
1 Screw
F-4-354
F-4-356
F-4-355
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor 2
4-192
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw
4-193
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
<Procedure>
1) Hold the Lever of the Left Guide to open the Left Guide.
2) While holding the Upper Separation Claw Retaining Spring, remove the Upper Separation
Claw.
F-4-357
Upper Separation
Claw Spring
Upper
Separation
Claw
F-4-358
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw
4-193
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw
4-194
3) Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
<Procedure>
1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
F-4-361
F-4-359
F-4-360
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw
4-194
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 2
4-195
2) Free the harness of Thermoswitch 2.
1 Connector
<Preparation>
Wire Saddle
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
4. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web (take-up side).
F-4-362
F-4-363
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 2
4-195
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 2
4-196
1 Screw
2 Screws
x2
F-4-366
F-4-364
4) Free the harness from the Edge Saddle and remove the Thermoswitch 2 Unit.
1 Screw
F-4-365
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 2
4-196
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller
Pickup/Feed System
4-197
<Procedure>
2 Screws
x2
F-4-367
NOTE:
When installing the Left Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the
4 grooves of the Left Pickup Deck to install.
Protrusion
F-4-369
Groove
F-4-368
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller
4-197
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck
4-198
<Preparation>
2 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Feed Roller.
x2
F-4-371
F-4-370
NOTE:
When installing the Right Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into
the 4 grooves of the Right Pickup Deck to install.
Protrusion
Groove
F-4-372
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck
4-198
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
4-199
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller.
<Procedure>
1 Claw
F-4-375
F-4-373
3) Clean paper dust on the Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS20) with a blower when replacing
the Separation Roller.
PS20
F-4-374
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
4-199
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS19)
4-200
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
<Procedure>
1 Boss
F-4-377
F-4-376
F-4-378
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS19)
4-200
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette
5) Clean paper dust on the Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS19) with a blower when replacing
the Separation Roller.
4-201
PS19
x4
F-4-379
F-4-380
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette
4-201
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller
4-202
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
1 Claw
F-4-382
F-4-381
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller
4-202
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2 (PS21)
4-203
5) Clean paper dust on the Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2 (PS21) with a blower when replacing
the Separation Roller.
PS21
F-4-385
F-4-383
F-4-384
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2 (PS21)
4-203
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller
4-204
<Preparation>
4 Screws
x4
1 Claw
F-4-386
F-4-387
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller
4-204
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 (PS22)
4-205
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-204)
<Procedure>
1 Boss
F-4-388
F-4-389
F-4-390
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller
/Cleaning the Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 (PS22)
4-205
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
5) Clean paper dust on the Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 (PS22) with a blower when replacing
the Separation Roller.
4-206
PS22
F-4-391
F-4-392
<Procedure>
1) Remove the gear.
1 Claw
F-4-393
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
4-206
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
1 E-ring
1 E-ring
F-4-394
4-207
F-4-396
F-4-395
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
4-207
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4-208
CAUTION:
Installation work gets difficult if the plate and the spring (as shown in the figure) are
removed when removing the cover; therefore, be careful not to remove them.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller")
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. (Refer to page 4-206)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Lower Guide.
2 Screws
6 Claws
6 Protrusions
x2
x6
F-4-398
F-4-399
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4-208
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-209
5) Clean paper dust on the Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) and the Multi-purpose Tray Last
Paper Sensor (PS28) with a blower.
PS28
3) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Guide Unit, and clean the 2 areas of the Feed Guide [A].
(Remove paper lint.)
4) Clean a whole circumference of 2 Rollers [B] and the 3 Rollers [C] by manually rotating
PS24
[B]
F-4-401
6) Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.
[A]
[C]
F-4-400
[A]
F-4-402
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-209
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
7) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
4-210
9) Open the Duplex Merging Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free
paper.
CAUTION:
When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold
the side of the Roller to rotate manually.
[A]
F-4-405
F-4-403
Boss
8) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
F-4-406
F-4-404
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-210
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
11) Clean paper dust on the Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS19), Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2
4-211
17) Clean paper dust on the Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS20) with a blower.
PS20
PS19
PS21
PS22
F-4-409
F-4-407
18) Install the Right Deck and place it inside the host machine.
NOTE:
When installing the Right Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into
the 4 grooves of the Right Pickup Deck to install.
x2
Protrusion
Groove
F-4-410
F-4-408
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-211
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-212
3) Insert lint-free paper into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the
Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [B] and the sheet on the edge of the
2) Open the Registration Upper Guide, insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance
between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
[A]
Sheet
Sheet
[B]
F-4-412
4) Open the Registration Upper Guide and clean paper dust on the Registration Sensor (PS29)
F-4-411
with a blower.
PS29
F-4-413
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-212
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
5) Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator and clean adhered soiling.
4-213
7) Hold the 2 handles to lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-416
8) Clean the soiling adhered on the Magnet and the Sheet with lint-free paper moistened with
F-4-414
alcohol.
Sheet
Magnet
F-4-417
F-4-415
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-213
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-214
13) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
10) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide [A] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[A]
F-4-418
11) Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
12) Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.
F-4-420
14) Clean paper dust on the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) with a blower.
PS65
[A]
F-4-419
F-4-421
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-214
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
15) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
4-215
18) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] inside the equipment with lint-free paper.
F-4-424
F-4-422
16) Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to close the Feed Unit.
17) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Reverse Path with lint-free paper.
NOTE:
To clean the feed area [A] inside main body, removing the Fixing Assembly can improve
the operability.
[A]
[A]
F-4-423
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
F-4-425
4-215
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-216
22) Clean paper dust on the Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and
20) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Duplex Path (Upper/Lower) with lint-free
paper.
PS66
[A]
PS67
PS64
F-4-428
23) Clean a whole circumference of 5 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
F-4-426
21) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
F-4-429
F-4-427
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-216
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-217
24) Place a paper on the Duplex Path. Then, point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller
frame to remove paper lint.
NOTE:
The Cleaning Brush is engaged with 4 Rollers, causing accumulation of paper lint. By
blowing air with the Blower, paper lint can be fallen down.
F-4-430
25) Insert the paper lint cleaning tool to the gap of Reverse Path [A] to remove paper lint.
[A]
F-4-431
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-217
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
4-218
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Right Deck. (Refer to page 4-198)
2. Remove the Left Deck. (Refer to page 4-197)
<Procedure>
1) Disconnect the Connectors.
F-4-434
F-4-432
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.
3 Screws
Pickup Unit Fixation Plate(Upper)
x3
F-4-435
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
4-218
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
4-219
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Right Cover.(Refer to page 4-93)
2. Pull out the Right Deck.(Refer to page 4-198)
<Procedure>
1) Open the Right Lower Cover.
2) Remove the Connector Cover.
1 Screw
F-4-438
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.
F-4-436
F-4-439
F-4-437
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
4-219
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit
<Procedure>
<Preparation>
NOTE:
This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit.
Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used.
4-220
F-4-440
1-2)
2 Hinge Pins
F-4-442
F-4-441
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit
4-220
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
4-221
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left).
1-1)
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-444
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.
F-4-446
1-2)
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-445
Projection
F-4-447
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
4-221
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
2-1)
3-1)
4-222
3 Screws
x3
F-4-448
2-2)
F-4-450
4 Screws
x4
1) Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 3 and 4
in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-449
F-4-451
CAUTION:
Do not lose the bushings when removing the Roller Shaft.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
4-222
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
1 Screw
4 Screws
2 Protrusions
13 Connectors
4-223
9 Wire Saddles
1 Reuse Band
Harness
x2
x4
x13
F-4-452
F-4-454
x3
x4
F-4-453
F-4-455
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
4-223
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-224
CAUTION:
When installing the handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten
screws.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.
1-1)
1-2)
Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
x4
F-4-456
6) Free the harness and remove the Vertical Path Cassette Drive Unit.
1 Connector
F-4-458
3 Wire Saddles
6 Screws
x6
F-4-457
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-224
4
1-3)
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull
4-225
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover
1 Screw
F-4-460
F-4-459
F-4-461
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-225
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-226
x2
x4
F-4-462
F-4-464
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured.
F-4-463
[A]
F-4-465
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-226
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit
NOTE:
When installing the Registration Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure
to tighten screws.
4-227
x4
Unit")
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup
Drive Unit")
4. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.(Refer to page 4-237)
5. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit. (Refer to page 4-218)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit in the direction of the arrow.
6 Screws
F-4-466
1 Connector
1 Wire Saddle
x6
F-4-467
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit
4-227
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-228
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
Unit")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
Unit")
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup
Drive Unit")
4. Remove the Waste Toner Container. (Refer to page 4-143)
5. Remove the Right Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit")
6. Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit. (Refer to page 4-219)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pre-registration Guide Unit.
F-4-469
2 Screws
3) Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2
in the direction of the arrow.
x2
F-4-468
F-4-470
CAUTION:
Do not lose the bushings when removing the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-228
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-229
NOTE:
When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be sure to follow the order as
shown in the figure to tighten screws.
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
x2
x3
F-4-473
F-4-471
x3
9 Wire Saddles
1 Reuse Band
Harness
x4
x13
F-4-472
CAUTION:
When removing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be careful of toner scattering.
F-4-474
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-229
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-230
8) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again
CAUTION:
When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
figure to tighten screws.
x4
F-4-477
x2
F-4-478
F-4-476
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-230
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-231
2 Screws
3 Screws
3 Connectors
1 Connector
Harness
x2
x3
x3
F-4-479
11) Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base.
F-4-481
1 Screw
Harness
1 Screw
F-4-480
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
F-4-482
4-231
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-232
4 Screws
6 Screws
1 Connector
x4
x6
F-4-483
F-4-485
CAUTION:
When installing the Right Rear Handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
figure to tighten screws.
x4
F-4-484
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-232
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter
4-233
1 Screw
F-4-487
F-4-486
NOTE:
To prevent falling of the Filter Cover, be sure to hold the Filter Cover to remove the
screw.
F-4-488
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter
4-233
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-234
<Preparation>
2-1)
2-2)
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-491
4 Screws
F-4-489
1-2)
x4
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-492
Projection
F-4-490
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-234
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-235
<Procedure>
8 Screws
4 Screws (TP)
x8
x4
F-4-495
F-4-493
x17
F-4-494
F-4-496
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-235
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-236
F-4-497
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-236
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly
4-237
2) Disconnect the 23 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply
Assembly.
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
x23
3 Screws
x3
F-4-500
F-4-498
x2
<Procedure>
1) Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle.
F-4-501
F-4-499
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly
4-237
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit
4-238
x3
F-4-504
Leakage Breaker
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
x5
<Procedure>
1) Open the 2 Finisher Connector Covers.
2 Claws
x2
F-4-505
F-4-503
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit
4-238
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB
4-239
<Preparation>
2 Screws
x4
4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Power Supply Assembly")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the frame of Waste Toner Container.
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
x2
F-4-506
x2
5 Screws
x5
F-4-508
F-4-507
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB
4-239
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB
4-240
<Preparation>
15 Connectors
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (Refer to Removing Main Controller PCB 2.)
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
7 Screws
x7
x6
F-4-509
F-4-510
<Procedure>
1) Disconnect the ARCNET Cable (or the Terminal Connector).
ARCNET Cable
F-4-511
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB
4-240
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB
4-241
2 Wire Saddles
4 Screws
1 Connector
Washer
Nut
Wire Saddles
x4
Washer
x2
Nut
Connector
ARCNET PCB
F-4-512
F-4-514
5 Screws
ARCNET PCB Fixation Plate
x5
F-4-513
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the ARCNET PCB
4-241
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit
4-242
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
<Procedure>
x10
F-4-516
3) While avoiding the harness and Motor Driver PCB Unit, remove the Upper High Voltage
Projection
Unit.
1 Screw
x5
x2
F-4-515
F-4-517
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit
4-242
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upright Control Panel
4-243
Reuse Band
Joint Cover R
Joint Cover L
x2
F-4-520
x2
Power Supply Cable
Cable Clamp
Power Supply Connector
F-4-521
F-4-519
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upright Control Panel
4-243
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upright Control Panel
4-244
Boss
Projection
Boss
x4
Upright Arm
Cable
F-4-522
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upright Control Panel
4-244
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
Upgrading and installation is used as the terms to handle the system software.
Backup and restoration is used as the terms to handle data in SRAM and HDD on the boards.
Version-up
Backup Restore
Settings/Registration
Service Mode
System software
F-4-523
Be sure to use the latest possible backup data for the SRAM data of each board.
If restoring the SRAM data backed up long time ago, image failure, etc., may occur due to
mismatch between the backup data and the parameter for host machine adjustment changed
after backup.
Part to be Description
Procedure
replaced
Main
SRAM of the Main Controller PCB Hold down 2 and 8 to start the
Controller 2 2 includes user data and MEAP- machine, and then use SST to
related data.
clear the encryption key of the HDD
If there are any files backed up
Encryption Board.
from RUI by the user, restore them Use SST or a USB memory device
after recovery.
to Format ALL and install the
Explain the user that the
system.
reinstallation of everything related
to MEAP is necessary.
4-245
When TPM is
enabled (ON)
After the
system is
properly
installed,
enable TPM
to execute a
backup of TPM.
Reference: If Meapback.bin
is saved using SST, it can be
restored after replacing the Main
Controller PCB 2. This makes the
reinstallation of everything related
to MEAP unnecessary.
New HDD Install the system software on the Hold down 2 and 8 to start the
new HDD after formatting it by
machine, and then use SST or a
SST.
USB memory device to Format ALL
If there are any files backed up
and install the system.
from RUI by the user, restore them
after recovery.
Explain the user that the
reinstallation of everything related
to MEAP is necessary.
Reference: If Meapback.bin
is saved using SST, it can be
restored after replacing the Main
Controller PCB 2. This makes the
reinstallation of everything related
to MEAP unnecessary.
After the
system is
properly
installed,
enable TPM
to execute a
backup of TPM.
System
To upgrade the system version,
installation the Assist Mode of SST is
when the recommended.
HDD is
properly
working.
Backup
Enter service mode to make a
of Reader backup of SRAM data into the
Controller HDD.
PCB
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
4-245
4
Part to be
replaced
Backup
of DC
Controller
PCB
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
Description
Procedure
When TPM is
enabled (ON)
No additional
work
Follow the
description on
the left.
Service
Address Lists
Settings/Registration > Paper Type
Management Settings
Quick Menu Settings
Remote UI(Import/Export)
Remote UI(Import/Export)
None
None
Remote UI(Import/Export)
SST(Meapback)
Remote UI(Import/Export)
SST(Meapback)
Printer Settings
Remote UI(Import/Export)
None
MEAP Settings
SMS
SST(Meapback)
Key information to TPM to use for coding Settings/Registration > Administrator > None
Management Settings >TPM Settings
T-4-45
Regarding the items in the table below, there is no method for the user to back them up. Ask
the user to make settings again. Part of the items can be recovered from Meapbac.bin.
Default setting
When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board
on SRAM is lost and HDD cannot be accessed. For recovery, perform "Items which needs to
be backed up by the user when replacing the HDD" as well in addition to the table below to
format the HDD.
User
User
Service
None
SST(Meapback)
None
SST(Meapback)
None
SST(Meapback)
Certificate Settings
None
None
Document of non-transmission
None
None
None
None
Forwarding Settings
Remote UI(Import/Export)
Remote UI(Import/Export)
4-246
None
T-4-46
T-4-44
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
4-246
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
4-247
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
4-247
Adjustment
Overview
replacing parts
When
Adjustment
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD
Overview
In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are
Controller System
mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 4 blocks based on their related
technology as shown below.
Parts Name
5-2
HDD
Controller System
HDD
Main Controller PCB1
Main Controller PCB2
TPM PCB
Image Formation System Primary Charging Wire
Primary Charging Assembly
Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
Pre-Transfer Charging Wire
Drum
Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)
Developing Assembly
Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB
ETB
Patch Sensor
Waste Toner Container
Fixing System
Fixing Roller
External Auxiliary System DC Controller PCB
p. 5-2
p. 5-4
p. 5-5
p. 5-7
p. 5-7
p. 5-7
p. 5-9
p. 5-9
p. 5-9
p. 5-10
p. 5-10
p. 5-10
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-12
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Printing the set/registered data
Use the service mode.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed.
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD
5-2
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD
2. After Replacing
5-3
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn
ON the main powerswitch.)
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
5) Restoring the backup data
Use the Remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
6) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA ertificate,
request the user to generate them again.
8) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation
Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA
collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced,
reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following
procedures.
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press OK button.(e.g.: If
No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD
5-3
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1
5-4
NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.
Cooling Fan
Controller
BOX Frame
F-5-1
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-5-2
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1
5-4
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2
5-5
1. Before Replacing
Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand.
<Procedure of adjustment>
Target data:
Service part:
Address List
Forwarding Settings
Settings/Registration
F-5-3
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2
5-5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2
2. When Replacing
5-6
3. After Replacing
Memory PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
Memory PCB
F-5-4
Prohibited Operation:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might
cause to fail the restoration.
Main Controller PCB 1
Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)
Memory PCB
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2
5-6
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-7
TPM PCB
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-81.
<Procedure of adjustment>
When TPM setting is OFF
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
<Procedure of adjustment>
It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to ON.
1) Removing the network cable
Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density
becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following.
When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and
up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the
density of output image becomes light.
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-7
5
3)
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the
5-8
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output
NOTE:
When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density
becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following.
When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and
up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the
density of output image becomes light.
CAUTION:
Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment
screws with the same amount.
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.
[C]
[A]
F-5-5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-8
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum
4) Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print
and check the image.
5-9
CAUTION:
<Procedure of adjustment>
Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment
screws with the same amount.
[2]
Photosensitive Drum
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-124.
[D]
[B]
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Remove the EEROM.
1 Screw
1 Connector
F-5-6
F-5-7
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum
5-9
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB
3) Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum.
5-10
CAUTION:
If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in
the ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Applying Tospearl
4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.
Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
uniformly with lint-free paper. In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the
Photosensitive Drum
Tospearl
F-5-8
Sheet
lint-free paper
F-5-9
Developing Assembly
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the Developing Assembly," on p. 4-130.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>DVG-CYL)
2) Supplying Developing Assembly toner (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S)
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB
5-10
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Roller
5-11
Fixing System
Fixing Roller
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-185.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Clear the ETB control counter. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>TR-BLT)
Parts counter (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>TR-BLT) is also cleared coincidentally.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1) Grease Application
Apply approx. 230 mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference
Patch Sensor
and outer circumference of the Insulating Bushing so that all circumferences are covered
with white film. If grease is not applied, abnormal noise may occur, or the Fixing Roller
Grease Application
F-5-10
As a rough standard, see the following for the amount of grease to be applied (approx. 230
mg).
F-5-11
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Roller
5-11
Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB
5-12
When applying grease, pay attention not to get it accumulated in the cut [a].
DC Controller PCB
<Procedure of parts replacement>
see "Removing the DC Controller PCB," on p. 4-234.
<Procedure of adjustment>
1. Before Replacing
1) Backup of the Service Mode data
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
2. After Replacing
1) Restoring the backup data
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
F-5-12
When installing the Insulating Bushing [2] to the Fixing Roller [1], wipe off excess grease
adhered to the end face of the Fixing Roller (including the groove on the edge) [b].
Otherwise, grease may adhere to the Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer or be scattered from the
Fixing Roller.
F-5-13
Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB
5-12
Troubleshooting
Print
Test
Faults
Image
Faults
Feed
Other
upgrade
Version
Initial Checks
Making
Messages
Error
Codes
Error
Troubleshooting
6-2
Test Print
Overview
PG
TYPE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pattern
Gradation
Normal copy/print
Grid
17 gradations Tbic rank 2
17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or
141-line screen)
Solid white
Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2,
without image correction)
Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or
141-line screen, without image correction)
Solid black
Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces)
Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces)
Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2,
without image correction)
Halftone (density: 60H, 134-line screen or
141-line screen, without image correction)
Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2,
without image correction)
Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or
141-line screen, without image correction)
15 to 50: For development
Transfer
Fogging
failure
Black
line
Right angle
accuracy
Straight line
accuracy
Side
Magnification
Shock
registration
ratio
PCB to generate PG
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.
2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2
6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
6-3
17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
Grid (TYPE=1)
F-6-2
Check item
F-6-1
Check item
Right angle
accuracy/
Straight line
accuracy
Side
registration
Magnification
ratio
Check method
Assumed cause
Check method
Gradation
Black line
White line
Assumed cause
Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
or developing system failure is considered.
Laser light path failure, grid failure,
developing system failure, cleaning (drum,
ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly failure is considered.
Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
system failure is considered.
T-6-3
T-6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
6-3
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
6-4
NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following
cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.
2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2"
(TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2
When changing the density of the test print, use the following service mode to change the
density: TEST>PG>K.
Check item
F-6-3
Check item
Fogging
Check method
Assumed cause
Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
the blank area.
or developing system failure is considered.
T-6-4
Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
Check method
Assumed cause
F-6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)
F-6-5
Check item
6-5
Check method
F-6-6
Assumed cause
Check item
Black line
White line
Uneven pitch
Uneven
density
(rear/front)
Check method
Check whether black lines appear on
the image.
Check whether white lines appear on
the image.
Check whether lines appear on the
image in the horizontal scanning
direction.
Check the density difference between
the front and rear sides.
Assumed cause
Laser light path failure, grid failure,
developing system failure, cleaning (drum,
ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly failure is considered.
Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
system failure is considered.
Drum failure, developing system failure,
laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered.
Primary Charging Assembly failure, drum
failure or developing system failure is
considered.
T-6-7
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)
6-5
Image Faults
6-6
[Image Sample]
Feed direction
55mm
[Location]
.ETB
[Cause]
Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation
speed between the ETB and drum differs
[Condition]
When replacing the ETB
[Field Remedy]
1) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check the output image
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6
Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3
63mm
(LDR) or larger.
With shock image: go to step 2
Without shock image: End
2) Measure a distance from the trailing edge of the shock image.
3) Adjust using the following service mode. COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > TBLT-SPD:
Adjust the Transfer Belt speed
Shock image is located approx. 55mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by +10
gradually.
Shock image is located approx. 63mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by -10
F-6-7
gradually
4) Output a halftone image with the condition described in step 1 again and check the image.
With shock image: go to step 3.
Without shock image: End
6-6
6-7
4) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs.
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6
Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3
(LDR) or larger.
When uneven density is seen: Go to step 5.
When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.
CAUTION:
This adjustment is executed when the preferred image is not output even if the Primary
Charging Wire height adjustment and secure watermark adjustment * are performed.
* Secure watermark adjustment: Function Settings>Common>Print Settings>Secure
Watermark Settings>Adjust Background/Character Contrast
F-6-8
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2D-READ
3) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power switch after step 2. Uneven
density may be reduced by the two dimensional shading correction at the startup.
6-7
6-8
<Test pattern>
F-6-9
CAUTION:
13X19
F-6-10
NOTE:
For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1 to
output. The following shows the use case of each test print.
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P1
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with light density
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P2
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark density
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P3
6-8
6-9
6) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of
uneven density.
6-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to
return to the initial values.
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE2 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE3 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE4 (Level 2)
6-2) Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction (A to O) which uneven density is
seen.
After selecting "M-LINE1/M-LINE2", select the target horizontal scanning window (A to
O), and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning
direction A to H
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning
direction I to O
Not Use
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen
is switched, the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not
reflected on the screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the horizontal scanning direction (H line) is adjusted, the adjustment
value of the vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) is also changed.
F-6-11
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density
becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern and
make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed dramatically,
the image error (while line) may occur.
6-9
6-10
6-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image.
When uneven density is seen: Go to 6-4).
When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.
6-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27),
and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction
1 to 8
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE2 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction
9 to 16
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE3 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction
17 to 24
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE4 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction
25 to 32
NOTE:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen is
switched, the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not reflected
on the screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the vertical scanning direction (25 and 26 lines) is adjusted, the
adjustment value of the horizontal scanning direction (A to P) is also changed.
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density
Not Use
becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern and
make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed dramatically,
the image error (while line) may occur.
F-6-12
6-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the
procedure.
NOTE:
If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure,
reenter the values written in step 6-1.
6-10
[Remedy]
Changing the setting value in the following service mode improves the problem of a black
Image processing has been improved with this equipment, which applies optimal image
processing to the text part and the photo part respectively. Improvement in image processing,
however, highlights imperceptible dusts at the original scanning position, which may appear
as a line on the image.
Before Reading
Original
6-11
line.
COPIER > ADJUST > AE > AE-TBL: Text density adjustment when adjusting image density
Setting value: Change the default (5) to 3
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > SHARP: Setting of the sharpness level on the image
After Reading
Result
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2: Setting of the halftone processing in text/photo
Platen roller 1
mode
Setting value: Change the default (0) to 2
CAUTION:
Platen roller 1
Stream reading
glass
Scanning position
When performing a field remedy, remind that the scan result changes as follows:
It sticks on the
original during
scanning.
[Location]
ADF
[Cause]
At stream reading with the ADF, imperceptible dusts (paper dust, toner, dust, etc.) adhere
and remain at the original scanning position, which causes a black line on the original image.
(Occurrence frequency is roughly 3/10,000 of scanning documents)
The dusts causing a black line are delivered outside the ADF together with the scanning
original; therefore, there will be no black line with the next original.
6-11
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Bleed-thru/Soil appeared on the back of the paper (Staple Finisher D1/Booklet Finisher D1)
6-12
F-6-14
[Cause]
While the paper is stacked to the Process Tray Assembly, two sheets are rubbed at where the
F-6-15
sheets are nipped between the Stack Delivery Upper Roller [C] and the Stack Delivery Lower
[Remedy]
Bleed-thru is improved by changing the setting value in the following service mode:
This symptom can occur with all paper types because soil on the back of the paper (bleed-thru)
is caused by the rubbing of sheets, however, bleed-thru is likely to occur in the case of using
SORTER > OPTION > SLD-BCK: ON/OFF the mode to prevent bleed-thru
Setting value:
0: OFF (default)
This symptom is expected to occur when using coated paper together with plain paper; soil
appears on the coated paper because the image on the plain paper is transferred to the
coated paper.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Bleed-thru/Soil appeared on the back of the paper (Staple Finisher D1/Booklet Finisher D1)
6-12
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > White line (foreign matter between Developing Sleeves)
6-13
[Field Remedy]
1) Remove the Developing Assembly.
NOTE:
Be sure to place paper on a clean place and take out the foot of the Developing
Assembly before placing the Developing Assembly.
Feed Direction
F-6-16
F-6-17
[Location]
Developing Assembly
[Cause]
A line appears in toner coating when imperceptible foreign matter is caught between the 2
sleeves of the Developing Assembly. This can cause image failure of a white line in vertical
scanning direction.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > White line (foreign matter between Developing Sleeves)
6-13
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > White line (foreign matter between Developing Sleeves)
6-14
Insert a corner of the paper between the sleeves and scrape out and remove foreign matter
Toner can be excessively attached because the toner is pushed to the sleeve when
scraping out the foreign matter. Perform cleaning in the following steps because excess
toner can cause uneven density.
3-1) While rotating the sleeve, blow the toner with the blower and then check for excess
toner.
F-6-18
NOTE:
The location of foreign matter can be easily identified by using a blower to blow
excess toner between the sleeves.
Be sure to use plain paper with around 75 g/m2. (Too thick paper may not be fit into
the gap. Too thin paper can be folded or ripped.)
If it is difficult to insert paper, turn the gear clockwise and counterclockwise for 2
teeth so that it gets easier to insert paper between the sleeves. Do not turn the gear
counterclockwise for half round or more (otherwise, it can cause image failure due to
collected toner between the sleeve and the blade or between the sleeves)
F-6-19
3-2) Pile up 3 sheets of lint-free paper and clean excess toner with the lint-free paper.
NOTE:
Do not apply force and lightly wipe out the excess toner. Rubbing the toner part can
cause the rubbed part to be dark image.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > White line (foreign matter between Developing Sleeves)
6-14
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw
3-3) Check if the toner blown by the blower is attached to the Developing Roller; if the
toner is attached, wipe it with lint-free paper.
(Otherwise, the toner is fused to the Roller that causes banding)
6-15
F-6-20
4) Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-ROT.
If the white spots persist, execute the service mode again.
CAUTION:
Heavy use can result in deterioration of developer or toner scattering.
F-6-21
[Condition]
Job after a jam which occurs when the paper enters to the drum
When using curled paper (when using backside of printed paper, etc.)
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Separation Claw.
NOTE:
Replace the Separation Claw when a separation failure jam occurs even once..
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw
6-15
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-16
[Image Sample]
Feed Direction
<Soil attached.143mm from the paper edge>
[Location]
Fixing Feed Unit
[Cause]
Soil attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex
Outlet Roller
[Condition]
When soil is attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the
Duplex Outlet Roller, paper is fed with minor soil (paper dust and toner) attached to it, and the
soil is gradually attached to the Registration Front Roller. When the paper stops at the time of
registration, the rotating Registration Front Roller contacts the paper, which causes two trails
of soil of the roller width at 143mm from the paper edge.
Cleaning Brush
143mm
Paper
F-6-23
[Field Remedy]
Follow the following procedure to replace the Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right
Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller and clean the relevant parts.
Duplex Right Roller
<Preparation>
Remove the Registration Unit. (See Chapter 4, "Removing the Registration Unit.")
Registration Roller
143
mm
Registration
Front Roller
F-6-22
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-16
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
<Procedure>
1 Connector
2 Harness Guide
2 Screws
1 Wire Saddle
1 Claw
2 Screws
6-17
x2
x3
x2
F-6-24
F-6-26
x2
F-6-25
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-17
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
4 Wire Saddles
2 E-rings
1 Edge Saddle
1 Timing Belt
11 Connectors
2 Pulleys
3 Screws
2 Parallel Pin
6-18
2 Claws
x5
x11
F-6-28
x3
Protrusion
x2
x2
F-6-27
F-6-29
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-18
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-19
11) Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path, and remove a N-ring each from the Duplex
Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller.
3 Connectors
1 Wire Saddle
CAUTION:
2 Screws
Be sure to place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path because paper dust drops
during the following work.
x3
x2
F-6-30
Paper
10) Remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
N-ring
2 Hooks
F-6-32
Hook
x2
Hook
F-6-31
F-6-33
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-19
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
13) Pull out the Duplex Right Roller and remove the shaft at the rear.
6-20
14) Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixing Feed
Unit Side Plate. Then, move the Duplex Right Roller in the direction of the arrow and take it
NOTE:
In this procedure, the procedure for removing the Duplex Right Roller is shown in steps
13 and 14. When removing the Duplex Outlet Roller, check the installation position in
step 15 and remove the Duplex Outlet Roller by a similar procedure.
out from the opening on the top of the Fixing Feed Unit.
15) Remove the Duplex Outlet Roller in a similar procedure referring to the procedure for
removing the Duplex Right Roller in steps 13 and 14.
NOTE:
The installation position of the Duplex Outlet Roller is shown in the following figure.
Bushing
F-6-34
Bushing
F-6-37
F-6-35
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-20
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
16) Remove the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet
Roller.
6-21
18) Remove the paper on the Duplex Path, and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4
rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand.
17) Clean the four areas where the Cleaning Brushes are attached with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
F-6-39
19) Attach new 4 Cleaning Brushes with reference to the upper right of the plate where they
are going to be attached.
F-6-38
Reference for
attachment
F-6-40
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-21
20) Clean the four areas on the removed Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
6-22
Uneven density
[Cause]
Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change
in drum characteristics due to wear.
[Field Remedy]
Start the field remedy
YES
NO
Adjust developing bias
COPIER > ADJUST > VCONT > DE-OFST
F-6-41
Is it fixed?
YES
NO
CAUTION:
When rotating the roller by hand, be sure not to touch the surface of the roller but to
hold a side face.
Enable 2D shading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE; ON
Is it fixed?
Roller
YES
NO
Execute 2D shading individual correction
F-6-42
6-22
6-23
Smeared image
[Cause]
OR
Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which
Feed Direction
F-6-44
In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal
direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result. When
making adjustment, execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart.
can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared
image:
When the paper type is changed
Toner deterioration
Rapid change in environment (High temperature <- -> Low temperature)
Feed Direction
< Smeared Image >
OR
Feed Direction
F-6-45
If it is not a straight uneven density, change the value of the following service mode in
decrement of -10 and check the output result.
COPIER > ADJUST > VCONT > DE-OFST
(Setting value: default 0, -10, -20, -50)
Side Line
F-6-46
CAUTION :
Executing the above setting can generate smeared image or foggy image.
Smeared image may also occur exclusively in the area 5 to 10 mm from the leading edge of
the paper when there is burr on the leading edge of the paper (jagged edge formed when the
paper was cut by a cutter).
After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON
the main power and check the output result.
It is caused by toner being pushed backward by the power of the ETB, which is pushed down
by the burr when it passes through the transfer nips, to go back to the original position.
Burr
(For detailed procedure, see Troubleshooting > Uneven density correction by 2D shading >
Toner
Photosensitive Drum
ETB
Transfer Roller
Paper
Smeared imageF-6-47
6-23
[Field Remedy]
6-24
Select the following to execute Full Adjust: Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance
> Adjust Image > Auto Adjust Gradation < Full Adjust; and check the output result.
1) In COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1, set the values to "4", "7", and "-10" in that
order from the left, and check the output result.
CAUTION :
Executing the above setting may cause the Pre-transfer Charging Wire to be easily
soiled. Be sure to check for soiling of the Charging Wire at the time of inspection since
heavy soiling may cause vertical lines to occur on the rear side of the image.
YES
Is it fixed?
NO
1) COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > DMAX-N-T; reduce the value of DMAX-N-T from 895 (default)
by -30.
2) Select the following to execute DMAX-N: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DMAX-N; and
then check the output result.
If the symptom is not improved, further reduce the value in step 1) by -30 and then execute
step 2).
YES
Is it fixed?
CAUTION :
NO
Changing the above setting can cause reduced density or thinner line
If the smeared image is not improved within the acceptable range for density and line width,
execute skipping process in the following procedure:
1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; change the value to 1
2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; change to 1 and check the output result.
YES
3) If the symptom is not improved, change the value in step 2) to 2, 3and check the output
result.
NO
CAUTION :
Execute skipping processing (within the acceptable range for density/line width)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-SW; set 1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-CONT; set 1 to 3
Check the image
Changing the above setting can cause minor skipping in the text part.
Complete
F-6-48
6-24
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level
Example: In the case of the environment where the relative value "135" is suitable as the
default value.
The edge emphasis level of image can be adjusted in both user mode and service mode, but
the use conditions differ.
User mode
Item code
6-25
Service mode
The following table shows the edge emphasis level by the combination of "SHARP" and
"Sharpness" settings, using the relative value when the default is 100.
1
2
3
4
5
-3
-2
25
40
45
50
55
65
60
85
100
115
140
100
115
125
135
150
140
145
150
155
160
+3
175
T-6-9
Images become smoother as values in the table become smaller, while they become sharper
as values become larger.
Note that, when "Sharpness" is the upper limit or lower limit, the relative value stays constant
regardless of the "SHARP" setting, therefore the edge emphasis effect does not change even
if the settings are changed.
Normally, adjustment is made for each copy on the Touch Panel based on the service
mode setting, but depending on the environment or paper type (coarse surface, etc.), edge
emphasis may not turn out the way the user expected.
In this case, edge emphasis level customized for the user can be set by setting the current
value of "Sharpness" as the default value.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level
6-25
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Sleeve
6-26
[Location]
Developing Sleeve
4) Execute service mode > COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE to output a halftone image (PG12),
[Cause]
If the surface of the sleeve is soiled, uneven toner coating occurs, causing the soiling of the
same shape to appear at intervals equal to the circumference of the sleeve (approx. 63 mm)
in the vertical scanning direction.
F-6-49
[Field Remedy]
1) Rotate the sleeve in the normal direction and identify the location where the soiling occurs.
CAUTION:
Do not turn the sleeve in the reverse direction.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Sleeve
6-26
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image failure due to the temperature rising at the edge of the Fixing Roller (crepe mark)
6-27
<Location of Trouble>
Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller
<Cause>
This is the symptom which image error like crepe mark occurs when temperature at the
edge of the Fixing Roller rises.
When the temperature rising at the edge occurs, the edge of the Pressure Roller made with
rubber expands, giving the following influences on papers.
Feed speed at the edge is increased, compared with the speed at the center.
Tension is applied in the direction of both edges.
As it get close to the trailing edge, fixing is performed while a paper is distorted, causing an
image error.
<Conditions>
Although all images have a possibility to have the error because the cause is temperature
rising at the edge, the symptom is mainly significant with halftone images. The following
shows estimated error occurrence with halftone image.
When printing 200 sheets or more of small size paper continuously (approx. 1000
sheets in A4 size)
When printing a large size sheet right after printing 100 sheets or more of small size
paper continuously
<Field Remedy>
1) Go through the following: Settings/Registration > XXX > XXX; and turn ON the item.
By doing so, image error (crepe mark) will not occur.
With this setting, temperature difference between the center and the edge of the Fixing
Roller is detected, and start idle rotation when temperature rising at the edge tends to
occur.
During idle rotation, paper feed is stopped to keep constant temperature on the Fixing
Roller, so the productivity is reduced.
2) Switching the image priority mode level.
When the image priority mode is specified, productivity may be extremely reduced
depending on use conditions (paper size, paper type, and print image).
In such a case, change the level of production reduction by the following service mode.
COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX > FIX-IMGLV
F-6-50
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image failure due to the temperature rising at the edge of the Fixing Roller (crepe mark)
6-27
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure
MTF Adjustment
6-28
Adjustment Procedure
The MTF value of the Reader Unit may differ from the factory setting value depending on the
Series
Model
imagePRESS
1135/1125/1110 Series
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051/C5045/
C5035/C5030 Series
MTF (128g)
FY9-9453-000 MK0808 (100)
Simultaneous
duplex reading *1
Copyboard
reading
Reverse duplex
reading
Simultaneous
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Reverse duplex
C9075 PRO/9070 PRO/9065 PRO/
reading
9060 PRO/C7065/7055 Series
Simultaneous
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Simultaneous
8105/8095/8085 Series
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Reverse duplex
6075/6065/6055 Series
reading
Simultaneous
duplex reading
-*2
F-6-51
NOTE:
The end with a dark color square will be the trailing edge at reading. When adjusting
the copyboard reading, place the chart on the Copyboard Glass to make the dark color
square comes at the right side.
T-6-10
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure
6-28
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment
6-29
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLM-PLTN
BWM-PLTN
CLM-DF1
BWM-DF1
CLM-DF2
BWM-DF2
CLM-TGT
BWM-TGT
T-6-14
T-6-12
NOTE:
In the case of executing sampling of the MTF value several times, execute in arbitrary
order.
NOTE:
The MTF value for fine adjustment can be set only after executing sampling of the MTF
value.
2) Recalculate the MTF filter coefficient.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD >
MTF-CLC
4) During the adjustment, START is indicated, and once it is terminated normally, OK! is
indicated.
T-6-15
3) Print the image with moir, and check that moir is not appeared on the image.
If moir appears, determine the image quality by asking the user to compare the images
NOTE:
If NG1 to 3 is indicated, check the location to set the chart and direction of the chart,
and then executed the adjustment again.
before adjustment, after sampling of the MTF value, and after making a fine adjustment.
4) If using the MTF value after sampling as the MTF value, set the MTF value for fine
adjustment to 0 and recalculate the MTF filter coefficient.
If using the MTF value before the adjustment, it disables the MTF adjustment.
Description of adjustment Color/B&W (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R >
Copyboard reading
Front side stream reading
Back side stream reading
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLPLT-EN
BWPLT-EN
CLDF1-EN
BWDF1-EN
CLDF2-EN
BWDF2-EN
Copyboard reading
Front side stream reading
NOTE:
The initial value of the MTF value is updated by switching the Control Panel screen.
After the adjustment, the corresponding MTF value is corrected.
(Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-xx, MTF2-xx
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLPLT-EN
BWPLT-EN
CLDF1-EN
BWDF1-EN
CLDF2-EN
BWDF2-EN
T-6-16
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB or the Scanner Unit, check the initial value of
the MTF value. If the value is 1, it will be necessary to execute the adjustment.
6) Print the image with moir, and check that moir is not appeared on the image.
If moir appears, make a fine adjustment.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment
6-29
Feed Faults
6-30
<Field Remedy>
Normally, when printing to paper larger than A3 or LDR size paper at the start of printing in
a high humidity environment, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation.
Paper wrinkle
Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time becomes
longer. In other cases, idle rotation is not performed.
<Location>
If paper wrinkle occurs on paper larger than B4, increase the setting value from 2 in
<Cause>
Right after the startup, temperature is different between the center and the edge of the
Fixing Roller (temperature: center > edge).
Because a slippery solid black image does not match to the nip shape when it is fed, the
center of paper is pulled toward the feeding direction, causing paper wrinkle.
<Condition>
Timing: Approx. 20 sheets immediately after the startup first time for the day
Paper size: Paper size larger than B4
If paper wrinkle occurs on B4 size paper, increase the setting value from 4 in increments of
1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-WNKL
[Setting values]
0: OFF
1: When paper is larger than A3/LDR size paper in a high humidity environment,
idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds. (Default)
2: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds, whereas it
is performed for up to 20 seconds when paper size is 304.8457.2 mm
(12"18")/330.2482.6 mm (13"19").
3: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds, whereas it
is performed for up to 40 seconds when paper size is 304.8457.2 mm
(12"18")/330.2482.6 mm (13"19").
4: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 20 seconds.
5: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 40 seconds.
6: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 60 seconds.
6-30
Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm
Other
6-31
1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
Ring.
F-6-53
x3
F-6-52
NOTE:
If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm, change the phase difference
between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws according to the
following procedure.
Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm
F-6-54
6-31
Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation
Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the
dents formed by tightening the screws.
6-32
F-6-55
4) Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and retighten the 2 screws loosened in
Loosen
step 3.
F-6-56
Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
6-32
Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
2 Screws
2 Screws
6-33
Duct
x2
F-6-59
6) Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB
1 Screw
Unit.
Fixing Feed Right
Front Upper Cover
CAUTION:
The load of rotating the gear is heavy, so be careful not to get injured.
ITB Unit
F-6-58
Disengage Gear
F-6-60
Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
6-33
6-34
In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the
specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the
field.
1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper.
2) Set A4 size plain paper/recycled paper on the Multi-purpose Tray.
3) COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK
A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20
seconds later.
4) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet.
If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 7.0 to 8.0 mm at the center (b), and
F-6-61
Center
Edge
c
Paper feed direction
F-6-62
6-34
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
6-35
Overview
Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Introduction
shown below.
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in
DC Controler PCB
Option
HDD
Controller system
failure diagnosis
tool
Reader
Start system
failure
diagnosis
tool
Main
Controller
PCB 1
Control Panel
All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply
Operation
panel
Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB, PCI Expansion
Option
F-6-63
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
PCB (option)>
Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (J11/J13), SDRAM (P),
Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option), HDD>
in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
blue frame (dotted line).
This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
6-35
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
6-36
This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in HDD.
Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be
accessed.
Voice
Operation/
Voice
Guidance
PCB
Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis
Expansion Bus
PCB
IPSec PCB
HDD(Option)
HDD
(Standard)
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-6-64
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
6-36
6-37
Basic Flowchart
DDR2-SDRAM Board
No
Yes
F-6-66
No
Yes
No
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or
the error.
F-6-67
6-37
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Boot System Error Diagnosis
6-38
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Power Supply
Switch.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is
disconnected.
4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if
not recovered.
Operation
Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below.
Use each tool according to the following purposes.
When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot
System Error Diagnosis.
When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 or child PCBs
mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis.
Environment
Heater Switch
Cassette
Heater Switch
Leakage Breaker
F-6-68
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Boot System Error Diagnosis
6-38
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
6-39
starts.
The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
Processing/Date
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
Error
Settings/Registration
Main Menu
Energy Saver
Quick Menu
Log In/Out
Clear
Reset
Stop
Status Monitor/Cancel
Start
F-6-69
F-6-71
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may not
Diagnosis Time
perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In
this case, remove and then install the 2 SDRAMs on the Main Controller PCB 1.
If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed
normally. (For details, see "Error Diagnosis".)
*2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is
correct operation.
*3: When the 2 SDRAMs are not mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1, this diagnosis is not
After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
F-6-70
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time
6-39
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method
6-40
Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4'
simultaneously.
Processing/Date
Main Menu
Error
Settings/Registration
Energy Saver
Quick Menu
Log In/Out
Clear
Reset
Status Monitor/Cancel
Stop
Start
F-6-73
F-6-72
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method
6-40
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears
on the Control Panel.
6-41
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-75
F-6-77
Note:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "--.--" is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.
F-6-78
F-6-79
F-6-76
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time
6-41
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time
Test Name
SN-6 SM
BUS SOC
DIMM2
occurring.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
Description
Check an SM bus
error in the Main
Controller PCB 1 and
SDRAM (M0) on the
Main Controller PCB 2
Note:
Once the tool is activated, this machine reboots after approx. 2 minutes.
After completion of the diagnosis, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power.
By turning the power OFF, the operation of this tool completes.
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Test Name
SN-1 IASDRAM
SN-2 SM
BUS IA
DIMM1
SN-3 SM
BUS IA
DIMM2
Description
Check an error
between the Main
Controller PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 1
Check an SM bus
error in SDRAM
(outside) on the Main
Controller PCB 1
Check an SM bus
error in SDRAM
(inside) on the Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-4 SM
Check an SM
BUS IA
bus error in Clock
Clock Gen Generator on the Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-5 SM
Check an SM bus
BUS SOC error in the Main
DIMM1
Controller PCB 1 and
SDRAM (M1) on the
Main Controller PCB 2
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM
(outside) on
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM
(inside) on Main
Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M1) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Error
Code
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Check the installation of SDRAM
(M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
SN-7 PCI
Config
Maestro
SN-8 PCI
Config
LANC
SN-9 PCI
Config PCIBridge
SN-10
CPLD
Remedy
Error
Code
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Check the installation of SDRAM
(M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Supplementary Information: If
SDRAM (M0) on the Main Controller
PCB 2 is not installed, [no] is
displayed for the diagnosis result.
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
6-42
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0/
M1) on Main
Controller PCB 2
Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time
6-42
6
Test Name
Description
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
TPM PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-18
SRAM
Check failure of
SRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
A battery emptied
check
SN-19 GS Check On-board BUS
on the Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-20 HDD Check an HDD I/F
error
SN-21
BOARD
CONNECT
IA-SOC
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions
Remedy
Error
Code
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (J11/
J13) on Main
Controller PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 2
It is always no indication.
A result does not become NG
Main Controller
PCB 2
Memory PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
6-43
Assumed Error
Location
Test Name
Description
SN-22
BOARD
CONNECT
SOCChLink
SN-23
BOARD
CONNECT
SOCDCON
Main Controller
PCB 2
Channel link
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
DC controller
PCB
Remedy
Error
Code
Restrictions
<Boot System Error Diagnosis>
If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 2
PCI Expansion
PCB
HDD Cable
HDD
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions
6-43
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-44
Version upgrade
Overview
Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
SST
System Software
System CD
System Software
Host Machine
Download mode
Normal mode
/(Safe mode)
Copy the
System Software
Write the
system software
Restart
Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device
System Software
Temporary Memory Space
CDS
System Software
Updater
F-6-80
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-44
6-45
Download Mode
The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage
device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the
Normal mode(recommend):
Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1
and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and
enables the download same as before.
You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
F-6-81
NOTE:
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main
menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must
start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to
activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message,
version up..error. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the
machine. If so, turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for
details).
Safe mode:
Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not
possible to start this machine and enter service mode or where format of the HDD is going
to be executed.
F-6-82
6-45
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-46
Software to be upgraded
Host Machine
Main Controller
MEAP Controller
Language Module
Remote UI Contents
RUI portal
Mobile print
UI-BOX
UI-COPY
UI-Intro
UI-SEND
Voice Synthesis Dictionary
Paper Type Information File
Service Mode Contents
Printer Controller
WebDAV Contents
Resources for Web Browser
Reader Controller(2-sided Single Pass)
FAX Board Boot Program
Display on SST
Registered
Name of system
name of
software
product
iA8105
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted
Communication
OCR Libraly
Interface Controller
Option Controller
Inserter Controller
Finisher Controller
Folder Controller
Trimmer Controller
Finisher Controller
Saddle Controller
Folder Controller
Inserter Controller
Trimmer Controller
iAxxxx
USB
memory
Others
SYSTEM
MEAPCON
LANGUAGE
RUI
RPTL
MOBPR
BOX
COPY
INTRO
SEND
TTS
MEDIA
SMCNT
DCON
WEBDAV
BROWSER
RCOND
G3CCB
G3CCM
KEY
SDICT
PIU_B1
PIU_CON
ARCNET Connection
ISU_K1
OP_CON
IST_CON
FIN_F1
FIN_CON
FLD_CON
BT_D1
TRM_CON
IPC Connection
FIN_D1
FIN_CON
SDL_CON
FLD_CON
IST_CON
TRM_CON
Remarks
This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
T-6-18
6-46
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-47
Overview
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of
machine start-up at power-on.
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously
on the numeric keypad).
Single mode
Assist mode(recommended)
Assist mode provides the following features.
The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
searched.
The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically
CAUTION:
downloaded.
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is
not possible to start this machine and enter service mode.
The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
[RCON]
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or
when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto)
is used.
The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten
even when system software of the same version is being written.
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
NOTE:
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-47
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
6-48
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver.4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
HDD
System
Software
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
1) Start the PC
2) Set the system CD in the PC
3) Start SST
4) Click Register Firmware button.
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area
BOOT area
FLASH
ROM
F-6-83
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
F-6-84
6-48
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
6-49
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click OK button.
F-6-85
F-6-87
F-6-86
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
6-49
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6-50
Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
IP address:172.16.1.100
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
IP address:172.16.1.160
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
Preparation
Requirements
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
IP address : 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Cross cable
Cross cable
IP address : 172.16.1.160
10Base-T : category 3, 5 or later
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
100Base-TX : category 5 or later
1000Base-TEnhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-T: Category 5
1000Base-T: Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
F-6-88
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
CAUTION:
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6-50
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-51
F-6-89
CAUTION:
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
cross cable.
F-6-90
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
selected.
NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-51
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
NOTE:
When You was connected to the main body of Safe mode in Assist mode:
A system software of LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT, SDICT can acquire version
information.
6-52
displayed.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions is selected.
F-6-91
5) Click"Next"button.
4) Click Start button
F-6-93
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process. The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-52
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-53
NOTE:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
IP address
Model name
Download mode
Device Information
button.
F-6-95
F-6-94
F-6-96
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-53
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
6-54
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click Clear button.
Clear
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
3) ClickOKbutton.
F-6-99
F-6-97
F-6-100
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-54
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-55
Formatting HDD
Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
ALL:to format the whole HDD
When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.
When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade.
F-6-101
After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is
downloaded.
After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting
to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV
format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting.
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the
system software.
F-6-102
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-55
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-56
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Writing process
Writing process
Writing process
Writing process
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
F-6-103
Automatically restart
Start in the new version
of the system software
F-6-104
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-56
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
NOTE:
With SSTv4.41, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models,
the following screen is displayed.
As for the iR ADVANCE series models (or this machine), the procedure displayed on the
screen is not necessary; thus, click the Next button to go on to the next screen.
Device Information
6-57
Steps of Formatting
1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and the information file (single) for individual download.
Check the network settings and click Start button.
F-6-105
F-6-106
4) ClickFormat HDDbutton
F-6-107
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-57
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-58
7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.
F-6-108
F-6-110
CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.
CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is
downloaded (to write the downloaded software).
Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process.
Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.
F-6-109
HDD is formatted.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-58
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-59
When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In
this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
Replacing HDDs
Connect to SST
F-6-112
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
F-6-113
Click Initialize button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-59
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
Backup
Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB.
Backup via SST
Backup data
Backup data RAM
MEAP applications
For investigation in Dev
Service Print
6-60
NOTE:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
Controller PCB.
Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading
SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
including Service mode stored in the old PCB
T-6-19
Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
(Before replacing the Main Controller PCBs, DC Controller PCB, be sure to back up
the data because Backup RAM holds the parts durable counter data and service mode
setting data in the Main Controller.)
MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
Backup via Service mode
Backup data
Backup of Reader
Controller PCB
Backup of DC Controller
PCB
Service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-20
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-60
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-61
3) Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download (Single).
Check the network settings and click Start.
CAUTION:
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation
to determine the cause.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon
Service PC
SST
iR ---System
Upload/Download
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
Main controller
F-6-116
F-6-114
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-61
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-62
CAUTION:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS.
Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click Save button.
F-6-118
7) Click OK button
F-6-119
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-62
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device
6-63
PC
F-6-120
SST
System software
USB memory
storage device
SST
System software
Downloading the
system software
HDD
Flash ROM
F-6-122
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below.
F-6-121
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device
6-63
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-64
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Requirements:
System
Software
HDD
System
Software
3) Start SST.
Temporary
memory space
2) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
F-6-124
FLASH
ROM
F-6-123
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-64
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
6-65
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click OK button.
F-6-125
F-6-127
6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
screen.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
click Copy button.
F-6-126
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-65
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-66
Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
USB memory storage device (*)
Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption
technology.
F-6-128
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
inserted.
F-6-129
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-66
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-67
NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
8) Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.
F-6-130
NOTE:
The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST
7) Click Start button.
Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.
F-6-132
F-6-131
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-67
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
Connection
6-68
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.
Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-134
CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
memory storage device.
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
USB memory
F-6-133
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
6-68
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-69
Menu/Function Overview
NOTE:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-135
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.
[1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
To download the system software (confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
To download the system software (overwriting)
[4]: Format HDD
To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
[5]: Backup
Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it
other than the following.)
[7]: Clear downloaded files
To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)
[8]: Download Menu 2
To move to Download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-69
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-70
Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the
shutdown sequence.
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the
F-6-136
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-70
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-71
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
[1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
F-6-139
F-6-138
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-71
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
Operation procedure
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
6-72
F-6-140
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
F-6-141
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
6-72
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-73
F-6-142
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-73
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
6-74
Formatting HDD
CAUTION:
In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
software from SST to USB.
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset
key.
F-6-144
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
6-74
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
6-75
Operation procedure
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Writing process
Writing process
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
F-6-146
6-75
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Clearing Download File
6-76
Backup
[5]: Backup
[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
menu screen.
CAUTION:
This function includes R&D review.Do not usually use it other than the following
function.
The USB memory collecting log uses the USB memory where You registered a system
software for this Host machine with by SST.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[5] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2
[1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.
F-6-147
[4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text
format.
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[C]: Return to Main Menu
F-6-148
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Clearing Download File
6-76
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu
6-77
This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the
sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
Main Power Switch).
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
is displayed on the touch panel.
All downloaded file is deleted.
3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
4) Remove the USB memory storage device.
Download Menu 2
[8]: Download Menu 2
F-6-150
Other Menu
[9]: Other Menu
This mode displays other menu.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu
6-77
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-78
Troubleshooting
Error Code: E753-0001
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E7530001.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the
correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the nonconnecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finishers system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-78
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-79
Checking the
Durables
Checking the
Periodically
Replaced Parts
No.
Detail
Check
1
2
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-79
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation
6-80
Preparation
Overview
Overview of Preparation
Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the
Installation
Method
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)
Automatic download
Automatic update
b
Firmware acquisition
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
periodical download
Periodical update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Without connection to
external network
F-6-151
See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware]
Update] Button
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Periodical
update
validation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-22
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation
T-6-23
6-80
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
6-81
Network Settings
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-6-152
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
6-81
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
6-82
F-6-153
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-6-154
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
6-82
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
3. Communication Test
6-83
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.
You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a
communication test of the RDS.
F-6-156
F-6-158
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
6-83
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
6-84
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
NOTE:
F-6-159
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-6-160
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
6-84
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-85
See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked Download and Update.
STEP 1
Scheduling
via UGW
STEP 1
STEP 2
Scheduling
via UGW
Update using
Updater
F-6-162
F-6-161
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
CAUTION:
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan
operation)
See the section of "Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function" under Limitations and
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed
information.
The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-85
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-86
F-6-163
F-6-165
F-6-166
F-6-164
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-86
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Download using
Updater
Update using
Updater
6-87
F-6-167
CAUTION:
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan
operation)
See the section of "Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function" under Limitations and
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed
information.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
F-6-168
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-87
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-88
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
F-6-171
F-6-169
[Retrieval ID]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
[Password]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
F-6-170
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-88
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
F-6-172
[Version]:
6-89
F-6-173
[Delivery Time]:
[Applicable Firmware]:
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
[Additional Languages]:
If there are any addtional languages, they are displayed.
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added. The languages already registered in the device are
always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary language from the device.
Include English and Japnese in eight languages.
[Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
[Now]:
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
[Set Time]:
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on
the specified date and time.
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
[Timing to Apply]:
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
[Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
[Manual]:
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-89
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
[E-mail]:
6-90
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept]
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
button.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]
[Updated Module Only]
For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
selected in [Updated Module Only].
[E-mail]
To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with
comma (,) or semi-colon (;).
For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following
timing.
F-6-174
-Distribution Set
-Distribution Started
-Distribution Finished
-Update Started
-Update Finished
-Error Occurred
F-6-175
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-90
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
6-91
[Manual], respectively:
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
F-6-176
F-6-178
F-6-177
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-91
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-92
F-6-181
F-6-179
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
CAUTION:
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan
operation)
F-6-180
See the section of "Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function" under Limitations and
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technical Information of this manual for more
detailed information.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-92
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-93
This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
F-6-183
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
F-6-182
F-6-184
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-93
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-94
F-6-186
F-6-185
F-6-187
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-94
6-95
F-6-188
6-95
6-96
F-6-189
F-6-191
<Service Mode>
F-6-190
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.
F-6-192
F-6-193
6-96
6-97
No.2
No.5
Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
No.3
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
device cannot be started.
Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.
2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.
No.4
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution
should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on
CDS.
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST.
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.)
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
6-97
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files
Debug Logs
Obtaining Log Files
Update Logs
Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
Information to Report
6-98
1. Check that the CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to 1 and then restart the device.
Symptom occurred
2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<devices IP address or host name>) using the system
Occurrence frequency
Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
administrator right.
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
will be helpful for investigation.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files
6-98
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files
6-99
3. From Display Logs/Communication Test screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and
Update Logs by copy & paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/
Others] > [Register/Update Software] > Display Logs/Communication Test
F-6-194
NOTE:
See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 3 for details of changing Log Level
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files
6-99
6-100
Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No.
Messages
Timing of display
Cause
Remedy
6-100
6
No.
Messages
10
Timing of display
6-101
Cause
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Set proxy and restart the communication test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The access to the network is limited.
Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication test, Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
OK
time-out (in HTTP communication, no response
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
File Server : Retrieve
for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but failed to Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed
connect to server.
sales company.
The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
Error Code: [XXXX]
download in the communication test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in the Contact the sales company's Support Department.
communication test.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-101
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
6-102
Cause
communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new
(main screen)
log was not accepted.
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
Remedy
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Notice of version
Failed to acquire version information of device
Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
device.
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server.
If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version
No return of notifying version information
Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
during the sending.
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof
notice of version information.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
6-102
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
Immediate download
(error dialogue)
6-103
Cause
Remedy
UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the
UGW linkage.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Re-execute the job.
approval information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery
Re-execute the job.
order
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
firmware delivery information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal
Re-execute the job.
error occurred.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-103
6
No.
12
Messages
Timing of display
Immediate download
(main screen)
Manual update (main
screen)
Automatic update (main
screen)
6-104
Cause
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
passed.)
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server did not exist.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
then ON the power of device main body.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Updated version was different from the ordered
Re-execute the job.
version.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was
Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error.
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-104
6
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Messages
Delivery Error
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
6-105
Cause
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server does not exist.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery Error
UGW linkage (Update
The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time
Firmware screen)
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Delivery Firmware Label
passed).
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Delivery Firmware version
sales company.
Immediate download
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
Error Code: [ xxx ]
(Update Firmware screen) then ON the power of device main body.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists.
This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
Restart failed.
Manual update (error
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.
dialogue)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
dialogue)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64
Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters.
update setting
characters.
The following characters cannot be
At the time of periodical
used for the [E-Mail Address]:
update setting
,:;()[]<>\
Specify [Comments] with up to 128
At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters.
Specify comments within 128 characters.
characters.
update setting
The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong.
Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
server URL.
T-6-25
6-105
6-106
Error Codes
Error Codes displayed on LUI in a device and how to read them.
84014206
Code
Value
Error
0
1
2
3
4
5
Not dened.
CDS server
Updater
UGW
Service person
IT administrator (User)
xx
Method
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000-
Contents
Category code
F-6-195
6-106
6-107
Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number)
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits
digit Error
digit
digits Method Category
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Error
0
1
Not defined.
CDS server
x
x
Description
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
6-107
2~5
I/O
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
9
6-108
Description
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
The specified license access number does not exist in LMS The specified license access number has been deauthorized The package product of the entered license access number doesn't include MEAP application/System Option
The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the sale company for the package product
The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit
number allowed to register
As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were issued more than the defined number of times for the
same device serial number
No device product exists applicable to the optional product No product exists applicable to the device serial number
The product of the entered license access number cannot
be used with this device because the settings of the sales
company are incorrect
No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery
Although the product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now
No existence of optional product applicable to the device
serial number.
The license access number has been registered for another device
For the device product applicable to the device serial
number, no available software (MEAP application, System
Option) exists
LMS system error
-
Not defined
Unknown error
Processing exclusively
6-108
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
3
4
1
1
0
0
5
6
Description
I/O
1
x
x
An internal error about file operation
2
x
x
An internal error about xML file operation
3
0
1
Failed to output the license file
Device
1
x
x
An internal error in CPCA
2
x
x
An internal error in IMI
3
x
x
An internal error in SMS
4
x
x
An internal error in NLM
SOAP communication
1
0
1
The processing thread stopped
1
0
2
Processing SOAP communication now
1
0
3
The function type is not matched
1
0
4
An invalid SOAP response error
2
0
1
An internal error about application information
2
0
2
config.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
3
type.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
4
An error in binding type.xml
2
0
5
An error in creating a service tab
2
0
6
A runtime error in performing the web method
2
0
7
An unknown host error in performing the web method
3
0
1
The delivery server is stopped
3
0
2
An error occurrence in the delivery server
HTTP communication
1
0
1
Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown
2
0
1
Invalid HTTP request
2
0
2
Failed to connect to the server
2
2
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
6-109
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
6-109
Description
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
5
6
7
8
6-110
Remedy
Socket communication
1
0
1
Failed to connect the eRDS
1
0
2
No response from eRDS
1
0
3
No notice of start from the eRDS
1
0
4
Error of socket reading
1
0
5
Socket communication time-out
Other internal codes
0
0
2
One of installation, start or authorization failed
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an
error) *
0
3
x
An internal error in processing the installation
1
x
x
An error by using invalid API
2
x
x
An internal error in SMS
3
0
1
No existence of delivery ID
3
0
2
Invalid delivery ID
3
0
3
The updated firmware information is not identical with the
firmware information after activation of the Updater
3
0
4
The process of firmware download is incomplete
3
0
5
The update process is incomplete
3
0
6
The installment process is incomplete
4
0
1
Failed to retrieve delivery information
5
0
1
Failed to execute the delivery process
5
0
2
The scheduled delivery was not executed within the defined Scheduled deliveries not executed
period of time
within the defined period of time are
abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
T-6-26
6-110
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Storing System Information > Description of Log to be Collected
Debug log
6-111
Scope of Application
failure.
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and
Purpose
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log
of quality follow-up.
by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the
cause.
With imageRUNNER ADVANCE, Sublog can be saved in the HDD using the standard
The Sublog Board is also assigned as a tool with imageRUNNER ADVANCE. The Sublog
Board is required for an error that requires rebooting because the Sublog Board has a battery.
Automatic Storage
At the time of shipment, 101 is specified in service mode Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION >
Manual Storage:
Execute "Counter Key(10 sec. or longer) + 1.2.3" to save the debug log.
Collecting logs:
Manual Storage
Counter Key + 1.2.3
Execute "Counter Key + 1.2.3" to save the debug log.
Overview
Note that the Control Panel is locked during the saving process; therefore, the screen does
not change even though you press the OK button on <Check Counter>.
Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
modules in the device for debug purpose.
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
determine the cause.
Previous time
Delete
Delete Delete
10
The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Storing System Information > Description of Log to be Collected
This time
10
F-6-196
6-111
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6-112
machine. If the screen changes by pressing the OK button, data transfer has been completed.
Collection Destination
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP
server or SST (Ver. 4.41 or later).
Collection Method
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.
Start the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and use SST on a PC with the network cable
connected to transfer the debug log.
Start the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and transfer the debug log to a USB memory
device that stores the system of the machine.
Method
Storage
SST
F-6-197
SUBLOG02_201103290130.BIN
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6-112
6-113
DEBUG-1
Function
Service Mode Lev.2
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > DEBUG-1
F-6-199
F-6-198
Note:
Date to be added to the file name shows the date that the log was transferred.
Display it by time of local Time.
DEBUG-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate Select the item, and then press OK key.
method
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service. Change the setting value in accordance
with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
Display/adj/set 0 to 3
0: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception
range
1: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
2: Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
3: Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
Default value
3
T-6-28
6-113
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-114
Preconditions:
The log is stored in the machine by holding down the counter + 1.2.3 or the automatic log
collection function.
A PC with SST running is connected to the machine and the machine is at download mode by
starting it with the 2 and 8 keys.
Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
1. Start SST (Ver. 4.41 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.
F-6-201
F-6-200
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-114
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-115
5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
F-6-202
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iRC5051 >EXR02627 (Serial number)
F-6-205
F-6-203
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-115
Error Code
Overview
Code
Error
Code
Jam
Code
Alarm
Error Code
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
Overview
7-2
Outline
In the jam display screen, the P row corresponds to the pickup position code.
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the
Pickup position
Explanation
Reference
p. 7-3
p. 7-101
p. 7-115
T-7-1
Location code
Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,
Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information.
Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,
In the jam display screen, the L row corresponds to the location code.
ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
JAM
ERR
ALARM
When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
00
Main Controller = 00
Printer engine = 05
Others of
listed below
error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
01
04
02
00
05
04
00
05
Device
IPC : 02
05
ARCNET : 71
02
05
IPC : 02
05
ARCNET : 31
04
-
As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the
target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
65
02
05
61, 62
02
05
61, 62
Booklet Trimmer-D1
02
05
T-7-2
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
7-2
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Error Code
7-3
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E001 -0002
-05
E000 -0001
Item
Description
-05
Title
-05
E000 -0002
E001 -0003
-05
-05
E001 -0004
-05
Remedy
E000 -0010
Title
Description
Remedy
E000 to E069
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
E001 -0010
-05
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-3
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E002 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-4
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E004 -0010
-05
Remedy
E002 -0010
Remedy
E003 -0000
E004 -0102
-05
-05
-05
E004 -0205
Remedy
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
Title
Fixing Power Supply error
-05
Title
-05
E005 -0000
Remedy
E005 -0001
-05
E005 -0010
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
Title
Remedy
E003 -0010
Description
Remedy
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
Title
Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
-05
Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
error.
7-4
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E012 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Drum Motor (M1) error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E014 -0001
7-5
-05
-05
Title
-05
E017 -0001
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
E013 -0002
Title
Description
1. Check the gear of the Fixing Drive Unit. -> Replace the
gear.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M3).
3. Check the connection drawer between the Fixing Assembly
and the host machine.
4. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
Description Lock error of the Fixing Motor (M3).
Remedy
E013 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
-05
Title
Remedy
NOTE:
Check if the Disengagement Cam is stained. If
necessary, clean it.
Check if the drive system (gear, Motor, one-way) is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Check if the link with the Fixing Feed Handle is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Description Disengagement of the ETB is not completed within the
specified period of time.
7-5
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E017 -0002
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Title
Remedy
7-6
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E017 -0003
NOTE:
Check if the Disengagement Cam is stained. If
necessary, clean it.
Check if the drive system (gear, Motor, one-way) is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Check if the link with the Fixing Feed Handle is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Description Engagement of the ETB is not completed within the specified
period of time.
-05
Item
Description
Title
ETB HP error
Remedy
NOTE:
Check if the Disengagement Cam is stained. If
necessary, clean it.
Check if the drive system (gear, Motor, one-way) is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Check if the link with the Fixing Feed Handle is
failed. If necessary, replace it.
Description Engagement of the ETB was not completed at initialization.
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-6
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E020 -0000
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Developing Assembly toner absent error
7-7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E020 -0003
-05
-05
Title
E020 -0004
-05
-05
Title
-05
Title
E020 -0021
-05
Title
E023 -0001
-05
Title
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E020 -0002
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
E020 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-7
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E023 -0002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-8
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E041 -0002
-05
E027 -0001
-05
Title
E041 -0003
-05
E041 -0004
Remedy
Disconnection of cable.
-05
Title
E053 -0001
Title
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E032 -0001
Remedy
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
E025 -0001
Item
-05
Title
-05
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-8
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E060 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Primary Charging Shutter HP open error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E060 -0002
7-9
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
-05
Item
Title
Description
Primary Charging Shutter HP close error
7-9
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E061 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Potential control error (VL)
7-10
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E061 -0101
Description
-05
Title
-05
NOTE:
If the difference is somewhere between +/-10V
and less than 30V, alarm is indicated.
Item
Remedy
E064 -00FF
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Remedy
7-10
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E065 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Primary charging/grid high voltage output leak error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E066 -0001
Remedy
7-11
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
-05
Item
Title
Description
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP open error
7-11
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E066 -0002
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Description
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP close error
7-12
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E067 -0001
Description
-05
Title
-05
Remedy
Item
Remedy
E068 -0001
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Remedy
7-12
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E069 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-13
Description
Transfer high voltage output leak error
T-7-4
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
7-13
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
E100 to E197
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E100
-11xx
-05
7-14
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
Title
BD unlock error
Remedy
E100 -13xx
-05
Item
Title
Remedy
E100 -12xx
-05
Remedy
NOTE:
When condensation occurs inside of the machine
or the Laser Scanner Unit, this error also occurs.
When condensation occurs, leave the machine or
the unit as it is until condensation disappears. (Use
the machine or the unit in an environment where
condensation does not occur.)
NOTE:
When condensation occurs inside of the machine
or the Laser Scanner Unit, this error also occurs.
When condensation occurs, leave the machine or
the unit as it is until condensation disappears. (Use
the machine or the unit in an environment where
condensation does not occur.)
Description Locked state was not detected within the specified period of
time at start-up.
Title
BD unlock error
Description
E100 -FFFF
NOTE:
When condensation occurs inside of the machine
or the Laser Scanner Unit, this error also occurs.
When condensation occurs, leave the machine or
the unit as it is until condensation disappears. (Use
the machine or the unit in an environment where
condensation does not occur.)
-05
Description During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1
second or longer. (Laser diode is not lit up/failure of the BD
PCB/power supply error, or condensation)
Title
Polygon Motor BD unlock error
Remedy
Description After the BD range was specified, lock was unlocked for 1
second or longer.
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-14
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E102 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-15
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E110
-12xx
Remedy
E110
-11xx
-05
Replace the Laser Scanner Unit with the one for the correct
model.
Description The scanner for 6075/6065/6055 models was installed to the
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105/8095/8085 models, and vice
versa.
Title
Polygon Motor FG unlock error
Title
-05
E110
-13xx
Remedy
Remedy
Description
-05
Remedy
E103 -0001
Item
E110 -FFFF
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
-05
7-15
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E121 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-16
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E197 -0003
Title
E197 -0002
-05
-05
E197 -0004
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
Description
-05
Remedy
E197 -0001
Item
E197 -0005
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
-05
7-16
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E197 -0006
E197 -0008
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
Description
Title
7-17
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E197 -0011
E197 -0009
-05
Title
-05
E197 -0012
-05
E197 -0181
Remedy
Remedy
E197 -0010
Description
-05
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
-05
7-17
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
E202 to E280
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E202 -0001
7-18
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E227 -0003
-04
-04
Title
-04
-04
E202 -0102
-04
E227 -0004
-04
-04
E227 -0101
-04
Title
-04
Title
E227 -0103
-04
Title
E240 -0000
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E227 -0002
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E227 -0001
Scanner HP error
Remedy
E202 -0101
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E202 -0002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
-05
Title
7-18
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E240 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
Description
3 minutes passed with pickup request waiting status
7-19
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E247 -0002
-00
Remedy
E240 -0002
-05
E240 -0003
-05
E247 -0003
-00
E246 -0001
-00
Remedy
E247 -0004
-00
-00
E248 -0000
System error
Remedy
E248 -0001
E248 -0002
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
SRAM error
Remedy
-04
-04
Title
EEPROM error
Remedy
Description EEPROM writing error for the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
E248 -0003
Title
Remedy
E263 -0000
Title
System error
Remedy
Description ---
-04
Title
Description ---
Remedy
Description
Description ---
Remedy
Item
-05
Title
EEPROM error
Remedy
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
Description ---
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-19
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E263 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-20
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E270 -0002
-04
E270 -0101
-04
Remedy
E263 -0002
Remedy
E263 -0003
-05
E270 -0001
-04
E280 -0001
-04
E280 -0101
-04
Remedy
Description
Title
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-20
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355
E301 to E355
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E301 -0001
E301 -0101
-04
-04
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
Title
Remedy
E302 -0001
-04
-04
E302 -0101
7-21
E315 -0025
-00
E315 -0007
-00
Remedy
E315 -000d
-00
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
E315 -0027
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
-00
E315 -0501
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
jcdImage device.
E315 -0511
-00
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
Remedy
Title
Codec error
1. Replacement of SDRAM.
2. Replacement of HDD.
3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
Description JBIG decode error.
E315 -0520
Title
E315 -0521
Remedy
E315 -000e
Description
Remedy
Item
Codec error
1. Replacement of SDRAM.
2. Replacement of HDD.
3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
Description Software decode error.
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355
-00
-00
jcdImage device.
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
jcdImage device.
7-21
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E315 -0530
E315 -0531
-00
-00
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355
Description
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
Remedy
-00
-00
Title
-00
E350 -0002
-00
Remedy
jcdImage device.
E315 -0551
-00
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
E350 -0003
-00
E315 -0561
-00
jcdImage device.
-00
Title
Codec error
Remedy
jcdImage device.
E350 -3000
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
E354 -0001
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
E355 -0001
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
System error
Remedy
Description ---
Title
Description ---
Description
Description ---
Remedy
E315 -0541
Item
Description ---
jcdImage device.
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E350 -0001
7-22
jcdImage device.
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
Description --T-7-7
-00
Title
System error
Remedy
Description ---
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355
7-22
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490
E400 to E490
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E400 -0001
-04
E400 -0002
-04
E401 -0001
-04
7-23
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E407 -0001
Title
-04
-04
E407 -0002
Remedy
E413 -0001
-04
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
E401 -0002
Description
-04
Title
Item
E413 -0002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490
-04
7-23
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E413 -0011
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490
7-24
Description
-04
Title
-04
E413 -0012
Remedy
E423 -0001
-04
-04
Title
Remedy
-04
Title
T-7-8
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490
7-24
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
E500 to E5F9
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E500 -0000
-05
7-25
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Title
Description
E500 -0001
-05
Remedy
E500 -0001
E500 -0001
-05
-05
Remedy
Title
Description
Error in ARCNET communication
Remedy
Item
E500 -0022
-05
Remedy
-05
Title
Remedy
-05
Title
Remedy
-05
Title
Remedy
-05
Title
Remedy
-05
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
Title
Remedy
7-25
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E500 -00D4
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Error due to unexpected operation
7-26
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
-05
E503 -0022
-05
Title
E503 -0041
-05
Title
E503 -0042
-05
Title
E503 -0051
-05
Title
E503 -0002
E503 -0003
-05
-05
-05
Title
Remedy
E503 -0006
-05
Description
E503 -0021
Remedy
E503 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Title
7-26
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E503 -0053
-05
Item
Title
Remedy
Description
E503 -0061
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
E503 -0062
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
E503 -0081
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Error in communication between the Integration Unit Professional Puncher (Professional Puncher Integration
Unit-B1)
1. The connector on the cable between the Integration Unit
and the Professional Puncher is disconnected.
2. The cable between the Integration Unit and the
Professional Puncher is faulty.
3. The Integration Controller PCB is faulty.
4. The Professional Puncher Controller PCB is faulty.
Communication failed between the Integration Unit Professional Puncher (Error in communication of Professional
Puncher)
Error in communication between the Finisher - Paper Folding
Unit (Finisher-D1)
1. The connector on the cable between the Finisher and the
Paper Folding Unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit
is faulty.
3. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
4. The Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
Communication failed between the Finisher - Paper Folding
Unit
Error in communication between the Finisher - Paper Folding
Unit (Paper Folding Unit-H1/Finisher-D1)
1. The connector on the cable between the Finisher and the
Paper Folding Unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit
is faulty.
3. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
4. The Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
Communication failed between the Finisher - Paper Folding
Unit
Error in communication between the Saddle Stitcher Trimmer (Finisher-D1)
1. The connector on the wiring between the Saddle Stitcher
and the Trimmer is disconnected.
2. The wiring between the Saddle Stitcher and the Trimmer is
faulty.
3. The Trimmer Controller PCB is faulty.
4. The Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB is faulty.
5. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
Communication failed between the Finisher - Trimmer
7-27
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E503 -0082
-05
Title
E503 -8004
-05
Title
E505 -0001
E505 -0003
-05
-05
Title
Remedy
Description The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error. (The value
written in EEPROM and the value extracted from EEPROM
doesn't conform.)
Title
Insertion unit back-up RAM error (Finisher-D1)
Remedy
E505 -0005
E505 -0008
-05
-05
Description The value written in EEPROM and the value extracted from
EEPROM doesn't conform.
Title
Error in reading of multi functional folding machine
Remedy
E505 -0009
-05
Description The value written in EEPROM and the value extracted from
EEPROM doesn't conform.
Title
Paper Folding Unit backup RAM error (Paper Folding Unit-H1/
Finisher-D1)
Remedy
The Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
EEPROM
EEPROM
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
Title
Error in BootROM
Remedy
BootROM
7-27
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E509 -0002
-05
Item
Title
Remedy
E509 -0004
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Name mismatch between BOOTROM of integration unit and
firmware
Failure in DC controller PCB (PCB1) of integration unit
7-28
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E514 -8003
Title
E514 -8002
-05
-05
-05
Remedy
Description
-05
Item
E514 -8004
Remedy
E514 -8005
-05
E514 -8006
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-28
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E518 -8001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-29
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E530 -8002
-05
E531 -8001
-05
Remedy
E530 -8000
Remedy
E530 -8001
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Item
Description
Title
7-29
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E531 -8002
-05
E532 -8000
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-30
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E532 -8002
-05
E535 -0001
-05
Remedy
E532 -8001
-05
Item
Description
Title
E535 -0002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-30
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E535 -0003
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-31
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E537 -8001
-05
E537 -8002
-05
E539 -8001
-05
Remedy
E535 -0004
Remedy
E535 -8001
-05
E535 -8002
-05
Item
Description
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
7-31
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E539 -8002
-05
E540 -8001
-05
E540 -8002
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-32
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E540 -8003
-05
E540 -8013
-05
Item
Description
Title
E540 -80FF
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-32
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E542 -8001
E542 -8002
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-33
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E542 -8003
-05
E542 -8013
-05
Item
Description
Title
E542 -80FF
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-33
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E551 -0001
-05
Item
Title
Remedy
Description
E551 -0001
E551 -0001
-05
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
Title
Remedy
Description
E551 -0002
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
a. Error in power fan of the integration unit
b. Error in Power Supply Cooling Fan (Document Insertion
Unit-K1)
c. Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-D1)
a-1. Contact failure on connector of power fan (FM1)
a-2. Failure of power fan (FM1)
b-1. Connector of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (F1) is
disconnected
b-2. Power Supply Cooling Fan (F1) is faulty
c-1. The connector of the Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is
disconnected.
c-2. The wiring of the Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is faulty.
c-3. The Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is faulty.
c-4. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
b. The lock detection signal is detected ON while the Power
Supply Cooling Fan is driven, or the fan lock detection
signal is detected OFF while the Power Supply Cooling
Fan is stopped.
c. The loch signal is detected 1.2 sec. or more while the fan
operates.
Error in power fan
1. Contact failure on connector of power fan (FM1) on the
integration unit
2. Failure of power fan (FM1) on the integration unit
Fan lock detection signal is detected ON.
Error in power supply fan (F1) of the insertion unit
1. Power supply fan is faulty
2. Connector of the power supply fan is disconnected
Fan lock detection signal is detected ON while the power
supply fan is driven
A. Error in Power Supply Cooling Fan of Paper Folding Unit
(Paper Folding Unit-H1)
B. Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-D1)
A-1. Connector of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (F1) is
disconnected
A-2. Power Supply Cooling Fan (F1) is faulty
B-1. The connector of the Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is
disconnected.
B-2. The wiring of the Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is faulty.
B-3. The Power Supply Fan (FAN101) is faulty.
B-4. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
A. The lock detection signal is detected ON while the Power
Supply Cooling Fan is driven, or the fan lock detection
signal is detected OFF while the Power Supply Cooling
Fan is stopped.
B. The lock status is released when the fan stops.
7-34
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E551 -0002
-05
E551 -0004
-05
E551 -0011
-05
Item
Description
Title
Remedy
E551 -0011
-05
E551 -0021
-05
E562 -8001
-05
E562 -8002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-34
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E562 -8003
-05
E562 -8004
-05
E566 -8001
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E567 -8002
-05
E568 -8001
E567 -8001
-05
-05
Item
Title
Description
Error in shift roller operation
Remedy
E566 -8002
7-35
-05
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
7-35
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E568 -8002
E568 -8003
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-36
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E568 -8004
-05
E569 -8001
-05
E569 -8002
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Item
Description
Title
7-36
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E569 -8003
-05
Item
Title
Remedy
Description
E569 -8004
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
E56A -8001
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
E56A -8002
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go through
HP
1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M8) is disconnected
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S23) is
disconnected
4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty
The upper stopper HP sensor failed to be OFF despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the upper stopper
motor started to be driven while the upper stopper HP sensor
was ON.
Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return to
HP
1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M8) is disconnected
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S23) is
disconnected
4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty
The upper stopper HP sensor failed to be ON despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the upper stopper
motor started to be driven while the upper stopper HP sensor
was OFF.
C-fold Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go
through HP (Paper Folding Unit-H1)
1. Connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor (M9) is
disconnected.
2. C-fold Stopper Motor (M9) is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S24) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S24) is faulty.
The C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor failed to be OFF despite
the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP
Sensor was ON.
C-fold Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to
HP (Paper Folding Unit-H1)
1. Connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor (M9) is
disconnected.
2. C-fold Stopper Motor (M9) is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S24) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S24) is faulty.
The C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor failed to be ON despite
the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP
Sensor was OFF.
7-37
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E56B -8001
-05
E56B -8002
-05
E56D -8001
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Item
Description
Title
7-37
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E56D -8002
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Error in the Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Motor (Finisher-D1)
7-38
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E56F -8002
-05
Remedy
E56E -8001
E56E -8002
E56F -8001
-05
-05
-05
Item
Title
Description
Error in inlet roller disengage operation
Remedy
E577 -8001
-05
Remedy
E577 -8002
-05
E577 -8003
-05
E577 -8004
-05
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
7-38
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E578 -8001
E578 -8002
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-39
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E57A -8001
Item
Description
-05
Title
-05
E57A -8002
Remedy
E57A -8003
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-39
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E57B -8001
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-40
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E57B -8002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
Item
Description
Title
7-40
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E57C -8001
-05
E57C -8002
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-41
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E583 -8001
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
Item
Description
Title
7-41
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E583 -8002
E584 -0002
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E584 -8001
-05
E584 -8002
-05
Remedy
7-42
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Item
Description
Title
7-42
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E584 -8003
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E590 -8001
Remedy
E584 -8004
Remedy
E590 -8000
-05
7-43
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
Item
Description
Title
7-43
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E590 -8002
E590 -8003
-05
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
E590 -8004
-05
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E593 -8001
Item
Description
-05
Title
-05
E593 -8002
Remedy
E5A3 -0001
-05
E5A3 -0002
Remedy
7-44
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-44
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5A4 -8001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-45
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5A7 -8022
-05
E5A7 -8025
-05
Remedy
E5A4 -8002
Remedy
E5A7 -8011
E5A7 -8012
E5A7 -8021
-05
-05
-05
Item
Title
E5A7 -8033
-05
E5A7 -8043
-05
E5A7 -8044
-05
Description
Description There is a failure with the numerical value for home position
that has been saved
Title
The driver with the trimming area feed motor (M04) of the
booklet trimmer is faulty
Remedy
1. Connector check
2. Replacement of motor
3. Replacement of driver PCB
Description There was a failure in the trimming area feed motor driver
PCB (A04)
Title
The driver with the trimming motor (M05) of the booklet
trimmer is faulty
Remedy
Description There was a failure in the trimming motor driver PCB (A05)
Title
Remedy
E5A7 -8051
-05
E5A7 -8051
-05
Title
Title
Remedy
Description The stopper home position sensor (PI05) failed to be OFF
E5A7 -8055
-05
Title
Remedy
Description
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
7-45
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5A7 -8061
E5A7 -8062
-05
-05
E5A7 -8065
-05
E5A7 -8073
-05
E5AA -8001
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Title
7-46
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5AA -8002
Title
-05
E5AA -8003
Remedy
E5AE -8000
-05
Remedy
Remedy
Description
-05
Title
Title
Item
E5BA -8001
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-46
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5BA -8002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-47
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5BB -8001
Title
E5BA -8012
-05
E5BB -8002
-05
E5F0 -8001
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
Description
-05
Remedy
E5BA -8011
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-47
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F0 -8002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-48
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F2 -8001
Title
-05
-05
E5F2 -8002
Remedy
E5F1 -8002
-05
E5F3 -8001
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
E5F1 -8001
Description
-05
Remedy
E5F1 -8000
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-48
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F3 -8002
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
Error in the Saddle Alignment Guide Motor (Finisher-D1)
7-49
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F4 -8002
-05
E5F5 -8001
-05
Remedy
E5F4 -8001
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Item
Description
Title
7-49
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F5 -8002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-50
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F6 -8003
Title
E5F6 -8002
-05
E5F7 -8001
-05
E5F7 -8002
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
Description
-05
Remedy
E5F6 -8001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-50
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F8 -8001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-51
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5F9 -8002
-05
E5FA -8000
-05
Remedy
E5F8 -8002
Remedy
E5F9 -8001
-05
Item
Description
Title
E5FA -8001
-05
E5FA -8002
-05
E5FB -8001
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
-05
7-51
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5FB -8002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
Description
-05
Title
-05
7-52
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E5FE -8001
Title
-05
E5FE -8002
E5FD -8001
-05
-05
Remedy
E5FC -8002
Description
-05
Remedy
E5FC -8001
Item
Remedy
Remedy
E5FD -8002
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F9
7-52
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
E602
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0001
7-53
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E602 -0012
Title
-00
Title
-00
-00
-00
E602 -0100
Remedy
E602 -0101
-00
-00
E602 -0007
-00
E602 -0102
-00
-00
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0009
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0006
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0003
Description
-00
Remedy
E602 -0002
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-53
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0104
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-54
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0113
-00
Remedy
E602 -0105
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0114
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0115
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0121
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0112
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0111
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0110
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-54
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0122
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-55
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0200
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0201
-00
Title
E602 -0202
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0203
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0125
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0124
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0123
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-55
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0204
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-56
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0213
-00
Remedy
E602 -0205
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0214
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0215
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0221
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0212
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0211
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0210
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-56
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0222
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-57
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0300
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0301
-00
Title
E602 -0302
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0303
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0225
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0224
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0223
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-57
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0304
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-58
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0313
-00
Remedy
E602 -0305
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0314
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0315
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0321
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0312
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0311
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0310
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-58
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0322
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-59
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0400
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0401
-00
Title
E602 -0402
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0403
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0325
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0324
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0323
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-59
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0404
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-60
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0413
-00
Remedy
E602 -0405
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0414
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0415
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0421
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0412
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0411
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0410
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-60
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0422
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-61
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0500
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0501
-00
Title
E602 -0502
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0503
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0425
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0424
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0423
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-61
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0504
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-62
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0513
-00
Remedy
E602 -0505
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0514
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0515
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0521
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0512
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0511
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0510
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-62
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0522
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-63
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0600
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0601
-00
Title
E602 -0602
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0603
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0525
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0524
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0523
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-63
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0604
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-64
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0613
-00
Remedy
E602 -0605
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0614
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0615
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0621
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0612
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0611
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0610
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-64
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0622
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-65
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0700
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0701
-00
Title
E602 -0702
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0703
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0625
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0624
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0623
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-65
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0704
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-66
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0713
-00
Remedy
E602 -0705
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0714
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0715
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0721
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0712
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0711
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0710
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-66
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0722
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-67
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0800
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0801
-00
Title
E602 -0802
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0803
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0725
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0724
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0723
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-67
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0804
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-68
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0813
-00
Remedy
E602 -0805
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -0814
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0815
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0821
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0812
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0811
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0810
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-68
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0822
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-69
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0900
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0901
-00
Title
E602 -0902
-00
Title
Remedy
E602 -0903
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0825
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0824
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -0823
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-69
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0904
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-70
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0912
-00
Remedy
E602 -0905
-00
Title
Title
E602 -0913
-00
-00
Title
E602 -0914
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0911
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0910
Item
E602 -0915
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-70
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0921
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-71
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -0925
-00
Remedy
E602 -0922
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1000
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1001
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0924
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -0923
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-71
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1003
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-72
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1012
-00
Remedy
E602 -1004
-00
Title
Title
E602 -1013
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1014
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1015
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1011
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1010
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1005
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-72
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1021
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-73
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1025
-00
Remedy
E602 -1022
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1100
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1101
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1024
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1023
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1102
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-73
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1103
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602
7-74
-1111
-00
Remedy
E602 -1104
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1112
-00
Title
E602 -1113
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1110
Remedy
E602 -1105
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1114
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-74
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1115
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-75
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1125
-00
Remedy
E602 -1121
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1200
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1201
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1202
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1124
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1123
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1122
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-75
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1203
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1211
7-76
-00
Remedy
E602 -1204
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1212
-00
Title
E602 -1213
-00
Title
Remedy
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1210
Remedy
E602 -1205
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1214
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-76
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1215
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-77
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1225
-00
Remedy
E602 -1221
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1300
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1301
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1302
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1224
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1223
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1222
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-77
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1303
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-78
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1312
-00
Remedy
E602 -1304
-00
Title
Title
E602 -1313
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1314
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1315
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1311
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1310
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1305
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-78
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1321
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-79
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1325
-00
Remedy
E602 -1322
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1400
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1401
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1324
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1323
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1402
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-79
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1403
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-80
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1412
-00
Remedy
E602 -1404
-00
Title
Title
E602 -1413
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1414
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1415
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1411
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1410
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1405
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-80
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1421
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-81
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1425
-00
Remedy
E602 -1422
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1500
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1501
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1424
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1423
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1502
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-81
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1503
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-82
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1512
-00
Remedy
E602 -1504
-00
Title
Title
E602 -1513
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1514
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1515
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1511
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1510
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1505
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-82
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1521
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-83
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1525
-00
Remedy
E602 -1522
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -1600
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1601
-00
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1524
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1523
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -1602
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
7-83
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1603
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-84
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1612
-00
Remedy
E602 -1604
-00
Title
Title
E602 -1613
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1614
-00
-00
Title
E602 -1615
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1611
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1610
Title
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -1605
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-84
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1621
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
7-85
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -1625
-00
Remedy
E602 -1622
-00
Title
-00
Title
E602 -2000
-00
E602 -2001
-00
Remedy
E602 -1624
-00
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
E602 -1623
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E602 -2002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Execute the key clear of the Encryption Board using SST (at
this time, HDD becomes unformatted; thus, it is necessary to
execute HDD format and system reinstallation).
Description Although the Host Machine does not have the authentication
information of the Encryption Board, the authenticated
Encryption Board is installed.
Title
Failure of Encryption Board, others
Remedy
7-85
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -4000
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
-00
Title
OS startup error
-00
7-86
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -FF03
-00
-00
E602 -FF04
-00
E602 -FF01
-00
Title
E602 -FF10
-00
Title
Title
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -FF00
Title
Description
Remedy
E602 -4001
Item
-00
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-86
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -FF12
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
Description
Hard disk error
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -FF21
7-87
-00
Remedy
E602 -FF13
-00
Title
Title
E602 -FF22
-00
-00
Title
-00
Title
Remedy
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -FF15
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E602 -FF14
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
-00
Title
Remedy
7-87
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E602 -FF25
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-88
Description
Hard disk error
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-88
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677
E604 to E677
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E604 -1024
-00
7-89
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Description
Title
Insufficient memory
Remedy
DDR2-SDRAM
E610 -0202
-00
E609 -0009
-00
-00
Title
Remedy
HDD.
E610 -0001
-00
-00
-00
Title
Remedy
E610 -0101
-00
-00
Title
E610 -0303
-00
Title
E610 -0401
-00
Title
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
Remedy
Title
Remedy
HDD.
Description At the time of recovery from sleep, it does not reach to the
specified temperature.
Title
Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration
error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption
processing error)
Remedy
Check the hardware configuration.
Description
Title
Remedy
Item
-00
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677
7-89
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E611 -0000
-00
Item
Title
Remedy
Description
E674 -0001
-00
Title
Remedy
E674 -0002
-00
Description
Title
Remedy
E674 -0004
-00
Description
Title
Remedy
E674 -0008
-00
Description
Title
Remedy
-00
Description
Title
Remedy
E674 -000C
E674 -0010
-00
E674 -0011
-00
E674 -0030
-00
E674 -0100
-00
Description
Title
Remedy
Description
Title
Remedy
Description
Title
Remedy
Description
Title
Remedy
Description
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677
Description
Rebooting due to SRAM corruption when executing a
transmission job that secures disconnection of the power
Clear SRAM to erase the job that secures disconnection of
the power.
In the case that reboot is repeated at recovery from power
down because SRAM information is corrupted and the job
information saved on SRAM cannot be read, the phenomenon
that the communication is repeated occurs.
FAX error
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Communication error with the FAX PCB.
FAX error
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Communication error with the FAX PCB.
FAX error
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Error in access of the modem IC.
FAX error
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Error in access of the port IC.
FAX error
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Error in access of the modem IC/port IC.
FAX error
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
FAX error.
FAX error
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
FAX error.
FAX error
Download the system software for 2-line FAX.
Checksum error.
FAX error
Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Logging is failed after completion of FAX communication, and
unable to read.
7-90
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E674 -0200
-00
E677 -0001
-00
Item
Description
Title
Remedy
E677 -0004
-00
-00
Title
Remedy
E677 -0010
-00
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677
-00
Title
Remedy
7-90
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
E710 to E760
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E710 -0001
E711 -0001
-00
-00
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
E711 -0002
-05
-05
Description
Printer IPC error
Remedy
Disconnection of cable.
-05
-05
Description Occurrence of error was set for 4 times or more for 1.5
seconds to the error register of the IPC Chip.
Title
IPC communication error (retransmission request reception
error)
Remedy
1. Check the cable connection.
Check the connection between DCON side (J462) and
Finisher Lattice side (J9043)
Finisher Cable
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Description Communication between the host machine and the Finisher
was lost.
Title
IPC communication error (reception timeout)
Remedy
E711 -0004
E711 -0040
-05
E713 -0001
-05
E713 -0002
-05
Title
Description
IPC communication error (serial error)
E713 -0004
-05
E713 -0020
-05
E713 -0040
Remedy
Remedy
E711 -0020
Item
Remedy
Title
Remedy
E711 -0001
7-91
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
-05
7-91
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E717 -0001
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Communication error with the NE Controller
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E719 -0012
-00
Remedy
E717 -0002
-00
7-92
-00
E719 -0031
-00
Title
-00
-00
E719 -0032
Remedy
Remedy
E719 -0003
-00
E719 -0011
-00
E720 -0001
-05
-05
Title
Remedy
E720 -02xx
Remedy
Remedy
Remedy
E719 -0002
Title
Description
Remedy
Remedy
E719 -0001
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
-05
-05
Title
Remedy
7-92
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E720 -0300
E730 -1001
05
-00
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Title
Remedy
7-93
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E732 -0000
-00
-00
Title
E732 -0001
-00
Title
E730 -9005
-00
Title
E732 -0010
-00
Remedy
E730 -A006
-00
Title
E732 -0020
-00
Remedy
E730 -A007
-00
E732 -0021
Remedy
E730 -B013
-00
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
E730 -9004
Remedy
E730 -100A
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
-00
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
7-93
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E732 -0022
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Scanner communication error
7-94
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E733 -0001
-00
E733 -0002
-00
Remedy
E732 -0023
-00
E732 -8888
-00
E732 -9999
-00
Remedy
E733 -0000
-00
Description When a scanner for the different model is detected during the
communication with the reader.
Title
Detection of Reader
---
Description The Reader is detected for the first time with the printer
model. (On the user screen, only the message"Turn OFF
and then ON the power again", instead of an error code, is
displayed. It is recorded as an error log in Service Mode >
DISPLAY > ERR.)
Title
Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and
the DC Controller PCB
Remedy
1. Check the cable connection (connector connection error/
open circuit).
DC Controller PCB: J441, J442, Main Controller PCB
2: J21, J22
Main Controller PCB 2: J2, Main Controller PCB 1:
J1019
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB/Main Controller PCB 2/
Main Controller PCB1.
Description Unable to make communication between the Main Controller
PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB. (Communication error
was detected at startup.)
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Item
Description
Title
7-94
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E733 -0010
E740 -0002
-00
-00
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Title
-04
Title
7-95
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E743 -0004
-04
Remedy
Description
-04
Title
-00
E744 -0001
Remedy
E744 -0002
-00
E744 -0004
-00
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Remedy
E743 -0003
Item
Title
Remedy
Replace the Boot ROM with the one for the correct model.
-00
Title
Remedy
This error normally does not occur. This error occurs when
using the HDD which was used with another model.
Replace the HDD with the one which was originally installed
or a new one for the model.
Description Invalid controller firmware was detected.
E744 -4000
E746 -0003
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
-05
-00
Title
Engine ID error
Remedy
Description The Main Controller PCB model and the DC Controller PCB
(PCB1) model are not matched.
Title
Different Image Analysis PCB model
1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB.
2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB.
Description Different Image Analysis PCB model.
Remedy
7-95
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E746 -0021
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Image Analysis PCB self-check error detection
7-96
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E746 -0033
-00
E746 -0022
-00
Title
Item
Title
Remedy
E746 -0023
-00
Title
When the TPM key was not backed up, formatting the system
is required.
Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and download
the system software. For details, see "Chapter 6: Upgrading".
For your reference, the method using USB memory is
described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the
download mode.
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu.
After formatting is completed, the machine reboots
automatically and starts with the download mode.
5. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu.
System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically.
Description Error that can be recovered
E746 -0024
-00
Title
E746 -0031
-00
Title
Remedy
The TPM PCB is not installed, the TPM PCB for other model
is installed, or failure of TPM Chip.
Description Hardware error (TPM).
E746 -0032
-00
Title
Remedy
Description
E746 -0034
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
-00
Title
7-96
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E748 -2010
-00
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
Description
Flash PCB error / HDD error
7-97
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E753 -0001
-05
Remedy
E748 -2011
-00
-00
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
E760 -0001
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Remedy
-00
Title
Download Error
Remedy
Check the log to find where the download error has been
occurred.
<FIN_D1> Staple Finisher-D1/Booklet Finisher-D1/Paper
Folding Unit-H1/Document Insertion Unit-K1/Inner Booklet
Trimmer-A1
<PIU_B1> Professional Puncher Integration Unit-B1
Title
Title
System error
Remedy
Description
Item
-00
-00
Title
Download error
Remedy
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760
7-97
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
E804 to E996
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E804 -0000
-05
7-98
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
Item
Title
Description
E808 -0003
Title
-05
-05
E808 -0004
Remedy
Remedy
E806 -0000
-05
E808 -0005
-05
-05
-05
Title
E808 -0006
-05
Remedy
Description Detected OFF with 12V of the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
output.
Title
12V OFF detection when relay is turned ON
Remedy
Remedy
E808 -0001
Remedy
Remedy
E804 -0001
Description
-05
Item
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
-05
Title
7-98
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E808 -0008
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
Description
Fixing Power Supply error
7-99
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E840 -0001
-05
E808 -0009
-05
Title
Remedy
-05
Title
E820 -0001
-05
E880 -0001
-00
E820 -0002
-05
-05
E880 -0005
-00
E905 -0001
-05
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Remedy
Title
Remedy
E824 -0000
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Item
E905 -0002
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
-05
7-99
7
E
Detail
Location
Code Code
E905 -0003
-05
Item
Title
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
7-100
Description
POD Deck Air Assist Fan error
Remedy
E906 -0001
-05
E906 -0002
-05
E996
-xxxx
-05
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996
7-100
7-101
Jam Code
Jam Type
Jam types are shown below.
Type
DELAY
STNRY
OVERLAP
TIMING NG
OHP NG
ADF OP
COVER OP
RESIDUAL
PICKUP NG
POWER ON
DOOR OP
SEQ NG
DELAY ESC
OTH JAM
STNRY ESC
STP
SDL STP
INIT ROT
UP DEVICE
OTHER
ERROR
RETRY ERR
STOP
ROT
PROGRAM
TIME OUT
PUNCH
MEDIA NG
Meaning
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Double feed detection
Timing error
Incorrect paper
ADF open
Cover open
Residual jam
Pickup error
Power ON
Door open
Sequence jam
Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Other jams
Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Staple
Saddle stitch staple
Residual (at initial rotation)
Upper stream device jam
Others
Error
Retry error
Press Stop key
Keeps rotating
Program
Time-out
Punch
Misprint
T-7-14
7-101
7-102
Main Unit
SW2
PS52
PS20 PS67
PS29 PS64
PS28
PS3
PS36
PS35
PS4
PS65
PS24
PS66
PS19
PS32
PS2
PS25
PS21
PS26
PS33
PS22
PS27
F-7-1
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
010A
010B
010C
010D
010E
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0202
0203
0204
0205
0207
0208
0209
020B
020C
020E
0212
0213
0214
0215
0305
0A02
0A03
0A04
0A05
0A07
0A08
0A09
0A0B
0A0C
0A0E
Type
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
TIMING NG
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
Sensor Name/Description
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 1
Writing Judging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Left Deck Pickup Sensor 1
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 1
Vertical Path Sensor 3
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1
Vertical Path Sensor 4
Fixing Outlet Sensor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 1
Writing Judging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 3
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Vertical Path Sensor 4
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Registration Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 1
Writing Judging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 3
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Vertical Path Sensor 4
Sensor ID
PS19
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS20
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS21
PS26
PS25
PS22
PS27
PS52
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS26
PS25
PS27
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
PS29
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS26
PS25
PS27
7-102
7
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
02
0A0F
0A10
0A11
0A12
0A13
0A14
0A15
0B01
0B02
0B03
0CA1
0CA2
0CA3
0CA4
0CA5
0C10
0CF1
0D91
1E00
Type
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
Sensor Name/Description
Fixing Entrance Sensor
Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor
Fixing Outlet Sensor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Front Door Open Detection Switch
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor
FeedSts time out jam
RefeedStart time out jam
ImageSet time out jam
PageComplete time out jam
Fixing temperature control time out jam
Fixing Toenail jam
Retry jam
Different Size jam(short paper length)
Finisher Sequence Error jam
7-103
Sensor ID
PS51
PS4
PS52
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
PS4
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
T-7-15
7-103
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-C1
SR12
SR6
SR10
SR2
SR7
SR8
7-104
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0051
0052
0071
0073
0074
0075
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
Type
DELAY
STNRY
TIMING NG
HP NG
HP NG
HP NG
ADF OP
ADF OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
POWER ON
PICKUP NG
Sensor Name/Description
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Disengaging HP sensor 1
Disengaging HP sensor 2
Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
Cover open/closed sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
All feed sensor *3
Post-separation sensor 1/2/3
Sensor ID
PCB5
PCB5
TIMING NG
SR15
SR16
SR12
ADF OP
ADF OP
SR10
SR10
POWER ON
SR2,SR3,PCB2
T-7-16
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
SR15
SR5
PCB4
SR16
SR11
PCB5
SR3
SR1
SR9
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
VR
be notified.
SR13
F-7-2
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
Type
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
Sensor Name/Description
Post-separation sensor 1/2/3
Post-separation sensor 1/2/3
Delay detection sensor
Delay detection sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Post-separation sensor 3
Delay detection sensor
Delay detection sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Sensor ID
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
SR5
SR5
PCB5
PCB5
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
SR5
SR5
*2 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor.
Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is
open circuit, and replace the sensor.
*3 Please confirm the following sensors from service mode.
Leading Edge Position Sensor (SR22): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P003> 2 (1: Paper
presence)
Delivery Sensor (PCB5): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 0 (0: Paper presence)
Read Sensor 2 (SR5): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 1 (0: Paper presence)
Read Sensor 1 (PCB4): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 2 (0: Paper presence)
Registration Sensor (PCB3): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 3 (0: Paper presence)
Delay sensor (SR4): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 6 (0: Paper presence)
Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P004> 7 (0: Paper presence)
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-C1
7-104
7-105
PS6
PS1
PS1
PS6
F-7-4
F-7-3
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
0117
0118
0218
0A18
Type
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
POWER ON
Sensor ID
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
0117
0118
0218
0A18
Type
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
POWER ON
Sensor ID
PS1
PS6
PS6
PS6
T-7-18
PS1
PS6
PS6
PS6
T-7-17
7-105
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-K1 > ARCNET Connection
Inserter-K1
7-106
ARCNET Connection
S10
S9
S3
S13
S7
S8
SW2
S19
S12
S18
S17
SW1
S16
S20
S21
ACC
ID
Jam Code
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
20E0
20E2
20E4
20E5
20E6
20E7
20E8
21F0
21F2
21F4
21F5
21F6
21F7
21F8
2200
2300
2400
2C00
2C01
2FC0
2FC1
2FC2
2FC3
2FC4
2FCF
Type
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTHER
POWER ON
DOOR OP
OTHER
ERROR
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
OTHER
STOP
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet Sensor Delay jam1
Outlet Sensor Delay jam1
Registration Sensor Delay jam
Middle Feed Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam
Inlet Sensor Stationary jam
Outlet Sensor Stationary jam
Registration Sensor Stationary jam
Middle Feed Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Entrance Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Early Timing jam
Power ON jam
Cover Open jam
Sequence error jam
Error Avoidance jam
EntryStart Time Out jam
EjectStartAck Time Out jam
Upper Tray Paper Absent jam
Lower Tray Paper Absent jam
Different Inserter Width jam
Emergency Stop jam
Sensor ID
S20
S21
S3, S7
S8
S18
S17
S16
S20
S21
S3, S7
S8
S18
S17
S16
TIMING NG
POWER ON
DOOR OP
SEQ NG
ERROR
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
S9
S12
S10
STOP
T-7-19
F-7-5
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-K1 > ARCNET Connection
7-106
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-K1 > IPC Connection
7-107
IPC Connection
ACC
ID
Jam Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10E0
10E2
10E4
10E5
10E6
10E7
10E8
11F0
11F2
11F4
11F5
11F6
11F7
11F8
13CD
14CC
1FC0
1FC1
1FC2
1FC3
1FC4
1FCE
1FCF
Type
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
COVER OP
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
OTHER
OTHER
OTH JAM
ERROR
STOP
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet Sensor Delay jam1
Outlet2 Sensor Delay jam1
Registration Sensor Delay jam
Middle Feed Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Entrance Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam
Inlet Sensor Stationary jam
Outlet2 Sensor Stationary jam
Registration Sensor Stationary jam
Middle Feed Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Entrance Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Power ON jam
Cover Open jam
EntryStart Time Out jam
EjectStartAck Time Out jam
Upper Tray Paper Absent jam
Lower Tray Paper Absent jam
Different Inserter Width jam
Error Avoidance jam
Emergency Stop jam
Sensor ID
S20
S21
S3, S7
S8
S18
S17
S16
S20
S21
S3, S7
S8
S18
S17
S16
POWER ON
SW1
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
S9
S12
OTH JAM
ERROR
STOP
T-7-20
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-K1 > IPC Connection
7-107
7-108
F-7-6
F-7-7
7-108
Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher-C1/Integration Unit-B1 > IPC Connection
ARCNET Connection
ACC
ID
Jam Code
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
1002
1004
1006
1008
100A
1103
1105
1107
1109
110B
11A3
11A5
11A7
11B3
11B5
11B7
11B9
1231
1320
1422
1721
1C01
1F01
1F30
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTHER
POWER ON
DOOR OP
INIT ROT
OTHER
ERROR
OTHER
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
1F07
1FA0
1FC0
1FC2
1FD0
1FD1
1FD2
FF01
TIMING NG
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
UP DEVICE
Type
7-109
IPC Connection
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet Sensor
Pull in Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Pull in Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Punch Sensor 1
Punch Sensor 8
Punch Sensor 7
Punch Sensor 2
Punch Sensor 3
Punch Sensor 4
Punch Sensor 6
Early Timing jam
Power ON
Door Open jam
Residual jam
Time-out error
ERROR
Error in completion of paper feed from upper
stream device
Reverse Sensor
Timing error
Other jams
Timing error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Sensor ID
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
S1
S8
S7
S2
S3
S4
S6
TIMING NG
POWER ON
DOOR OP
RESIDUAL
TIME OUT
SIGNAL
SEQ NG
RS3
TIMING NG
TOOL OF
TIMING NG
MOTOR NG
SIGNAL NG
SIGNAL NG
UP DEVICE
T-7-21
ACC
ID
Jam Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1051
1053
1055
1057
1059
1152
1154
1156
1158
115A
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1370
1472
1F5E
1F5F
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
COVER OP
TIMING NG
MOTOR NG
02
02
1F71
1F73
OTH JAM
OTH JAM
02
02
02
1F74
1F75
1F76
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
OTH JAM
02
02
02
1F77
1F78
1F79
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
SIGNAL
02
1F7A
SIGNAL
02
02
1F7B
1F7F
UP DEVICE
OTH JAM
Type
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet Sensor
Pull in Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Pull in Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Punch Sensor 1
Punch Sensor 8
Punch Sensor 7
Punch Sensor 2
Punch Sensor 3
Punch Sensor 4
Punch Sensor 6
Power ON jam
Door Open jam
Reverse Sensor
IFU Operation Error of Path Switching
Motor
Idle rotation jam
Jam during Paper feed from Upper Stream
Device
EntryStart Time Out jam
EjectStartAck Time Out jam
Punch Unit Error(Die comes off during
operation)
Puncher IFU paper feed time out
Time Out jam(Error Avoidance)
Error in completion of paper feed from upper
stream device
Error in start of paper feed from upper
stream device
Upper stream device jam
Emergency Stop jam
Sensor ID
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
S1
S8
S7
S2
S3
S4
S6
POWER ON
COVER OP
RS3
ERROR
OTH JAM
OTH JAM
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
OTH JAM
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
ERROR
ERROR
UP DEVICE
OTH JAM
T-7-22
Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher-C1/Integration Unit-B1 > IPC Connection
7-109
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit-H1 > ARCNET Connection
7-110
ARCNET Connection
SW1
S20
S21
S30
ACC
ID
Jam Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1082
1084
1086
1088
108A
108C
108E
1092
109E
1183
1185
1187
1189
118B
118D
118F
1193
119F
139C
149B
179C
1C9D
1F9A
Type
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STOP
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTHER
POWER ON
COVER OP
POWER ON
ERROR
OTHER
S33
Sensor Name/Description
Entrance sensor
Delivery sensor 2
Slowdown timing sensor
Release timing sensor
Fold position sensor
Upper stopper paper sensor
Delivery sensor 1
Fold tray paper sensor
Press Stop key
Entrance sensor
Delivery sensor 2
Slowdown timing sensor
Release timing sensor
Fold position sensor
Upper stopper paper sensor
Delivery sensor 1
Fold tray paper sensor
Other jams
Power ON
Cover open
Power ON
Error
Other jams
Sensor ID
S20
S21
S30
S31
S32
S33
S22
S27
STOP
S20
S21
S30
S31
S32
S33
S22
S27
OTHER
POWER ON
COVER OP
POWER ON
ERROR
SIGNAL
T-7-23
S31
S32
S22
S27
F-7-8
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit-H1 > ARCNET Connection
7-110
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit-H1 > IPC Connection
7-111
IPC Connection
ACC
ID
Jam Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
10E1
10E3
10E9
10EA
10EB
10EC
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10ED
10EE
11F1
11F3
11F9
11FA
11FB
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
02
11FC
STNRY
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
11FD
11FE
13DD
14DC
1FD0
1FD1
1FDE
1FDF
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
COVER OP
STOP
TIME OUT
ERROR
STOP
Type
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet Sensor Delay jam
Outlet2 Sensor Delay jam
Slowdown Timing Sensor Delay jam
Release Timing Sensor Delay jam
Fold Position Adjustment Sensor Delay jam
Upper Stopper Paper Detection Sensor
Delay jam
Outlet1 Sensor Delay jam
Fold Tray Empty Sensor Delay jam
Inlet Sensor Stationary jam
Outlet2 Sensor Stationary jam
Slowdown Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Release Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Fold Position Adjustment Sensor Stationary
jam
Upper Stopper Paper Detection Sensor
Stationary jam
Outlet1 Sensor Stationary jam
Fold Tray Empty Sensor Stationary jam
Power ON jam
Cover Open jam
EntryStart Time Out jam
EjectStart Time Out jam
Error Avoidance jam
Emergency Stop jam
Sensor ID
S20
S21
S30
S31
S32
S33
S22
S27
S20
S21
S30
S31
S32
S33
S22
S27
POWER ON
SW1
TIME OUT
TIME OUT
ERROR
STOP
T-7-24
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit-H1 > IPC Connection
7-111
UN14
ACC
Jam Code
ID
UN13
PS4
UN24
PS6
PS3
PS101
PS103
PS27
PS111
PS110
PS105
PS113
PS116
PS106
F-7-9
7-112
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1002
1004
1006
1008
100A
100C
100E
1042
1044
1046
104A
1054
1103
1105
1107
1109
110B
110D
110F
1143
1145
1147
114B
1155
1231
1320
1422
1524
1550
1721
1C01
1F03
1F25
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
RESIDUAL
POWER ON
DOOR OP
STP
SDL STP
INIT ROT
RETRY ERR
UP DEVICE
OTHER
02
02
02
02
1F30
1F31
1F4B
1F52
UP DEVICE
UP DEVICE
TIME OUT
OTHER
02
1FFF
ERROR
Sensor Name/Description
Inlet sensor
Shift unit trailing edge sensor
Buffer path 1 sensor PCB
Buffer path 2 sensor PCB
Upper delivery sensor
Lower sensor
Lower delivery sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Saddle vertical path sensor
Saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor
Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 2
Saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor
Inlet sensor
Shift unit trailing edge sensor
Buffer path 1 sensor PCB
Buffer path 2 sensor PCB
Upper delivery sensor
Lower sensor
Lower delivery sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Saddle vertical path sensor
Saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor
Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 2
Saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor
Residual jam
Power ON
Door open
Staple HP sensor
Saddle staple HP sensor
Residual jam
Time Out jam
Upper stream device jam
Stop due to jam accompanied with
sequence error
Upper stream device jam
Upper stream device jam
Time Out jam
Saddle press
HP sensor
Error
Sensor ID
PS3
PS4
UN13
UN14
PS5
UN24
PS6
PS101
PS103
PS105
PS111
PS113
PS3
PS4
UN13
UN14
PS5
UN24
PS6
PS101
PS103
PS105
PS111
PS113
RESIDUAL
POWER ON
FRONT CVR
PS27
SDL STP
RESIDUAL
RETRY ERR
UP DEVICE
SEQ NG
UP DEVICE
UP DEVICE
TIME OUT
PS110
ERROR
T-7-25
7-112
ACC
Jam Code
ID
S104
S102
S101
S129
S201
S131
S223
S101(TRM)
S227
S226
S218
S203
Type
Sensor Name/Description
Sensor ID
02
02
02
02
02
02
1011
1012
1091
1092
1093
1094
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
02
02
02
02
1121
1122
112F
11A1
STNRY
STNRY
OTH JAM
STNRY
02
11A2
STNRY
02
02
11A3
11A4
STNRY
STNRY
02
02
02
02
11AF
1205
1307
1387
OTH JAM
OTH JAM
POWER ON
POWER ON
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
138A
1408
1488
148B
1506
1586
1F45
1F4F
1F8F
POWER ON
COVER OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
STP
SDL STP
PUNCH
OTH JAM
OTH JAM
F-7-10
7-113
S101
S102
S226
S227
S201
S201, S203
S226, S227
S101
S102
OTH JAM
S226
T-7-26
7-113
Booklet Trimmer-D1
PI13
7-114
ACC
Jam Code
ID
PI12
PI11
PI02
PI10
PI08
PI07
PI01
F-7-11
Type
02
10C2
DELAY
02
10C4
DELAY
02
10C6
DELAY
02
02
10C8
10CA
DELAY
DELAY
02
10CC
DELAY
02
10CE
DELAY
02
10D0
DELAY
02
11C3
STNRY
02
11C5
STNRY
02
11C7
STNRY
02
02
11C9
11CB
STNRY
STNRY
02
11CD
STNRY
02
11CF
STNRY
02
02
02
02
02
13DC
14DB
17DD
17DE
1FD6
POWER ON
COVER OP
INIT ROT
ROT
OTHER
02
1FD7
OTHER
02
1FD8
OTHER
02
02
02
1FD9
1FDA
1FDF
PROGRAM
OTHER
OTHER
Sensor Name/Description
Infeed section entrance booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Infeed section exit booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Trim section entrance booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Stopper booklet sensor (Photoelectric)
Trim section exit booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Booklet lifter booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Delivery section booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Conveyor section booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Infeed section entrance booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Infeed section exit booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Trim section entrance booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Stopper booklet sensor (Photoelectric)
Trim section exit booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Booklet lifter booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Delivery section booklet sensor
(Photoelectric)
Power ON
Cover open
Residual jam
Residual jam
Stop due to jam accompanied with
sequence error
Stop due to jam accompanied with
sequence error
Stop due to jam accompanied with
sequence error
Program error
Timing error
Other jams
Sensor ID
PI01
PI02
PI07
PI08
PI10
PI11
PI12
PI13
PI01
PI02
PI07
PI08
PI10
PI11
PI12
POWER ON
COVER OP
RESIDUAL
RESIDUAL
SEQ NG
SEQ NG
SEQ NG
PROGRAM
TIMING NG
SIZE NG
T-7-27
7-114
Alarm Code
Alarm
Code
7-115
Title
Error code display
(4-digit)
00-0247
01-0001
01-0002
No change in device
status after specified
period of time has
passed
(RDS server creates)
01-0004
IP address change
notification (RDS
server creates)
02-0020
Dust correction (paper Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where dust
is detected (image on paper front)
front) occurrence
Cause: Dust is detected on the Stream Read Glass (paper
front).
Measures: Clean the Stream Read Glass (paper front), and
check if the Platen Roller 1 is soiled. If necessary,
clean it.
02-0021
Dust correction (paper Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where
dust is detected (image on paper back with 1-Path
back) occurrence
DADF).
Cause: Dust is detected on the Scanner Glass (paper back).
Measures: Clean and check the Scanner Glass (paper back),
and check if the Platen Roller 2 is soiled.
04-0001
Right Deck Lifter error Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not
using the Right Deck.
Cause: The Right Deck Lifter does not rise, failure of the Right
Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6).
Measures:
1. Turn OFF/ON the power.
When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not
recovered, execute the following measures.
2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises.
If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs
although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps.
3. Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor
(M4) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Motor side: J2069, PCB side: J225
4. Replace the Right Deck.
5. Check the connection between the Right Deck Paper Height
Sensor (PS6) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Sensor side: J2063, J3633 (relay), PCB side: J222
6. Check the operation of the Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
(PS6), and replace it.
7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
04-0002
00-0246
Title
7-115
7
Alarm
Code
04-0003
04-0004
Title
7-116
Alarm
Code
Title
Cassette 3 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not
using the Cassette 3.
Cause: The Cassette Lifter does not rise, failure of the Cassette
3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17).
Measures:
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not
recovered, execute the following measures.
2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises.
If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs
although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps.
3. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor
(M20) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Motor side: J2072, PCB side: J225
4. Replace the Cassette 3.
5. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Paper Height
Sensor (PS17) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Sensor side: J2080, J3635 (relay), PCB side: J223
6. Check the operation of the Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
(PS17), and replace it if necessary.
7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
04-0008
04-0010
04-0031
Cassette 4 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) is stopped. Not
using the Cassette 4.
Cause: The Cassette 4 Lifter does not rise, failure of the
Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18).
Measures:
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not
recovered, execute the following measures.
2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises.
If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs
although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps.
3. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor
(M21) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Motor side: J2074, PCB side: J225
4. Replace the Cassette 4.
5. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Paper Height
Sensor (PS18) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Sensor side: J2091, J3636 (relay), PCB side: J224
6. Check the operation of the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
(PS18), and replace it if necessary.
7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
04-0032
7-116
7
Alarm
Code
04-0033
04-0034
04-0069
04-0070
Title
Cassette 3 Lifter
Motor overcurrent
alarm
Cassette 4 Lifter
Motor overcurrent
alarm
7-117
Alarm
Code
Title
04-0071
Error in Cassette
3 Pickup Solenoid
connection
04-0072
Error in Cassette
4 Pickup Solenoid
connection
04-0073
Error in Multi-purpose
Pickup Solenoid
connection
04-0074
7-117
7
Alarm
Code
Title
04-0075
Error in Reverse
Detachment Solenoid
connection
06-0003
09-0006
2D Shading ROM
error 1
09-0007
2D Shading ROM
error 2
09-0008
Drum HP signal noise Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of
shading is degraded and an image error occurs.
alarm
Uneven density may occur.
Cause: The Drum HP cycle is shorter than the specified cycle.
Measures:
1. Install the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and check the connector.
2. Check the Drum HP Flag.
3. Check the harness between the Drum HP Sensor (PS61)
and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
(Between J2137 and J107)
4. Replace the Drum HP Sensor (PS61).
5. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
6. Check the harness between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
and the DCON PCB (PCB1).
(Between J125 and J411 and between J126 and J412)
7. Replace the DCON PCB (PCB1).
7-118
Alarm
Code
Title
09-0009
Drum HP signal
absence alarm
10-0001
10-0006
7-118
7
Alarm
Code
Title
10-0007
10-0008
7-119
Alarm
Code
Title
10-0009
10-0010
D-max control contrast Movement: Vcont of D-max control is between 150V and 270V,
potential (Vcont) error
and correction amount at a time is 50V or less.
1
Cause: Vcont calculated with D-max control is less than 150V.
Measures:
If density of output image is sufficient, measures are not
needed.
When the density is light (dark), execute PASCAL.
If the problem is not corrected, check/replace the Developing
Assembly.
10-0011
D-max control contrast Movement: Vcont of D-max control is between 150V and 270V,
and correction amount at a time is 50V.
potential (Vcont) error
Cause: Vcont calculated with D-max control is greater than
2
270V.
Measures:
If density of output image is sufficient, measures are not
needed.
When the density is light (dark), execute PASCAL.
If the problem is not corrected, check/replace the Developing
Assembly.
7-119
7
Alarm
Code
10-0012
11-0002
Title
D-max control contrast Movement: Vcont of D-max control is between 150V and 270V,
and correction amount at a time is 50V or less.
potential (Vcont) error
Cause: Difference of Vcont from its of the last D-max control is
3
50V or higher.
Supplement for cause(alarm detection at installation and
replacement of the Developing Assembly):
Although the alarm is detected after execution of auto
gradation adjustment (full adjust) at installation and
replacement of the Developing Assembly, it is not an error.
The alarm is detected because previous Vcont that is a
target for comparison is 0V at installation. At replacement
of the Developing Assembly, previous Vcont that is a
target for comparison is the value determined by the
original Developing Assembly. Therefore, depending on the
individual difference in the Developing Assembly, 50V or
more difference occurs and the alarm is detected.
The alarm is cleared by either re-executing auto gradation
adjustment (full adjust) or printing 6,000 or more sheets (auto
execution of D-max control).
If the date and time of occurrence of the alarm differs from
the timing of installation and replacement of the Developing
Assembly, perform the following measures.
Measures:
If density of output image is sufficient, measures are not
needed.
When the density is light (dark), execute PASCAL.
If the problem is not corrected, check/replace the Developing
Assembly.
Movement: A message The waste toner container is full. is
Waste Toner
displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine is
Container full
stopped.
(Photosensitive Drum)
Cause: The Waste Toner Counter reaches 600000.
Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container. Reset the Waste
Toner Counter.
7-120
Alarm
Code
Title
30-0004
Pre-transfer Charging
PCB Harness
disconnection
(connection error)
31-0005
Environment Sensor
reading alarm
31-0007
31-0008
7-120
7
Alarm
Code
32-0002
Title
Potential control (VL
control) error
33-0001
Delivery Assembly
Decurler Fan alarm
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Paper Cooling Fan
(FM5).
Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM5).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Paper Cooling
Fan (FM5).
33-0002
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Registration Motor/
Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42).
Failure of the Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling
Fan (FM42).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Registration
Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42).
7-121
Alarm
Code
Title
33-0010
33-0013
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Feed Driver Cooling
Fan (FM40).
Failure of the Feed Driver Cooling Fan (FM40).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Feed Driver
Cooling Fan (FM40).
33-0022
33-0023
33-0025
33-0026
Charging Assembly
Fan 1 alarm
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Air Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33).
Failure of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air
Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33).
Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
(FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Exhaust Fan (FM33).
7-121
7
Alarm
Code
Title
33-0027
Charging Assembly
Fan 2 alarm
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Primary Charging
Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17).
Failure of the Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
(FM17).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Primary
Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17).
33-0028
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Duplex Driver Cooling
Fan (FM41).
Failure of the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Duplex Driver
Cooling Fan (FM41).
37-0001
For R&D
37-0002
For R&D
37-0003
For R&D
37-0004
For R&D
37-0005
For R&D
37-0006
For R&D
37-0007
For R&D
37-1000
For R&D
37-2000
For R&D
38-0001
For R&D
38-0002
For R&D
50-0007
Insufficient light
intensity in Postseparation Sensor 3
50-0008
Insufficient light
intensity in Lead
Sensor 1
50-0009
Insufficient light
intensity in Delivery
Sensor
7-122
Alarm
Code
Title
50-0010
50-0013
Insufficient
light intensity in
Registration Sensor
60-0001
61-0001
62-0001
65-0001
Punch alarm
73-0006
LIPS
73-0007
LIPS
73-0008
LIPS
73-0009
LIPS
73-0011
LIPS
73-0014
LIPS
73-0015
LIPS
73-0017
LIPS
73-0021
LIPS
7-122
7
Alarm
Code
Title
7-123
Alarm
Code
Title
73-0024
LIPS
80-0019
BDL
73-0026
LIPS
81-0001
Imaging
75-0001
Error occurred in
Yukon
81-0002
Imaging
Rendering error
81-0003
Imaging
81-0004
Imaging
81-0005
Imaging
Imaging
75-0002
76-0001
Font
81-0006
76-0002
Font
81-0007
Imaging
76-0003
Font
83-0005
76-0004
Font
83-0015
76-0005
Font
83-0016
83-0017
PDF error
76-0006
Font
76-0007
Font
84-0001
84-0002
76-0008
Font
84-0003
78-0003
GL
Invalid GL entry
84-0004
78-0005
GL
84-0005
79-0001
Canon-made PCL
84-0006
79-0002
Canon-made PCL
84-0007
84-0008
XPS non-support
image error
84-0009
79-0003
Canon-made PCL
79-0004
Canon-made PCL
Download overflow
80-0001
BDL
Admin error
80-0003
BDL
80-0004
BDL
Wrapper error
80-0007
BDL
Resource error
80-0008
BDL
Attribute error
T-7-28
80-0009
BDL
VolatileResource error
80-0010
BDL
Graphics error
80-0011
BDL
Char error
80-0012
BDL
Image error
80-0013
BDL
Image error
80-0015
BDL
80-0016
BDL
7-123
Service Mode
Overview
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
Service Mode
Overview
8-2
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode.
1) Press [i]
F-8-1
"MODELIST"
"MODELIST CLASSIC"
This mode is same as the old machine. The new function, which will be
described later, is not available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
Updater
F-8-2
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " or Updater is pressed, the screen will switch to initial
screen for each mode.
8-2
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
F-8-4
F-8-3
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification
F-8-5
Name
Description
Function switching
FNC-SW
DSPLY-SW
IMG-FIX
Fixing related
IMG-TR
Transfer related
IMG-DEV
Developer related
IMG-RDR
IMG-SPD
Cleaning
Environment settings
ENV-SET
FEED-SW
Noise reduction
SOUND
Noise related
Network
NETWORK
Customization
CUSTOM
Customization
T-8-1
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
Security features
8-5
1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
System Manager ID
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
System Password
F-8-6
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-5
8-6
Language switch
The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and
The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
HDD.
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
Settings/Registration > Prefernces > Display Settings > Language/Keyboard Switch
Settings/Registration
<Language/Keybord Switch>
Language
English
Japanese
French
German
Italian
Dutch
Keyboard Layout
English(USA)Layout
Cancel
1/1
Set
OK
F-8-9
NOTE:
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
F-8-8
8-6
8-7
F-8-10
8-7
COPIER
DISPLAY
VERSION
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PANEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-8
SDL-STCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
DECK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MN-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
RIP1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
DIAG-DVC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
RUI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-8
8-9
LANG-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LANG-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-9
8-10
OCR-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
OCR-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
OCR-KR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
OCR-TW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TTS-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TTS-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TTS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-10
8-11
TIMESTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ASR-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ASR-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
MEDIA-JA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-DE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-IT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-11
8-12
MEDIA-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-12
8-13
SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ROOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
FLASH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TRIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
FOLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INS-IF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PUNCH-IF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-13
8-14
BOX-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
MOBPR-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
RPTL-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TSP-JLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-FR
Lv.1 Details
8-14
8-15
COPY-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-15
8-16
COPY-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPY-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-16
8-17
SEND-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-17
8-18
SEND-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SEND-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-18
8-19
INTRO-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-19
8-20
INTRO-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-20
8-21
CSTMN-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-21
8-22
ACSBT-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-22
8-23
ACSBT-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-23
8-24
ERS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-24
8-25
ERS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ERS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-25
8-26
NLS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-26
8-27
NLS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
NLS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-27
8-28
BOX-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-28
8-29
BOX-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BOX-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-29
HOLD-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-30
8-30
8-31
HOLD-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HOLD-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-31
USER
ACC-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
SPDTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
BRWS-STS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
8-32
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-32
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
NETWARE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-33
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
SEND
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
TRIM-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
HDD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
PCI1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PCI2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
IA-RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
Default value
8-33
ANALOG
TEMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
ABS-HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
FIX-U
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
FIX-UE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
8-34
FIX-UE2
Lv.1 Details
T-8-5
8-34
CST-STS
HV-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
WIDTH-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
WIDTH-C4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
WIDTH-MF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
8-35
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
PRIMARY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related service mode
PRI-GRID
Lv.1 Details
T-8-6
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related service mode
PRE-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
BIAS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
TR-V
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
8-35
8-36
CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
TARGET-B
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TARGET-G
Lv.2 Details
T-8-7
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TARGET-R
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
GAIN-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-36
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
GAIN-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
GAIN-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
GAIN-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
LAMP-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
8-37
LAMP-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
OFST-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
OFST-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
OFST2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-37
8-38
GAIN2BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-38
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
OFST2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-39
DPOT
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
DPOT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
VL1T
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
VL1M
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
VDT
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
VDM
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
BIAS-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Unit
LPOWER-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-39
DENS
8-40
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Use case
T-8-9
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
8-40
8-41
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
P-LED
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adjust/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
P-B-AVE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
P-B-MAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
P-B-MIN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
8-41
SENSOR
8-42
MISC
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
DOC-SZ
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPOWER
Lv.2 Details
T-8-11
8-42
ENVRNT
2D-SHADE
COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE
Environment Indication
The readings of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main) are indicated as a
history of changes in the following: machine inside temperature (deg C), humidity (%), fixing
roller surface (middle; deg C).
F-8-11
Item
No.
DATE
TIME
D+deg C
E+%
F+deg C
8-43
Description
order of data acquisition (the higher the number, the order the data)
date of data acquisition
time of data acquisition
machine inside temperature
machine inside humidity
fixing roller surface (middle) temperature
2D-STS
Lv.1 Details
T-8-13
T-8-14
NOTE:
The interval at which data is acquired may be changed using the following service
mode item: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ENVP-IN.
8-43
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
bit
Name
P001
15
14
13
Not used
Not used
DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
(Fixing/Feed) Remote Signal
DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
Remote Signal
Not used
Not used
Not used
Fixing Feed Drawer Connector
Connection Signal
Main Driver PCB Connector
Connection Signal
Relay PCB Connection Signal
Not used
DC Power Supply PCB (12V) Laser
Output Signal
DC Power Supply PCB (24V) B
Interlock System Output Signal
DC Power Supply PCB (24V) B
Output Signal
DC Power Supply PCB (24V) A
Interlock System Output Signal
DC Power Supply PCB (24V) A
Output Signal
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 Error
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Remarks
0: ON
0: ON
0: Connect
PCB2
0: Connect
PCB5
PCB29
0: Connect
PCB31
0: Normal
PCB31
0: Normal
PCB30
0: Normal
PCB30
0: Normal
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
PS94
THM4
2
1
Not used
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Excessive
Temperature Rise Detection
THM2
THM1
0: Normal
Name
8-44
Symbol
Remarks
1: HP front
FM14/FM15 1: Error
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-44
8
Address
bit
Name
P004
15
14
Not used
Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 > Fixing
Main Thermistor
Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 > Fixing
Sub Thermistor 2
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Main Thermistor > Fixing Sub
Thermistor 1
Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 > Fixing
Main Thermistor
Thermistor Connection
Front Door Open Detection Switch
Fixing Feed Lever
Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V OFF
13
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Symbol
THM1/
THM4
Remarks
Address
bit
Name
P005
15
14
13
12
1: Error
* The value returns to 0 when
temperature of the Fixing
Assembly decreases.
1: Error
* The value returns to 0 when
temperature of the Fixing
Assembly decreases.
THM2/
THM4
THM1/
THM2
1: Error
* The value returns to 0 when
temperature of the Fixing
Assembly decreases.
1: Error
* The value returns to 0 when
temperature of the Fixing
Assembly decreases.
0: Connect
0: Close, 1: Open
1: Fixing Feed Unit presence
1: 12V to Fixing Power Supply
PCB is OFF or safety circuit
operation
1: Paper presence
THM1/
THM2
THM1
SW2
PCB10
PS36
M3
FM7
1: Stop
1: Stop
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P006
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8-45
Symbol
Remarks
PCB26
PCB12
PCB11
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
M3
M3
PCB10
-
1: ON
0: CW (paper feed direction)
1: ON
H02
M7
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
0: ON
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
8-45
8
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
6
5
4
PS4
PS52
PS51
3
2
Not used
Fixing Shutter Home Position
Sensor
Not used
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter
Sensor
PS53
12
11
10
9
8
1
0
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Symbol
Remarks
PS104
(rear) /
PS105
(front)
PS103
PS102
0: Full
PS101
1: HP
SL9
0: Connect
0: Connect
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
1: Web level is low or
Connector disconnection
0: JAM
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence or
Connector disconnection
Address
bit
Name
P008
15
14
13
12
0: Paper presence
1: HP
SL10
PS45
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PS95
1: HP front
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-46
Symbol
PCB10
PCB10
Remarks
0: iRA8105 Series
PCB11
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB11
0: Connect
PCB12
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB12
0: Connect
PCB26
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB26
0: Connect
PS61
PCB6 or
PCB7
-
1: HP
0: Connect
1: Error
0: 100V, 1: 200V
PCB13
PCB13
M101
M101
PS104
(rear) /
PS105
(front)
Develop High Voltage PCB AC ON PCB12
Develop High Voltage PCB DC ON PCB12
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB PCB11
ON
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
0: CW
0: CCW
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
8-46
8
Address
bit
P010
15
14
13
12
P011
Name
Not used
Patch Sensor_ON
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor ON 2
Symbol
PS90
M6
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Remarks
bit
Name
P012
15
14
13
1: ON
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
M6
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Developing Motor Error
Drum Motor Error
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch
M2
M1
SW5
12
PS54
11
10
Not used
Toner Supply Motor Error
M10
9
8
Not used
Toner Feed Motor Error
M28
7
6
5
4
TS3
TS3
TS2
TS2
TS1
TS1
1: Toner presence
0: Connect
CL5
CL1
3
2
Address
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1: Stop
1: Stop
1: Lock (toner clogging) or
Connector disconnection
0: Cover Open or Connector
disconnection
1: Overcurrent Error (logical
change)
P013
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-47
Symbol
Remarks
FM17
FM16
FM2
1: Stop
1: Stop
1: Stop
PS28
1: Paper presence
SL2
PS23
PS24
SW2
PS3
FM32/FM33 1: Error
FM31
FM30
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
1: Error
1: Error
8-47
8
Address
bit
P014
15
14
Symbol
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Not used
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air
Supply Fan/Pre-transfer Charging
Exhaust Fan Full Speed ON
Not used
Not used
Drum Motor_ON
Drum Motor_CCW
Not used
Not used
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air
Supply Fan/Pre-transfer Charging
Exhaust Fan Half Speed ON
Voltage Sensor PCB ON
Not used
Not used
Developing Motor_ON
Developing Motor_CCW
Not used
Not used
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1/2
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
Connection
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Vertical Path Sensor 3
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close
Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
PS32
PS48
PS47
1
0
M4
PS7
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
P015
Name
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Remarks
M1
1: ON
M1
0: CW
FM32/FM33 1: Half Speed
PCB15
M2
M2
PS19
SL6
1: ON
1: ON
0: CW
1: Paper presence
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
0: Lifter Up
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
0: Open
PS6
PS25
PS26
PS8
PS2
1: Paper presence
Address
bit
P016
15
14
13
M20
PS70
PS69
1: Error
Detect paper level by
combination of the Paper Level
Sensor 1/2
0: OFF
1: ON (Condition that the flag
blocks the sensor)
As for the combination, refer
to the Pickup/Feed System in
Service Manual.
12
11
10
9
PS17
PS21
PS68
PS13
SL3
0: Lifter Up
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
0: Paper absence, 1: Paper
presence
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
Detect paper size by
combination of 4 switches
0: ON (Condition that the
switch is pressed)
1: OFF
As for the combination, refer
to the Pickup/Feed System in
Service Manual.
SW7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-48
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW7
SW7
SW7
Remarks
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-48
8
Address
bit
P017
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P018
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Remarks
Address
bit
P019
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Not used
Not used
Vertical Path Sensor 4
Not used
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Error
Making Image Exhaust Fan Error
Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid
Connection
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1
PS27
FM40
FM3
SL4
PS18
M21
PS22
PS71
PS14
SL7
PS73
PS72
PS50
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-49
Remarks
1: Paper presence
1: Error
1: Stop
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
Detect paper level by
combination of the Paper Level
Sensor 1/2
0: OFF
1: ON (Condition that the flag
blocks the sensor)
As for the combination, refer
to the Pickup/Feed System in
Service Manual.
0: Lifter Up
1: Error
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
1: Paper presence
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
Detect paper level by
combination of the Paper Level
Sensor 1/2
0: OFF
1: ON (Condition that the flag
blocks the sensor)
As for the combination, refer
to the Pickup/Feed System in
Service Manual.
8-49
8
Address
bit
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Symbol
PS49
M5
PS12
PS20
PS33
PS10
PS11
SW10
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Remarks
Address
bit
Name
P021
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Half Speed
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Full Speed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Making Image Exhaust Fan Half
Speed
Making Image Exhaust Fan Full
Speed
For factory use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
SW10
SW10
SW10
SW8
SW8
SW8
SW8
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-50
Symbol
FM40
FM40
FM3
FM3
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON (priority)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-50
8
Address
bit
Name
P023
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P024
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Symbol
PS29
PS64
SL11
Remarks
Address
bit
P025
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
SL5
PS56
PS55
PS31
FM8
PS66
FM41
-
P026
1: HP
1: Engage
0: Detect
1: Stop
1: Paper presence
1: Stop
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For factory use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
8-51
Remarks
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-51
8
Address
bit
P027
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P028
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Transfer High Voltage PCB
Connection
Not used
Transfer High Voltage PCB 24V
Check
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Duplex Merging Sensor
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor
Cooling Fan
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Not used
Paper Cooling Fan Error
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Reverse Detachment Solenoid
Connection
Inner Delivery Sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
Symbol
Remarks
PCB13
0: Connect
PCB13
1: Error
Address
bit
Name
P029
15
14
PS67
FM42
13
1: Paper presence
1: Stop
PS65
FM5
SL12
1: Paper presence
1: Stop
P030
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
PS35
-
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-52
Symbol
Remarks
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
FM5
FM5
FM42
0: Active
FM42
1: Full Speed
FM8
1: Half Speed
FM8
1: Half Speed
1: Full Speed
1: ON
1: Half Speed
T-8-15
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030)
8-52
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)
Address
bit
Name
Address
bit
P001
0-7
8
9 - 11
12
13
14
15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 10
11
12 - 14
15
0
P001
P002
P003
P004
P005
1-3
4
5 - 10
11
12
P006
13 - 15
0-4
5
6
7 - 15
Symbol
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
FM14/FM15
-
Remarks
0: Abnormal, 1: Normal
0: Normal, 1: Abnormal
P002
0: ON, 1: OFF
P003
PCB52
PCB1
-
Name
8-53
Symbol
Remarks
SR2
1: HP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Board Test
12V Power Supply Monitor
24V Power Supply Monitor
Reader-DADF Connect
Location Information 0
Location Information 1
Debug LED
Memory Identification
Model Identification
7
0
1
2
3
CF1
CF2
SR1
SR3
FM1
Not used
0: Reception is available
0: Controller ready
1: Normal start-up, 0: Silent startup
1: Normal start-up, 0: PCB check
0: Power supply
0: Power supply
1: Connect, 0: Unconnected AP
Not used
Not used
Not used
1: Model with memory, 0: Model
without memory
1: X-system or Copyboard, 0:
S-system
0: Original presence
0: Original presence
1: Close, 0: Open
1: Close, 0: Open
1: Failure
FM2
1: Failure
4
5
6
7
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)
8-53
8
Address
bit
P004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P005
Name
B_DDI_SPI1
B_DDI_SCTS
B_DDI_SPRDY
Debug Inspection Activation LED
DF/Reader Selector
Size Detection LED
Watchdog Output
Scanner Motor Current Setting 1
Scanner Motor Current Setting 2
Scanner Motor Reset
Scanner Motor Enable
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan ON
Scanner Motor Direction
-
Symbol
M1
M1
M1
M1
FM2
M1
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)
Remarks
Fix to 1
0: Transmission is available
0: Engine ready
1: ON
1: DADF, 0: Reader
1: ON
0: (Toggle operation)
(0,0): 100%, (0,1): 75%, (1,0):
50%, (1,1): 25%
0: Reset (100nsec)
1: Enable
1: ON
1: Back scan, 0: Scan
-
Address
bit
Name
P001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
SR23
SR8
SR7
SR9
SR13
SR6
SR10
SR1
PCB2
0: Power supply
1: Paper presence
0: Failure
1: Paper presence
1: A4R, STMTR, B6R
0: Open
1: HP (lower limit)
1: Paper surface detection
0: Open
1: Original presence
0: Stamp presence
1: Paper presence
SR3
SR2
SR12
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
1: HP (Escape)
7
0
1
FM3
SR16
-
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SR22
SR15
SR20
SR19
SR18
SR17
PCB5
SR5
PCB4
PCB3
SR11
PCB2
M1
M8
SL2
LED
M8
M6
M7
0: Failure
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: 1-path duplex, 0: Reverse
duplex
1: Paper presence
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
Not used
0: HP
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
1: Rotation direction, 0: (Not used)
1: Enable, 0: Reset
1: Up, 0: Down
1: ON
1: ON
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
P002
4
5
6
T-8-17
P003
P004
P005
8-54
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)
Symbol
Remarks
8-54
8
Address
bit
P006
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P007
Name
Glass Shift Motor Current
Glass Shift Motor Direction
DADF Fan ON
Pickup Motor Direction
Separation Motor Current
Pickup Motor Current
Registration Motor Current
Read Motor Current
Pickup Motor Current
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan ON
Pickup Clutch
Delivery Motor Current
Delivery Motor Direction
-
Symbol
M9
M9
M1
M1
M3
M4
M1
FM3
M5
M5
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit - C1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
Remarks
1: Operation is available
1: Shading direction (Right upper)
1: ON
1: ON
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
1: Operation is available
1: ON
1: ON
1: Operation is available
1: CCW (Delivery direction)
-
bit
P048
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T-8-18
P049
8-55
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
deck main motor hold
deck open solenoid
deck lifter motor
deck lifter motor ON signal
deck main motor ON signal
not used
not used
deck pickup clutchON ON signal
not used
deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid
deck open indicator
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Symbol
Remarks
M1
SL2
M2
M2
M1
CL2
SL1
0:open/1:close
0:up/1:down
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
LED100
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit - C1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
8-55
8
Addres
bit
Description
P050
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
for R&D
not used
for R&D
for R&D
deck open sensor
deck set sensor
deck lifter lower limit detecting
switch
deck paper level sensor
deck paper supply position sensor
deck main motor lock signal
deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid ON signal
deck pickup sensor
deck feed sensor
deck lifter position sensor
deck paper sensor
deck open detecting switch
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite - A1 (DC-CON>P047 to P050)
Remarks
PS9
PS5
SW2
0:close/1:open
0:connected/1:unconnected
0:ON/1:OFF
PS8
PS7
M1
SL1
PS6
PS1
PS4
PS2
SW1
8-56
Address
bit
P047
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Expansion Fan OFF
Not used
Air Heater Control Signal
FAN3
H1
1: OFF, 0: ON
0 (0,0): 60 degC, 3 (1,1): 90 degC
M3
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
BANK-RX1
BANK-RX0
BANK-TX
Deck Pickup Clutch ON
Hot Air Fan OFF
Air Heater ON
Open/Close Solenoid ON
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Lifter DOWN/UP
Deck Lifter Motor ON
Cold Fan OFF
Cassette Heater ON
Motor Cooling Fan
Deck Pickup Motor Current 1
Deck Pickup Motor Current 0
Deck Pickup Solenoid ON
Indication LED ON
FAN1,
FAN2,
FAN3
CL1
FAN1
H1
SL2,
SL3
M2
FAN2
H2, H3
FAN4
M1
M1
SL1
-
P048
Name
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite - A1 (DC-CON>P047 to P050)
Remarks
8-56
8
Address
bit
P049
15
14
13
12
11
10
Not used
Heater Error 1
Heater Ready
POD Deck Detection
Motor Cooling Fan Error
Deck Foreign Matter Sensor
FAN4
PS13
PS12
PS7
PS10
5
4
PS1
PS4
PS2
SW3
P050
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Name
Symbol
PS6
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
8-57
Remarks
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: Ready, 0: Not ready
1: Detect, 0: Not detect
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: Foreign matter absence, 0:
Foreign matter presence
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper
presence
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0
1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0
1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0
1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0
1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0
1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0
1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0
1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0
Fix to 0
1: Error, 0: Normal
Fix to 0
Fix to 1
1: Open, 0: Close
1: Unconnected, 0: Connected
1: Normal, 0: Abnormal
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper
presence
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper
presence
1: Open, 0: Close
Address
bit
P425
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P426
Name
paper delivery start response
paper delivery start Request
Inlet motor CLK
lower tray document set LED
exit motor1CLK
upper tray document set LED
exit motor phase switching 2
exit motor phase switching 1
exit motor2CLK
upper tray width sensor
lower tray width sensor
-
Symbol
S10
S13
-
Remarks
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
P31=0,P32=0 : 2phase
P31=1,P32=0 : 1-2phase
-
1: 5V OFF, 0: 5V ON
1: Paper presence, 0: Paper
absence
1: Paper presence, 0: Paper
absence
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper
presence
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper
presence
1: ON, 0: OFF
T-8-20
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
8-57
8
Address
bit
P427
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Reserve solenoid
upper tray registration sensor
lower tray registration sensor
EEPROM / IO DO signal
SOL1
S3
S7
-
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EEPROM CS signal
EEPROM / DA / IO / DIsignal
EEPROM / DA / IO / CLK signal
PMmotoroutput Enable
upper tray registration clutch
lower tray registration clutch
Reserve unit motor rotation direction
Reserve unit motor phase switching1
CL1
CL2
-
P428
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : no paper / 1 : paper
0 : no paper / 1 : paper
0 : data bit 0 / 1 : data bit
1
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : CCW / 1 : CW
0 : 2phase / 1 : 1-2phase
P429
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P430
Name
PM motor chip Enable
exit motor1Enable
Brushless motor Enable
HB motor Enable
Inlet motor phase switching2
Inlet motor phase switching1
paper delivery start response
paper delivery start
drive switching motor rotation direction
drive switching motor CLK
lower tray lift motor rotation direction
lower tray lift motor CLK
upper tray lift motor rotation direction
upper tray lift motor CLK
pickup motor rotation direction
upper tray lift motor current
lower tray lift motor current
drive switching motor current
external I / O data bus 6
Reserve unit motor CLK
external I / O data bus 5
external I / O data bus 4
external I / O data bus 3
external I / O data bus 2
external I / O data bus 1
pickup motor CLK
Symbol
-
8-58
Remarks
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : OFF / 1ON
PH0=0,PH1=0 : 2phase
PH0=1,PH1=0 : 1-2phase
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : OFF / 1ON
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
0 : CCW / 1 : CW
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
8-58
8
Address
bit
P431
15
S6
14
13
12
11
S15
S14
S12
S4
10
S2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
S11
S9
S16
S17
S18
S8
S1
2
1
0
S19
SW2
S5
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S21
S20
SW1
-
P432
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
P433
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
Wire-speed sorting Identification signal
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
PCB2
PCB1
-
P434
P439
P440
P445
P450
P451
Name
Symbol
8-59
Remarks
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : low speed machine /
1 : high speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0 : insetion
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
T-8-21
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P425 to P451)
8-59
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : IPC Connection (SORTER>P038 to P047)
bit
P038
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P039
P040
Name
paper delivery start response
paper delivery start Request
Symbol
S10
S13
SOL1
S3
S7
-
Address
Remarks
0:OFF/1ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
P31=0,P32=0:2phase
P31=1,P32=0:1-2phase
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:no paper /1:paper
0:no paper /1:paper
-
P041
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P042
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
EEPROM/IO DO signal
EEPROM CS signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ DIsignal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK signal
PMmotoroutput Enable
upper tray registration clutch
lower tray registration clutch
Symbol
8-60
Remarks
CL1
CL2
-
0:2phase/1:1-2phase
0:OFF/1ON
0:OFF/1ON
0:OFF/1ON
0:OFF/1ON
PH0=0,PH1=0:2phase
PH0=1,PH1=0:1-2phase
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1ON
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : IPC Connection (SORTER>P038 to P047)
8-60
8
Address
bit
P043
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
S6
14
13
12
11
10
S15
S14
S12
S4
S2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
S11
S9
S16
S17
S18
S8
S1
S19
SW2
S5
-
P044
P045
Name
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : IPC Connection (SORTER>P038 to P047)
Remarks
0:CCW/1:CW
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:outside pick position/1:pick
position
0:no paper /1:paper
0:paper/1:no paper
0:paper/1:no paper
0:outside lower limit/1:lower limit
0:outside pick position/1:pick
position
0:paper/1:no paper
0:paper/1:no paper
0:no paper /1:paper
0:no paper /1:paper
0:no paper /1:paper
0:no paper /1:paper
0:outside HP/1:inside HP
0:close/1:open
0:close/1:open
0:outside lower limit/1:lower limit
-
Address
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P046
P047
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
power supply lock detect signal 3
Delivery2 sensor
inlet sensor
Front upper cover switch
Brushless motor Lock detection
signal
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
Wire-speed sorting Identification
signal
PCB Identification signal2
PCB Identification signal1
PSW2
PSW1
fan 2 Enable
PCB LED2
PCB LED1
Symbol
8-61
Remarks
S21
S20
SW1
-
0:normal /1:lock
0:no paper /1:paper
0:no paper /1:paper
0:close/1:open
0:normal /1:lock
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:low speed machine/1: high speed
machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0:insetion
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
PCB2
PCB1
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - K1 : IPC Connection (SORTER>P038 to P047)
T-8-22
8-61
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : ARCNET Connection
(SORTER > P029 to P038)
bit
P029
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P030
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Upper stopper paper sensor
Fold position sensor
Separation timing sensor
Speed down timing sensor
paper delivery start response
paper delivery start request
Rotation direction of fold position
adjustment motor
Rotation direction of fold position
adjustment motor CLK
fold feed motor CLK
C-fold stopper solenoid
Separation solenoid
Fold tray branch flapper solenoid
Exit Motor phase switching 2
Exit Motor phase switching 1
Exit Motor 2CLK
Upper stopper paper sensor AD
Fold position accuracy sensor AD
Separation timing sensor AD
Speed down timing sensor AD
Symbol
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
SOL5
SOL3
SOL2
S33
S32
S31
S30
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
P31=0,P32=0 : 2phase
P31=1,P32=0 : 1-2phase
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
Address
bit
P031
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
SOL4
-
6
5
4
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : data bit0 /
1 : : data bit1
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
0 : CW / 1 : CCW
1 : OFF / 0 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
-
Remarks
S33
S32
S31
S30
-
3
2
P032
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-62
Remarks
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : ARCNET Connection
(SORTER > P029 to P038)
8-62
8
Address
bit
P033
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
CL4
CL3
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P034
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : ARCNET Connection
(SORTER > P029 to P038)
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
PH0=0,PH1=0 : 2phase
excitation
PH0=1,PH1=0 : 1-2phase
excitation
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
0 : PWM / 1 : PWM
-
P035
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
S29
S27
S26
S28
11
10
Delivery 1 sensor
2nd fold push-on stopper HP sensor
S22
S23
S24
S25
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P036
Name
Symbol
S21
S20
-
8-63
Remarks
0 : close / 1 : open
1 : paper
1 : paper
0 : HP outside /
1HP input
1 : paper
0 : HP outside /
1HP input
0 : HP outside /
1HP input
0 : HP outside /
1HP input
0 : normal / 1 : Lock
1 : paper
1 : paper
0 : close / 1 : open
0 : close / 1 : open
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : ARCNET Connection
(SORTER > P029 to P038)
8-63
8
Address
bit
P037
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
Wire-speed sorting Identification signal
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P038
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : IPC Connection
(SORTER>P028 to P037)
Symbol
Remarks
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : low speed machine /
1 : high speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0 : insetion
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : OFF / 1 : ON
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
T-8-23
8-64
bit
P028
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
P029
14
P030
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Upper stopper paper sensor
Hold position sensor
Separation timing sensor
Speed down timing sensor
paper delivery start response
paper delivery start request
Symbol
Remarks
S33
S32
S31
S30
-
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:CW/1:CCW
SOL5
SOL3
SOL2
S33
S32
S31
S30
SOL4
-
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
P31=0,P32=0:2phase
P31=1,P32=0:1-2phase
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
0:PWM/1:PWM
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : IPC Connection
(SORTER>P028 to P037)
8-64
8
Address
bit
P031
15
14
13
12
P033
Symbol
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EEPROM/IO DO signal
C-Hold tray motor CLK
lead edge holding guide motor CLK
Rotation direction of lead edge holding
guide motor
C-Hold stopper adjustment motor CLK
Rotation direction of C-Hold stopper
adjustment motor
upper stopper motor
Rotation direction of upper stopper motor
External DAC CS signal
EEPROM CS signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ DI signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK signal
PM motor output Enable
External I/O Address bus3
External I/O Address bus2
External I/O Address bus1
Hold position adjustment clutch (negative)
Hold position adjustment clutch (positive)
PM motor chip Enable
exit motor1Enable
Brushless motor Enable
HB motor Enable
entrance motor phase switching 2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
11
10
P032
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : IPC Connection
(SORTER>P028 to P037)
Remarks
0:CW/1:CCW
CL4
CL3
-
0:CW/1:CCW
1:OFF/0:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
PH0=0,PH1=0:2phase
excitation
PH0=1,PH1=0:1-2phase
excitation
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
-
Address
P034
P035
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
C-Hold stopper adjustment motor current
upper stopper motor current
C-Hold stopper adjustment motor current
lead edge holding guide motor current
external I/O Data Bus 6
external I/O Data Bus5
external I/O Data Bus4
external I/O Data Bus3
external I/O Data Bus2
external I/O Data Bus1
Hold unit pull-out sensor
Hold tray paper sensor
Hold tray full sensor
Hold tray HP sensor
Delivery 1 sensor
2nd Hold push-on stopper HP sensor
C-Hold stopper HP sensor
Lead edge holding guide HP sensor
Symbol
S29
S27
S26
S28
S22
S23
S24
S25
8-65
Remarks
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:PWM/1:PWM
0:close/1:open
1:paper
1:paper
0:HP outside/1HP input
1:paper
0:HP outside/1HP input
0:HP outside/1HP input
0:HP outside/1HP input
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit - H1 : IPC Connection
(SORTER>P028 to P037)
8-65
8
Address
bit
P036
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P037
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
S21
S20
-
Remarks
0:normal/1:Lock
1:paper
1:paper
0:close/1:open
0:close/1:open
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:low speed machine/1:
high speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0:insetion
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
T-8-24
8-66
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
ARCNET-INT
Not use
Not use
Stack delivery motor
check LED
Saddle feed motor
Delivery motor
Processing feed motor
Processing feed motor
Inlet feed motor
Punch motor FG
Punch motor FG
Shift feed motor FG
SST Connect
-
Symbol
M19
M101
M5
M26
M26
M1
M24
M4
M2
-
Remarks
0 : OFF,1 : ON
1 : SST Connect
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-66
8
Address
bit
Name
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
-
Remarks
0 : RESET
1 : latch
0 : Normal,1 : Download
0 : release
0 : Active
0 : Active
0 : Active
0 : Active
-
Address
bit
Name
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P006
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
M22
M22
M23
SL9
M25
M25
M23
M23
M23
M23
M23
UN16
UN16
UN16
M3
M3
M3
M3
M26
M26
M26
M26
M4
M4
M4
M4
M25
M25
M25
M25
8-67
Remarks
0 : CCW,1 : CW
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : CCW,1 : CW
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : selected,1 : not
selected
0 : selected,1 : not
selected
0 : selected,1 : not
selected
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CCW,1 : CW
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-67
8
Address
bit
Name
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P008
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
PS32
MSW2
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
PS33
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
PS27
PS31
PS30
PS29
PS28
PS42
-
Remarks
0 : No paper,1 : paper
0 : detect, 1 : not detect
0 : not detect,1 : detect
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : Shading
0 : No staple,1 : staple
0 : not ready,1 : ready
0 : ON,1 : OFF
1 : HP
0 : NG,1 : OK
0 : NG,1 : OK
0 : NG,1 : OK
0 : NG,1 : OK
1 : not set or full
-
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P010
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Inlet feed motor
Inlet feed motor
Inlet feed motor
Inlet feed motor
feed roller disengage motor current
switching 2
feed roller disengage motor current
switching 1
feed roller disengage motor current
switching B phase
feed roller disengage motor current
switching A phase
Shift feed motor Current switching 2
Shift feed motor Current switching 1
Shift feed motor CW
Shift feed motor Clk
Inlet roller disengage motor current set
Inlet roller disengage motor current set
Inlet roller disengage motor current B
phase
Inlet roller disengage motor current A
phase
7segLED_A
7segLED_B
7segLED_C
7segLED_D
7segLED_E
7segLED_F
7segLED_G
7segLED_Dot
Horizontal registration shift motor Current
switching 2
Horizontal registration shift motor Current
switching 1
Horizontal registration shift motor CW /
CCW
Horizontal registration shift motor Clock
(1-2 phase)
Delivery motor Current switching 2
Delivery motor Current switching 1
Delivery motor CW / CCW
Delivery motor Clk
Symbol
8-68
Remarks
M1
M1
M1
M1
M8
0 : CW,1 : CCW
-
M8
M8
M8
M2
M2
M2
M2
M27
M27
M27
0 : CW,1 : CCW
-
M27
M7
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
-
M7
M7
0 : CW,1 : CCW
M7
M5
M5
M5
M5
0 : CW,1 : CCW
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-68
8
Address
bit
P011
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P012
Name
DIPSW(adjust4)
DIPSW(adjust3)
DIPSW(adjust2)
DIPSW(adjust1)
DIPSW(adjust0)
DIPSW(PunchIdentification0)
DIPSW(PunchIdentification1)
DIPSW(PunchIdentification2)
CHK-SW8
CHK-SW7
CHK-SW6
CHK-SW5
CHK-SW4
CHK-SW3
CHK-SW2
CHK-SW1
Upper cover sensor
feed cooling fan error
Front door sensor
Chip tray sensor
Punch 2 / 3 hole sensor
door 24V power down detect
Chad sensor
-PSW
+PSW
ENTER PSW
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
DIPSW4
DIPSW3
DIPSW2
DIPSW1
DIPSW0
DIPSW0
DIPSW1
DIPSW2
CHK-SW8
CHK-SW7
CHK-SW6
CHK-SW5
CHK-SW4
CHK-SW3
CHK-SW2
CHK-SW1
PS2
FM2
PS1
PS40
PS39
PS46
-
Remarks
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : open,1 : close
0 : normal,1 : error
0 : open,1 : close
0 : not set,1 : set
0 : 2 hole,1 : 3hole
1 : power down
1 : full
0 : PUSH
0 : PUSH
0 : PUSH
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P014
Symbol
Remarks
M20
M20
M20
M17
M17
M17
M16
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
M16
M16
M24
SL2
SL3
SL1
-
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
M24
M24
M6
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : not selected,
1 : selected
0 : not selected,
1 : selected
0 : not selected,
1 : selected
-
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
4
3
2
1
0
Name
8-69
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-69
8
Address
bit
P015
15
PS26
14
PS24
13
PS9
12
PS8
11
10
PS37
PS36
Staple HP sensor
PS27
PS7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
UN22
PS5
PS3
PS4
UN13
UN14
PS6
PS43
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UN24
UN24
UN24
PS25
P016
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
Remarks
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : front,1 : rear
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
-
Address
bit
P017
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
P018
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-70
Remarks
Trimmer Out
Stack delivery auxiliary tray motor ON
Stack delivery auxiliary tray motor B
Stack delivery auxiliary tray motor A
M13
M13
M13
M14
M14
M14
SL8
M15
M15
M15
M28
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : RESET
-
M28
M28
M19
M19
M19
M19
M12
M12
M12
M12
M18
M18
M18
M18
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-70
8
Address
bit
P019
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P020
3
2
1
0
Name
Square hold connected detection
Trimmer connect detection
Square hold input 3
Square hold input 2
Square hold input 1
tray B ISAsensor
Tray B paper surface sensor PCB
(receiving)
tray B sensor
tray B SAsensor
Tray A paper surface sensor PCB
(receiving)
tray A sensor
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
Remarks
UN18
0 : conect,1not connect
0 : conect,1not connect
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
UN16
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
0 : paper,1no paper
Address
bit
P021
15
14
P022
Name
Symbol
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
M21
M21
M21
-
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CZ hold set
CZ hold download mode
motor standby PM
5V power on
fan on signal
saddle separate
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
M9
M9
M9
M9
M10
M10
M10
M10
8-71
Remarks
M11
M11
M11
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : Separate(Kill),
1 : not Separate
0 : reset off ,1 : reset
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : DOWN,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : not separate,
1 : separate(kill)
0 : OFF,1 : paper
0 : DOWN,1 : ON
1 : Response
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-71
8
Address
bit
Name
P023
15
PS110
14
13
12
11
CZ hold FOLDENTRYACK
CZ hold FOLDEXIT
Processing tray HP sensor
PS13
10
9
8
7
PS17
PS16
PS12
PS11
PS15
PS20
PS45
PS14
PS44
PS19
PS21
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not use
power supply fan error 2
CZ fold connect detect
power supply fan error
Saddle delivery sub tray paper sensor
saddle unit connect detection
PS112
-
P024
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
Remarks
0 : HP inside,
1 : HP outside
0 : Response
0 : paper
0 : HP outside,1
: HP inside
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : Transmission,1 :
Shading
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : normal,1 : error
0 : connect,1not connect
0 : normal,1 : error
0 : paper 1 : No paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : connect,1not connect
Address
bit
P025
15
14
13
12
PS109
PS106
11
10
9
8
PS105
7
6
5
PS122
PS119
3
2
1
0
PS121
15
14
PS110
13
12
11
10
9
8
PS107
7
6
5
PS103
PS101
PS108
4
3
2
1
PS118
P026
Name
Symbol
8-72
Remarks
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : not Center ,1 : Center
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : Not through the home
position,1 : Through the
home position
0 : HP outside,1 : HP
inside
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : no stapl,1 : stapl
0 : no stapl,1 : stapl
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
0 : HP outside,
1 : HP inside
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-72
8
Address
bit
Name
P027
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P028
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
M109
M109
M105
M105
M108
M108
M106
M106
M114
M114
Saddle alignment roller motor IL
M112
Saddle alignment guide motor CW
M102
Saddle alignment guide motor IL
M102
Saddle lead edge stopper motor CW
M103
Saddle lead edge stopper motor current IL M103
check LED
Saddle feed motor CW
M101
Saddle feed motor current IH
M101
Saddle feed motor current IL
M101
Saddle trailing edge moving motor CW
M111
Saddle trailing edge moving motor IL
M111
Saddle trailing edge retainer move motor IL M110
jam paper display LED4(Front)
saddle roller guide motor current IL
M104
motor standby
Saddle paper tapping motor current IL
M113
Remarks
1 : CCW Active
1 : CW Active
0 : CCW Active
0 : CW Active
0 : CCW Active
0 : CW Active
0 : CCW Active
0 : CW Active
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : OFF,1 : ON
1 : standby
-
Address
bit
Name
P029
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
M1
-
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P030
Symbol
8-73
Remarks
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
"P31=0, P32=0 :
2phaseExcitation
P31=1, P32=0 :
1-2phaseExcitation"
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-73
8
Address
bit
Name
P031
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
reserve solenoid
upper bin registration
lower bin registration
Inner tray motor solenoid
flash write communication received
flash write communication send
EEPROM / IO DO signal
Saddle lead edge guide hold motor rotation
direction
inner 3 hold adjust motor rotation direction
upper stopper motor rotation direction
External DAC CS signal
EEPROM CS signal
EEPROM / DA / IO DI signal
EEPROM / DA / IO CLK signal
PM motor output Enable
upper bin registration clutch
lower bin registration clutch
External I / O Address bus 3
External I / O Address bus 2
External I / O Address bus 1
Reverse unit motor rotation direction
Reverse unit motor phase switching1
P032
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : data bit 0,1 : data bit 1
0 : CW,1 : CCW
P033
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
M1
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : ON,1OFF
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : data bit 0,1 : data bit 1
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : CCW,1CW
0 : 2phase1 : 1-2phase
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
M1
M23
M23
M22
M22
M22
M23
-
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : OFF,1ON
0 : OFF,1ON
"PH0=0, PH1=0 : 2phase
PH0=1, PH1=0 :
1-2phase"
0 : ON,1OFF
0 : ON,1OFF
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CW,1 : CCW
0 : CCW,1CW
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
0 : PWM,1 : PWM
-
P034
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-74
Remarks
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-74
8
Address
bit
P035
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PS3
-
P036
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
P037
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
Wire-speed sorting Identification signal
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
-
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UN24
0 : normal,1 : lock
0 : normal,1 : lock
0 : normal,1 : lock
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : no paper,1 : paper
0 : Closed, 1 : Open
0 : normal,1 : lock
P038
P039
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P045
P046
P047
P048
P049
P050
Name
Symbol
8-75
Remarks
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : low speed machine /
1 : high speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0 : insetion
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : ON / 1 : OFF
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : OFF,1 : ON
0 : ON,1 : OFF
0 : ON,1 : OFF
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher-F1 / Booklet Finisher-F1
(SORTER > P001 to P075)
8-75
8
Address
P051
P052
P053
P054
P055
P056
P057
P058
P059
P060
P061
P062
P063
P064
P065
P066
P067
P068
P069
P070
P071
P072
P073
P074
P075
bit
Name
Horizontal registration sensor 2
Horizontal registration sensor 1
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Symbol
UN24
UN24
-
Remarks
P024)
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
P002
12
T-8-25
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-76
Name
Horizontal registration HP sensor
Punch 2-/3-hole encoder
Punch 2-/3-hole sensor
Punch position sensor
Buffer Feed Motor rotation signal
Swing Guide Motor clock signal
Swing Guide Motor rotation signal
Inlet Sensor
Swing Guide Height Detection Sensor
Feed Path Senor
Inlet Feed Motor
Inlet Feed Motor
Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter Motor
rotation
Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter Motor
clock
DA converter 1 clock signal
DA converter 1 data output signal
DA converter 1 chip select signal
Buffer Feed Motor clock signal
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Position
Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Rear HP
Sensor
Tray Auxiliary Guide Rear HP Sensor
Rear Alignment HP Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front HP
Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front HP
Sensor
Front Alignment HP Sensor
Staple HP Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
S101
S103
S102
M102
M110
M110
S101
S118
S102
M200
M200
M122
1:home position
1:home position
1:home position
0:CCW/1:CW
0:CW/1:CCW
0:paper/1:no paper
1:detected
0:no paper/1:paper
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
M122
S149
1:home
S138
1:home
S136
S109
S139
0:home
1:home
1:home
S137
0:home
S108
S131
1:home
1:home
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-76
8
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
P004
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Symbol
Remarks
M120
M114
S103
S114
PBA600
S128
S132
S133
S134
-
1:detected
1:home
0:light/1:charge
1:detedted
1:detected
1:detedted
0:50staples/1:100staples
-
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
PBA700
PBA700
PBA700
PBA700
S117
S116
S115
S140
M209
M209
M209
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P006
Name
Symbol
8-77
Remarks
0:no paper/1:paper
0:no paper/1:paper
0:no paper/1:paper
0:no paper/1:paper
1:front
1:rear
0:front/1:rear
1:home
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0:CW 1,0,1:CCW
0,1,1:brake 0,0,0:free
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0:CW 1,0,1:CCW
0,1,1:brake 0,0,0:free
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0:CW 1,0,1:CCW
0,1,1:brake 0,0,0:free
0:CW/1:CCW
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-77
8
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P008
Name
Rear Alignment Motor CLK
Rear Alignment Motor rotation
Gripper Base Motor CLK
Gripper Base Motor DIR
Gripper Motor CLK
Gripper Motor DIR
Tray 2 Shift Motor ENBL
Tray 2 Shift Motor CLK
Tray 2 Shift Motor CW
Tray 2 Shift Motor CUR
Symbol
M109
M109
M116
M116
M117
M117
M217
M217
M217
M217
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Remarks
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
0:enable
0:CW/1:CCW
0:OFF/1:ON
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P010
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Tray 2 Area Sensor 3
Tray 2 Area Sensor 2
Tray 2 Area Sensor 1
Tray 2 Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Shift Motor ENBL
Tray 1 Shift Motor CLK
Tray 1 Shift Motor CW
Tray 1 Shift Motor CUR
Stapler Shift HP Sensor
Escape Tray Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Area Sensor 1
Tray 1 Area Sensor 2
Tray 1 Area Sensor 3
Tray 1 Shift Motor
Tray 2 Shift Motor alarm
Buffer Flapper HP Sensor
Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor
Swing Guide HP Sensor
Shutter Close Detection Sensor
Shutter HP Sensor
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide HP
Sensor
Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter Motor
Shutter Clutch
Swing Guide Solenoid
Front Door Sensor
Paper Return Guide HP Sensor
Paper Retainer HP Sensor
Feed Roller Separation HP Sensor
Symbol
8-78
Remarks
S127
S126
S125
S105
M105
M105
M105
M105
S107
S130
S104
S122
S123
S124
M105
M217
S142
S143
S110
S148
S106
S113
M122
CL102
SL101
S129
S112
S135
S111
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
0:open/1:close
1:home
1:home
1:home
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-78
8
Address
bit
P011
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P012
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Stapler Shift Motor CLK
Stapler Shift Motor DIR
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide
Motor CLK
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide
Motor DIR
Paper Return Guide Roller Motor CLK
Paper Return Guide Roller Motor DIR
Saddle Roller Guide Motor DIR
Feed Roller Disengage/Buffer Flapper
Motor DIR
Processing Tray Paper Retainer Motor
CLK
Processing Tray Paper Retainer Motor
DIR
Paper Return Guide Motor CLK
Paper Return Guide Motor DIR
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Symbol
Remarks
M107
M107
M113
0:CCW/1:CW
-
M113
0:CW/1:CCW
M121
M121
M204
M119
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CW/1:CCW
M118
M118
0:CW/1:CCW
M112
M112
0:CW/1:CCW
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P014
Name
Punch slide motor CW
Punch slide motor CLK
Inserter connection
IF connection
Punch connection
Punch motor CCW
Punch motor CW
Punch motor ON
Power Supply Fan ON signal
Inserter eject start ack
Inserter entry start
IF unit ejection start ack
IF unit entry start
Fold eject ack
Fold entry start
Power Supply Fan alarm
Inserter eject start
Inserter entry start ack
IF unit ejection start
IF unit entry start ack
Fold eject start
Fold entry ack
Symbol
M101
M101
M102
M102
M102
FAN101
FAN101
-
8-79
Remarks
0:CW/1:CCW
0: connected
0:connected
0:connectecd
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CCW/1:CW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-79
8
Address
bit
P015
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
P016
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Saddle connection
Staple Position Switch
Swing Guide Safety Switch
SW103
SW102/
SW104
Front Door Switch
SW101
24V1-DETECT
24V-DETECT
Relay ON signal
Feed Motor/Buffer Feed Motor stepping M101/
change
M102
Stack Delivery Upper Motor stepping
M101/
change
M102
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Motor
M114
rotation signal
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor rotation
M120
signal
Push switch (-)
Push switch (+)
Dip switch 4
Dip switch 3
Dip switch 2
Dip switch 1
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Remarks
0:connected
0:close/1:open
0:close/1:open
Address
bit
Name
P017
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
0:close/1:open
0:ON 1:OFF
0:ON 1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:2W12phase/1:12phase
0:2W12phase/1:12phase
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CCW/1:CW
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
P018
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
8-80
Remarks
S228
S219
0:stanfby/1:ready
0:enable/1:disenable
0:ON 1:OFF
0:ON 1:OFF
1:paper
1:home
S221
1:home
M203
SL205
SL203
1:ON
SL204
1:ON
SL206
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-80
8
Address
bit
Name
P019
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P020
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
Symbol
Remarks
M211
1:CW/0:CCW
M211
M210
1:CW/0:CCW
M210
M202
M202
S222
S229
S131
S218
S203
S226
S213
0:CW/1:CCW
S214
S206
S205
M205
S225
S224
S207
S227
S215
S201
Address
bit
Name
P021
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
1:home
1:home
1:home
1:detected
1: paper
0:ON/1:OFF
1:home
1:home
0:connected
1:detedted
1:detedted
1:home
1: paper
1:home
1:paper
P022
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
8-81
Remarks
M209
M209
M209
M204
M204
-
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CCW/1:CW
0:OFF/1:ON
0: detected 24V
1:CW/0:CCW
1:CW/0:CCW
M212
M212
-
0:Standby
0:Enable
1:CW/0:CCW
M214
1:CW/0:CCW
1:CW/0:CCW
0:half-step
0:half-step
1:CW/0:CCW
M214
M206
M206
M205
M205
-
1:CW
1:CCW
1:CW
1:CCW
0:ENABLE
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - D1 / Booklet Finisher -D1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-81
8
Address
bit
P023
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
P024
Name
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inner Trimmer - A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
8-82
Remarks
1:LED ON
-
6
5
4
3
LED PCB
Feed motor current value setting D/A
output
Waste paper full sensor D/A output
Waste paper full sensor A/D input
Push switch
Press motor HP sensor
S106
2
1
0
Inlet sensor
Waste paper box detection sensor
S101
S109
0:ON/1:OFF
0:feed position 1:release
position
1:paper
1:waste paper
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P024
M101
P025
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
S011
S011
S011
S106
S101
S109
S104
0:ON/1:OFF
0:feed position 1:release position
1:paper
1:waste paper
0:release position 1:feed position
S102
M105
1:paper
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:release/1:touch
M105
M105
0:standby/1:ready
0:permission/1:prohibition
M105
M101
0:permission/1:prohibition
0:entrance/1:delivery
M101
M101
0:standby/1:ready
0:permission/1:prohibition
M101
0:permission/1:prohibition
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
T-8-26
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inner Trimmer - A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
8-82
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inner Trimmer - A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P026
15
M102
0:permission/1:prohibition
M106
M102
0:permission/1:prohibition
-
M102
M102
0:standby/1:ready
1:registration completion
S105
M102
1:registration completion
-
M104
0:24V detection
-
M103
0:standby/1:ready
M103
0:CW/1:CCW
M103
M104
M105
M103
0:permission/1:prohibition
M103
SL102
SL101
M104
1:shutdown
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:permission/1:prohibition
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P027
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
Address
bit
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
8-83
Symbol
LED on PCB
Cutter motor CCW signal
M106
Cutter motor CW signal
M106
Cutter motor ON/OFF output
M106
M104
Rear estrangement motor CW/
CCW switching signal
Front estrangement motor standby M103
signal
Stopper solenoid/paddle solenoid
SL101/
drive PWM output
SL102
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inner Trimmer - A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
Remarks
0:ON/1:OFF
0:CW/1:CCW
0:CCW/1:CW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:release/1:touch
0:standby/1:ready
T-8-27
8-83
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
8-84
bit
P369
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P370
Name
Low Speed Model Detect
Finisher Connect Detect
Reverse motor FG
Pre-reverse feed motor FG
Lead-in motor FG
Bypass Motor FG
Reverse delivery motor FG
-
Symbol
M4
M3
M2
M1
M5
-
Address
bit
P371
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
0 : Finisher Connect
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
-
P372
Name
SST Connect
GA Reset
Download latch Input
DL latch Input
DL latch Off
Symbol
-
Remarks
1 : SST Connect
1 : reset
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
8-84
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
8
Address
bit
P373
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P374
Name
GA CS
RAM CS
ARCNET CS
LED
FinisherEjectStart
FinisherEntryStartAck
PunchFinComEnable
PunchRelayON
PunchMachineON
PunchPaperLatch
PunchPaperEntry
PunchPaperExitAck
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
8-85
Symbol
-
Remarks
0 : Active
0 : Active
0 : Active
1 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
1 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
-
Address
bit
P375
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P376
Name
PunchPchComEnable
PunchStanby
PunchPunchEnable
PunchPaperComAck
PunchPaperExit
PunchDoorOpen
PunchAbnormal
Punch Conect Detection
Front Door Open Detection
Power-Down Detect
FinisherEjectStartAck
FinisherEntryStart
7segLED_A
7segLED_B
7segLED_C
7segLED_D
7segLED_E
7segLED_F
7segLED_G
7segLED_Dot
FAN Motor ON
Feed Driver Power Supply ON
Bypass Motor CW
Pre-reverse feed motor CW
Reverse delivery motor CW
Reverse motor CW
Lead-in motor CW
Symbol
SW1
MSW1
FM1
M1
M3
M5
M4
M2
Remarks
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : Detect
1 : close
0 : Power-Down
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : Rotation
1 : ON
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
8-85
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
8
Address
bit
P377
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P378
Name
Pre-reverse feed motor Motor IL
Pre-reverse feed motor Motor IH
Reverse delivery motor CW Motor IL
Reverse delivery motor CW Motor IH
Reverse Motor IH
Reverse Motor IL
Lead-in Motor IH
Lead-in Motor IL
Path switching MotorIH
Path switching MotorIL
Bypass MotorIH
Bypass MotorIL
DIPSW_BIT0
DIPSW_BIT1
DIPSW_BIT2
DIPSW_BIT3
DIPSW_BIT4
DIPSW_BIT5
DIPSW_BIT6
DIPSW_BIT7
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
8-86
Symbol
M3
M3
M5
M5
M4
M4
M2
M2
M1
M1
-
Remarks
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
Address
bit
P379
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P380
Name
FAN Error Detection
Delivery Sensor
Path Switching Motor HP Sensor
Integration unit reverse path 3 sensor
Integration unit reverse path 2 sensor
Integration unit reverse path 1 sensor
Integration unit bypass 1 sensor
P-puncher bypass 8 sensor
P-puncher bypass 7 sensor
P-puncher bypass 6 sensor
P-puncher bypass 5 sensor
P-puncher bypass 4 sensor
P-puncher bypass 3 sensor
P-puncher bypass 2 sensor
P-puncher bypass 1 sensor
Puncher die Detect HP Sensor
Puncher die sensor 7
Puncher die sensor 6
Puncher die sensor 5
Puncher die sensor 4
Puncher die sensor 3
Puncher die sensor 2
Puncher die sensor 1
Symbol
FM1
RS5
PS7
RS4
RS3
RS2
RS1
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
Remarks
1 : Rotation
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
T-8-28
8-86
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 :
ARCNET Connection (SORTER > P369 to P380)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
8-87
bit
P047
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P048
P049
Name
Low Speed Model Detect
Finisher Connect Detect
Reverse motor FG
Pre-reverse feed motor FG
Lead-in motor FG
Bypass Motor FG
Reverse delivery motor FG
SST Connect
-
Symbol
M4
M3
M2
M1
M5
-
Address
bit
P050
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
1 : Low
0 : Finisher Connect
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : Low
1 : SST Connect
-
P051
Name
GA Reset
Download latch Input
DL latch Input
DL latch Off
GA CS
RAM CS
ARCNET CS
-
Symbol
-
Remarks
1 : reset
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
0 : Active
0 : Active
0 : Active
-
8-87
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
8
Address
bit
P052
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P053
Name
LED
FinisherEjectStart
FinisherEntryStartAck
Punch Fin Com Enable
Punch Relay ON
Punch Machine ON
Punch Paper Latch
Punch Paper Entry
Punch Paper Exit Ack
Punch Pch Com Enable
Punch Standby
Punch Punch Enable
Punch Paper Com Ack
Punch Paper Exit
Punch Door Open
Punch Abnormal
Punch Connect Detection
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
8-88
Symbol
SW1
-
Remarks
1 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
1 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : ON
0 : Detect
Address
bit
P054
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P055
Name
Front Door Open Detection
Power-Down Detect
FinisherEjectStartAck
FinisherEntryStart
7segLED_A
7segLED_B
7segLED_C
7segLED_D
7segLED_E
7segLED_F
7segLED_G
7segLED_Dot
FAN Motor ON
Feed Driver Power Supply ON
Bypass Motor CW
Pre-reverse feed motor CW
Reverse delivery motor CW
Reverse motor CW
Lead-in motor CW
Pre-reverse feed motor IL
Pre-reverse feed motor IH
Reverse delivery motor CW Motor IL
Reverse delivery motor CW Motor IH
Reverse Motor IH
Reverse Motor IL
Lead-in Motor IH
Lead-in Motor IL
Symbol
MSW1
FM1
M1
M3
M5
M4
M2
M3
M3
M5
M5
M4
M4
M2
M2
Remarks
1 : close
0 : Power-Down
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : Rotation
1 : ON
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
1 : CCW
-
8-88
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
8
Address
bit
P056
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P057
Name
Path switching MotorIH
Path switching MotorIL
Bypass MotorIH
Bypass MotorIL
DIPSW_BIT0
DIPSW_BIT1
DIPSW_BIT2
DIPSW_BIT3
DIPSW_BIT4
DIPSW_BIT5
DIPSW_BIT6
DIPSW_BIT7
FAN Error Detection
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
8-89
Symbol
M1
M1
FM1
-
Remarks
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : OFF
1 : Rotation
-
Address
bit
P058
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P059
Name
Delivery Sensor
Path Switching Motor HP Sensor
Integration unit reverse path 3 sensor
Integration unit reverse path 2 sensor
Integration unit reverse path 1 sensor
Integration unit bypass 1 sensor
P-puncher bypass 8 sensor
P-puncher bypass 7 sensor
P-puncher bypass 6 sensor
P-puncher bypass 5 sensor
P-puncher bypass 4 sensor
P-puncher bypass 3 sensor
P-puncher bypass 2 sensor
P-puncher bypass 1 sensor
Puncher die Detect HP Sensor
Puncher die sensor 7
Puncher die sensor 6
Puncher die sensor 5
Puncher die sensor 4
Puncher die sensor 3
Puncher die sensor 2
Puncher die sensor 1
-
Symbol
RS5
PS7
RS4
RS3
RS2
RS1
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
-
Remarks
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : paper
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
1 : ON
T-8-29
8-89
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Professional Puncher-C1 / Integration Unit-B1 : IPC Connection (SORTER > P047 to P059)
ADJUST
8-90
ADJ-XY
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
AE
ADJ-X
Lv.1 Details
8-90
8-91
ADJY-DF2
Lv.1 Details
T-8-31
8-91
CCD
8-92
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
SH-TRGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-92
8-93
MTF2-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-93
8-94
MTF2-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-94
8-95
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
100DF2RG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DFCH2R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-95
8-96
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CCD-CHNG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-96
8-97
MTF-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-97
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-98
DFCH-R10
Lv.1 Details
8-98
8-99
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DFCH-G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-99
8-100
DFCH2K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH-K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DFCH-K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-100
8-101
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
DFTBK-R
Lv.1 Details
8-101
LASER
8-102
IMG-REG
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
PVE-OFST
Lv.1 Details
MAG-H-K
Lv.1 Details
8-102
DEVELOP
8-103
DENS
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
BIAS
Lv.1 Details
DENS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
T-8-35
8-103
8-104
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
P-B-TGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
DMAX-N-T
Lv.2 Details
8-104
BLANK
BLANK-T
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
BLANK-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
BLANK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-105
BLANK-B
Lv.1 Details
T-8-37
8-105
V-CONT
8-106
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
VD-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DE-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
VCONT-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
VL-OF-L
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
VL-OF-H1
Lv.2 Details
VL-OF-H2
Lv.2 Details
8-106
PASCAL
8-107
HV-PRI
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
OFST-P-K
Lv.1 Details
PRIMARY
Lv.1 Details
8-107
HV-TR
8-108
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
TR-OFS2
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
8-108
8-109
TR-OFS3
Lv.2 Details
TR-OFS4
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
8-109
8-110
TR-OFS5
Lv.2 Details
TR-OFS6
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Transfer Roller target current offset value: -10 to 10
5 micro A
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1 to 5, TR-SP2
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Plain
To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for plain paper.
Use case
When a drum separation failure occurs
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10
Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20
Unit
5 micro A, 1 mm
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF2 to 6
TR-L-OF2
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Heavy1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 1.
Use case
When a drum separation failure occurs
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10
Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20
Unit
5 micro A, 1 mm
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1, 3 to 6
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
TR-L-OF1
Lv.2 Details
8-110
8-111
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
TR-L-OF6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
P-TR-OF1
Lv.2 Details
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
8-111
8-112
P-TR-OF2
Lv.2 Details
P-TR-OF3
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
8-112
8-113
P-TR-OF4
Lv.2 Details
P-TR-OF5
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
8-113
P-TR-OF6
Lv.2 Details
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
TR-SP1
Lv.2 Details
8-114
TR-SP2
Lv.2 Details
8-114
8-115
FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Lv.1 Details
8-115
8-116
ADJ-C4
Lv.1 Details
8-116
8-117
REG-THCK
Lv.1 Details
8-117
8-118
LP-MULT1
Lv.1 Details
8-118
8-119
CST-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
T-8-42
8-119
8-120
MISC
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
SEG-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
K-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-120
8-121
WT-FL-LM
Lv.1 Details
8-121
8-122
TBSIS-WB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DCON-V
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
HP-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-122
8-123
EXP-LED
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
PR-EXP
Lv.2 Details
8-123
FUNCTION
8-124
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
CARD
Lv.1 Details
INSTALL
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
TONER-S
Lv.1 Details
8-124
8-125
CNT-DATE
Lv.1 Details
8-125
8-126
CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
DF-WLVL1
Lv.1 Details
8-126
8-127
DENS
COPIER > FUNCTION > DENS
DEV-AGG
Lv.1 Details
T-8-47
8-127
DPC
8-128
CST
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
DPC
Lv.1 Details
C3-STMTR
Lv.1 Details
8-128
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Related service mode
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Related service mode
MF-A6R
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Related service mode
MF-A4
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Related service mode
8-129
CLEANING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
TBLT-CLN
Lv.1 Details
ETB cleaning
To execute three idle rotations of the ETB and clean the ETB.
Disengage the Photosensitive Drum and Transfer Roller from the
ETB.
Use case
When ETB cleaning failure/stain on the back of paper occurs
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required time
Approx. 10 seconds
WIRE-CLN
Cleaning of all Charging Wires
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pretransfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (5-reciprocation).
Polish new Charging Wires to remove foreign matters or protrusions.
Use case
- When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
- When replacing the Charging Wire
- When vertical lines occur on an image
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required time
Approx. 90 seconds
WIRE-EX
Check cleaning operation of all Chg Wir
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pretransfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (1-reciprocation).
Check the reciprocation operation of the Wire Cleaner.
Use case
When checking operation of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor after removing, and then installing the Primary Charging
Assembly at working around the Process area
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required time
Approx. 30 seconds
T-8-51
T-8-50
8-129
FIXING
8-130
PANEL
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
NIP-CHK
Lv.1 Details
LCD-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
LED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
TOUCHCHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-130
PART-CHK
8-131
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
T-8-54
8-131
CLEAR
ERR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
8-132
ADRS-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
CNT-MCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
CNT-DCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
OPTION
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
8-132
8-133
CA-KEY
Lv.2 Details
8-133
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
USBM-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
JV-CACHE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
FXTX-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
GRD-CRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
LANG-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-134
FIN-MCON
Lv.1 Details
T-8-55
8-134
MISC-R
8-135
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
CLM-DF1
Lv.1 Details
8-135
8-136
CLPLT-EN
Lv.1 Details
8-136
8-137
CLDF2-EN
Lv.1 Details
8-137
8-138
RD-SHPOS
Lv.2 Details
T-8-56
8-138
MISC-P
8-139
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
ENV-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
PJH-P-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Supplement/memo
PJH-P-2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Supplement/memo
WB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
8-139
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adjust/set range
Required time
DMAX-N
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
P-BASE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
8-140
P-LED
Lv.2 Details
T-8-57
8-140
SENS-ADJ
8-141
SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ
STCK-LMT
Lv.2 Details
DOWNLOAD
Lv.1 Details
8-141
8-142
RSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
T-8-59
8-142
2D-SHADE
M-LINE1
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
M-LINE2
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
S-LINE1
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
S-LINE2
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
S-LINE3
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
S-LINE4
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
8-143
SHD-P1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
T-8-60
8-143
OPTION
8-144
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ
Lv.1 Details
FNC-SW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
PO-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-144
W/SCNR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-LGL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-LTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-B5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-145
8-145
8-146
MODELSZ2
Lv.2 Details
8-146
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
CKT-LANG
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
KSIZE-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
PDF-RDCT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-147
REBOOTSW
Lv.2 Details
8-147
UNLMTBND
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
MIBCOUNT
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MEAP-PRI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CNTR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-148
8-148
8-149
CE/SCNR
Lv.1 Details
8-149
8-150
CDS-UGW
Lv.1 Details
8-150
8-151
FAX-INT
Lv.2 Details
8-151
8-152
DSPLY-SW
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-152
IMGC-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
UI-RSCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
UI-EPRNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
UI-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-153
8-153
8-154
RMT-CNSL
Lv.1 Details
8-154
8-155
IMG-FIX
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
FIX-CLN
Lv.1 Details
8-155
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TMP-TBL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
TMP-TBL3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
TMP-TBL4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
TMP-TBL5
8-156
TMP-TBL6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-156
8-157
FIX-TMP2
Lv.1 Details
8-157
8-158
FX-WNKL
Lv.2 Details
8-158
8-159
IMG-DEV
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV
TSPLY-SW
Lv.2 Details
DV-RT-LG
Lv.1 Details
[Not used]
Set Developing Assembly idle rotn time
To set the duration of idle rotation of the Developing Assembly by
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DV-RT.
As the value is incremented by 1, the duration is increased by 1
minute.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When an image failure is not alleviated by executing idle rotation
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
If the duration is long, deterioration of developer or toner scattering
might occur.
Display/adj/set range
1 to 20
Unit
1 minute
Default value
5
Related service mode
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DV-RT
ADJ-VPPN
Adj developing bias Vpp: Uncoated paper
Lv.1 Details
To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias for uncoated paper group.
The initial value is 1.5 kV, and as the value is decreased by 1, Vpp is
decreased by 0.1 kV (density and fogging increase).
Decrease the value when fogging or bias leak occurs, and increase
the value when the density is low or white spots occur.
Use case
When fogging, bias leak, low density, or white spots occur
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
-4 to 2
Unit
0.1 kV
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Uncoated paper group: uncoated paper/recycled paper/textured
paper/label/postcard/cotton
PG-DMAX
Setting of patch image in D-max control
Lv.2 Details
To set the patch image formed by D-max control.
When increasing the target density, accuracy of patch image reading
improves by setting 1.
Use case
When increasing the target density
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: Solid patch, 1: Shadow patch
Default value
0
8-159
8-160
LWDTYADJ
Lv.1 Details
8-160
8-161
TBLTBIS+
Lv.1 Details
8-161
8-162
IMG-LSR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR
LAPC-SW
Lv.2 Details
8-162
IMG-RDR
8-163
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L2
Lv.1 Details
8-163
8-164
DF2DSTL2
Lv.1 Details
T-8-66
8-164
IMG-MCON
PASCAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DRM-IDL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
SHARP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DRM-H-SW
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-165
SCR-SLCT
Lv.2 Details
8-165
8-166
C-S-P-D
Lv.2 Details
8-166
8-167
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
HDADDCNT
Lv.1 Details
8-167
CLEANING
8-168
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
CLN-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
T-8-68
8-168
ENV-SET
8-169
FEED-SW
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
ENVP-INT
Lv.1 Details
TRY-CHG
Lv.2 Details
8-169
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-170
DK3-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-170
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-171
DK1-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-171
8-172
DK1-AIR
Lv.1 Details
T-8-70
8-172
NETWORK
RAW-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
RMT-LANG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
IFAX-LIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SMTPTXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-173
SMTPRXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-173
8-174
NS-GSAPI
Lv.2 Details
8-174
8-175
SSH-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-175
8-176
DA-CNCT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
CHNG-STS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
CHNG-CMD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MEAP-SSL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-176
8-177
WUEV-RTR
Lv.2 Details
8-177
8-178
DNSTRANS
Lv.1 Details
8-178
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IKERETRY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
SPDALDEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
NCONF-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-179
IKEINTVL
Lv.1 Details
8-179
8-180
IPTBROAD
Lv.1 Details
8-180
8-181
CUSTOM
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL
Lv.1 Details
8-181
8-182
DEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-182
8-183
AC-FREQ
Lv.2 Details
T-8-72
8-183
USER
COPY-LIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SLEEP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SIZE-DET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Default value
COUNTER2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-184
COUNTER3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DATE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
8-184
8-185
MF-LG-ST
Lv.2 Details
8-185
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
NW-SCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
HDCR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-186
JOB-INVL
Lv.2 Details
8-186
8-187
CNT-SW
Lv.1 Details
8-187
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
DOC-REM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DPT-ID-7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-188
RUI-RJT
Lv.2 Details
8-188
8-189
MEAPSAFE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
AFN-PSWD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PTJAM-RC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PDL-NCSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-189
8-190
CNCT-RLZ
Lv.2 Details
8-190
8-191
DOM-ADD
Lv.2 Details
8-191
8-192
FREE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
8-192
8-193
SNMP-COU
Lv.2 Details
8-193
8-194
CTCHKDSP
Lv.1 Details
8-194
8-195
W-TN-DSP
Lv.1 Details
8-195
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-PULL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-PDLB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-196
JA-JOBK
Lv.2 Details
8-196
8-197
SCN-RSLG
Lv.1 Details
8-197
CST
U1-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U2-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U3-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U4-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-198
P-SZ-C1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-198
8-199
CST4-U1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
T-8-74
8-199
ACC
COIN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
DK-P
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-200
PD-SIZE
Lv.1 Details
8-200
8-201
MIC-TUN
Lv.1 Details
8-201
INT-FACE
T-8-75
Default value
AP-OPT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
AP-ACCNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
AP-CODE
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
NWCT-TM
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-202
8-202
8-203
TEMPO
T-8-76
[Not used]
ON/OFF of humidity manual entry
To set whether to enable F-HUM-D setting when an error (failure) in
the Environment Sensor occurs.
When 1 is set, the F-HUM-D setting is enabled. Use the item as a
temporary measure until replacing the Environment Sensor.
Use case
When an error (failure) in the Environment Sensor occurs
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-D
F-HUM-D
Manual entry of humidity
Lv.2 Details
Enter the humidity at the installation location manually when an error
in the Environment Sensor occurs.
When F-HUM-SW is 1, this setting is enabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
30 to 99
Unit
1%
Default value
35
Related service mode
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-SW
T-8-77
8-203
LCNS-TR
ST-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-204
ST-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-204
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-205
ST-HDCLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-HDCLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-205
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-206
ST-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-206
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-207
ST-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-207
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
TR-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ST-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-208
8-208
8-209
ST-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-209
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-210
ST-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-210
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-211
ST-MOBIL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-MOBIL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-211
8-212
ST-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-212
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-213
ACCPST-D
COPIER > OPTION > ACCPST-D
ACC1
Lv.1 Details
8-213
8-214
ACC7
Lv.1 Details
T-8-79
8-214
TEST
PG
COPIER > TEST > PG
TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TXPH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-215
Test print
To execute the test print.
At trouble analysis
Enter the setting value, and then press Start key.
Test print is executed.
Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
0 to 50
0: Normal print
1: Grid
2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2
3: 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen)
4: Solid white
5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without
image correction)
7: Solid black
8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
9: Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces)
10: Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces)
11: Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
without image correction)
13: Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
without image correction)
15-50: For development
0
Setting of test print image mode
To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
At trouble analysis
0 to 6
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines)
4: REOS screen (no screen structure)
5: Error diffusion (with trailing edge adjustment)
6: High screen ruling (with trailing edge adjustment)
8-215
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-216
NETWORK
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
PING
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-216
8-217
8-217
COUNTER
TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
SERVICE2
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
COPY
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
PDL-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
FAX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
RMT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
BOX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
8-218
T-8-82
8-218
PICK-UP
FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
C1
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Details
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Details
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Details
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Unit
8-219
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
FEED
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
L-FEED
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
S-FEED
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
DFOP-CNT
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
T-8-83
8-219
JAM
MISC
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
FEEDER
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
SORTER
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C1
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
8-220
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
FIX-WEB
Lv.1 Details
T-8-85
8-220
JOB
PRDC-1
COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
DVPAPLEN
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
Unit
DVRUNLEN
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
Unit
8-221
COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
PRM-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
PRM-GRID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PO-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PRM-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-221
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PO-WI-U
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FIX-TH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FIX-TH2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-222
OZ-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
T-8-88
8-222
DRBL-1
PRM-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PO-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
T-CLN-BD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
T-CN-BRU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-223
TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
TR-ROLL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
PT-DRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CLN-BLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-223
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
BS-SL-F
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
BS-SL-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DVG-CYL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-224
C1-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C1-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C1-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C2-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-224
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C2-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C3-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C3-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-225
C3-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C4-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C4-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C4-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-225
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
M-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-UP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-LW-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-226
FX-IN-BS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-WEB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-L-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLV-UCLW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-226
8-227
DRBL-2
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
8-227
8-228
PD-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
8-228
8-229
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
8-229
8-230
SDL-STC2
Lv.1 Details
8-230
IS-P-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-S-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-F-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-TQLM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-231
8-231
8-232
PNCH-RL
Lv.1 Details
8-232
8-233
TRM-CUT3
Lv.1 Details
8-233
8-234
DIESET4
Lv.1 Details
8-234
8-235
DIESET10
Lv.1 Details
8-235
8-236
DIESET16
Lv.1 Details
8-236
8-237
DIESET22
Lv.1 Details
8-237
8-238
DIESET28
Lv.1 Details
8-238
8-239
DIESET34
Lv.1 Details
8-239
8-240
DIESET40
Lv.1 Details
8-240
8-241
DIESET46
Lv.1 Details
8-241
8-242
DIESET52
Lv.1 Details
8-242
8-243
DIESET58
Lv.1 Details
8-243
8-244
DIESET64
Lv.1 Details
8-244
SDL-STC4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-FLP1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-FLP2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-FLP3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-245
8-245
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
STP-BASE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
BEHLTQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SWG-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-246
SWG-DL-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SWG-DL-2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SHT-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SHT-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-246
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SUB-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
TRY-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
TR2-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-247
SWG-RB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-CL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-ELM1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-CL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-247
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IS-ELM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-ELM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-CL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-248
PF-ELM1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-CL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-RL-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-FL-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-248
8-249
H-DBL-A1
COPIER > COUNTER > H-DBL-A1
FIN-CMN1
Lv.1 Details
8-249
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-SDL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IU-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IU-BP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-250
IU-RV-RL
Lv.1 Details
T-8-91
8-250
T-CNTR
SORTER
COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
8-251
COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER
[Not used]
T-8-92
DIESET1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-251
8-252
DIESET15
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET16
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET17
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET18
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET19
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET20
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-252
8-253
DIESET29
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET30
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET33
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET34
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET35
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-253
8-254
DIESET43
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET44
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET45
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET46
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET47
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET48
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET49
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-254
8-255
DIESET57
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET58
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET59
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET60
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET61
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET62
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET63
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-255
8-256
H-DBL-A2
COPIER > COUNTER > H-DBL-A2
FIN-CMN2
Lv.1 Details
T-8-93
8-256
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IU-PRV-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IU-RV-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IU-EJT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-257
H-DBL-A3
COPIER > COUNTER > H-DBL-A3
FIN-CMN3
Lv.1 Details
T-8-94
8-257
8-258
IS-FD2
Lv.1 Details
8-258
8-259
LF
COPIER > COUNTER > LF
K-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
T-8-95
8-259
FEEDER
DISPLAY
FEEDER > DISPLAY
FEEDSIZE
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
TRY-WIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
SPSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
SPSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
RDSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-260
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DRSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DRSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
RGSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
RGSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-260
ADJUST
8-261
FEEDER > ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJSSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-261
8-262
FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION
SENS-INT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-262
8-263
Caution
Required time
Related service mode
SL-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
SL-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-263
8-264
OPTION
FEEDER > OPTION
SIZE-SW
Lv.1 Details
8-264
SORTER
ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
PNCH-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PF-A3Z1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A3Z2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-B4Z1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-265
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4RZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4RZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-LDRZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-265
8-266
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-LGLZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-LGLZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRRZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRRZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4RC1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4RC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRRC1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-266
8-267
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4R31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4R32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRR31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRR32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4R41
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4R42
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRR41
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-267
8-268
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PF-A4R21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PFLTRR21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PRCS-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
STP-F1
Lv.1 Details
8-268
8-269
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
STP-2P
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
BFF-SFT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
PNCH-X
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
TRM-RG1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
TRM-RG2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
TRM-CUT1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
8-269
8-270
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
BFF-SFT2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-STP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-FLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-RLPT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-RLFD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-RLHD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-270
8-271
BFR-UPA4
Lv.1 Details
RTR-DWA4
Lv.1 Details
8-271
8-272
BF-SB-A4
Lv.1 Details
RTR-UPA4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
RTR-UPB5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
RTR-UPLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
8-272
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
ST-ALG1
Lv.1 Details
ST-ALG2
Lv.1 Details
PRT-DWN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
8-273
FUNCTION
SORTER > FUNCTION
FN-SENS1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
FN-SENS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
CLEAR
Lv.1 Details
FIN-BK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
FLD-BK-W
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
PIU-BK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
8-273
8-274
VR1-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR1-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR1-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR1-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-274
8-275
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR2-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR2-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
VR2-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
FIN-CON
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Adj/set/operate method
PF-SENS1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
PF-SENS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
PF-SENS3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
PF-SENS4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
TRM-SENS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-275
8-276
OPTION
SORTER > OPTION
BLNK-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-276
8-277
SDL-PRS
Lv.1 Details
TRY-EJCT
Lv.1 Details
8-277
8-278
CURL-SW
Lv.1 Details
PUCH-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TRY-PATH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ALG-IMPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-278
8-279
BUFF-SW2
Lv.1 Details
SD-STCNB
Lv.1 Details
8-279
8-280
PRCS-SP2
Lv.1 Details
PRCS-MX1
Lv.1 Details
8-280
8-281
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
FIN-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SLD-BCK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-281
8-282
BOARD
OPTION
BOARD > OPTION
MENU-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FONTDL
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-282
Installation
before
Checking
Installation
of Options
Table
Combination
the Contents
Checking
Unpacking
Installation
Relocating the
When
Machine
Cover -B1
Printer
Heater Unit
Reader
Heater Unit
Cassette
Installation
Deck Heater
Paper
Unit-A1
Tray-A1/A2
Utility
Reader-C1/Copy
Card
Card Reader-F1
Guidance Kit-F1/F2
Voice
Procedure
Installation
for Expansion Bus-F1/
F2, IPSec Board-B2 and
Wireless LAN Board-B1
Memory Type
Additional
B (512MB)
of HDD
Combination
Options
9-2
The optional Booklet Trimmer, Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO, Paper Folding Unit, Professional
Puncher Integration Unit, Professional Puncher, Document Insertion Unit, Duplex Color
Image Reader Unit, and POD Deck Lite are attached.
EUR: 200V/10A
USA: 120V/16A
800 mm or more
1.624 mm
500 mm
or more
window.
3) Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment
4.631 mm
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
F-9-1
comfortable. Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a
poorly-ventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running this equipment
does not harm human health.
9-2
Installation > Checking before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
The optional Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO and Duplex Color Image Reader Unit are attached.
100 mm or more
9-3
1.393 mm
causing moisture beads on the metal surface. Using the host machine while the machine
is condensed can cause image failure. Therefore, when moving the machine from a cool
place to a warm place to install, unpack the host machine and leave it for 2 hours or more
before the installation work so that the machine becomes used to the room temperature.
2) Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine.
500 mm
or more
2.546 mm
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
F-9-2
3) To install the host machine, install it in a well-ventilated place. Especially when there are
multiple host machine s, be sure to locate the machine where the machine is free from
direct exhaust of other machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from the air-inlet duct
which is used for ventilation of the room.
Installation > Checking before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
9-3
Installation > Table of Options Combination > Order to Install the Host machine and the Options
NOTE:
Following table shows the combination of options to be installed at the right side of the
host machine.
Refer to the table below to install the options described in the table. Be sure to check
the combination before the installation work.
NOTE:
In the case of installing the host machine and the other options at the same time, follow
the order as described below to install the options first so that the installation operability
is improved.
1.
2.
Unpacking
3.
Utility Tray
Card Raeader
No
Yes
4.
No
Yes
5.
Card Reader
Yes
Yes
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Utility Tray
9-4
T-9-1
Installation > Table of Options Combination > Order to Install the Host machine and the Options
9-4
9-5
F-9-3
9-5
9-6
[15] Hook-and-Loop Fastener X1
EUR only
EUR only
[19] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x10) X 9
Use 2 of them
[21] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 3
Use 1 of them
F-9-4
F-9-5
9-6
9-7
[7] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x10) X 6
Use 2 of them
Use 4 of them
F-9-6
9-7
9-8
<CD/GUIDES>
CD/GUIDES
North America
EUR
ASIA / AUS
3
(UK, FRA/SPA, ITA/GER)
Quick Reference
Users Guide
Maintenance Guide
How to Use The Manuals
1
1
5
(UK, FRA, SPA, ITA, GER)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-Manual
1
1
T-9-2
9-8
Unpacking
9-9
3) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
the pad. Put the plastic bag aside in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
The host machine weighs about 242kg. For safety, be sure to work carefully to move
and install the machine.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine.
Handle
Handle Cover
NOTE:
The dimension of the host machine and the transport container is as shown in the figure.
Be sure to secure a space to unpack, and then start the installation work.
1,305 mm
plastic bag
Pad
F-9-8
4) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
1,064 mm
893 mm
CAUTION:
F-9-7
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
Handles
1 Claw each
Pads
Plastic Bag
F-9-9
9-9
5) Take out the 2 Slope Plates stored at the right side of the Pallet and remove the 2 pins
9-10
8) Remove tapes on the exterior surface of the host machine.
which are secured at the back of the Slope Plate with tape.
6) Turn around the 2 Slope Plates to install as shown in the figure, and then fit the pin-holes of
the pallet with the pin-holes of the Slope Plates to put the 2 pins into the holes.
NOTE:
Do not remove 2 tapes for tags and a tape for the Filter Cover at this step. These tapes
will be removed later on.
Pin
Slope Plate
F-9-10
F-9-12
7) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine, and then, while supporting the
corner of the host machine, fit the casters to the center of the Slope Plate to slowly bring
the machine down.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make the casters off from the Slope Plate.
Handle
Handle
F-9-11
9-10
Installation
9-11
2) Bring down the Upright Control Panel together with the cushioning materials from the host
machine.
1) Put the Upright Arm straight into the round hole of the Frame Base.
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the cables as indicated in the figure below.
Be careful not to get the cables caught.
Cushioning
Upright Arm
Control Panel
Cable
F-9-14
Frame Base
3) Align the hole on the Upright Arm and the hole on the Frame Base, and secure the Upright
Arm in place.
2 screws (TP; M4x8)
Upright Arm
x2
F-9-13
Frame Base
F-9-15
9-11
9-12
7) Install the Base Cover (Front) and the Base Cover (Rear).
2 Screws (P Tightening; M3 x 8)
Cable Clamp
x2
Reuse Band
Base Cover (Front)
Power Supply Cable
F-9-18
F-9-16
[A]
[A]
Hook
F-9-19
F-9-17
9-12
9
10)
11)
2 Protrusions
9-13
1 Screw (TP; M4 x 8)
2 Bosses
4 Screws (TP; M4 x 8)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the Harness [A] with the Panel Base.
Be sure to tighten the upper screw first.
Upright Control Panel
Boss
Protrusion
Boss
x4
F-9-21
Upright Arm
Cable
[A]
F-9-20
9-13
9
12)
Route the Power Supply Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Power Supply
Connector.
13)
14)
9-14
Route the Control Panel Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Control Panel
Connector.
Fix the Power Supply Cable with the Reuse Band and the Cable Clamp.
15)
Secure the cable with the Reuse Band and cut the extra part.
1 Screw (TP; M4 x 8)
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Control Panel
Connector
Ferrite Core
Reuse band
x1
Power Supply Cable
Cable Clamp
3
Power Supply
Connector
Reuse Band
F-9-23
F-9-22
9-14
9
16)
17)
9-15
2 rubber caps
Place the tie-wrap along with the groove of the Joint Cover L. At this time, be sure that
the tie-wrap comes inside the groove.
CAUTION:
Be sure to put the Power Cable through groove on the Joint Cover R.
Joint Cover L
Tie-Wrap
Joint Cover R
x2
F-9-24
18)
When installing the Reader or the Printer Cover at the same time, install it after
9-15
9-16
CAUTION: Checking and Adjusting the Direction of the Toner Blocking Sheet
Be sure to check the direction of the Toner Blocking Sheet before installing the
Developing Assembly to the host machine.
If the Toner Blocking Sheet turns inward, image error due to toner scattering will occur,
so adjust it to turn outward with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Be careful not to damage the Developing Assembly when adjusting the sheet.
Sheet
Sheet
F-9-26
F-9-27
9-16
2) Check if there are any scratches on the cylinder while rotating the gear manually in the
direction of the arrow.
9-17
CAUTION:
Do not damage and touch the cylinder.
Do not turn the gear inversely.
When pushing the Developing Roller, be sure to hold the Developing Roller at lower
side and [A] part of the Developing Assembly.
Be sure to rotate the gear clockwise, and be careful not to rotate it counterclockwise.
If rotating the gear without pushing the Developing Roller, toner will be accumulated
between the Developing Lower Sleeve and the seal (Toner clusters) If pushing
the Developing Assembly against the drum in this condition, the Developing Lower
Sleeve does not move to the appropriate position because of the toner clusters. As
a result, the gap between the Developing Upper Sleeve and the drum (SD gap) will
be widened. It causes low density at rear or deterioration of developer because it
becomes hard to deposit toner onto the drum.
Developing Sleeve
F-9-28
[A]
Developing Roller
F-9-29
9-17
9-18
CAUTION:
Before installing the Developing Assembly, be sure to check that the Buffer Shutter is
not opened.
If forcedly inserting the Developing Assembly while the Buffer Shutter is open, the
Buffer Shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, be sure to close it by
pulling it toward the front.
F-9-30
F-9-31
Whether the Developing Assembly is installed properly can be checked with the Shutter
Arm.
<Buffer Shutter is closed>
Shutter Arm
Shutter Arm
F-9-32
9-18
9-19
5) Hold the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure, and align the protrusions at both
When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the
Developing Assembly as shown in the figure.
Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is
slippery, so it may cause a fall of the assembly.
Protrusion
rail
Protrusion
F-9-33
rail
Protrusion
F-9-34
9-19
9-20
F-9-35
7) Close the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover and return the Lock Lever to the original
position.
8) Secure with the Screw (Binding; M4x6).
F-9-37
F-9-36
9-20
6) Loosen the screw and slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow. Check
that the screw position is at the engraved mark [1], and then tighten the screw.
Engraved Mark
9-21
Deck Pressure
Plate
Screw
F-9-38
9-21
NOTE:
In the case that the Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw is hard to be removed, release
the lock by pressing the Lock Springs at both rails, and pull out the Fixing Feed Unit
further until it stops.
9-22
Lock Spring
Lock Spring
9-22
9-23
1) Open the Toner Exchange Cover, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to
release.
F-9-42
F-9-43
7) Return the Fixing Feed Unit and lock the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever.
NOTE:
In the case of pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit further, be sure to return the Fixing Feed
Unit while releasing the Lock Spring.
F-9-44
9-23
9-24
2) Hold the Exhaust Filter as shown in the figure, and install it to the Main Body.
4) Set the Toner Container to the Main Body, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the
arrow to secure the Toner Container in place.
F-9-47
F-9-45
F-9-48
F-9-46
9-24
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
9-25
1) Insert the Terminal Connector into the terminal of the Host machine and turn it in the
direction of the arrow to install it.
CAUTION:
Use the Card Reader prepared by each sales company.
NOTE:
In the case of installing Staple Finisher-F1 PRO or Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO
simultaneously, it is not necessary to connect the Terminal Connector to the
machine.
When connecting the Terminal Connector to the Finisher side, refer to Staple
Finisher-F1 PRO/Booklet Finisher-F1 PRO Installation Procedure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn the knob of the ARCNET cable all the way to connect otherwise it can
cause unstable electrical contact.
F-9-50
F-9-49
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
9-25
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
9-26
5) Replace the Device Port Sheet with the Case Sheet, and install the Clear Cover.
1 Screw
2 Claws
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 3))
x2
x2
F-9-51
F-9-53
part.
2 Claws
[A]
x2
x2
Claws
F-9-52
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
F-9-54
9-26
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
7) Affix one side strip along the rib line of section [A].
9-27
9) Push the card reader against the "side strip" and section [A], and affix one "side strip" to
section [B] of the card reader.
[A]
[A]
[B]
F-9-55
F-9-57
Fix the card reader and harness cable with the hook-and-loop fastener.
150 mm
F-9-56
F-9-58
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
9-27
9
11)
9-28
Cassette Heater
Switch
F-9-59
12)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the USB Cable.
13)
14)
Leakage Breaker
F-9-60
9-28
9-29
Toner Stirring
1) Check that "Check the developer" is displayed in the following service mode.
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Press OK after checking the installation of the Developing Assembly and the Developing
3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
3) Toner supply is executed. (For approx. 12 minutes. Countdown is shown on the screen)
NOTE:
While stirring toner,"Installation of the Host Machine", "Other Installation Work",
"Setting the Deck" and "Setting the Paper Cassette" can be executed.
7) Press "Finished Stamp" in the second page of the "Other Function" screen.
8) Set to the feeder and conduct transmission test to check that the originals are stamped.
1) Confirm the position to install the Host Machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand
until they closely contact the floor.
NOTE:
If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand, use a screwdriver so that they can be
turned by your hand.
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.
3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
4) A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected
2) Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secured.
properly.
5) Select the following service mode and enter 0 to the setting value.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
6) Exit the Service Mode.
7) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
F-9-61
9-29
9-30
<Cleaning Tool>
Store in an empty space at front side of the Cassette 3 to use for maintenance.
Remove the double-sided tape on back side of the Service Book Holder, and affix the holder
on the Base Plate of the host machine.
F-9-64
<Connection Seal>
Affix the Connection Seal (Front) and the Connection Seal (Middle) to the position on the left
F-9-62
CAUTION:
Install the 2 Finisher Connector Covers to the left side of the host machine.
Be sure that there is no gap between [A] the Connection Seal (Front) and the
Connection Seal (Middle).
1 Protrusion each
1 Claw each
[A]
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-63
9-30
9-31
4) Following the paper size, put the Size Plate L in the Right and Left Deck through the
1) Push the Deck Release Button to pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front.
2) Remove the 3 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate, Left Guide Plate, and Right
Guide Plate in place, and fix each of the guide plates at users desired size.
NOTE:
Setting at the time of shipment: A4 size
Left
Guide Plate
x3
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
Screw
Right
Guide Plate
F-9-67
NOTE:
When taking out the size plate, access it from back side of the Deck Cover and push it
out upward.
F-9-66
F-9-68
9-31
9-32
1) Push the Cassette Release Button to pull out the Cassette to the front.
2) Hold the Lever of the Side Guide Plate to set the Side Guide Plate to the specified size.
3) Hold the Lever of the Trail Edge Guide Plate to set the Trail Edge Guide Plate to the
specified size.
Side Guide
Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
F-9-69
4) Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate.
Paper
Cover
F-9-70
9-32
9-33
Cut
F-9-71
6) Following the paper size, set the Size Plate R (unused size plates should be put together).
1) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.)
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation], and execute the item.
F-9-72
7) Close the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate and push in the Cassette.
8) Set another cassette as well.
NOTE:
Paper size is set to be automatically recognized.
9-33
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-34
6) Check the Cassette position by the scale of the Cassette Button Link Unit.
Adjustment of Cassette/Deck
Print from each cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within
2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
Cassette Button
Link Unit
If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
Feeding direction
of paper
Scale
L1
image
F-9-73
F-9-74
Cassette Button
Link Unit
2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the
service label.
3) Exit from the service mode.
4) Print from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2.5
+/- 1.5mm.
NOTE:
If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment
amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 5) and later steps.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
Cassette Button
Link Unit
F-9-75
9-34
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-35
8) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 6), adjust the position of
the Cassette Button Link Button.
In the case of larger margin at the rear side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear
side.
In the case of larger margin at the front side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the
front side.
NOTE:
If you concern alignment of the Cassette Front Cover, adjust the left and right sides of
the cover as necessary.
10)
Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Cassette Front Cover by referring
to the scale.
11)
When moving the Cassette Button Link Unit, adjust the left side of the Cassette Front
Scale
Scale
Scale
F-9-76
12)
Once the position of the Cassette Front Cover is confirmed, tighten the 4 screws
Print from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image is
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-35
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-36
NOTE:
By executing the margin adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
applied to all source of paper.
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
applied to all source of paper.
Execute printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is within L1 2.5
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5
+/- 0.5mm.
+/- 1.5mm.
If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
Feeding direction
of paper
image
L1
image
F-9-79
F-9-78
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-36
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
9-37
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
applied to all source of paper.
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin on the
image
L1
F-9-81
Feeding direction
of paper
image
F-9-80
2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the
service label.
3) Exit from the service mode.
4) Print from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the left edge margin of the image
is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
NOTE:
If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment
amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 5) and later steps.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
9-37
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)
9-38
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, the
adjustment is applied to all source of paper.
Execute duplex printing from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the leading edge
Scale
Feeding direction
of paper
image
Slide Guide
F-9-83
F-9-82
NOTE:
When a mechanical adjustment was made, be sure to execute the service mode in step
1) again.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)
9-38
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
9-39
Overview
CAUTION:
If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network
setting is properly performed.
To execute Ping command with the Windows Vista-installed PC, set OFF the firewall, or
execute Ping command from the Windows Vista-installed PC to the Host Machine.
If the user's network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, there is no need to check the
network environment.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [PING command]
2) Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press "Execute"
key. "Response from the host" is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while "no
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type
(STP cable) is recommended.
Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the
network cable.
2) Connect the network cable to the Host Machine and turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the Host Machine
is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.
1) Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping.
2) Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator.
NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator.
Factory default password is as follows.
System administration division ID: 7654321
System administration password: 7654321
CAUTION:
To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set
"ON".
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Change network settings/
check connection]
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4
setting] > [Use IPv4]
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
9-39
Installation > Installation > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
Network Troubleshooting
9-40
To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet Port.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field.
2) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address.
The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct if the message say "Response
1) Ask the network administrator at the users site to write down the IP address of the PC that
is connected to the network.
2) [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] >
[Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press
Execute key.
The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host".
If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.
NOTE:
The IP address of the PC can be checked by the following procedure:
Select the following on a Windows PC: Start > Program > Accessory > Command
Prompt; and enter ipconfig and press Enter key to display information of the IP
address.
Installation > Installation > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
9-40
9-41
When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation
3 Projections
shown below.
3 Claws
3 Screws
Claw
Protrusion
Claw
x3
x3
4) Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.
5) Remove the 2 Finisher Connector Covers from the left side of the host machine.
1 Claw each
1 Protrusion each
Claw
Claw
F-9-85
7) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner System Fixation Screws that have been kept in
a safe place since installation.
x2
Protrusion
F-9-84
F-9-86
9-41
8) After moving the host machine, be sure that there is no toner scattering on the Registration
9-42
Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. If there is any toner scattering, wipe off
the toner.
Loosen
2) Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
out the Fixing Feed Unit.
F-9-89
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open.
F-9-87
3) Wipe the top surface of the Registration Assembly with lint-free paper.
At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine
is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while
the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is
in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly
while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.
F-9-88
9-42
3) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly.
9-43
F-9-90
4) Wipe the top surface of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper.
F-9-92
F-9-91
9-43
9-44
[3] Screw
(P Tightening ; M4X10) X 8
[7] Screw
(RS Tightening ; M4X8) X 2
F-9-93
9-44
9-45
Installation Procedure
NOTE:
Installation procedures for imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105/8095/8085 Series and iR
ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series are the same.
Subsequent illustrations and pictures are the case of imageRUNNER ADVANCE
8105/8095/8085 Series.
1) Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft, and secure it in the hole as shown in the figure.
1 Screw
F-9-94
9-45
2) IInstall the Reader Fixation Plate R (come with the host machine) to the installation position
9-46
of front side.
Flat Control Panel model only: Install the Reader Fixation Plate R to make the Control
Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable over the plate.
TP
2 Bosses
1 Screw (RS tight: M4x8) (come with the host machine)
P tight
x5
F-9-95
3) Install the Reader Fixation Plate L (come with the host machine) to the installation position
of front side.
2 Bosses
1 Screw (RS tight: M4x8) (come with the host machine)
F-9-97
F-9-96
9-46
9-47
7) Install the Right Upper Cover (come with the host machine).
Front Cover
3 Protrusions
Right Door
Box Cover
x2
Right Rear Cover 1
Rubber Cap
Toner Exchange Cover
Right Cover
F-9-100
F-9-98
8) stall the Left Upper Cover (come with the host machine) in the direction of the arrow.
4 Protrusions
3 Protrusion
3 Claws
2 Claws
Protrusion
x2
x3
x3
Protrusion
Protrusion
Claw
Claw
F-9-99
F-9-101
9-47
9-48
Operation Check
Front Cover
Right Door
3) A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected
Box Cover
properly.
4) Select "0" for the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
10) Install the Left Rear Cover (come with the host machine).
1 Protrusion
1 Claw
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-102
9-48
Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-49
F-9-103
Parts name
Parts Number.
Q'ty
[1]
FK2-7164-000
1 pc
[2]
XA9-1956-000
4 pc
[3]
Heater Sheet
FC8-6060-000
1 sheet
T-9-3
Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-49
Installation Procedure
9-50
x2
F-9-106
F-9-104
CAUTION:
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched with the
glass surface or the backside of the white plate.In case the glass is soiled, clean it with
lint-free paper.
x2
F-9-105
F-9-107
9-50
9-51
x4
F-9-108
5) Align the 5 heater sheets in the marking line and put them on.
Boss
Marking line
Guide Shaft
F-9-110
F-9-109
9-51
7) Pass the connecter under the wire and the Scanner Rail.
9-52
8) To make a space [A] to put the harness through, loosen the screw.
CAUTION:
Hole
[A]
Wire
Scanner Rail
Screw
F-9-112
F-9-111
9-52
9) Put the harness along the claws of FFC guide in the 4 places.
9-53
NOTE:
Make sure to keep the harness tightly put.
Guide
Wire saddle
Guide
x4
F-9-115
10) Open the 2 Edge Saddles, put the connector through a hole of the plate, and then secure
in place using the 2 Edge Saddles.
sheet
edge
F-9-116
F-9-114
9-53
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the sheet is on the plate.
9-54
13) Aligning with the boss, tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 8).
14) Install the removed cover.
Copy board glass
DF cable cover
Right retainer cover
15) Close the DADF.
16) Turn ON the environment switch
17) Insert the power plug to the outlet.
18) Turn the main power switch ON.
Sheet
Sheet
F-9-117
9-54
Installation Procedure
9-55
2 Screws
[2] Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) X 2
x2
F-9-118
F-9-119
Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as
service part.
No.
Parts Number
Q'ty
[1]
Parts Name
FM3-4855-000
1 pc
[2]
XB6-6400-805
2 pc
T-9-4
F-9-120
4) Pull out the Right Deck to remove the Left Deck in the same way.
5) Put the 2 Rails in.
9-55
9-56
4 Screws
1 Claw
2 Protrusions
x4
Protrusion
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-121
F-9-123
F-9-122
9-56
9) Fit the Protrusions of the Cassette Heater Unit into the Holes of the Host Machine.
9-57
10) Fit the 2 bosses of the host machine into the holes of the Cassette Heater Unit to install
the Cassette Heater Unit.
2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8)
Hole
CAUTION:
Hole
The unit may be fallen down if misaligned from the bosses, so be sure to hold the lower
part by hand until the screws are tightened.
Boss
Protrusion
Hole
Protrusion
Boss
Hole
x2
F-9-124
F-9-125
9-57
9-58
16) Pull out the Rails at the installation area of the Right Deck.
17) Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of the Right Deck to place the Right Deck
over the Rails.
F-9-126
F-9-128
18) After having installed Right Deck with 2 screws,close the Right Deck.
19) Install the Left Deck o the Right Deck in the same way.
20) Close the Front Cover.
21) Turn on the cassette heater switch.
22) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
23) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
F-9-127
9-58
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-59
NOTE:
Every components of the paper deck heater unit (paper deck heater unit-A1)
are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand.
[3]
a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet.
[6]
[1]
b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck.
[5]
[9]
[12]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[5]
[11]
F-9-129
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Parts Name
Heater Unit
AC Input Connector
Relay Harness Unit
AC Cable
Screw with Toothed Washer
Cable Protection Bushing
Power Supply Label
Screw (Binding; M4x4)
Screw (RS-tight; M4x8)
Wire Saddle
Cord Mount
Screw with Flat Spring
Parts Number
Q'ty
FG6-9651-000
FK3-0631-000
FG6-2957-000
FG6-1117-000
XB2-7400-607
WT2-5098-000
FS6-8725-000
XB1-2400-409
XA9-0732-000
WT2-5018-000
FC7-5473-000
XB2-8401-007
1pc.
1pc.
1pc.
1pc.
3pcs.
1pc.
1pc.
2pcs.
2pcs.
3pcs.
1pc.
1pc.
T-9-5
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-59
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-60
2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the
paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing.
1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine.
x1
x1
F-9-130
F-9-131
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-60
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
3 screws
3 screws
9-61
1 connector
x3
x3
x1
F-9-132
F-9-134
x6
x2
F-9-133
F-9-135
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-61
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing into the hole on the top panel of the paper
9-62
deck.
F-9-138
F-9-136
8) Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck, and then take the connector
out from the hole on the top plate.
11) Remove the blindfold plate from the power core mount of the papar deck.
1 screw
9) Insert 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and then
secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck.
1 screw with toothed washer
x1
x1
F-9-139
F-9-137
NOTE:
Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-62
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
12) Install the supplied AC input connector in 2 steps ([A] > [B]).
9-63
13) Install the relay hareness unit to the rear side panel of the paper deck.
[B]
x2
[A]
x2
[A]
F-9-141
14) Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes (at [A] shown below) in the rear side
panel to secure the relay harness.
15) Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector and
AC power connector respectively.
x1
16) Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence;
[1] Top cover (take care not to have the cables caught)
2 screws (RS-tight; M4x8)
[2] Front-upper cover (insert the connector)
3 screws (RS-tight; M4x8)
[3] Rear cover
F-9-140
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-63
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-64
2 wire saddles
F-9-144
F-9-142
4 screws
1 claw
1 protrusion
x4
Claw
F-9-145
Projection
F-9-143
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-64
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
21) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow.
9-65
23) Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount, and then secure the ground cable to
3 screws
x3
x1
F-9-148
F-9-146
1 connector
2 screws
x2
x1
x2
F-9-147
F-9-149
NOTE:
Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-65
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-66
28) Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck.
x1
F-9-151
F-9-150
26) Reatach the exterior covers of the host machine in the following sequence;
29) Fix the paper deck cable in the wire saddle and joint the connector to the host machine.
x1
x1
1 claw
1 protrusion
[4] Fix the Harness.
2 wire saddles
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
F-9-152
9-66
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
30) Peel off the 4 blindfold seal at the rear side of the host machine, then fit the reuse band
9-67
CAUTION:
Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord
explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening
should not be placed in the hatched area.
x3
x1
x3
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-9-154
F-9-153
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-C1)
9-67
9-68
Utility Tray-A1/A2
Checking the Contents
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used.
[1] Utility Tray Unit X 1
Use 3 of them
Included in A2 only
Included in A2 only
F-9-155
9-68
Installation Procedure
9-69
CAUTION:
Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this equipment before operation.
2) Loosen the 2 screws of the Utility Tray Unit, and remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
<In Case of Utility Tray-A1>
Utility Tray Mounting Plate
F-9-157
CAUTION:
Be sure not to pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.
While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
Screw
[A]
F-9-156
F-9-158
9-69
Installation > Utility Tray-A1/A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard
3) Remove the 3 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps
will not be used.)
9-70
x2
F-9-161
F-9-159
Wire Saddles
x3
F-9-162
F-9-160
Installation > Utility Tray-A1/A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard
9-70
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Card Reader-C1
9-71
F-9-163
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Card Reader-C1
9-71
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
9-72
F-9-164
9-72
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Installation Procedure
Name
Card Reader Mounting Plate
Card Reader
Connector Cover1
Connector Cover2
Card Reader External Relay Harness
Connector Case
Cord Guide
PCB Spacer
Screw (TP; M4x12)
Screw (RS tight; M4x8)
Screw (Bindeing; M4x20)
Screw (TP; M3x6)
Q'ty
Part to be used
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
2pcs
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
9-73
CAUTION:
Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this equipment before operation.
After installing the Card Reader, enter the card number to be used in the following
service mode of this equipment: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD.
Otherwise, the card will not be recognized even inserting it.
F-9-165
9-73
9-74
5) Remove the Face Cover. (The removed Face Cover will not be used.)
2 Hooks
x2
Hook
Hook
F-9-168
F-9-166
x2
Control Panel Cable
USB Cable
F-9-169
9-74
9-75
10) Remove the screw. (The removed screw will be used in step 12).
x2
x3
F-9-171
F-9-172
9-75
12) Install the Connector Cover to the Card Reader External Relay Harness.
9-76
15) Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the cable.
When installing the Connector Cover, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader
External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover.
Lower Cover
F-9-173
F-9-175
13) Install the Side Cover by putting the Card Reader External Relay Harness through a
hole of the cover.
17) Disconnect the Short Connector on the Card Reader. (The removed Short Connector
will not be used.)
2 Hooks
1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)
Hook
Hole
Hook
F-9-176
F-9-174
9-76
9
18) Install the Card Reader.
9-77
19) Put the connector of the Card Reader Unit through the hole on the Card Reader
Mounting Plate.
20) Connect the connectors of the Card Reader Unit and the Card Reader External Relay
18-1) Install the Card Reader to the Card Reader Mounting Plate.
Harness.
1 Toothed Washer
1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8)
F-9-179
F-9-177
F-9-178
9-77
9-78
22) Secure the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the Cord Guide.
CAUTION:
When installing the Connector Cases, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader
External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cases.
22-1) Remove the cover of Cord Guide, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
F-9-181
F-9-180
9-78
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
22-2) Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Cord Guide, and install the
9-79
NOTE:
When installing it, be sure [A] part does not interfere when opening/closing the Right Rear
Cover 1.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE
In the case of Card Reader-C1, select 1.
In the case of Copy Card Reader-F1, check that 0 is selected.
NOTE:
The number of card (number of department) can be changed if a request arises from a
user. Make this setting before the step 3).
Specify the number of cards to be used in service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION >
FNC-SW > CARD-RNG.
To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
[A]
23) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
NOTE:
1000 cards from the inputted number can be used.
3) To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
4) Insert the registered card, and check that it is in standby.
24) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
NOTE:
After setting, if a request arises from a user and changing the number of card (number
of department), make a following setting. In that case, the current counter information
by department will be reset.
Execute in service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD.
Specify the number of cards to be used in service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION >
FNC-SW > CARD-RNG.
To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-79
9-80
Use 4 of them
F-9-183
<CD/Guides>
User's Guide
Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide
Voice Guidance Manual CD
FCC/IC-A DOCUMENT
9-80
9-81
2 Hooks
2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and
then disconnect the power plug.
Hook
Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this equipment before operation.
Hook
x2
[A]
F-9-184
USB Cable
9-81
5) Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1.
9-82
1 Connector
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
[A]
Connector
x4
F-9-188
F-9-187
9-82
9-83
10) Connect the Speaker Cable to the Voice Guidance Board Unit.
F-9-191
F-9-189
11) Install the Side Cover by putting the Speaker Cable through a hole of the cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50mm from the end of the Speaker Cable.
2 Hooks
1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)
12) Put the Speaker Cable through the guide.
Hook
Hole
50mm
F-9-190
Guide
Hook
F-9-192
9-83
9-84
14) Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps
F-9-195
F-9-193
17) Remove the covers of 4 Cord Guides, and affix them to the area indicated in the figure.
NOTE:
When affixing it, be sure to keep 30mm or more distance from the end of the Rear
Upper Cover to prevent interfering with opening/closing the Right Rear Cover 1.
30 mm
x2
F-9-194
F-9-196
9-84
9-85
20) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
21) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings >
Use Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.
2)
Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings >
Voice Guide from Speakers, and check that the setting is ON.
Operation Check
F-9-197
CAUTION:
Be sure to slack off [A] part for not interfering to open/close the Right Rear Cover 1.
[A]
F-9-198
9-85
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Points to Note at Installation
9-86
Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1
Points to Note at Installation
CAUTION:
To install the IPSec Board-B2 and the Wireless LAN Board-B1, the Expansion Bus-F1/F2 is required.
Procedures after Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 will falls into 3 Types according to the installation combination.
Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination:
Title
Expansion Bus-F1/F2
IPSec Board-B2
Type-1
Type-2
Type-3
p. 9-92
p. 9-92
T-9-7
9-86
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Points to Note at Installation
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking the Contents > IPSec Boa
9-87
Expansion Bus-F1/F2
[1] PCI Bus Expansion PCB X 1
F-9-199
IPSec Board-B2
[1] IPSec PCB 1
F-9-200
<CD/Guides>
FCC/IC Instruction Sheet (USA only)
9-87
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking the Contents > IPSec Boa
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking the Contents > Wireless L
9-88
F-9-201
9-88
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking the Contents > Wireless L
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the
9-89
<CD/Guides>
Users Manual
Wireless LAN Users Manual CD
FCC/IC Instruction Sheet (USA only)
9-89
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-90
Installation Procedure
NOTE:
Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this
procedure, the same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel.
Hook
Hook
F-9-203
[A]
F-9-202
x2
Control Panel Cable
USB Cable
9-90
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-91
3) Insert the Expansion PCB into the connector on the Main Controller PCB 1 to install it.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6) (Included in the Expansion Kit)
x3
x2
F-9-207
4) Insert the IPSec PCB into the connector on the Expansion PCB to install it.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (Included in the IPSec Board)
F-9-205
x2
F-9-208
F-9-206
9-91
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9-92
CAUTION:
When installing the Main Controller PCB 1, be careful not to trap cables.
x2
F-9-210
2) Install the Expansion PCB (included in the Expansion Bus Kit) to the Expansion Support
Plate.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (Included in the Expansion Bus Kit)
CAUTION: Point to Caution at Installation
When installing the Expansion PCB, be sure to place it under [A] part of the Expansion
Support Plate.
Expansion PCB
F-9-209
x2
[A]
9-92
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9-93
3) Insert the Wireless LAN Board into the connector on the Expansion PCB, and install it to
F-9-214
F-9-212
4) Remove the Face Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1. (The removed Face Plate will not
be used.)
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 7).)
6) Install the Expansion Support Plate assembled in step 3) to the Main Controller PCB 1.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6) (Included in the Expansion Bus Kit)
CAUTION:
When installing the Expansion Support Plate, be careful not to trap the Fan Cable.
x2
x3
F-9-213
F-9-215
9-93
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9-94
7) Install the Wireless LAN Support Plate assembled in step 1) to the Main Controller PCB 1.
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 4).)
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (Included in the Wireless LAN Board)
NOTE:
When installing the IPSec Board, go through the steps 9) through 11). When not
installing it, go on to the step 12).
CAUTION:
9) Remove the plate of the IPSec PCB. (The removed plate will not be used.)
When securing the Wireless LAN Support Plate in place using the screws, be careful
not to trap the Fan Cable.
x2
x4
F-9-218
10)
F-9-216
8) Insert the terminal of the Bulkhead Unit to the position shown in the figure.
Install the IPSec PCB removed in step 9) to the Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate (included
NOTE:
Check that the terminal is installed properly.
x2
Wireless LAN
Auxiliary Plate
F-9-219
F-9-217
9-94
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9
11)
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9-95
Insert the IPSec PCB into the connector on the Expansion PCB to install it.
15)
Install the Side Cover by putting the Antenna for MFP through a hole of the cover.
x2
Hole
HooK
F-9-222
F-9-220
16)
CAUTION:
Install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.
12)
13)
14)
Insert the terminal of the Antenna for MFP into the terminal of the Main Controller
PCB 1.
F-9-221
9-95
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9
17)
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
9-96
Affix the Antenna Adhesive Tape to the Antenna for MFP and affix the antenna to the
CAUTION: Point to Caution at Installation
host machine.
Be sure to affix the Cord Guide to the area 30mm from the Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
Keep the remaining tapes for later use as needed.
30 mm
Antenna Adhesive Tape
F-9-225
19)
F-9-223
18)
F-9-226
F-9-224
9-96
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Expans
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-97
21)
NOTE:
Be sure to secure the extra slack of the Antenna Cable for MFP at the position
shown in the figure.
F-9-229
F-9-227
20)
Put the Antenna Cable for MFP through the Cord Guides, and install the Cord Guide
Covers.
9-97
Installation > Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus-F1/F2, IPSec Board-B2 and Wireless LAN Board-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-98
Installation Procedure
x4
F-9-230
F-9-231
9-98
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-99
NOTE:
Be sure to insert it until it stops.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Get out from service mode.
F-9-232
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-99
9-100
Combination of Product
Option HDD (250GB)
Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Reference Pages
p. 9-101 to p. 9-110
p. 9-111 to p. 9-121
p. 9-123 to p. 9-140
p. 9-141 to p. 9-162
p. 9-163 to p. 9-184
p. 9-185 to p. 9-201
p. 9-202 to p. 9-222
p. 9-223 to p. 9-250
p. 9-252 to p. 9-276
p. 9-278 to p. 9-300
p. 9-302 to p. 9-325
Remarks
9-100
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Checking the Contents
9-101
F-9-233
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-234
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Checking the Contents
9-101
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-102
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-9
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-102
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-103
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-10
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-103
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-104
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-104
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
9-105
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-105
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
9-106
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-106
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Assembling the Option HDD
9-107
4 Anti-vibration Dampers
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Connector
Option HDD
CAUTION:
When assembling the Option HDD, be sure to pay attention to the direction.
Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up.
x4
Be sure that the [A] part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the
connecter.
Spacer
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-236
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-235
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Assembling the Option HDD
9-107
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-108
[A]
F-9-239
F-9-237
2 Connecters
1 Rubber cap
1 Screw
x2
F-9-240
F-9-238
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-108
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-109
F-9-241
x2
F-9-242
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-109
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-110
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (250GB) > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-110
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents
9-111
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-243
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents
9-111
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-112
2 hooks
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-245
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
4) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Protrusions
[A]
x2
F-9-244
Protrusion
F-9-246
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-112
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-113
3 Screws (TP)
x7
F-9-249
F-9-247
2 Connectors
1 Rubber Cap
1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)
x2
F-9-250
F-9-248
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-113
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
10) Open the Controller Box, and disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
on the host machine. (Disconnected cables will not be used.)
9-114
2 Connectors
9 Wire Saddles
2 Edge Saddles
x2
F-9-252
x2
x11
F-9-251
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-114
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
9-115
Screw Hole
1 Screw (TP)
1 HDD Grounding Plate
NOTE:
If the removed HDD has the screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate, remove them.
The removed screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used.
Label
Connector
x4
HDD
TP
HDD Grounding Plate
9-115
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
9-116
NOTE:
Use the parts disassembled in step 1) and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.
Connector
x4
F-9-256
HDD Connector
Plate
9-116
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
9-117
4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
Claw
F-9-257
F-9-259
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-258
F-9-260
9-117
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
9-118
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-263
F-9-261
4) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-264
F-9-262
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-118
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-119
5) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
6) Return the rail to its original position.
2 Bosses
2 Hooks
2 Bosses
Hole
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11).)
Hole
x2
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Boss
Hook
Boss
F-9-265
7) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
x2
Boss
x2
Edge Saddle
Hook
F-9-267
F-9-266
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-119
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-120
3) Fold extra length of the CH B Cable (FK2-7837), and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
CAUTION:
4 Wire Saddles
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
NOTE:
Be sure not to close the 2 Wire Saddles [A] in this step.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
x2
Ch
.B
.
Ch
x5
x2
[A]
[A]
F-9-268
F-9-270
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-269
F-9-271
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-120
9
5) Close the Controller Box.
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-121
8) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
F-9-274
9) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-272
F-9-275
Hook
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
12) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
F-9-273
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-121
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-122
9-122
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (250GB)
9-123
F-9-276
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-277
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (250GB)
9-123
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-124
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-278
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-124
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-125
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-11
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-125
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-126
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-12
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-126
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-127
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-127
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
9-128
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-128
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
9-129
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-129
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-130
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
Installation Procedure
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Option HDD
Screw Hole
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
Label
Connector
x4
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
Screw Hole
Spacer
F-9-279
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-280
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-130
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-131
3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-281
F-9-282
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-283
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-131
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-132
6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
1 Claw
7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-286
Claw
F-9-284
x2
F-9-285
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-132
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-133
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
x2
Protrusion
[A]
F-9-287
F-9-289
2 hooks
x7
Hook
F-9-288
F-9-290
9-133
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-134
1 Rubber cap
2 Connectors
x2
F-9-293
F-9-291
F-9-292
9-134
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-135
10) Open the Controller Box, and disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
on the host machine. (Disconnected cables will not be used.)
2 Connectors
9 Wire Saddles
2 Edge Saddles
x2
F-9-295
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
x11
F-9-294
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
9-135
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-136
5)Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
x2
Hole
x2
Boss
F-9-297
Boss
4) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.)
2 Bosses
F-9-299
2 Arms
7) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
Boss
Arm
Boss
x2
Turn over
Edge Saddle
F-9-298
F-9-300
9-136
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-137
1 Edge Saddle
2 Hooks
4 Wire Saddles
2 Bosses
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11).)
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
NOTE:
Be sure not to close the 2 Wire Saddles [A] in this step.
.
Ch
x5
x2
Hook
[A]
F-9-302
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
Hook
F-9-301
F-9-303
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-137
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
3) Fold extra length of the CH B Cable (FK2-7837), and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles.
9-138
CAUTION:
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
Ch
.B
x2
F-9-306
[A]
F-9-304
2 hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-305
F-9-307
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-138
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
8) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
9-139
F-9-308
9) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-309
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-139
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-140
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-140
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-141
[TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-310
9-141
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (8
9-142
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
Use 1 of them.
F-9-311
9-142
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (8
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring
9-143
F-9-312
9-143
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
9-144
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-13
9-144
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
9-145
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-14
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-145
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
9-146
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-146
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
9-147
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-147
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
9-148
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-148
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the C
9-149
2 hooks
Installation Procedure
Removing the Covers
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-314
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
4) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Protrusions
[A]
x2
F-9-313
Protrusion
F-9-315
9-149
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the C
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the C
9-150
1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption
3 Screws (TP)
x7
F-9-316
F-9-318
1 Rubber cap
2 Connectors
1 Screw
x2
F-9-319
F-9-317
9-150
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the C
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-151
9) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Power Supply Cable
2
DD
(H
t.2
Slo
F-9-320
Sl
D1
HD
1(
ot.
F-9-321
9-151
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-152
1) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
2) Pull out the cables to the front, and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
Unit.
x2
F-9-323
x5
x4
F-9-322
F-9-324
9-152
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-153
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-326
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
Connector
F-9-325
x2
Connector
x6
F-9-327
9-153
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-154
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow.
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
F-9-328
x2
x6
F-9-329
9-154
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-155
11) Assemble the Option HDD (80GB). (for the second HDD)
1 HDD Support Plate
4 Anti-vibration Dampers
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Connector side
Connector
Slot.1 (HDD1)
x4
Option HDD
F-9-330
Spacer
CAUTION:
When assembling the Option HDD, be sure to pay attention to the direction.
Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up.
Be sure that the [A] part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the
connecter.
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-332
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-331
9-155
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-156
14) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable (included in the package) to the
HDD.
14-1) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7827) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to Slot.2.
14-2) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to Slot.1.
Connector side
NOTE:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled HDD1 or HDD2 should be
connected to the HDD.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7827)
F-9-333
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
x4
x2
F-9-334
9-156
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-157
15) Put the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables through [A] part.
16) Connect the 4 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled ch.A or ch.B should be
connected to CH A or CH B on the board.
When connecting the Power Supply Cables, the cable on the Slot.1 side should be
connected to CH A, and the other cable on the Slot.2 side should be connected to
CH B.
[A]
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
DD
(H
.2
lot
CH B
CH A
1)
DD
(H
t.1
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7827)
x4
2)
Slo
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
F-9-336
9-157
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-158
CAUTION:
17) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable.
If there is extra slack of the cables, be sure to tuck them to the host machine side.
1 Edger Saddle
9 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at [A] part.
Be sure that the Wire Saddle [B] is properly securing the cables.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
[A]
x10
F-9-339
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
[B]
F-9-338
F-9-340
9-158
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-159
1 Screw
CAUTION:
1 Rubber cap
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the [A] part of the HDD Cap.
If the cables protrude from the [A] part, allow extra slack of the cables at the [B] part
and tuck them to the host machine side.
[A]
[B]
F-9-342
F-9-341
F-9-343
9-159
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-160
2 hooks
24) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
1 Screw
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
25) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
26) Turn ON the main power switch. (Only when installing HDD Mirroring Kit)
Hook
Hook
F-9-344
F-9-345
9-160
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryption &
9-161
10) Check the versions of MN-CONT and LANG etc in service mode (COPIER > Display >
VERSION).
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
) is
9-161
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryption &
9-162
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
CAUTION:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
When the error indicating the message of Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with
Service Technician) on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows;
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 1.
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting
value.
The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial
installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.
F-9-346
9-162
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryption &
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-163
[TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-347
9-163
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HD
9-164
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
Use 1 of them.
F-9-348
9-164
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HD
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirr
9-165
F-9-349
9-165
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirr
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
9-166
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-15
9-166
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
9-167
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-16
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-167
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
9-168
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-168
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
9-169
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-169
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
9-170
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-170
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assemblin
9-171
4 Anti-vibration Dampers
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Connector
Installation Procedure
Option HDD
CAUTION:
When assembling the Option HDD, be sure to pay attention to the direction.
Spacer
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-351
9-171
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assemblin
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-172
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
x2
Protrusion
[A]
F-9-352
F-9-354
2 hooks
x7
Hook
F-9-353
F-9-355
9-172
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-173
1 Rubber cap
2 Connectors
1 Screw
x2
F-9-358
F-9-356
9) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
F-9-359
F-9-357
9-173
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-174
1) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Power Supply Cable
2
DD
(H
t.2
Slo
Sl
D1
HD
1(
ot.
F-9-360
x5
F-9-361
9-174
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-175
2) Pull out the cables to the front, and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front.
x2
x2
F-9-362
x4
F-9-364
F-9-363
9-175
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-176
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-365
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
F-9-367
Connector
x2
Connector
x6
F-9-366
9-176
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-177
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow.
Connector side
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-369
x2
x6
F-9-368
9-177
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-178
12) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable (included in the package) to the
1 screw (Use the screws removed in Removing the Covers step 7).)
HDD.
1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)
12-1) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7827) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to Slot.2.
12-2) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to Slot.1.
x2
NOTE:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled HDD1 or HDD2 should be
connected to the HDD.
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7827)
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
x4
F-9-370
9-178
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-179
13) Put the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables through [A] part.
14) Connect the 4 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled ch.A or ch.B should be
connected to CH A or CH B on the board.
When connecting the Power Supply Cables, the cable on the Slot.1 side should be
connected to CH A, and the other cable on the Slot.2 side should be connected to
CH B.
[A]
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
DD
(H
.2
lot
CH B
CH A
1)
DD
(H
t.1
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7827)
x4
2)
Slo
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
F-9-372
9-179
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-180
CAUTION:
15) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable.
If there is extra slack of the cables, be sure to tuck them to the host machine side.
1 Edger Saddle
9 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at [A] part.
Be sure that the Wire Saddle [B] is properly securing the cables.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
[A]
F-9-375
x10
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
[B]
F-9-374
F-9-376
9-180
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-181
1 Screw
CAUTION:
1 Rubber cap
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the [A] part of the HDD Cap.
If the cables protrude from the [A] part, allow extra slack of the cables at the [B] part
and tuck them to the host machine side.
[A]
[B]
F-9-378
F-9-377
F-9-379
9-181
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-182
2 hooks
22) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
1 Screw
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
23) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
Hook
Hook
F-9-380
F-9-381
9-182
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryptio
9-183
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
9-183
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD Data Encryptio
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
9-184
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
CAUTION:
When the error indicating the message of Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with
Service Technician) on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows;
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 0.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 1.
5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting
value.
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial
installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.
F-9-382
9-184
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-185
F-9-383
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-185
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-186
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-17
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-186
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-187
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-18
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-187
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-188
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-188
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
9-189
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-189
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
9-190
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-190
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-191
2 hooks
Installation Procedure
Removing the Covers
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-385
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
4) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Protrusions
[A]
x2
F-9-384
Protrusion
F-9-386
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-191
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-192
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
3 Screws (TP)
x7
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Slo
k)
an
Bl
.2(
S
DD
(H
.1
lot
1)
F-9-387
F-9-389
F-9-388
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-192
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
NOTE:
The HDD has been removed in the figures of the following steps 1) to 9), but it is not
necessary to remove the HDD to perform this procedure.
1) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
9-193
2) Pull out the cables to the front, and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
to the Encryption Board.
x2
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
F-9-391
x4
x5
F-9-392
F-9-390
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-193
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
9-194
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-394
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
Connector
F-9-393
x2
Connector
x6
F-9-395
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-194
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-195
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow.
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
F-9-396
x2
x6
F-9-397
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-195
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
10) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826) and the Power Supply Cable (570mm;
FK2-7831) to Slot.1.
9-196
11) Put the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable through [A] part.
12) Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Encryption Board.
NOTE:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled HDD1 should be connected to
the HDD.
Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826)
CAUTION:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled ch.Ashould be connected to
CH A on the board.
x2
[A]
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
x2
CH A
F-9-399
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-196
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
13) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable.
9-197
13-2) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7827) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to CH B, and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
13-1) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable connected to CH A.
1 Edger Saddle
13-3) Fold extra length of the cables and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles
[B].
8 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at [A] part.
x2
Be sure that the Wire Saddle [B] is properly securing the cables.
CH B
x4
[A]
[A]
x9
CH A
[B]
F-9-401
[B]
F-9-400
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-197
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
CAUTION:
If there is extra slack of the cables, be sure to tuck them to the host machine side.
9-198
[B]
F-9-404
F-9-402
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-403
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-198
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-199
CAUTION:
1 Screw
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
Hook
F-9-407
F-9-405
F-9-408
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-199
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in 'Canon MFP Security Chip' as version
9-200
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-200
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-201
1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot1) is flashing.
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
F-9-409
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-201
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-202
[TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-410
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-202
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (250GB)
9-203
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-411
9-203
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (250GB)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
9-204
F-9-412
9-204
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-205
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-19
9-205
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-206
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-20
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-206
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-207
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-207
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-208
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-208
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-209
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-209
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-210
4 Anti-vibration Dampers
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Connector
Installation Procedure
Option HDD
CAUTION:
When assembling the Option HDD, be sure to pay attention to the direction.
Spacer
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-414
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-413
9-210
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-211
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
x2
Protrusion
[A]
F-9-415
F-9-417
2 hooks
x7
Hook
F-9-416
F-9-418
9-211
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-212
1 Rubber cap
2 Connectors
1 Screw
x2
F-9-421
F-9-419
F-9-420
9-212
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-213
1) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
Unit.
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Slo
k)
an
Bl
.2(
S
DD
(H
.1
lot
1)
F-9-422
x5
F-9-423
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-213
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
2) Pull out the cables to the front, and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable
to the Encryption Board.
9-214
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front.
x2
x2
F-9-424
x4
F-9-426
F-9-425
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-214
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
9-215
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-427
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
F-9-429
Connector
x2
Connector
x6
F-9-428
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-215
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Encryption Board.
9-216
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow.
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
Connector side
F-9-431
x2
x6
F-9-432
F-9-430
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-216
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
12) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826) and the Power Supply Cable (570mm;
FK2-7831) to Slot.1.
9-217
13) Put the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable through [A] part.
14) Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Encryption Board.
NOTE:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled HDD1 should be connected to
the HDD.
Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7826)
CAUTION:
When connecting the Signal Cables, the side labeled ch.Ashould be connected to
CH A on the board.
x2
[A]
Signal Cable
(550mm; FK2-7826)
x2
CH A
F-9-434
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-217
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
15) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable.
9-218
15-2) Connect the Signal Cable (550mm; FK2-7827) and the Power Supply Cable
(570mm; FK2-7831) to CH B, and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
15-1) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable connected to CH A.
1 Edger Saddle
15-3) Fold extra length of the cables and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles
[B].
8 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at [A] part.
x2
Be sure that the Wire Saddle [B] is properly securing the cables.
CH B
x4
[A]
[A]
x9
CH A
[B]
F-9-436
[B]
F-9-435
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-218
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
CAUTION:
If there is extra slack of the cables, be sure to tuck them to the host machine side.
9-219
[B]
F-9-439
F-9-437
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-438
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-219
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-220
CAUTION:
1 Screw
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
Hook
F-9-442
F-9-440
F-9-443
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-220
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in 'Canon MFP Security Chip' as version
9-221
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-221
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-222
1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot1) is flashing.
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
F-9-444
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
9-222
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
9-223
[TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-445
9-223
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
9-224
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-446
9-224
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
9-225
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
F-9-447
9-225
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
9-226
F-9-448
9-226
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Co
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
9-227
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-21
9-227
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
9-228
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-22
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-228
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
9-229
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-229
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
9-230
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-230
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
9-231
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-231
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data Enc
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-232
2 hooks
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-450
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
4) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Protrusions
[A]
x2
F-9-449
Protrusion
F-9-451
9-232
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-233
3 Screws (TP)
x7
F-9-454
F-9-452
2 Connectors
1 Rubber cap
1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)
x2
F-9-455
F-9-453
9-233
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-234
10) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
x2
F-9-457
x5
F-9-456
9-234
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
9-235
Screw Hole
1 Screw (TP)
1 HDD Grounding Plate
NOTE:
If the removed HDD has the screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate, remove them.
The removed screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used.
Label
Connector
x4
HDD
TP
HDD Grounding Plate
9-235
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
9-236
NOTE:
Use the parts disassembled in step 1) and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.
Connector
x4
F-9-461
HDD Connector
Plate
9-236
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
9-237
4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-462
Claw
F-9-464
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-463
F-9-465
9-237
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disass
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-238
7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
HDD No.
Serial No.
Option HDD
XXXXXXXX
F-9-466
Connector
x4
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
Screw Hole
Anti-vibration
Damper
Label
Connector
F-9-468
Screw Hole
F-9-467
9-238
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-239
3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-469
F-9-470
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-471
9-239
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-240
6) Affix the HDD No.2 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
1 Claw
7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-474
Claw
F-9-472
x2
F-9-473
9-240
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-241
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
x2
F-9-477
5) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
Arm
3) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)
1 Screw
Boss
Turn over
F-9-478
F-9-476
9-241
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-242
6) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
Case Unit
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
Hole
Hole
x2
Boss
CH
CH
Slo
Boss
Signal Cable
)
D1
(H
t.1
Slo
Signal Cable
2)
DD
H
.2(
F-9-479
F-9-481
8) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
9) Close the Edge Saddle.
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-480
9-242
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-243
1) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Mirroring Board
or Encryption Board.
x2
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Hook
F-9-482
x2
Boss
x4
Hook
F-9-484
F-9-483
9-243
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-244
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front, and pull out the extra lengths of the
cables to the front.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
Connector
Connector
F-9-485
x6
6) Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
F-9-487
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
[A]
F-9-486
x2
F-9-488
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or
9-244
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-245
Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
10) Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x4
.
Ch
.
Ch
CH B
CH A
x2
x6
F-9-489
9-245
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-246
11) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 3 Wire Saddles.
x3
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
F-9-491
[A]
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-492
CH B
CH A
F-9-493
9-246
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-247
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below.
Be sure to insert the HDD No.1 to the Slot.1, and the HDD No.2 to the Slot.2.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
F-9-496
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-494
CAUTION:
1 Screw
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
Hook
F-9-497
F-9-495
9-247
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
9-248
19) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
22) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
23) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
24) Turn ON the main power switch. (Only when installing HDD Mirroring Kit)
F-9-498
20) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-499
9-248
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proce
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
9-249
10) Check the versions of MN-CONT and LANG etc in service mode (COPIER > Display >
VERSION).
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
) is
9-249
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
9-250
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
CAUTION:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
When the error indicating the message of Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with
Service Technician) on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows;
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 1.
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting
value.
The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial
installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.
F-9-500
9-250
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
9-251
9-251
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
9-252
[TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-501
9-252
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
9-253
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-502
9-253
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
9-254
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
F-9-503
9-254
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
9-255
F-9-504
9-255
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
9-256
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-23
9-256
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
9-257
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-24
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-257
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
9-258
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-258
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
9-259
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-259
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
9-260
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-260
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note when HDD Data En
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-261
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
Installation Procedure
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Option HDD
Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD
Connector Plate.
Screw Hole
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
Label
Connector
x4
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
Screw Hole
Spacer
F-9-505
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-506
9-261
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-262
3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-507
F-9-508
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-509
9-262
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-263
6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
1 Claw
7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-512
Claw
F-9-510
8) Assemble the other Option HDD (250GB) in the same way according to steps 1) to 5).
9) Affix the HDD No.2 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
10) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-513
F-9-511
9-263
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-264
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
x2
Protrusion
[A]
F-9-514
F-9-516
2 hooks
x7
Hook
F-9-515
F-9-517
9-264
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-265
1 Rubber cap
2 Connectors
x2
F-9-520
F-9-518
F-9-519
9-265
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-266
10) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
x2
F-9-522
x5
F-9-521
9-266
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
9-267
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
x2
F-9-525
5) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
Arm
3)Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)
1 Screw
Boss
Turn over
F-9-526
F-9-524
9-267
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation P
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-268
6) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
Case Unit
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
Hole
Hole
x2
Boss
CH
CH
Slo
Boss
Signal Cable
)
D1
(H
t.1
Slo
Signal Cable
2)
DD
H
.2(
F-9-527
F-9-529
8) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
9) Close the Edge Saddle.
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-528
9-268
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-269
1) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Mirroring Board
or Encryption Board.
x2
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Hook
F-9-530
x2
Boss
x4
Hook
F-9-532
F-9-531
9-269
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-270
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front, and pull out the extra lengths of the
cables to the front.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
Connector
Connector
F-9-533
x6
6) Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
F-9-535
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
[A]
F-9-534
x2
F-9-536
9-270
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-271
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
10) Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x4
.
Ch
.
Ch
CH B
CH A
x2
x6
F-9-537
9-271
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-272
11) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 3 Wire Saddles.
x3
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
F-9-539
[A]
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-540
CH B
CH A
F-9-541
9-272
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-273
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below.
Be sure to insert the HDD No.1 to the Slot.1, and the HDD No.2 to the Slot.2.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
F-9-544
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-542
CAUTION:
1 Screw
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
Hook
F-9-545
F-9-543
9-273
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-274
19) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
22) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
23) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
F-9-546
20) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-547
9-274
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installin
9-275
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
9-275
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installin
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of
9-276
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
CAUTION:
Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to 1.
When the error indicating the message of Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with
Service Technician) on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows;
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 0.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 1.
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting
value.
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial
installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.
F-9-548
9-276
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of
9-277
9-277
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-278
[TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-549
9-278
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9
[11] HDD Caution Label X 1
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
9-279
F-9-550
9-279
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-280
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-25
9-280
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-281
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-26
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-281
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-282
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-282
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-283
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-283
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
9-284
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-284
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Reference only)
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
9-285
2 hooks
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-552
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
4) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Protrusions
[A]
x2
F-9-551
Protrusion
F-9-553
9-285
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
9-286
3 Screws (TP)
x7
F-9-556
F-9-554
2 Connectors
1 Rubber cap
1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)
x2
F-9-557
F-9-555
9-286
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
9-287
10) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
x2
F-9-559
x5
F-9-558
9-287
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
9-288
Screw Hole
1 Screw (TP)
1 HDD Grounding Plate
NOTE:
If the removed HDD has the screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate, remove them.
The removed screw (TP) and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used.
Label
Connector
x4
HDD
TP
HDD Grounding Plate
9-288
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
9-289
NOTE:
Use the parts disassembled in step 1) and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.
Connector
x4
F-9-563
HDD Connector
Plate
9-289
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
9-290
4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
Claw
F-9-564
F-9-566
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-565
F-9-567
9-290
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of H
9-291
7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-570
F-9-568
4) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-571
F-9-569
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
9-291
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of H
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-292
5) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
6) Return the rail to its original position.
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
2 Bosses
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 3).)
Hole
Hole
x2
CH
Boss
CH
Slo
k)
an
Bl
.2(
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
)
D1
(H
t.1
Slo
Boss
F-9-574
F-9-572
8) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
9) Close the Edge Saddle.
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-573
9-292
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-293
1) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Encryption
Board.
x2
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Hook
F-9-575
x2
Boss
x4
Hook
F-9-577
F-9-576
9-293
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-294
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Encryption Board.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front, and pull out the extra lengths of the
cables to the front.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
Connector
Connector
F-9-578
x6
6) Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
F-9-580
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
[A]
F-9-579
x2
F-9-581
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Encryption Board.
9-294
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-295
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
10) Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x4
.
Ch
.
Ch
CH B
CH A
x2
x6
F-9-582
9-295
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-296
11) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 3 Wire Saddles.
x3
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
F-9-584
[A]
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-585
CH B
CH A
F-9-586
9-296
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-297
F-9-587
F-9-589
CAUTION:
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
F-9-588
F-9-590
9-297
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-298
19) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
22) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
23) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
F-9-591
20) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-592
9-298
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in 'Canon MFP Security Chip' as version
9-299
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-299
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-300
1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot1) is flashing.
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
F-9-593
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
9-300
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-301
9-301
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-302
[TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-594
9-302
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HD
9-303
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-595
9-303
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HD
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removab
9-304
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-596
9-304
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removab
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data
9-305
F-9-597
9-305
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Bac
9-306
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-27
9-306
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Points to Note Regarding Data Bac
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
9-307
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-28
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-307
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
9-308
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-308
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
9-309
6) Click [Download] under "Download/delete Disabled License File" item. Following the
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
window for license deletion.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
7) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
8) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
8. User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-309
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
9-310
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Click [Execute].
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [Export], and click [Start Export].
4) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
9-310
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Making a Backup of the Data (Refe
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling
9-311
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
Installation Procedure
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
Option HDD
Connector
Screw Hole
Label
Connector
x4
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
Screw Hole
Spacer
F-9-598
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-599
9-311
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling
9-312
3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-600
F-9-601
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-602
9-312
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-313
6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
1 Claw
7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-605
Claw
F-9-603
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
x2
[A]
F-9-606
F-9-604
9-313
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-314
1 Screw
2 hooks
3 Screws (TP)
Hook
x7
Hook
F-9-609
F-9-607
3) Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2
Wire Saddles.
x2
Protrusion
F-9-610
F-9-608
9-314
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
9-315
10) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the
host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case
Unit.
F-9-611
x5
2 Connectors
x2
F-9-613
F-9-612
9-315
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing C
9-316
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in Installing the Encryption Board and HDD
x2
x2
F-9-616
F-9-614
4) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-617
F-9-615
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
9-316
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing C
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-317
5) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
6) Return the rail to its original position.
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
2 Bosses
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 3).)
Hole
Hole
x2
CH
Boss
CH
Slo
k)
an
Bl
.2(
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
)
D1
(H
t.1
Slo
Boss
F-9-620
F-9-618
8) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
9) Close the Edge Saddle.
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-619
9-317
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-318
1) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Encryption
Board.
x2
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Hook
F-9-621
x2
Boss
x4
Hook
F-9-623
F-9-622
9-318
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-319
4) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
7) Connect the STS Cable (340mm (Light Blue); FM3-9152) to the Main Controller PCB 2 and
the Encryption Board.
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front, and pull out the extra lengths of the
cables to the front.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the
machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x2
Connector
Connector
F-9-624
x6
6) Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
F-9-626
8) Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
[A]
F-9-625
x2
F-9-627
9-319
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-320
9) Connect the LED Cable (310mm; FM3-9158) to the LED Board and the Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
10) Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the
Encryption Board.
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because
the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly.
x4
.
Ch
.
Ch
CH B
CH A
x2
x6
F-9-628
9-320
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-321
11) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 3 Wire Saddles.
x3
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
F-9-630
[A]
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
F-9-631
CH B
CH A
F-9-632
9-321
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-322
F-9-633
F-9-635
CAUTION:
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not
contact with it.
Hook
F-9-634
F-9-636
9-322
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
9-323
19) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
22) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position, and secure the Reader Communication
Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles.
23) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
F-9-637
20) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mmx14mmx64mm
F-9-638
9-323
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing th
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-324
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in 'Canon MFP Security Chip' as version
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
9-324
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
9-325
1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot1) is flashing.
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
F-9-639
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
9-325
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
9-326
9-326
Installation > [TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjust
Appendix
Tools
Service
Timing Chart
General
Circuit Diagram
General
of User Mode
List
Data
Backup
of HDD partition
Detail
Counter List
Soft
10-2
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool No
Ctgr
Digital multimeter
Tool name
FY9-2002
Cover switch
TKN-0093
FY9-3038
FY9-3039
Appearance
Remarks
Used for electrical checks; for adjustment of laser power in
com-bination with the laser power checker.
10-2
Tool name
Mirror positioning tool(front,
rear)
Tool No
Ctgr
FY9-3046-000
Appearance
Used for positioning the mirror mount 1 and the mirror mount 2.
FY9-9196
FY9-3059-000
10-3
Remarks
10-3
Tool No
Ctgr
FY9-9453
Appearance
Remarks
MTF adjustment
MTF (128g)
FY9-9453-000 MK0808 (100)
Tool name
MTF TEST SHEET
10-4
T-10-1
10-4
10-5
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Surface activating agent
Water
Alcohol
Fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
Chlorine-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Special oil
Special solid
lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Lubricating oil
Synthetic oil
Synthetic oil
NTN Corporation EU-1
Tool No.: FY9-6028 (50 cc)
Conducting grease
Ether, polytera
fluoethylene
Aluminum oxide
Zirconium silicate
FO #6000
Fujimi Incorporated
Tool No.: FY9-6024
T-10-2
10-5
10-6
Main power ON
Print Unit
INITIAL
INITIAL ROTATION
STBY
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
Duplex Feed Right Motor(M18)
ETB Engagement
CCW
Detachment
CW
Delivery Motor(M13)
Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33)
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL6)
Registration Motor(M34)
Reverse Motor(M14)
Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26)
* CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation
F-10-1
10-6
10-7
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
ETB Engagement
CCW
CCW
Detachment
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
10-7
10-8
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3,H4)
Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
CCW
ETB Engagement
CW CW
CW
CW CW
Detachment
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
CW
CW
10-8
Signal Name
12V Fuse Switch 2
24VB OCD Switch 2
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 1 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 1 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 2 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 2 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 1
(Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 1
(Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 2
(Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 2
(Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 3
(Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 3
(Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 3 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 3 (Differential -)
Potential Sensor Detection Signal
Patch Sensor Detection Signal
IH Power Supply PWM Output 2
IH Power Supply PWM Output 1
IH Power Supply PWM Output 0
IH Power Supply Over Currency Detection Signal
Main Driver Connection Detection Signal
DRV1_3RD_J_CLKDRV1_3RD_J_CLK+
DRV1_3RD_J_M2S+
DRV1_3RD_J_M2SJ413 AD0
AD1
IH_PWM2
IH_PWM1
IH_PWM0
IH_I_LIMIT
DRV1_ANALOG_IF
_CNCT_DTCX
J414 +5V
5V Power Supply
+3.3V
3.3V Power Supply
J421 DRV2_5TH_J_CLKDRV2_5TH_J_CLK+
DRV2_5TH_J_M2S+
DRV2_5TH_J_M2SDRV2_6TH_J_M2SDRV2_6TH_J_M2S+
DRV2_5TH_J_S2MDRV2_5TH_J_S2M+
DRV2_6TH_J_S2M+
DRV2_6TH_J_S2MJ431 DRV3_7TH_J_S2MDRV3_7TH_J_S2M+
DRV3_8TH_J_S2M+
DRV3_8TH_J_S2MJ432 DRV3_7TH_J_CLKDRV3_7TH_J_CLK+
DRV3_7TH_J_M2S+
DRV3_7TH_J_M2SDRV3_8TH_J_M2SDRV3_8TH_J_M2S+
DUP_DRAWER
_CNCT_DTCX
J441 PVD_K0
PVD_K1
PVD_K2
PVD_K3
PVD_K4
PVD_K5
PVD_K6
PVD_K7
PHSYNC_K
PVCLK_K
PBD_K
PVREQ_K
10-9
Signal Name
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 5 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 5 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 6 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 6 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 5
(Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 5
(Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 6
(Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 6
(Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 7
(Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 7
(Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 8
(Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 8
(Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 7 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 7 (Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 7 (Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 7 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 8 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 8 (Differential +)
Fixing Feed Drawer Connection Detection Signal
Printer Video Data Signal 0
Printer Video Data Signal 1
Printer Video Data Signal 2
Printer Video Data Signal 3
Printer Video Data Signal 4
Printer Video Data Signal 5
Printer Video Data Signal 6
Printer Video Data Signal 7
Printer Horizontal Synchronization Signal
Printer Video Transmission Clock
Printer BD Signal
Printer Image Request Signal
10-9
Signal Name
Printer Start Signal
Printer Power Supply Control Signal
Controller Receivable Signal
Printer Serial Command Signal (Main ControllerDC Controller)
Printer Receivable Signal
Printer Serial Status Signal (DC ControllerMain Controller)
Scan Start Signal
Printer Power Ready Signal
Printer Operation Signal
Printer Universal Output Signal
Printer Interruption Signal
Controller Power Ready Signal
Printer Reset Signal
Printer Live Wake Mode Signal
Printer Download Mode Signal
Duplex Driver Power Supply Remote
24VA Interlock Detection Signal
24VB Interlock Detection Signal
12V Interlock Detection Signal
Power Supply Fan Full Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan Error Detection Signal
Relay Board Connection Detection Signal
Clock (Option Deck Communication IF)
Option Deck Pickup Motor Clock
Transmission is complete (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception Request Signal (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception is complete (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception Signal (Option Deck Communication IF)
Output Enable (Option Deck Communication IF)
Finisher Remote Signal
Finisher Communication Reception Signal
Finisher Communication Transmission Signal
Finisher Mode Signal
Finisher Reset Signal
Finisher Download Signal
LDG Data (Differential +)
LDG Data (Differential -)
LDH Data (Differential +)
LDH Data (Differential -)
LDF Data (Differential +)
LDF Data (Differential -)
LDE Data (Differential +)
LDE Data (Differential -)
10-10
Signal Name
5V Monitor Signal
Shading Clock
Serial Interface Right Enable Signal
Shading IO Clock
Shading Data(E)
Shading Data(F)
Shading Data(H)
Shading Data(G)
AKM Clock
Data Input/Output
APC Control Chip Selection 1
Initial APC Signal
APC Selection Signal
Laser Operation Control Signal 0
Laser Operation Control Signal 1
Laser Operation Control Signal 2
Laser Operation Control Signal 3
Gain Fixed Signal
APC Control Chip Selection 2
Shading Data (A)
Shading Data (B)
Shading Data (C)
Shading Data (D)
LDD Data (Differential -)
LDD Data (Differential +)
LDC Data (Differential -)
LDC Data (Differential +)
LDA Data (Differential -)
LDA Data (Differential +)
LDB Data (Differential -)
LDB Data (Differential +)
EEPROM Chip Selection
AKM2 Chip Selection
AKM1 Chip Selection
Polygon Motor Deceleration Signal
Polygon Motor Acceleration Signal
Polygon Motor Rotation Signal (FG Signal)
Start/Stop Signal
System Output Enable Signal
BD Signal
10-10
10-11
Signal Name
Clock Signal (-CLK)
Clock Signal (+CLK)
Transmission Signal (+TX)
Transmission Signal (-TX)
Reception Signal (+RX)
Reception Signal (-RX)
T-10-3
10-11
10-12
100V(LOW)
200V
PCB5
SEE_SAW (V)
SOLD7
MT7
H(B)
FT47
SOLD6
FT46
(V)
SW01
FT07
FT08
J3273F
FT10
FT12
J3273M
GND
3.3
12V
1
1
J602
PCB6
J607
2
2
N.C.
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
J3549M
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
1
AC_H(B)
J802
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
J3549F
1
1
1
J3639M
J3639X
AC_IH_HNS
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
FT13
FT11
1
AC_N(W)
FT09
AC_N(W)
H(B)
2
SW04
SHUT RL ON_(Y)
FT40
GND
FT15
FT05
Noise Filter
J3637F
PCB18
J803
J500
Power ON Switch
N(W)
SW03
Environment Switch
Noise Filter
J3637M
FT39
PCB17
J507F
CB1004
Leakage Breaker
N(W)
H(B)
FT44
W
FT43
1
U
R
CB1003
Leakage Breaker
FT42
H(B)
N(W)
U
CB1002
FT04
W
J801
PCB10
J523
FT06
FT14
MT25
Leakage Breaker
FT41
H(B)
N(W)
FT29
1
U
CB1001
Leakage Breaker
N(W)
GND
MT01
SOLD5
MT24
Relay PCB
1
2
3
AC_N(W)
100V(HIGH)
AC_H(B)
120V
N.C.
(V)
3.3V
(V)
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/25)
1
2
3
J609
J601X
J611
AC Driver PCB(100V)
PCB7
AC Driver PCB(200V)
AC_H(B)
J9020
1
J101A
PCB29
10
J102A
PCB30
J102B
PCB31
PCB33
J613
5
13 12 11 10 9
J9019M
J9019F
J614
1
J3174D
1
J3174DH
9 10 11 12 13
J3176M
J3176F
J3174L
J3119F
C-10
E-8
To P.4
To P.13
J681
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
100V
N.C.
(V)
(V)
200V
J3173F
AC_N(W)
100V
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
200V
J3173M
J615
3
TEST +12V
J3115F
J220M
J220F
N.C.
FIN_GND
TEST_+12V
CST_H_SERIAL_DTC
CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC
CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG
GND_1
GND
J610
CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG
TEST_+3_3V
J608
GND_2
CST_H_ON
J604
1
DRUM_H_LATCH_ON
DRUM_H_LATCH_OFF
N.C.
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
J603
N.C.
N.C.
J606
N.C.
J605
AC_H(B)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/25)
J127
J3638D
F-1
H02
D-5
B-5
To P.9
To P.4
To P.10
P.1
F-10-4
10-12
10-13
FM14
FM15
J692
J691
1
J693
3
J201X
3
123
10
123
CT
J202B
J202A
PCB31
PCB30
PCB29
PCB33
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/25)
10
J2134DH
10
CT
J2154DH
J2134D
J2154D
J3224L
J510
J511
10
J512
10
J513
GND
N.C
3.3VB
PS FAN2 ERR
GND
PS FAN1 ERR
3.3VB
GND
J3224D
GND
GND
GND
24V
24V
24V
24V
24V-RMT
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V
24V
24V
24V-RMT
24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
12VB
12VB
GND
12VB
GND
12V_RMT
GND
N.C.
GND
N.C.
3VB
N.C.
3VB
3VB
12VB
J3224LH
J509
PCB5
Relay PCB
J517
3
J519
3
J508
J501
3
GND
RELAY_ON
RMT_DCON
R_PW_MONI
RMT_RCON
RMT_CONT
GND
RMT_SYS
GND
SEESAW
GND
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3VA
GND
24VA IL SS 1
GND
GND
24VB IL SS 1
12V OCD SW 3
GND
24VB OCD SW 3
GND
24VA IL OCD 2
GND
12V OCD SW 2
GND
24VB OCD SW 2
GND
24VA IL OCD 1
GND
12V OCD SW 2
GND
24VB OCD SW 2
N.C
C
12V
J503
J506
3
N.C.
J504
1
GND
12V
GND
12V
GND
PS_FAN_FULLON_CONT
PS_FAN_ERR_CONT
N.C.
J516
J515
J522
12VLOOPBACK
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/25)
J3225M
J3225X
J3225F
Flat Panel
Type
Uplighe Panel
Type
J3099F
C-4
To P.6
3
J108
J101
J3002
J201
USB Device
Port-A1
J1
J776M
J709
J23
PCB51
To P.17
J5
F-6
PCB3
PCB2
J4
J776F
(J1)
CPU PCB
Control Panel
10
P.2
F-10-5
10-13
10-14
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/25)
10
PCB5
Relay PCB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J401
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
24VB IL SS 1
GND
24VB IL SS 1
GND
24VA IL SS 1
CONNECT_LOOPBACK
GND
3.3V
N.C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
N.C
J520
N.C
GND
24V OCD 2
RMT_TEIHAN
RMT_RESERVE
GND
GND
24VB_OCD_SW_2
24VA_IL_DTC
GND
CONNECT_DTC
12V_FUSE_SW_2
24VB OCD SW 1
24VB_IL_DTC
12LZ_DTC
GND
N.C
PS_FAN_FULL_ON_DCON
24VA OCD 1
GND
PS_FAN_ERR_DCON
GND
J502
N.C
N.C
GND
GND
GND
24VA OCD SW 1
12V OCD SW 1
J514
J518
J505
J451
PCB1
DC Controller PCB
J462
9 10 11 12 13
J3241LH
9 10 11 12
J3130LH
J3241L
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J3123D
J3130L
J3237F
J3237M
J3123LH
J3102M
To P.1
A-3
J9040B_BUS[0:8]
FIN_GND
TEST_+12V
TEST_+3_3V
J3102F
N.C.
J3123L
J3238M
J3130D
J3118M
24V
J3119F
J3118F
12 11 10 9
GND
J3241D
J3238F
A-5
CHOUHI_TXOUTEN
GND
FINE_DOWNLOAD
FINE_RESET
FINE_MODE
GND
GND
GND
IPC_TXD
IPC_RXD
GND
FIN_RMT
GND
To P.1
CHOUHI_CLK
DECK_CLK
CHOUHI_TXEND
CHOUHI_TXD
CHOUHI_RXLOAD
CHOUHI_RXD
GND
J461
N.C.
N.C.
J3638L
J9043
MT23
J9043A
A7
B8
J9043B
J9040B
B8
A7
24V
MT26
GND
100V
J9043A_BUS[0:7]
MT22
J9043B_BUS[0:8]
J3638LH
200V
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/25)
J3218F
J9040
C-10
Deck Lattice
Finisher Lattice
Reader Lattice
10
J2151
J2152
1
10 11 12
J9024
To P.12
A-8
To P.10
A-9
To P.10
P.3
F-10-6
10-14
J3017D
3
2
8
9
10 11 12
1
2
3
J3002DA_BUS[0:12]
4
5
6
8
GND
GND
6
5
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
J441
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
GND
A8
B8
A9
B9
B10
J432
10 11
1
9
8
GND
GND
6
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
J491
8
J2087
5
4
2
1
PCB51
A10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A10
J442
DC Controller PCB
PCB1
D
J493
4
J3002DB
J3002D
PCB3
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/25)
GND
PPRTSU
PPOWER
GND
PRTS
RXD(PCMD)
GND
PCTS
TXD(STS)
PSCNST
PPO2
PPRDY
PPO1
PPO0
GND
GND
PCPRDY
B10
PPI2(DDIP_RST)
B9
GND
A9
PLIVEWAKE
B8
PDOWNLOAD
A8
GND
B7
GND
A7
PVCLK_K
B6
GND
A6
PHSYNC_K
B5
PV_00/02
A5
PV_01/03
B4
PV_04/06
A4
GND
GND
B3
PV_05/07
A3
PV_08/10
PV_09/11
B2
GND
GND
A2
PV_12/14
B1
DCON_FUNC_0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GND
A1
PV_13/15
DCON_FUNC_1
J413
PVREQ_K
PBD_K
DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT_DTC
GND
RESERVE_OUT_2
RESERVE_OUT_1
RESERVE_IN_2
RESERVE_IN_1
GND
IH_I_LIMIT
DCON_FUNC_2
DCON_FUNC_3
GND
J124
(J21)
J711
BOOT
IH_PWM_0
IH_PWM_1
N.C.
IH_PWM_2
PCB2
N.C.
GND
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
TXD
D
3
RXD
ANALOG_RESERVE
GND
9
PACTH_VOP
+3_3_CPU
DOWNROAD_PC
J412
EPC_SNS_ANALOG
DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT
3RD
3RD
3RD
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC
J431
GND
M2S+
M2S-
8TH
GND
GND
M2S-
M2S-
M2S+
M2S+
GND
7TH
CLK+
CLK-
CLK-
CLK+
GND
7TH
S2M+
2ND
1ST
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT
S2M-
GND
S2M-
S2M+
GND
S2M+
2ND
GND
RESERVE_OUT_4
RESERVE_OUT_3
GND
RESERVE_IN_4
RESERVE_IN_3
4
4
S2M-
GND
1ST
1ST
J125
J3017DH
3
B
10 11 12 13 14 15
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2
S2M+
J411
5
2
1
GND
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
S2M+
J421
8TH
M2S+
S2M-
M2S-
6
3
7TH
GND
S2M-
M2S-
7
4
GND
M2S+
8
5
GND
9
6
S2M-
GND
10
9
7
S2M+
CLK+
11
9
2
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1
8
8
7
9
RESERVE
C
8
6
8
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
CLK-
15 14 13 12 11 10
5
7
GND
J126
4
6
6TH
GND
J414
S2M+
S2M-
3
4
M2S+
5TH
M2S-
GND
GND
6TH
M2S-
+5v
A1
+3_3V
GND
GND
J128
10
10
11
A
2
M2S+
10
12
CLK+
CLK1
5TH
5TH
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/25)
10-15
J2102
J3017L
J3002DB_BUS[0:11]
J3002DA
A12 B11
To P.17
F-5
J204
1
P.4
F-10-7
10-15
10-16
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/25)
10
PCB2
J3098LH
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
+5V
GND
F
PRIM_HV_24V_RDY
PRIM_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
PRIM/GRID_HV_ONX
PRIM_HV_CNT_DA
PRIM_HV_CNCTX
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
GND
+5V
POST_HV_DC_ONX
GND
POST_HV_24V_RDY
POST_HV_DC_CNT_DA
DEV_HV_DC_ONX
DEV_HV_AC_ONX
DEV_HV_AC_CNT_DA
DEV_HV_DC_CNT_DA
DEV_HV_AC_CLK_A
DEV_SLOPE_CNT_DA
GND
POLLER_BIAS_OFFX
DEV_HV_PCB_CNCTX
J3098D
J111
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
POST_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
POST_HV_AC_ONX
POST_HV_CLK_25K
POST_HV_AC_CLK_A
GND
POST_HV_AC_CLK_B
+5V
POST_HV_PCB_CNCTX
DEV_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
GND
DEV_HV_24V_RDY
GRID_HV_CNT_DA
J112
J3098L
13 12 11 10 9
J3221F
2
2
J3545
24V
GND
24V
GND
J3222F
J3217M
PCB11
PIN3
MT03
J3502
MT8
J3005M
J3005F
J3217X
J3547
MT6
J3222M
J3501
J3500
24V
J3221M
J3097LH
J3548
MT5
J3513
PIN2
J3510
PIN1
PCB26
GND
PCB12
J3512
J3544
J3511
13 12 11 10 9
J3097D
J3097L
J3004M
J3004F
B-6
J3099M
C
J3003M
J3003F
J3214M
J3214F
To P.3
MT10
MT02
J3129M
2
J3129F
END46
END47
10
J9001
FT2
UN75
Post Charging Trance
FT23
FT34
END51
END50
FT22
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/25)
P.5
F-10-8
10-16
10-17
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/25)
10
PCB2
J114
J3088D
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3088LH
5V
POST_SHUT_OPEN_SNS
GND
5V
ENV_HUM_ANALOG
GND
ENV_THM_ANALOG
5V
MLT_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
POST_WIRE_CLN_M_DIR2
POST_WIRE_CLN_M_DIR1
24V
DEV_TNR_CNCT
DEV_TNR_DTC
GND
DEV_TNR_ANALOG
24V
GND
EPC_DTC_ANALOG
+24V
5V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
EPC_RMT_ON
PRIM_SHUT_HP_SNS
GND
+3.3V
GND
EROM_DM
EROM_CLK
EROM_DIN
EROM_DOUT
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J3088L
J3089D
J3055D
J3055DH
J3055L
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3089DH
J3089L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
END10
END9
J3510
J2029
3
3
PCB54
2
2
J3168D
1
1
J3168LH
J3168L
PS94
Primary Charging
Shutter Sensor
J3047D
J3047DH
J2133D
6
J1
J2133DH
J151
PCB23
Pre-tranfer Charging
Contact A PCB
J2133L
J3252D
J3047L
J3252LH
J3252L
J152
J3170D
6
5
3
J2133
J153
J3108L
TS01
2
2
M7
J3048
Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor
J3169D
J2132
3
MT21
J3169DH
2
1
J3
J3170LH
J3169L
PCB32
1
2
3
4
5
7
R
BK
J3170L
J3172
Pre-tranfer Charging
Contact B PCB
2
3
BK
Voltage Sensor
PCB
PCB15
PCB24
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/25)
PS03
Multi-purpose Cover
Open/Close Sensor
THU01
Environment Sensor
MT20
10
P.6
F-10-9
10-17
10-18
PCB2
J3063D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
+5V
POST_HP_SNS
GND
POST_FRONT_STOP
DEV_FAN2_STOP
GND
POST_FRONT_POW
DEV_FAN2_POW
DEV_FAN1_STOP
GND
GND
DEV_FAN_POW
PRIM_FAN_ERR
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3066LH
J3091LH
J3063L
J3066D
J3091D
GND
24V
24V
N.C
N.C
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_CNCT
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_DTC
GND
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_ANALOG
DEV_BUF_M_CNCTX(YOBI)
DEV_BUF_M_ON(24V)
24V
GND
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3063LH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24V
DEV_BUF_TNR_CNCT
DEV_BUF_TNR_DTC
24V
GND
DEV_BUF_TNR_ANALOG
DEV_BUF_CL_ON
J3091L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3066L
N.C
24V
+5V
BOTTLE_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
GND
GND
BOTTLE_M_PWM
GND
BOTTLE_M_CNCTX
J130
J115
PRIM_FAN_PWM
J117
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/25)
10
BOTTLE_M_ON
J3090DH
J3080D
J3067DH
J3090D
J3080DH
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3090L
J3080L
J3067D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3067L
N.C
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/25)
J3215D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J2037D
J3106D
J3124D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3215DH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3215L
J2037LH
J2037L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3124LH
J3124L
J3106LH
J3106L
J2131D
J2170D
J2171D
J2177D
J2131DH
J2114
J2039DH
J2036DH
J2039D
J2036D
J2034
3
1
2
2
1
2
J2036L
M10
PS54
Toner Supply
Motor
3
4
2
5
TS03
CL
1
6
J2035D
J2038D
6
J2035L
M28
CL05
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
123
123
123
FM02
TS02
J2177H
3
3
123
2
2
1
1
PS95
J2038L
FM30
Developer Lower
Cooling Fan
FM31
Developer Upper
Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer
FM32 Charging Shutter Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Air Supply Fan
Magnet Roller
Clutch
10
J2038DH
J2039L
J2171H
J2170H
J2035DH
P.7
F-10-10
10-18
10-19
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/25)
10
PCB2
J3235D
J3235LH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A-3
N.C.
J3272LH
FRONT_DOOR_DTC
5V
RETURN_FROM_SE
END13
COLLCT_TONER_SW_ON
5V
5V
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
FIX_LEVER_SNS
GND
5V
EX_DELI_SNS
DRUM_H_LATCH_OFF
DRUM_H_LATCH_ON
CST_H_ON
GND_2
CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG
To P.1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J3235L
GND_1
CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG
CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC
CST_H_SERIAL_DTC
N.C.
5V
GND
5V
VPATH_UPPER_SNS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LS_WRITE_SNS
GND
GND
MLT_PAPER_WIDTH
3.3V
5V
MLT_PAPER_SNS
GND
MLT_RELEASE_SL_ON
J110
12V_TO_DR
J103
J106
N.C
MLT_RELEASE_SL_CNCTX
J3272D
J3272L
J3121D
MT04
J3121DH
J3167D
5
J3167DH
9 10 11 12 13 14
J3167L
OR
BR
BR
J3121L
OR
14 13 12 11 10 9
J3251D
J3251L
J3050D
J3050LH
J3251LH
J3050L
J3253F
J2136D
J2002
3
1
SL
A
MT3
MT1
SL02
3
3
UN13
2
2
PS23
J2005
3
PS28
Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray Paper
Width Sensor Paper Last paper Sensor
10
J2053
J2003
J3101L
J3122L
J2001L
OR
2
2
J2140D
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS36
PS24
MT13
PS96
Outer Delivery
Sensor
SW05
FT31
SW06
FT02
FT01
SOLD4
1
1
1
1
SOLD3
SOLD2
SOLD1
J3101D
J3122D
J2001D
MT2
J3253M
MT14
MT4
J3101DH
J3122DH
J2001DH
OR
MT05
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/25)
SW02
FT30
P.8
F-10-11
10-19
10-20
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/25)
10
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
F
J127
J109
1
POST_REAR_FAN_ERR
A-2
GND
PRIM_OZON_FAN_ERR
POST_REAR_FAN_POWER
GND
PRIM_OZON_FAN_PWM
24V
REAR_COOL_FAN_ERR
GND
REAR_COOL_FAN_PWM
24V
DEV_SLV_CL_ON
DEV_SLV_CL_CNCTX
GND
5V
DEV_DRV_M_ON
DEV_DRV_M_ERR
DEV_DRV_M_CCW
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
DEV_DRV_M_GAIN
DEV_DRV_M_CLK
GND
5V
DRUM_M_ON
DRUM_M_ERR
DRUM_M_CCW
DRUM_M_GAIN
DRUM_M_CLK
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/25)
To P.1
C
J2006D
J2006DH
2
J2006L
B
7
M01
M02
Drum Motor
J2151
10
J2007D
J2139
J2138
8
Developing Motor
J2152
1 2
1 2
A-1
A-2
To P.4
To P.4
J2007L
123
J2008LH
4
J2004D
J2008D
J2007LH
J2004DH
3
123
123
CL
CL01
Developing Clutch
FM16
FM17
Laser Scanner
Cooling Fan
Primary Charging
Exhaust Fan
FM33
Pre-transfer Charging
Exhaust Fan
P.9
F-10-12
10-20
10
9
J9072D
J9072L
8
J9071L
1
2
1
2
J500
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A1
B1
7
6
5
4
3
F-2
To P.1
J9071D
IH Coil
1
J502
1
2
1
2
D
7
6
J3016LH
12V_TH
12V_TH
GND
I_LIM
GND
4
3
3
2
1
PCB2
J119
9 10 11 12 13
J3112D
9 10 11 12 13
J3112LH
J3112L
J501
PCB10
A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/25)
END16
12V
5V
GND
IH_FAN_ERR
GND
END15
12V_TH
12V_TH
13 12 11 10 9
GND
I_LIM
GND
N.C.(5V)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12V
IH_FAN_PWM
IH_FAN_ERR
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24V
J118
GND
N.C.
IH_HIGH_UNIT_DTCX
IH_ON
GND
IH_PID0_LOW_SPEED(E233)
IH_PID1_LOW_SPEED(E233)
GND
IH_CURRENT_ANALOG_TO_AD
IH_VOLTAGE_ANALOG_TO_AD
GND
GND
GND
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM0
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM1
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM2
IH_FAN_PWM
24V
IH_VIN_CMP
ID(E233/E219)
INV_ENB
GND
PID0
PID1
GND
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
IN_CRNT_DTC
V_MONI_AC
GND
GND
GND
PWM0_OUT
PWM1_OUT
PWM2_OUT
J3016L
GND
IH_12V_MONI
GND
J3016D
IH_RELAY1_ON
GND
E
IH_RELAY2_ON
12V_MONI
10
IH_RELAY1_ON
IH_RELAY2_ON
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/25)
10-21
J510
A2
B2
J9130D
123
J9130DH
FM7
IH Coil
P.10
F-10-13
10-21
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/25)
D
J3231M
J3231F
1
2
3
1
2
3
GND
GND
WEB_LESS_SNS
+5S
GND
FIX_SHUT_HP_SNS
+5S
MTR_A_OUT_A1
MTR_A*_OUT_A2*
MTR_B_OUT_B1
MTR_B*_OUT_B1*
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
END20
N.C.
5
4
PCB2
F
J105
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J3001DB_BUS[0:20]
F-5
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/25)
END19
FIX_CNCT2
+5S
FIX_CLAW_JAM_SNS
GND
+5S
FIX_EXT_SNS
GND
GND
10
11
+5V
FIX_M_ON
FIX_M_ERR
FIX_M_CCW
FIX_M_GAIN
FIX_M_CLK
12
13
A20 B20
14
15
8
2
16
A
3
17
4
18
FT25
19
MT06
20
J3001DA_BUS[0:20]
WEB_SL_ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
+5S
WEB_SL_CNCTX
J104
FIX_ENT_SNS
GND
N.C.
+5V
THM_CNCT_DTCX
SUB_R_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
12
GND
13
GND
14
15
C
3
SHUT_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
16
MAIN_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
17
9
+5V
GND
SUB_L_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
18
10
(V)
J129
19
A-2
12V_IH_POWER
10
20
To P.4
(OR)
E
12V IH LATCH
10-22
J3218M
J3200DWH
J3200DB
J3200DA
J32001D
To P.21
P.11
F-10-14
10-22
10-23
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/25)
10
PCB2
J107
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
To P.1
A-5
12 11 10 9
J3116F
J3116M
5V
DRM_HP_SNS
GND
DKIT_CNST_DTCX
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON2
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON1
PRE_LED_ON
24V
PATCH_SHUT_SL_ON
24V
GND
PATCH_Vref
PATCH_OUT
5V(DKIT_CNCT_DTC)
5V
J3115M
J3177D
1
J3177L
9 10 11 12
J3177LH
N.C
N.C
N.C
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
N.C
N.C
DKIT_CNCT
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
N.C
N.C
J3060D
J3255DH
J2141D
J3049DH
J2141DH
1
J3255L
2
3
J3049L
J2141L
FT17
J2143
PCB27
PS90
Patch Sensor
PCB28
10
J152
Primary Charging
Contact B PCB
2
2
SL
PCB20
SL10
Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid
LED03
LE1
Primary Charging
Contact A PCB
FT16
J151
PCB19
GND
J2002
PATCH_LED_ASW_IN
PATCH_VOP_ANALOG
J2001
J3060L
J3049D
J3255D
4
5V
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/25)
J153
J3107L
J2137
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS61
Drum Home Position
Sensor
M06
P.12
F-10-15
10-23
10-24
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/25)
10
PCB3
Feed Driver PCB
E
5V
VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS
GND
5V
C4_LIFT_SNS
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5V
GND
5V
C4_PAPER_SNS
C4_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS
GND
5V
GND
END22
C4_PICKUP_SL_CNCT_DTCX
5V
R_LOW_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
GND
5V
MID_UP
VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS
5V
GND
C3_LIFT_SNS
GND
5V
5V
J224
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
GND
C3_PAPER_SNS
C3_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS
GND
5V
5V
C3_RETRY_SNS
C3_PICKUP_SL_ON
GND
C4_RETRY_SNS
J223
C4_PICKUP_SL_ON
C3_PICKUP_SL_CNST_DTCX
N.C.
J3635D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3635L
J3635LH
J3128D
J3636D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
J3636L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
J3636LH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3128LH
N.C.
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/25)
J3128L
J2075DH
J2075D
J2073DH
J2073D
J2078
J2073L
3
3
S
SL
SL03
2
2
J2055
3
2
2
1
1
J2079D
3
3
2
3
1
2
2
2
B
J2075L
PS21
PS68
PS13
Cassette 3
Pickup Sensor 1
Cassette 3
Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3
Paper Sensor
J2089
3
2
2
PS17
J2054
PS26
Vertical Path
Cassette 3
Paper Height Sensor Sensor 3
3
S
2
2
1
1
J2066
3
3
2
2
PS22
SL
SL04
PS25
Cassette 3 Pickup
Solenoid
10
1
2
J2081D
J2080D
3
2
1
PS02
Cassette 4
Pickup Solenoid
1
1
J2090
J2056
3
2
3
1
2
2
2
J2091
2
2
1
1
J2092
3
1
1
PS71
Cassette 4
Cassette 4
Pickup Sensor 1 Upper Limit Sensor
PS14
Cassette 4
Paper Sensor
PS18
PS27
Cassette 4
Vertical Path
Paper Height Sensor
Sensor 4
P.13
F-10-16
10-24
10-25
PS07
PS19
PS47
PS32
SL
1
3
3
J2060
J2070L
J2070DH
3
3
2
2
J2061
J2062
2
2
PS50
SL
1
J2148
J2063
Right Deck
Paper Level Sensor 2
P
2
PS33
Left Deck
PS11
M05
PS20
PS49
Left Deck
Left Deck
Left Deck
PS12
PS10
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Left Deck
Pull Out Sensor
Paper
Sensor
Lifter
Motor
Pickup
Sensor
1
Left
Deck
Left
Deck
SL07
Paper Level Sensor 1
Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck
Paper Height Sensor
M
3 2 1
3 2 1
Pickup Solenoid S P
PS48
Right Deck
Paper Level Sensor 1
Right Deck
Right Deck
Right Deck
PS08
PS06
SL06
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1 Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Height Sensor
Pickup Solenoid
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/25)
10
J2149
J2042
J2064
J2043
J2044
J2045
J2048
J2049
J2051
J2046
J2070D
J2052L
J2052DH
J2052D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
8
J3633D
J3028D
N.C.
MT36
MT35
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3634L
J3634DH
J3634D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3132L
J3132LH
J3132D
LIFT_M_ERR
L_DECK_LIFT_M_ON
5V
L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
GND
GND
5V
5V
L_DECK_PULL
GND
5V
L_DECK_LIFT_SNS
GND
5V
L_DECK_PAPER
GND
5V
L_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT
GND
5V
L_DECK_RETRY
GND
5V
L_DECK_SL_ON
R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
L_DECK_SL_CNCT_DTCX
GND
5V
R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
GND
5V
R_DECK_PULL
GND
5V
R_DECK_LIFT_SNS
GND
5V
R_DECK_PAPER
GND
5V
R_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT
GND
5V
R_DECK_RETRY
GND
R_DECK_PICK_UP_SL
SL_ON
N.C.
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3028L
J3028LH
N.C.
J3633L
J3633LH
N.C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J221
J222
PCB3
C
3
GND
3_3V
5V
GND
12V
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
J218
J215
J214
MTR_B
J213
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A*
MTR_B*
MTR_A
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_B
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_A
J212
MTR_A
J211
MTR_A
B
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
J100
PCB8
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/25)
J2146
J2071
M11
Right Deck
Pickup Motor
10
J2050
10 11
Left Deck
Pickup Motor
M24
10 11
M33
6
2
7
3
10 11
M26
M31
Vertical Path
Upper Motor
5
1
Multi-purposeTray
Registration Front Motor
Vertical Path
Middle Motor
J2077
J2097
J2076
J2147
3
M12
Cassette3.4
Pickup Motor
10 11
5
1
6
2
7
3
10 11
M27
Vertical Path
Lower Motor
P.14
F-10-17
10-25
10-26
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/25)
10
PCB3
Feed Driver PCB
J226
J2069
2
J2072
2
M04
Right Deck
Lifter Motor
M20
Cassette 3
Lifter Motor
M21
Cassette 4
Lifter Motor
9 10 11 12 13
5V
N.C.
C4_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
5V
GND
GND
C4_WIDTH_BIT0
C4_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
GND
C4_WIDTH_BIT1
5V
C4_WIDTH_BIT2
C4_WIDTH_BIT3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C3_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
5V
GND
GND
C3_WIDTH_BIT0
C3_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
GND
C3_WIDTH_BIT2
C3_WIDTH_BIT3
5
J227
4
J2168
123
FM40
J3031D
11 10 9
J3031LH
J3031L
11 10 9
J3273D
J3273LH
9 10 11
J3033D
J3033LH
J3033L
9 10 11
J3273L
J2088L
J2088D
4
J2085
J2096
J2083
3
J2088DH
J3008D
5
2
J2084
J2074
END27
END25
13 12 11 10 9
END24
END29
GND
C4_LENGTH_BIT0
C4_LENGTH_BIT1
C4_LENGTH_BIT2
C4_LENGTH_BIT3
C3_LENGTH_BIT0
GND
C3_LENGTH_BIT1
C3_LENGTH_BIT2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C3_LENGTH_BIT3
GND
LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
C4_LIFT_M_ON
LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_ON
C3_LIFT_M_ON
C4_LIFT_M_ERR
R_DECK_LIFT_M+
C3_WIDTH_BIT1
J225
1
R_DECK_LIFT_M_ERR
C3_LIFT_M_ERR
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/25)
2 1
J2095
J2082
3
3
2
2
J2094
3
J2093
3
3
2
2
123
FM03
Making Image
Exhaust Fan
SW7
SW9
SW10
Cassette 3
Paper Length
Detection Switch
Cassette 4
Paper Length
Detection Switch
Cassette 3
Paper Width
Detection Switch
PS70
PS69
SW8
PS72
Cassette 3
Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 4
Paper Width
Detection Switch
Cassette 4
Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 3
Paper Level Sensor 2
PS73
Cassette 4
Paper Level Sensor 2
10
P.15
F-10-18
10-26
8
J310
MT11
PCB34
12
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT
5
4
3
2
J3306M
J3306F
MT9
FT20
5
11 10
4
3
11
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC
5
4
3
2
J300
J3061
PCB13
7
6
5
J3002LA
J3002LB
J3002L
J301
PCB4
J311
1
A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/25)
9
10
GND
GND
M2S-
TX+
8TH
M2S+
TX-
GND
GND
J3002LB_BUS[0:11]
J3002LA_BUS[0:12]
E
2
11
GND
A12 B11
7TH
RESERVE_OUT_4
10
RESERVE_OUT_3
CLK+
RESERVE_IN_4
CLK-
RESERVE_IN_3
GND
GND
S2M+
S2M-
12 11 10
12V
S2M+
D
B-7
GND
J3233M
S2M-
24V
GND
12V
GND
5V
J3233F
To P.5
A-7
3_3V
To P.3
GND
GND
24V
7TH
8TH
7TH
GND
24V
24V
GND
24V
12V
10
GND
GND
10
24V
GND
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/25)
10-27
J100
PCB9
PIN4
J3063M
MT12
P.16
F-10-19
10-27
10-28
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (17/25)
10
PCB4
Duplex Driver PCB
J333
1
J330
J331
J332
3
J342
3
9 10
+5V
GND
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (17/25)
J3042M
J3042F
J3263D
J3263DH
J3263L
J2145D
J2144D
4
J2144LH
J2107
J2111
J2167
10 11
10 11
J2108
1
J2109
1
2
3
1
2
M43
M19
M14
Reverse Motor
Duplex Feed
Left Motor
M32
Duplex Feed
Merging Motor
M18
Duplex Feed
Right Motor
123
123
PS29
M34
J2116
1
Registration Sensor
ETB Motor
J2145LH
J2098
FM41
Duplex Driver
Cooling Fan
FM42
Registration Motor/
Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Registration
Motor
10
P.17
F-10-20
10-28
10-29
PCB4
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (18/25)
10
+5V
TR_24V_RDY
GND
TR_HV_RMT_ONX
TR_P_CV_ONX
TR_RV_CC_ONX
TR_P_CC_ONX
TRN_P_CV_CNT
TR_P_CC_CNT
TRN_RV_CC_CNT
N.C.
TR_I_SNS_AD
TR_V_SNS_AD
GND
TRN_HV_PCB_CNCTX
+5V
DUP_MERGE_PAP_DTC
GND
+5V
DUP_EXT_PAP_DTC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
GND
LDECK_MERGE_SL_ON1
LDECK_MERGE_SL_DTC
+5V
TRBELT_PLESS_DTC
GND
+5V
TRBELT_PLESS_HP_DTC
GND
J3270DH
J3265D
J3270D
J3265DH
J3265L
J3270L
J3269D
3
J3269DH
J3269L
B
J2106D
J2101
3
3
J2106DH
J2106L
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
2
SL
PS56
ETB Engage
Sensor
10
PS55
SL11
ETB Disengage
Left Deck
Sensor
Merging Solenoid
J2105
J2104
J2100
N.C
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (18/25)
PCB13
PS64
PS67
Duplex Outlet
Sensor
Duplex Merging
Sensor
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3062
P.18
F-10-21
10-29
10-30
PCB4
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (19/25)
10
N.C.
DUP L PAP DTC
E
+5V
GND
DECURL_FAN_ON
GND
DECURL_FAN_ERR_DTC
REV SEP SL ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5V
GND
GND
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
5V
GND
5V
DUP_SIDEREGI_DTC
MTR_A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (19/25)
J3236D
J3242D
J3242LH
J3236LH
J3236L
J2124D
J2115D
J3243DH
J3243D
J2124DH
J2124L
J3243L
4
3
Side Registration
Motor
10
J2113
J2125
2
3
1
2
3
1
3
S
M16
PS31
Side Registration
Sensor
J2176D
J2176DH
J2115DH
J2115L
J2176L
J3021D
J2121DH
1
J3020LH
J3020L
J3242L
J2121D
PS35
Inner Delivery
Sensor
1
P
PS65
123
J2117
1
SL
J2118D
J2118DH
123
SL05
2
3
SL
SL12
Reverse Detachment
Solenoid
FM08
Transfer Cleaner
Cooling Fan
J2120
1
2
1
P
FM05
PS66
P.19
F-10-22
10-30
10-31
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (20/25)
10
To P.12
B-7
J3200LA
FUSER HNS
MT08
J3200LB
J3200LWH
FT27
4
A20 B20
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
E
20
2
1
J3212F
J3200LB_BUS[0:20]
12V IH LATCH
J3212M
J3213M
12V IH LATCH
A-4
(V)
(OR)
J3200LA_BUS[0:20]
J3200L
D
J3204D
J3271D
J3271DH
J3204DH
J3202D
J3206D
J3206DH
J3207D
J3207DH
J3203M
J3202DH
J3202L
J3203F
J3204L
J3271L
J3206L
J3211D
3
J3207L
J3210D
J3210LH
J3210L
J3208D
J3208LH
J3211DH
J3211L
J3208L
J3209D
9
9 10
J3209DH
J3209L
N.C.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2162D
TP
TP
J2164
J2161
MT16
MT15
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (20/25)
3
3
2
2
1
1
J2162DH
3
3
2
2
M03
1
1
J2162L
TP01
TP02
THM04
THM01
THM02
PS45
PS51
Thermal Switch 1
Thermal Switch 2
Fixing
Sub Thermistor 2
Fixing
Main Thermistor
Fixing
Sub Thermistor 1
J1
3
3
2
2
J2165
2
2
J2166
Fixing Motor
1
PS52
J2
1
PS04
Fixing Toenail
Jam Sensor
SL
SL09
Fixing Cleaning Web
Drive Solenoid
A
1
J3213F
E-8
10
P.20
F-10-23
10-31
N.C.
10
2
9
8
3
2
6
7
5
2
3
6
4
9
4
PCB 36
3
6
7
5
4
6
3
7
8
9
DEC
1
7
GND
ACC
FG
2
1
8
9
J403
5
4
1
2
3
2
3
4
8
1
7
9
J5101
8
6
5
4
3
2
J2159
1
1
J5100
2
3
4
BD PCB
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
19
20
23
21
22
25
23
24
27
25
26
27
28
29
31
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
37
38
K_LDB_P
36
K_LDA_P
37
K_LDB_N
35
K_LDA_N
34
K_LDC_P
33
K_LDC_N
32
K_LDD_P
30
K_LDD_N
28
K_5V_MON
26
K_SDCLK
24
K_WENN
22
K_WCLK
20
K_SD_DATA_D
K_SD_DATA_C
19
K_SD_DATA_A
18
K_SD_DATA_B
17
K_AKM_SCLK
16
K_DIO
15
K_AKM1_IC_SELN
14
K_INT_APC
13
K_APC_SEL
12
K_CTL0
11
K_CTL1
10
K_CTL2
K_CTL3
K_GAIN_PIX
K_AKM2_IC_SELN
K_SD_DATA_G
K_SD_DATA_H
K_SD_DATA_F
K_SD_DATA_E
N.C
K_LDE_N
K_LDE_P
K_LDF_N
J471
K_LDF_P
K_LDH_N
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
K_LDH_P
J472
K_LDG_N
K_LDG_P
N.C
GND
GND
K E2PROM CS
GND
5V
GND
K AKM 2 CSN
GND
K AKM 1 CSN
GND
DEC
ACC
24V
FG
S/S
GND
BD
5V
10
24V
S/S
J3011L
GND
BD
J3018D
5V
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (21/25)
2
1
PCB1
F
DC Controller PCB
40
J3018DH
J3018L
J3011D
1
J3011LH
M 44
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (21/25)
10-32
39
40
PCB35
A
Polygon Motor
P.21
F-10-24
10-32
10-33
10
PCB51
J2024
J2024
PCB51
J12
PCB51
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (22/25)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (22/25)
J2024
J12
J2024
J2
J1
J1
J3
J4
J2
J5
J4
J5
J1
J3
D
HDD1
HDD1
HDD1
HDD1
HDD2
PCB51
J12
J12
J12
J12
J2024
J2024
J2024
J1
J1
HDD1
J2
J3
J1
J4
J2
J5
J4
J5
HDD1
HDD1
J2024
10
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
HDD2
HDD2
HDD1
HDD2
P.22
F-10-25
10-33
10-34
TALLY PCB
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
10
UN118
Volume PCB
J1
J1
J3
UN120
Inverter PCB
J1
J3
J7
J1
J8
UN114
Inverter PCB
J6001
UN119
Volume PCB
J1
J5
UN116
J4002
UN112
Transparent
touch panel
J1003
J5001
J2
Transparent
touch panel
J2
J1005
J1006
UN117
CPU PCB
J9
J1
J10
J2
UN115
J1007
Hub PCB
J2002
UN109
Hub PCB
J1
LCD
UN111
CPU PCB
J1008
J4
J3002
UN110
J1009
FM4
J3001
J1025
Flash PCB
Copy Control
Interface Kit-A1
Card reader
or Serial interface kit
or Coin manager
USB (H)
USB (D)
LAN
J1027
J1021
J1018
J1017
J1026
J1020
123
J1003
J1007
J1015
PCB50
HDD2
HDD1
J2
J12
J1000
J1004
J1022
J1002
DDR2-SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM
TPM PCB
Voice Guidance
Kit-F1/F2
PCB51
J2024
J2027
J1
J7
J2017
J14
Memory PCB
J11
J13
DDR2-SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM
J1
PCB52
J2
N.C.
DRV2_FAIL
DRV2_ACT
GND
DRV1_FAIL
DRV1_ACT
J6
J6
5V
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
RCON
J2
LED PCB
10
P.23
F-10-26
10-34
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
10-35
10-35
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/25)
10-36
10-36
10
9
8
C
1
7
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
5
F
F
E
E
PCB1
DC controller PCB
J463
1
J4500
9 10 11 12 13
B
B
A
A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (24/25)
+3.3V
GND
GND
-CLK
+CLK
GND
14 13 12 11 10 9
+TX
-TX
GND
+RX
-RX
10
GND
+5V
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (24/25)
10-37
PCB55
ARCNET PCB
P.24
F-10-27
10-37
10-38
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (25/25)
10
D-9
To P.1
J2
J3012
CI_GND
2
C-6
CI_12V
J2
J3
J751
J1
2
BK
MONI_USB
GND
SLEEP_USB
FC_USB_IN
USB_RST
J4
GND
GND
CICNT
GND
HV
J3140LH
J3140L
J3141L
J3141DH
J3141D
J7
J5
1
2
1
J3140D
J5
J403
BK
GND
J3
3.3U
N.C.
J6
J8
J3
monitor-1
monitor-2
J4
L2
L1
N.C.
J4
T2
J2
N.C.
T1
Are1
CT2
CT1
2_LINE_L1
3_LINE_L1
2_LINE_L2
3_LINE_L2
Are2
N.C.
2_LINE_L1
2_LINE_L2
4_LINE_L1
4_LINE_L2
J1
J4
Pseudo CI PCB/
Off-hook Power Supply PCB
J7
AREST_1
AREST_2
To P.2
BK
J2
J1
J19
GND
B
#INT_FAX
#MODEM_SNS
#FCID_USB
+3.3R
#FCID
#FOFFHK
#RESET_FAX
#EXB_CS1
EXB_DT7
#EXB_WE
EXB_ADDR8
#EXB_OE
EXB_DT6
EXB_ADDR7
GND
GND
EXB_ADDR6
EXB_DT5
EXB_DT4
EXB_ADDR5
EXB_DT3
EXB_ADDR4
EXB_DT2
EXB_ADDR3
EXB_DT1
EXB_DT0
To P.2
EXB_ADDR2
F-3
GND
CI_12V
GND
CI_GND
EXB_ADDR1
12V
12V
GND
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (25/25)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J2083
J20
PCB51
10
P.25
F-10-28
10-38
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
10-39
parent machine
child machines
child machines
child machines
F-10-29
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
10-39
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
10-40
Environment Settings
Paper Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Paper Settings
A5R/STMTR Original Selection
B5/EXEC Original Selection
Paper Type Management Settings
Setting Description
Thin, Plain*, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Heavy 3, Color, Recycled, Tracing, Transparency, Labels, Bond, Tab, Pre-punched,
Letterhead
A5R, STMTR*
B5, EXEC*
Details/Edit
Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment, Color, Adjusting
Image Position
Duplicate, Delete
On, Off*
Register/Edit, Delete, Register Name
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
T-10-4
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
10-40
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
10-41
Display Settings
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 If the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit is not attached, the default setting is [On].
Item
Default Screen at Startup
Setting Description
Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy*1, Scan and Send, Fax*1, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox,
Secured Print, Web Browser, Workflow Composer, Remote Scanner, Print Server, Scan Lock Analyzer, Tutorial
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off*2
Default Status Type: Copy/Print*, Send, Receive, Store, Consumables
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log
Details: Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Receive Jobs, Copy*1, Fax*1, Forward, Local Print, Printer, Cascade Copy, RX Print,
Print Report
Regular Copy*, Express Copy
On*, Off
On
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function: On*, Off
Mail Box: On*, Off
Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off
Memory Media: On, Off*
On, Off*
Language, Keyboard Layout
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Simple*, Detailed
mm, inch*
On*, Off
Edit
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
10-41
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
10-42
Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Adjust Time
Date/Time Settings
Time Format
Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Weekly Timer Settings
Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Change Energy Saver Mode
Silent Mode Time
Setting Description
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-6
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
10-42
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-43
Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the
machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
In the NetWare or AppleTalk network, the TCP/IP protocol must be used to specify the settings with software other than the control panel of the machine. The setting items are shown below.
Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the PS Printer Kit is activated.
Item
User Data List
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
IP Address Settings
PING Command
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
Host Name
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4
IPv6
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings
IPv4
Setting Description
Plint List
On, Off*
Yes
No
No
Yes
On*, Off
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0*
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0*
DHCP: On, Off*
RARP: On, Off*
BOOTP: On, Off*
IP Adress: 0.0.0.0*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On, Off*
Use Stateless Address: On*, Off
Use Manual Address: On, Off*
Manual Address: IPv6 Address (39characters maximum)
Prefix Length: 0 to 128 (64*)
Default Router Address (39 characters maximum)
On, Off*
IPv6 Address: (39characters maximum)
48 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-43
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
IPv6
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution
WINS Server Address
Node Type
Scope ID
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings
LPD Banner Page*1
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Bidirectional Communication
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
Check NTP Server
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP printing
User
Password
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings
Use SSL
Use Authentication
User
Password
Setting Description
10-44
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Auto Set, display only
63 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours) (24hours*)
IP address or host name
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for IPP authentication (24 characters maximum)
Password for IPP authentication (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-44
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
Multicast Discovery Settings
Response
Scope name
Use HTTP
Use Web DAV Server
SSL Settings
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
Proxy Settings
Use proxy
Server Address
Port Number
Use Proxy within the Same Domain
Set Authentication
Use Proxy Auth.
User
Password
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec
Receive Non-policy Packets
Edit
Delete
Policy On, Off
Register
Policy Name
Register: Selector Settings
IKE Settings
10-45
Setting Description
On* Off
Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery
(32 characters maximum) (default*)
On* Off
On, Off*
Settings that use SSL
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
IP address or FQDN (128 characters maximum)
1 to 65535 (80*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
24 characters maximum
24 characters maximum
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
24 characters maximum
Local Address:
All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings
Remort Address:
All IP Addresses*, All IPv4Address, All IPv6Address, IPv4Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings
Port: Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name
IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive
Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig. Method
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Validity : Time (1 to 65535minuites)(480minuites*)
Validity : Size (1 to 65535 MB)(65535 MB*)
PFS : On, Off*
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Connect. Mode : Transport, display only
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-45
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
Netware Settings
Use NetWare
Frame Type
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Service
Packet Signature
Bindery Pserver Settings
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
Rprinter Settings
Print ServerName
File ServerName
Printer Number
NDS PServer Settings
Printer Number
Tree Name
Context
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
NPrinter Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Printer Number
Apple Talk Settings
Use Apple Talk
Phase
Service Name
Zone
Print Mode*2
10-46
Setting Description
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
47 characters maximum
47 characters maximum
20 characters maximum
0 to 15 (0*)
1 to 15seconds (5sedonds*)
0 to 255 (0*)
1 to 20 KB (20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/
Minimize form changes within print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
47 characters maximum
47 characters maximum
0 to 15 (0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
64 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
256 characters maximum
20 characters maximum
0 to 254 (0*)
1 to 255 seconds (5seconds*)
0 to 255 (0*)
3 to 20KB (20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/
Minimize form changes within print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
64 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
256 characters maximum
0 to 254 (0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Phase 2 (fixing)
32 characters maximum (Model name*)
32 characters maximum
Both*, Spool, Direct
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP
Auto Set, display only
Auto Set, display only
Bindery PServer, R Printer, NDS Pserver*, NPrinter
Auto Set, display only
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-46
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
SMB Server Settings
Use SMB Server
ServerName
Workgroup
Comment
LM Announce
SMB Printer Settings
Use SMB Print
Printer Name
SMB Auth. Settings
Use SMB Authentication
Authentication Type
SNMP Settings
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host
Use SNMPv1
Community Name1Settings
Community Name1
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Community Name2 Settings
Community Name2
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Use SNMPv3
User Settings
User On, Off
Register
Details/Edit
Delete
Context Settings
Register
Edit
Delete
Dedicated Port Settings
Dedicated Port Settings
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function
Startup Settings
Startup Settings
10-47
Setting Description
On, Off*
15 characters maximum (Canon+represents the
last six digits of a MAC address)
15 characters maximum (WORKGROUP*)
48 characters maximum
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
13 characters maximum (PRINTER*)
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
NTLMv1*, NTLMv2*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name (32 characters maximum) (public*)
On, Off*
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name (32 characters maximum) (public2*)
On, Off*
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/
Encryption Password
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/
Encryption Password
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-47
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Ethernet Type
MAC Address
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X
Login Name
User
Password
TLS Settings
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
TTLS Settings
Use TTL
TTLS Settings
PEAP Settings
Use PEAP
Same User Name as Login Name
Firewall Settings
IP Address Block Log
IPv4 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
IPv6 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6 Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6 Address
10-48
Setting Description
On*, Off
Half Duplex*/Full Duplex
10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T
Display only
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
24 characters maximum
Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication
Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
MSCHAPv2*, PAP
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-48
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
Item
MAC Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MAC Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MAC Address
Setting Description
10-49
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
T-10-7
External Interface
* Default Settings
Item
USB Settings
Use USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive
Setting Description
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Accessibility
* Default Settings
Item
Key Repetition Settings
Reversed Display (Color)
Setting Description
Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow
On, Off*
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
10-49
10-50
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality
*1
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Auto Adjust Gradation
Correct Density
Fine Adjust Zoom
Setting Description
No
No
No
T-10-10
Adjust Action
*1
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Change Stitching Position
Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position
Finisher Puncher Switch
Adjust Trim Width
Adjust Fold Position
Adjust Z-Fold Position
Adjust C-Fold Position
Adjust Accordion Z-Fold Position
Adjust Half Fold Position
Adjust Saddle Fold Position
Adjust Paper Deck Plates
Setting Description
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-11
Maintenance
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Clean Feeder*1
Clean Wire
Clean Drum
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1
Setting Description
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Display the cleaning method
10-50
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
10-51
Function Settings
Common
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
*3 Indicates items that cannot be used with the default setting. Also, the Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES is necessary. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Item
Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Multi-Purpose Tray
Other
Copy
Suspended Job Timeout On
Setting Description
No
No
No
No
Yes
No*2
No*2
No*2
No*2
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
10-51
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
Item
Setting Description
10-52
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
10-52
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
Item
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or
Photo Mode
Image Level in Text Mode
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Smart Scan
No. of OCR File Name Characters
Trace & Smooth Settings
Outline Graphics
Graphics Recognition Level
Background Image Level
Format PDF to PDF/A
Optimize PDF for Web
Rights Management Server Settings
Setting Description
10-53
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
1 to 24*
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Normal, Moderate*, High
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image Quality Priority
On, Off*
On, Off*
Server URL: 128 characters maximum
User: 128 characters maximum
Password: 24 characters maximum
Use Password for Each User: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-13
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
10-53
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
Copy
10-54
*1
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Change Default Settings
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Auto Collate
Image Orientation Priority
Auto Orientation
Photo Printout Mode
Register Remote Device for Cascade Copy
Cascade Copy Communication Timeout
Setting Description
No
No
Finishing*, Unassigned
2-Sided*, Unassigned
Density* Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
Unassigned*
No
No
No
No
No
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Register (Seven devices maximum), Details, Delete
5 to 30* seconds
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
T-10-14
Printer
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Output Report
PCL
Configuration Page
Font List
PS
Configuration Page
Font List
Printer Settings
Restrict Printer Jobs
PDL Selection (Plug-n-play)
Setting Description
Print
Print
No
No
Start
Print
Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer)
On, Off*
UFR II, PCL5e, PCL6, PS3, FAX
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
T-10-15
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
10-54
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
10-55
Send
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*6 Indicates item that appears according to the telephone line number specified in [No. of Sending Lines].
Item
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite
Settings
Show Comment
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings
Default Screen
Change Default Settings
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Communication Management Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
TX Terminal ID
Setting Description
Print List
Print List
No
No
Yes
On, Off*
On*, Off
Standard*, Address Book, One-Touch, Favorite Settings
Register, Initialize
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Print*, Do Not Print
TX Terminal ID: Print
Printing Position: Outside
Display Destination Unit Name: On, Off
Telephone # Mark*1: FAX, TEL
On*, Off
0 to 5 times (3 times*)
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
10-55
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
E-mail/Ifax Settings
Register Unit Name
Communication Settings
SMTP RX
POP
SMTP Server
E-mail Address
POP Server
POP Address
POP Password
POP Interval
POP AUTH Method
POP Authentication before
Sending
SMTP Authentication (SMTP
AUTH)
User
Password
Allow SSL (POP)
Allow SSL (SMTP Send)
Display Auth. Screen When Send
Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Use SMTP Authentication for Each User
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Set Authorized User Destination to Sender
Allow Sending to Unregistered Destinations
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Use Send via Server
Allow MDN Not via Server
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict Sending to Domains
Permitted Domains
Fax Settings*1
Default Screen
Change Default Settings
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Register Sender Name (TTI)
ECM TX
Setting Description
10-56
24 characters maximum
No
On, Off*
On* Off
Server name or IP Address (48 characters maximum)
64 characters maximum
Server name or IP Address (48 characters maximum)
64 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
0* to 99 (If the interval is set to '0', the incoming e-mail is not checked automatically.)
Standard*/APOP/POP AUTH
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete
Yes
No
No
No
Density*, Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
2-Sided Original*, Unassigned
Different Size Originals*, Unassigned
01 to 99: Register/Edit, Delete
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
10-56
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
Set Pause Time
Auto Redial
Redial Times
Redial Interval
Redial When TX Error
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Fax TX Report
Report with TX Image
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
Set Line
Register Unit Telephone Number
Register Unit Name
Select Line Type
Line
Select TX Line
TX Start Speed
PIN Code Access
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Allow Fax Driver TX
Remote Fax TX Settings
Remote Fax Server Address
TX Timeout
No. of Sending Lines
Select Priority Line
Remote Fax Settings
Use Remote Fax
Setting Description
10-57
1 to 15 seconds (2 seconds*)
On*, Off
1 to 10 times (2 times*)
2 to 99 minutes (2 minutes*)
Error and 1st page*, All pages, Off
On*, Off
For Error Only*, On, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00: 00 to 23: 59 (00: 00*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20 digits maximum
24 characters maximum
Pulse, Tone*
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 2
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 2, Line 3, Line 4
If the Super G3 FAX Board is installed:
Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
Line 4: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
No
No
No
No
T-10-16
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
10-57
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
10-58
Receive/Forward
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*7 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Receive Type, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List, E-Mail Priority
Item
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Print on Both Side
Select Drawer
Switch A
Switch B
Switch C
Switch D
Reduce Fax RX Size
2 On 1 Log
Received Page Footer
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors
Forwarding Settings
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes
Inbox No.
Register Box Name:
PIN
URL Send Settings
Initialize
Memory RX Inbox PIN
Use Fax Memory Lock*1
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
Divided Data RX Timeout
Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Fax Settings*1
ECM RX
Fax RX Report
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
RX Start Speed
RX Password
Setting Description
Print List
Print List
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Reduction Mode: Auto
Reduction %: 90%
Reduction Direction: Vertical Only
On, Off*
Print, Do Not Print*
Always Print*, Store/Print, Off
Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority,
Details/Edit, Delete, Print List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*7
00 to 49
24 characters maximum
Seven digits maximum
Seven digit number
On, Off*
On, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
0 to 99 hours (24hours*)
*On, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
For Error Only, On, Off*
On*, Off
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
20 digits maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
T-10-17
10-58
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Encrypted Secure Print
10-59
Store/Access Files
* Default Setting
Item
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Photo Printout Mode
Change Default Settings
Access Stored Files Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Change Default Settings
Mail Box Settings
Set/Register Mail Boxes
Mail Box No.
Register Box Name
PIN
Time Until File Auto Delete
URL Send Settings
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Initialize
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Time Until File Auto Delete
Print When Storing from Printer Driver
Advanced Box Settings
Open to Public
WebDAV Server Settings
Authentication Type
Use SSL
Allow to Create Personal Space
Delete All Personal Spaces
Initialize Shared Space
Prohibit Writing from External
Authentication Management
File Formats Allowed for Storing
Network Settings
Network Place Settings
Protocol for External Reference
SMB
WebDAV
Setting Description
No
Yes
No
No
No
00 to 99
24 characters maximum
Seven digits
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days
On, Off*
-
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Basic, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Delete
Initialize
On*, Off
On, Off*
Printable Formats Only*, Common Office Formats, All
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
No
No
T-10-18
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Setting Description
On, Off*
T-10-19
10-59
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
10-60
Set Destination
Set Destination
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Address List
Register Destinations
Rename Address List
Register One-Touch
Change Default Display of Address Book
Address Book PIN
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Register LDAP Server
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Acquire Remote Address Book
Acquire Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Communication Timeout
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Make Remote Address Book Open
Make Address Book Open
Setting Description
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
On*, Off
IP Address or Host Name (128 characters maximum)
15 to 120 seconds (30 seconds*)
On*, Off
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
T-10-20
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
10-60
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
10-61
Management Settings
User Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID
System PIN
System Manager
E-Mail Address
Contact Information
Comment
Department ID Management
Department ID Management
Register PIN
Page Totals
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs
Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs
Setting Description
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
T-10-21
Device Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Device Information Settings
Device Name
Location
Device Information Delivery Settings
Register Destinations
Setting Description
32 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
10-61
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
Item
Manual Delivery
Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Web Access Favorites
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Restrictions Receiving Device Information
Restore Data
Restrict Restriction for Each Function
Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Web Access Favorites
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Set Paper Information
Communication Log
Setting Description
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include, Exclude*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Settings/Registration Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites, Printer Settings, Paper Information
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
All, Basic Only*
Details, Print List, Report Settings
Report Settings
Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
Specify Print Time: On, Off*
-00: 00* to 23:59
Separate Report Type: On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
10-62
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
10-62
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
Item
Setting Description
10-63
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-22
License/Other
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Register License
MEAP Settings
Print System Information
SSL Settings
Remote UI
Setting Description
24 characters maximum
No
Print
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On*, Off
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On, Off*
Clear
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
T-10-23
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
10-63
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
10-64
Data Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
HDD Data Complete Deletion*
Timing of Deletion
Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Setting Description
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-24
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
10-64
10-65
Data
Address List
Location
Clear?
Backup by User
Backup by CE
Replace Replace Replace
Initialize Function Function
Function Function
Replace
Function Function
Location
Location
the HDD
the
the
All
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
Yes/No
Method
Method
the TPM
> CLEAR > CLEAR
to be Yes/No
to be
/ All
Main
Main
Data /
> MN> DC> ADRS> JVPCB
> R-CON > MMI
stored
stored
format PCB 1 PCB 2
Settings CONT
CON
BK
CACHE
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*)
Adjustment/Maintenance
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Function Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*)
Set Destination
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Management Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*)
Printer Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
-
Clear
Default Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
HDD
Clear
Clear
Previous Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Forwarding Settings
Settings / Registration
Preferences
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
No
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
No
Yes
(*1)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
(*2)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Clear
No
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Clear
No
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Clear
No
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Backup Data
Remarks
10-65
Data
Location
Clear?
Backup by User
Backup by CE
Replace Replace Replace
Initialize Function Function
Function Function
Replace
Function Function
Location
Location
the HDD
the
the
All
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
Yes/No
Method
Method
the TPM
> CLEAR > CLEAR
to be Yes/No
to be
/ All
Main
Main
Data /
> MN> DC> ADRS> JVPCB
> R-CON > MMI
stored
stored
format PCB 1 PCB 2
Settings CONT
CON
BK
CACHE
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Wallpaper Setting
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
Yes
(*)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
No
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
No
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
No
HDD
(management
information in
SRAM)
Clear
Clear
(*1)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Backup /
Restore)
PC
Yes
(*2, 3)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
HDD
(management
information in
SRAM)
Clear
Clear
(*1)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Backup /
Restore)
PC
Yes
(*2, 3)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Backup /
Restore)
PC
No
Remarks
*: Available only in the following case: The download mode in safe mode is
started when the HDD is faulty and backup of Meapback is available by
SST. In such a case, perform the following procedure to restore:
Execute backup of Meapback using SST
Replace the HDD
Install the system
Check if the system has been normally started
Start in safe mode and execute restoration using SST
*: Available only in the following case: The download mode in safe mode is
started when the HDD is faulty and backup of Meapback is available by
SST. In such a case, perform the following procedure to restore:
Execute backup of Meapback using SST
Replace the HDD
Install the system
Check if the system has been normally started
Start in safe mode and execute restoration using SST
*: Available only in the following case: The download mode in safe mode is
started when the HDD is faulty and backup of Meapback is available by
SST. In such a case, perform the following procedure to restore:
Execute backup of Meapback using SST
Replace the HDD
Install the system
Check if the system has been normally started
Start in safe mode and execute restoration using SST
*: Available only in the following case: The download mode in safe mode is
started when the HDD is faulty and backup of Meapback is available by
SST. In such a case, perform the following procedure to restore:
Execute backup of Meapback using SST
Replace the HDD
Install the system
Check if the system has been normally started
Start in safe mode and execute restoration using SST
10-66
10-66
Data
Location
Clear?
Backup by User
Backup by CE
Replace Replace Replace
Initialize Function Function
Function Function
Replace
Function Function
Location
Location
the HDD
the
the
All
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
Yes/No
Method
Method
the TPM
> CLEAR > CLEAR
to be Yes/No
to be
/ All
Main
Main
Data /
> MN> DC> ADRS> JVPCB
> R-CON > MMI
stored
stored
format PCB 1 PCB 2
Settings CONT
CON
BK
CACHE
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes (*1)
Remote UI
(Authentication
management
of Advanced
Box)
PC
Yes
(*2)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
HDD
(management
information in
SRAM)
Clear
Clear
(*1)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Backup /
Restore)
PC
Yes
(*2, 3)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*)
Remote UI
(Export /
Import)
PC
No
MEAP settings
MEAP application
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
PC
Yes
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*)
No
Yes
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
SRAM
(MCON2)
HDD
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Clear
Clear
(*1)
Clear
(*2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
(*2)
Clear
(*2)
No
No
(*3)
Remarks
PC
PC
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
No
No
No
Yes
PC
No
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
*1: After clearing the backup key information in the HDD, it is automatically
restored from the key in the SRAM.
*2: After clearing the key information in the SRAM, it is automatically
restored from the backup key in the HDD.
*1, 2: When replacing the HDD and Main Controller PCB 2 simultaneously,
restoring the key information is not executed automatically.
*3: There is no method to back up to the external devices.
10-67
10-67
Clear?
Backup by User
Backup by CE
Replace Replace Replace
Initialize Function Function
Function Function
Replace
Function Function
Location
Location
the HDD
the
the
All
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
Yes/No
Method
Method
the TPM
> CLEAR > CLEAR
to be Yes/No
to be
/ All
Main
Main
Data /
> MN> DC> ADRS> JVPCB
> R-CON > MMI
stored
stored
format PCB 1 PCB 2
Settings CONT
CON
BK
CACHE
Data
Location
SRAM
(MCON2)
HDD
TPM
Board
Clear
(*1)
Clear
(*2)
Clear
Clear
(*3)
Clear
(*2)
Clear
(*2)
Yes
(*4)
SRAM
(MCON2)
SRAM
(DC-CON)
Clear
No
Clear
(*)
-
Clear
No
EEPROM
(R-CON)
Clear
No
Settings /
USB
Registration memory
mode
(Management
Settings > Data
Management >
TPM Settings)
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Yes
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
Service
mode
(COPIER >
FUNCTION
> SYSTEM >
DSRAMBUP)
Service
mode
(COPIER >
FUNCTION
> SYSTEM >
RSRAMBUP)
Remarks
*1: An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is "ON". Recovery
procedure differs depending on the controller's version as follows:
Before Ver13
Perform Initialize All Data/Settings after rebooting, and then set the TPM
setting "ON" again to restore.
Ver.13 or later
After installation of the system, execute restoration of the TPM key to
restore.
*2: After executing each CLEAR operation, the key information in the SRAM
can be automatically restored from the common backup key in the HDD,
and the TPM setting becomes "ON". However, only the UI display is
"OFF", so it is required to change the TPM setting to "ON" manually.
*3: By initializing all data/settings, the TPM setting is changed to "OFF".
*4: Restoration is not available with other machines where the TPM setting
is set "ON".
The available range for backup of key information differs depending on
the controller's version as follows.
Before Ver13
Backup is available only for failure with TPM PCB
Ver.13 or later
Backup is available for effective key and settings information even in the
case of failure with HDD
HDD
HDD
T-10-25
10-68
10-68
10-69
Partition name
CHK-TYPE
FSTDEV
IMG-MNG
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
APL_GEN
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
APL_MEAP
APL_SEND
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Description
HDD Format
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
enable
enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
T-10-26
Data
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information Settings
Favorite Settings
Default Settings
Shortcut settings for Options
Previous Settings
Category
Setting for Advance Box
Setting for Web Access
Setting for Universal Data
Data
User information of Advanced Box
Registration information of Network Place
Web Access Setting information
Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission)
Job log information
Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings>Device
Settings>Certificate Setting
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values
PS font
T-10-27
10-69
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 000 to 099
Number
no
002
no
003
no
004
no
005
yes
006
yes
007
no
008
no
009
no
010
Counter Details
no
011
yes
012
yes
013
no
014
no
015
no
016
no
017
no
018
Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper
no
019
It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that
no
020
- Explanation of symbols shown in the table yes: Valid counter for this machine
4C: Full color
Mono: Mono color (Y, M, C / R, G, B / retro monochrome)
Bk: Single black color
L: Large size (larger than B4 size)
the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
no
021
yes
022
yes
023
no
071
no
072
no
073
no
074
no
075
no
081
no
082
no
083
no
084
no
091
10-70
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 000 to 099
10-70
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 100 to 199
Valid or invalid
Number
no
092
no
093
no
no
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
no
130
no
131
094
yes
132
095
yes
133
no
134
no
135
yes
136
yes
137
yes
138
yes
139
yes
140
yes
141
no
142
no
143
no
144
no
145
no
146
no
147
no
148
T-10-28
100 to 199
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
101
Total 1
yes
102
Total 2
yes
103
Total (large)
yes
104
Total (small)
no
105
no
106
yes
108
yes
109
no
110
no
111
yes
112
yes
113
yes
114
yes
115
yes
116
yes
117
no
118
no
119
no
120
no
121
no
122
no
123
no
124
no
125
yes
126
Total A1
yes
127
Total A2
yes
128
Total A (large)
yes
129
Total A (small)
10-71
Counter Details
no
149
yes
150
Total B1
yes
151
Total B2
yes
152
Total B (large)
yes
153
Total B (small)
no
154
no
155
yes
156
yes
157
no
158
no
159
yes
160
yes
161
yes
162
yes
163
yes
164
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 100 to 199
10-71
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 200 to 299
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
165
no
218
no
166
no
219
no
167
no
220
no
168
yes
221
no
169
yes
222
no
170
no
223
no
171
no
224
no
172
no
225
no
173
no
226
no
191
yes
227
no
192
yes
228
no
193
no
229
no
194
no
230
no
195
no
231
no
196
no
232
no
233
no
234
no
235
no
236
yes
237
yes
238
no
245
no
246
no
247
no
248
yes
249
yes
250
no
251
no
252
no
253
no
254
yes
255
yes
256
no
257
no
258
T-10-29
200 to 299
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
201
Copy (Total 1)
yes
202
Copy (Total 2)
yes
203
Copy (large)
yes
204
Copy (small)
yes
205
Copy A (Total 1)
yes
206
Copy A (Total 2)
yes
207
Copy A (large)
yes
208
Copy A (small)
yes
209
yes
210
yes
211
yes
212
yes
213
yes
214
yes
215
yes
216
no
217
10-72
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 200 to 299
10-72
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 300 to 399
10-73
300 to 399
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
259
Valid or invalid
Number
no
260
yes
301
Print (Total 1)
no
261
yes
302
Print (Total 2)
no
262
yes
303
Print (large)
no
263
yes
304
Print (small)
no
264
yes
305
Print A (Total 1)
yes
265
yes
306
Print A (Total 2)
yes
266
yes
307
Print A (large )
no
273
yes
308
Print A (small)
no
274
no
309
no
275
no
310
no
276
no
311
yes
277
no
312
yes
278
yes
313
no
279
yes
314
no
280
no
315
no
281
no
316
no
282
no
317
yes
283
no
318
yes
284
yes
319
no
285
yes
320
no
286
no
321
no
287
no
322
no
288
no
323
no
289
no
324
no
290
no
325
no
291
no
326
no
292
no
327
yes
293
no
328
yes
294
yes
329
yes
330
yes
331
PDLPrint (Total 1)
yes
332
PDLPrint (Total 2)
yes
333
PDLPrint (large)
yes
334
PDLPrint (small)
T-10-30
Counter Details
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 300 to 399
10-73
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 400 to 499
Valid or invalid
Number
no
335
no
336
yes
yes
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
yes
421
yes
422
339
no
431
340
no
432
no
341
no
433
no
342
no
434
yes
345
no
435
yes
346
no
436
no
351
no
437
Counter Details
no
352
no
438
yes
355
no
439
yes
356
no
440
no
441
no
442
no
443
no
444
no
445
no
446
no
447
no
448
no
449
no
450
no
451
Mono-clear (total 1)
no
452
Mono-clear (total 2)
no
453
Mono-clear (full-page 1)
no
454
Mono-clear (full-page 2)
no
455
Mono-clear (partial 1)
no
456
Mono-clear (partial 2)
no
457
no
458
no
459
no
460
T-10-31
400 to 499
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
401
no
402
yes
403
yes
404
yes
405
yes
406
no
407
no
408
no
409
no
410
yes
411
yes
412
yes
413
yes
414
no
415
no
416
no
417
no
418
no
419
no
420
10-74
T-10-32
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 400 to 499
10-74
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 700 to 799
500 to 599
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
no
619
620
Counter Details
yes
501
Scan (Total 1)
no
yes
502
Scan (Total 2)
no
621
622
yes
503
Scan (large)
no
yes
504
Scan (small)
no
623
no
624
625
yes
505
10-75
yes
506
yes
yes
507
yes
626
631
yes
508
yes
yes
509
yes
632
yes
633
yes
634
yes
639
yes
640
yes
645
yes
646
yes
655
yes
656
yes
510
yes
511
yes
512
600 to 699
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
601
yes
602
yes
603
yes
604
no
605
Valid or invalid
Number
no
606
yes
701
702
T-10-34
700 to 799
Counter Details
no
607
yes
no
608
yes
703
704
yes
609
yes
yes
610
no
705
no
706
no
707
no
611
no
612
no
613
no
708
709
no
614
yes
yes
615
yes
710
no
711
712
yes
616
no
617
no
no
618
no
713
no
714
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 700 to 799
10-75
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 800 to 899
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
yes
715
yes
750
yes
716
no
751
no
717
no
752
no
718
yes
753
no
719
yes
754
no
720
no
755
no
721
no
756
no
722
yes
757
no
723
yes
758
10-76
Counter Details
no
724
yes
759
yes
725
yes
760
yes
726
yes
761
yes
727
yes
762
yes
728
no
763
yes
729
no
764
yes
730
yes
765
no
731
yes
766
no
732
no
767
yes
733
no
768
yes
734
yes
769
no
735
yes
770
no
736
no
771
yes
737
no
772
yes
738
yes
773
no
739
yes
774
no
740
yes
741
yes
742
yes
743
yes
744
yes
745
yes
746
no
747
no
748
yes
749
T-10-35
800 to 899
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
801
yes
802
yes
803
yes
804
no
805
no
806
no
807
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 800 to 899
10-76
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
808
no
914
yes
809
yes
915
yes
810
yes
916
no
811
yes
917
no
812
yes
918
no
813
no
919
no
814
no
920
yes
815
yes
921
yes
816
yes
922
no
817
yes
929
no
818
yes
930
no
819
no
931
no
820
no
932
no
821
no
933
no
822
no
934
no
823
no
935
no
824
no
936
yes
825
yes
937
yes
826
yes
938
yes
939
yes
940
no
941
no
942
no
943
no
944
yes
945
yes
946
no
947
no
948
no
949
no
950
no
951
no
952
no
953
no
954
T-10-36
900 to 999
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
901
no
902
no
903
no
904
no
905
no
906
no
907
no
908
no
909
no
910
no
911
no
912
no
913
10-77
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999
10-77
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999
Valid or invalid
Number
no
955
no
956
no
957
no
958
yes
959
yes
960
yes
961
yes
962
yes
963
yes
964
yes
965
10-78
Counter Details
T-10-37
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999
10-78